Courage is the chief attribute to manliness.” — DanielW ebster . “It is never safe to look into the future with eyes of fear" — E. H. Harriman. “Never take counsel of your fears" — Motto of Stonewall Jackson . “If you persuade yourself that you can do a certain thing, provided this thing be possible, you will do it, however diffi- cult it may be. If, on the contrary, you imagine that you cannot do the simplest thing in the world, it is impossible for you to do it J and molehills become for you unscalable mountains " — Emile Coue. “This is the foundation of success nine times out of ten — having confidence in yourself and applying yourself with all your might to your work " — Thomas E . Wilson, President of Wilson and Company, Packers . “The ability to speak effectively is an acquire?nent rather than a gift ? — William Jennings Bryan. “To secure personal advancement, it is much more profit* able to be eloquent, than to be wise and grave in council f ' — London Daily Telegraph.DEVELOPING COURAGE AND SELF- CONFIDENCE More than eighteen thousand business men, since 1912, have been members of the various public speaking courses conducted by the author. Most of them have, at his request, written stating why they had enrolled for this training and what they hoped to obtain from it. Naturally, the phrase- ology varied ; but the central desire in these letters, the basic want in the vast majority, remained sur- prisingly the same: “When I am called upon to stand up and speak,” man after man wrote, “I be- come so self-conscious, so frightened, that I can’t think clearly, can’t concentrate, can’t remember what I had intended to say. I want to gain self- confidence, poise, and the ability to think on my feet. I want to get my thoughts together in logical order and I want to be able to say my say clearly and convincingly before a business group or audi- ence.” Thousands of their confessions sounded about like that. To cite a concrete case : Years ago, a gentleman here called Mr. D. W. Ghent, joined my public speaking course in Philadelphia. Shortly after the opening session, he invited me to lunch with him in the Manufacturers’ Club. He was a 3 4 PUBLIC SPEAKING man of middle age and had always led an active life; was head of his own manufacturing establish- ment, a leader in church work and civic activities. While we were having lunch that day, he leaned across the table and said: “I have been asked many times to talk before various gatherings, but I have never been able to do so. I get so fussed, my mind becomes an utter blank : so I have sidestepped it all my life. But I am chairman now of a board of col- lege trustees. I must preside at their meetings. I simply have to do some talking. . . . Do you think it will be possible for me to learn to speak at this late date in my life?” “Do I think, Mr. Ghent?” I replied. “It is not a question of my thinking. I know you can, and I know you will if you will only practise and follow the directions and instructions.” He w’anted to believe that, but it seemed too rosy, too optimistic. “I am afraid you are just be- ing kind,” he answered, “that you are merely trying to encourage me.” After he had completed his training, we lost touch with each other for a while. In 1921, we met and lunched together again at the Manufacturers’ Club. We sat in the same corner and occupied the same table that we had had on the first occasion. Re- minding him of our former conversation, I asked him if I had been too sanguine then. He took a little red-backed note book out of his pocket and showed me a list of talks and dates for which he was booked. “And the ability to make these,” he confessed, “the pleasure I get in doing it, the addi= DEVELOPING SELF-CONFIDENCE 5 CHAPTER I DEVELOPING COURAGE AND SELF- CONFIDENCE More than eighteen thousand business men, since 1912, have been members of the various public speaking courses conducted by the author. Most of them have, at his request, written stating why they had enrolled for this training and what they hoped to obtain from it. Naturally, the phrase- ology varied ; but the central desire in these letters, the basic want in the vast majority, remained sur- prisingly the same: “When I am called upon to stand up and speak,” man after man wrote, “I be- come so self-conscious, so frightened, that I can’t think clearly, can’t concentrate, can’t remember what I had intended to say. I want to gain self- confidence, poise, and the ability to think on my feet. I want to get my thoughts together in logical order and I want to be able to say my say clearly and convincingly before a business group or audi- ence.” Thousands of their confessions sounded about like that. To cite a concrete case : Years ago, a gentleman here called Mr. D. W. Ghent, joined my public speaking course in Philadelphia. Shortly after the opening session, he invited me to lunch with him in the Manufacturers’ Club. He was a 3 4 PUBLIC SPEAKING man of middle age and had always led an active life; was head of his own manufacturing establish- ment, a leader in church work and civic activities. While we were having lunch that day, he leaned across the table and said: “I have been asked many times to talk before various gatherings, but I have never been able to do so. I get so fussed, my mind becomes an utter blank : so I have sidestepped it all my life. But I am chairman now of a board of col- lege trustees. I must preside at their meetings. I simply have to do some talking. . . . Do you think it will be possible for me to learn to speak at this late date in my life?” “Do I think, Mr. Ghent?” I replied. “It is not a question of my thinking. I know you can, and I know you will if you will only practise and follow the directions and instructions.” He w’anted to believe that, but it seemed too rosy, too optimistic. “I am afraid you are just be- ing kind,” he answered, “that you are merely trying to encourage me.” After he had completed his training, we lost touch with each other for a while. In 1921, we met and lunched together again at the Manufacturers’ Club. We sat in the same corner and occupied the same table that we had had on the first occasion. Re- minding him of our former conversation, I asked him if I had been too sanguine then. He took a little red-backed note book out of his pocket and showed me a list of talks and dates for which he was booked. “And the ability to make these,” he confessed, “the pleasure I get in doing it, the addi= DEVELOPING SELF-CONFIDENCE 5 tional service I can render to the community — these are among the most gratifying things in my life.” The International Conference for the Limitation of Armaments had been held in Washington shortly before that. When it was known that Lloyd George was planning to attend it, the Baptists of Philadelphia cabled, inviting him to speak at a great mass meeting to be held in their city. Lloyd George cabled back that, if he came to Washing- ton, he would accept their invitation. And Mr. Ghent informed me that he himself had been chosen, from among all the Baptists of that city, to intro- duce England’s premier to the audience. And this was the man who had sat at that same table less than three years before and solemnly asked me if I thought he would ever be able to talk in public! Was the rapidity with which he forged ahead in his speaking ability unusual? Not at all. There have been hundreds of similar cases. For example — to quote one more specific instance — years ago, a Brooklyn physician, whom we will call Dr. Curtis, spent the winter in Florida near the training grounds of the Giants. Being an enthusiastic baseball fan, he often went to see them practise. In time, he be- came quite friendly with the team, and was invited to attend a banquet given in their honor. After the coffee and nuts were served, several prominent guests were called upon to “say a few words.” Suddenly, with the abruptness and unex- pectedness of an explosion, he heard the toastmas- ter remark: “We have a physician with us to-night, 6 PUBLIC SPEAKING and I am going to ask Dr. Curtis to talk on a Base- ball Player’s Health.” Was he prepared? Of course. He had had the best preparation in the world: he had been study- ing hygiene and practising medicine for almost a third of a century. He could have sat in his chair and talked about this subject all night to the man seated on his right or left. But to get up and say the same things to even a small audience — that was another matter. That was a paralyzing matter. His heart doubled its pace and skipped beats at the very contemplation of it. He had never made a public speech in his life, and every thought that he had had now took wings. What was he to do ? The audience was applaud- ing. Every one was looking at him. He shook his head. But that served only to heighten the ap- plause, to increase the demand. The cries of “Dr. Curtis ! Speech ! Speech !” grew louder and more in- sistent. He was in positive misery. He knew that if he got up he would fail, that he would be unable to utter half a dozen sentences. So he arose, and, without saying a word, turned his back on his friends and walked silently out of the room, a deeply em- barrassed and humiliated man. Small wonder that one of the first things he did after getting back to Brooklyn was to come to the Central Y. M. C. A. and enroll in the course in Public Speaking. He didn’t propose to be put to the blush and be stricken dumb a second time. He was the kind of student that delights an in- structor: he was in dead earnest. He wanted to be DEVELOPING SELF-CONFIDENCE 7' able to talk, and there was no half-heartedness about his desires. He prepared his talks thoroughly, he practised them with a will, and he never missed a single session of the course. He did precisely what such a student always does : he progressed at a rate that surprised him, that surpassed his fondest hopes. After the first few sessions his nervousness subsided, his confidence mounted higher and higher. In two months he had become the star speaker of the group. He was soon accepting invitations to speak elsewhere; he now loved the feel and exhilaration of it, the dis- tinction and the additional friends it brought him. A member of the New York City Republican Campaign Committee, hearing one of his public addresses, invited Dr. Curtis to stump the city for his party. How surprised that politician would have been had he realized that, only a year before, the speaker had gotten up and left a public banquet hall in shame and confusion because he was tongue- tied with audience-fear ! The gaining of self-confidence and courage, and the ability to think calmly and clearly while talking to a group is not one-tenth as difficult as most men imagine. It is not a gift bestowed by Providence on only a few rarely endowed individuals. It is like the ability to play golf. Any man can develop his own latent capacity if he has sufficient desire to do so. Is there the faintest shadow of a reason why you should not be able to think as well in a perpendicu- lar position before an audience as you can when sit- ting down? Surely, you know there is not. In fact, 8 PUBLIC SPEAKING you ought to think better when facing a group of men. Their presence ought to stir you and lift you. A great many speakers will tell you that the pres- ence of an audience is a stimulus, an inspiration, that drives their brains to function more clearly, more keenly. At such times, thoughts, facts, ideas, that they did not know they possessed, drift smok- ing by, as Henry Ward Beecher said; and they have but to reach out and lay their hands hot upon them, That ought to be your experience. It probably will be if you practise and persevere. Of this much, however, you may be absolutely sure: training and practise will wear away your audience-fright and give you self-confidence and an abiding courage. Do not imagine that your case is unusually diffi- cult. Even those who afterwards became the most eloquent representatives of their generation were, at the outset of their careers, afflicted by this blind- ing fear and self-consciousness. William Jennings Bryan, battle-marked veteran that he was, admitted that, in his first attempts, his knees fairly smote together. Mark Twain, the first time he stood up to lec- ture, felt as if his mouth were filled with cotton and his pulse were speeding for some prize cup. Grant took Vicksburg and led to victory one of the greatest armies the world had ever seen up to that time; yet, when he attempted to speak in public, he admitted he had something very like locomotor ataxia. The late Jean Jaures, the most powerful political speaker that France produced during his genera- DEVELOPING SELF-CONFIDENCE 9 tion, sat, for a year, tongue-tied in the Chamber of Deputies before he could summon up the cour* age to make his initial speech. “The first time I attempted to make a public talk,” confessed Lloyd George, “I tell you I was in a state of misery. It is no figure of speech, but literally true, that my tongue clove to the roof of my mouth; and, at first, I could hardly get out a word.” John Bright, the illustrious Englishman, who, dur- ing the civil war, defended in England the cause of union and emancipation, made his maiden speech be- fore a group of country folk gathered in a school building. He was so frightened on the way to the place, so fearful that he would fail, that he implored his companion to start applause to bolster him up whenever he showed signs of giving way to his nerv- ousness. Charles Stewart Parnell, the great Irish leader, at the outset of his speaking career, was so nervous, according to the testimony of his brother, that he frequently clenched his fists until his nails sank into his flesh and his palms bled. Disraeli admitted that he would rather have led a cavalry charge than to have faced the House of Commons for the first time. His opening speech there was a ghastly failure. So was Sheridan’s. In fact, so many of the famous speakers of Eng- land have made poor showings at first that there is now a feeling in Parliament that it is rather an in- auspicious omen for a young man’s initial talk to be a decided success. So take heart. 10 PUBLIC SPEAKING After watching the careers and aiding somewhat in the development of so many speakers, the author is always glad when a student has, at the outset, a certain amount of flutter and nervous agitation. There is a certain responsibility in making a talk, even if it is to only two dozen men in a business conference — a certain strain, a certain shock, a cer- tain excitement. The speaker ought to be keyed up like a thoroughbred straining at the bit. The im- mortal Cicero said, two thousand years ago, that all public speaking of real merit was characterized by nervousness. Speakers often experience this same feeling even when they are talking over the radio. “Microphone fright,” it is called. When Charlie Chaplin went “on the air,” he had his speech all written out. Surely he was used to audiences. He toured this country back in 1912 with a vaudeville sketch en- titled “A Night in a Music Hall.” Before that he was on the legitimate stage in England. Yet, when he went into the padded room and faced the micro- phone, he had a feeling in the stomach not unlike the sensation one gets when he crosses the Atlantic during a stormy February. James Kirkwood, a famous motion picture actoi and director, had a similar experience. He used to be a star on the speaking stage ; but, when he came out of the sending room after addressing the invisi- ble audience, he was mopping perspiration from his brow. “An opening night on Broadway,” he con- fessed, “is nothing in comparison to that.” Some men, no matter how often they speak, ah ways experience this self-consciousness just before DEVELOPING SELF-CONFIDENCE 11 they commence but, in a few seconds after they have gotten on their feet, it disappears. Even Lincoln felt shy for the few opening mo- ments. “At first he was very awkward,” relates his law partner, Herndon, “and it seemed a real labor to adjust himself to his surroundings. He struggled for a time under a feeling of apparent diffidence and sensitiveness, and these only added to his awkwardness. I have often seen and sym- pathized with Mr. Lincoln during these moments. When he began speaking, his voice was shrill, pip- ing and unpleasant. His manner, his attitude, his dark, yellow face, wrinkled and dry, his oddity of pose, his diffident movements — everything seemed to be against him, but only for a short time.” In a few moments he gained composure and warmth and earnestness, and his real speech began. Your experience may be similar to his. In order to get the most out of this training, and to get it with rapidity and dispatch, four things are essential : FIRST: START WITH A STRONG AND PERSISTENT DESIRE This is of far more importance than you prob- ably realize. If your instructor could look into your mind and heart now and ascertain the depth of your desires, he could foretell, almost with certainty, the swiftness of the progress you will make. If your desire is pale and flabby, your achievements will also take on that hue and consistency. But, if you go after this subject with persistence, and with 12 PUBLIC SPEAKING the energy of a bulldog after a cat, nothing under- neath the Milky Way will defeat you. Therefore, arouse your enthusiasm for this study. Enumerate its benefits. Think of what additional self-confidence and the ability to talk more convinc- ingly in business will mean to you. Think of what it may mean and what it ought to mean, in dollars and cents. Think of what it may mean to you so- cially; of the friends it will bring, of the increase of your personal influence, of the leadership it will give you. And it will give you leadership more rapidly than almost any other activity you can think of or imagine. “There is no other accomplishment,” stated Chauncey M. Depew, “which any man can have which will so quickly make for him a career and secure recognition as the ability to speak accept- ably.” Philip D. Armour, after he had amassed millions said: “I would rather have been a great speaker than a great capitalist.” It is an attainment that almost every person of education longs for. After Andrew Carnegie’s death there was found, among his papers, a plan for his life drawn up when he was thirty-three years of age. He then felt that in two more years he could so arrange his business as to have an annual income of fifty thousand ; so he proposed to retire at thirty- five, go to Oxford and get a thorough education, and “pay special attention to speaking in public.” Think of the glow of satisfaction and pleasure that will accrue from the exercise of this new power. The author has traveled around over no small part DEVELOPING SELF-CONFIDENCE 13 of this terrestrial ball; and has had many and varied experiences; but for downright, and lasting inward satisfaction, he knows of few things that will com- pare to standing before an audience and making men think your thoughts after you. It will give you a sense of strength, a feeling of power. It will appeal to your pride of personal accomplishment. It will set you off from and raise you above your fellow-men. There is magic in it and a never-to-be- forgotten thrill. “Two minutes before I begin,” a speaker confessed, “I would rather be whipped than start; but two minutes before I finish, I would rather be shot than stop.” In every course, some men grow faint-hearted and fall by the wayside; so you should keep think- ing of what this course will mean to you until your desire is white hot. You should start this program with an enthusiasm that will carry you through every session, triumphant to the end. Tell your friends that you have joined this course. Set aside one certain night of the week for the reading of these lessons and the preparation of your talks. In short, make it as easy as possible to go ahead. Make it as difficult as possible to retreat. When Julius Caesar sailed over the channel from Gaul and landed with his legions on what is now England, what did he do to insure the success of his arms? A very clever thing: he halted his soldiers on the chalk cliffs of Dover, and, looking down over the waves two hundred feet below, they saw red tongues of fire consume every ship in which they had crossed. In the enemy’s country, with the last link with the Continent gone, the last means of re- 14 PUBLIC SPEAKING treating burned, there was but one thing left for diem to do : to advance, to conquer. That is pre- cisely what they did. Such was the spirit of the immortal Caesar. Why not make it yours, too, in this war to exterminate your foolish fear of audiences. SECOND: KNOW THOROUGHLY WHAT YOU ARE GOING TO TALK ABOUT Unless a man has thought out and planned his talk and knows what he is going to say, he can’t feel very comfortable when he faces his auditors. He is like the blind leading the blind. Under such circumstances, your speaker ought to be self-con- scious, ought to feel repentant, ought to be ashamed of his negligence. “I was elected to the Legislature in the fall of 1881,” Teddy Roosevelt wrote in his Autobiog- raphy, “and found myself the youngest man in that body. Like all young men and inexperienced mem- bers, I had considerable difficulty in teaching myself to speak. I profited much by the advice of a hard- headed old countryman — who was unconsciously paraphrasing the Duke of Wellington, who was himself doubtless paraphrasing somebody else. The advice ran : ‘Don’t speak until you are sure you have something to say, and know just what it is ; then say it, and sit down.’ ” This “hard-headed old countryman” ought to have told Roosevelt of another aid in overcoming nervousness. He ought to have added: “It will help you to throw off your embarrassment if you DEVELOPING SELF-CONFIDENCE 15 can find something to do before an audience — if you can exhibit something, write a word on the blackboard or point out a spot on the map or move a table or throw open a window or shift some books and papers — any physical action with a purpose behind it may help you to feel more at home.” True, it is not always easy to find an excuse for doing such things; but there is the suggestion. Use it if you can; but use it the first few times only. A baby does not cling to chairs after it once learns to walk. THIRD: ACT CONFIDENT The most famous psychologist that America has produced, Professor William James, wrote as fol- lows : “Action seems to follow feeling, but really action and feeling go together; and by regulating the action, which is under the more direct control of the will, we can indirectly regulate the feeling, which is not. “Thus the sovereign voluntary path to cheerfulness, if our spontaneous cheerfulness be lost, is to sit up cheerfully and to act and speak as if cheerfulness were already there. If such conduct does not make you feel cheerful, nothing else on that occasion can. “So, to feel brave, act as if we were brave, use all of our will to that end, and a courage-fit will very likely replace the fit of fear,” Apply Professor James’ advice. To develop courage when you are facing an audience, act as if you already had it. Of course, unless you are pre- pared, all the acting in the world will avail but 16 PUBLIC SPEAKING little. But granted that you know what you are go- ing to talk about, step out briskly and take a deep breath. In fact, breathe deeply for thirty seconds before you ever face your audience. The increased supply of oxygen will buoy you up and give you courage. The great tenor, Jean de Reszke, used to say that, when you had your breath so you “could sit on it,” nervousness vanished. When a youth of the Peuhl tribe in Central Africa attains manhood and wishes to take unto himself a wife, he is compelled to undergo the ceremony of flagellation. The women of the tribe foregather, singing and clapping their hands to the rhythm of tom-toms. The candidate strides forth stripped naked to the waist. Suddenly a man armed with a cruel whip, sets upon the lad, beating his bare skin, lashing him, flogging him like a fiend. Welts appear; often the skin is cut, blood flows; scars are made that last a lifetime. During this scourging, a venerable judge of the tribe crouches at the feet of the victim to see if he moves or exhibits the slight- est evidence of pain. To pass the test successfully the tortured aspirant must not only endure the or- deal, but, as he endures it, he must sing a paean of praise. In every age, in every clime, men have always admired courage; so, no matter how your heart may be pounding inside, stride forth bravely, stop, stand still like the scourged youth of Central Africa, and, like him, act as if you loved it. Draw yourself up to your full height and look your audience straight in the eyes, and begin to talk as confidently as if every one of them owed you. DEVELOPING SELF-CONFIDENCE 17 money. Imagine that they do. Imagine that they have assembled there to beg you for an extension of credit. The psychological effect on you will be beneficial. Do not nervously button and unbutton your coat, and fumble with your hands. If you must make nervous movements, place your hands behind your back and twist your fingers there where no one can see the performance' — or wiggle your toes. As a general rule, it is bad for a speaker to hide behind furniture; but it may give you a little cour- age the first few times to stand behind a table or chair and to grip them tightly — or hold a coin firmly in the palm of your hand. How did Roosevelt develop his characteristic courage and self-reliance? Was he endowed by na- ture with a venturesome and daring spirit? Not at all. “Having been a rather sickly and awkward boy,” he confesses in his Autobiography , “I was, as a young man, at first both nervous and distrustful of my own prowess. I had to train myself painfully and laboriously not merely as regards my body but as regards my soul and spirit.” Fortunately, he has told us how he achieved the transformation: “When a boy,” he writes, “I read a passage in one of Marryat’s books which always impressed me. In this passage the captain of some small British man-of-war is explaining to the hero how to acquire the quality of fearlessness. He says that at the outset almost every man is frightened when he goes into action, but that the course to follow is for the man to keep such a grip on him- self that he can act ]mt as if he were not frightened. l8 PUBLIC SPEAKING After this is kept up long enough, it changes from pretense to reality, and the man does in very fact become fearless by sheer dint of practising fearless- ness when he does not feel it. (I am using my own language, not Marryat’s.) “This was the theory upon which I went. There were all kinds of things of which I was afraid at first, ranging from grizzly bears to ‘mean’ horses and gun-fighters; but by acting as if I was not afraid I gradually ceased to be afraid. Most men can have the same experience if they choose.” You can have that very experience in this course, if you wish. “In war,” said Marshal Foch, “the best defensive is an offensive.” So take the offensive against your fears. Go out to meet them, battle them, conquer them by sheer boldness at every op- portunity. Have a message, and then think of yourself as a Western Union boy instructed to deliver it. We pay slight attention to the boy. It is the telegram that we want. The message — that is the thing. Keep your mind on it. Keep your heart in it. Know it like the back of your hand. Believe it feelingly. Then talk as if you were determined to say it. Do that, and the chances are ten to one that you will soon be master of the occasion and master of your- self. FOURTH: PRACTISE! PRACTISE! PRACTISE! The last point we have to make here is emphat- ically the most important. Even though you for- get everything you have read so far, do remember DEVELOPING SELF-CONFIDENCE 19 this: the first way, the last way, the never-failing way to develop self-confidence in speaking is — to speak. Really the whole matter finally simmers down to but one essential; practise, practise, prac- tise. That is the sine qua non of it all, “the with- out which not.” “Any beginner,” warned Roosevelt, “is apt to have ‘buck fever.’ ‘Buck fever’ means a state of intense nervous excitement which may be entirely divorced from timidity. It may affect a man the first time he has to speak to a large audience just as it may affect him the first time he sees a buck or goes into battle. What such a man needs is not courage, but nerve control, cool headedness. This he can get only hy actual practice. He must, by custom and repeated exercise of self-mastery, get his nerves thoroughly under control. This is largely a matter of habit; in the sense of repeated effort and repeated exercise of will power. If the man has the right stuff in him, he will grow stronger and stronger with each exercise of it.” So, persevere. Don’t remain away from any session of the course because the business duties of the week have rendered it impossible for you to pre- pare something. Prepared or unprepared, come. Let the instructor, the class, suggest a topic for you after you have come before them. You want to get rid of your audience fear? Let us see what causes it. “Fear is begotten of ignorance and uncertainty,” says Professor Robinson in The Mind in the Mak- ing. To put it another way: it is the result of a lack of confidence. 20 PUBLIC SPEAKING And what causes that? It is the result of not knowing what you can really do. And not know- ing what you can do is caused by a lack of experh ence. When you get a record of successful experi- ence behind you, your fears will vanish; they will melt like night mists under the glare of a July sun. One thing is certain: the accepted way to learn to swim is to plunge into the water. You have been reading this book long enough. Let us toss it aside now, and get busy with the real work in hand. Choose your subject, preferably one on which you have some knowledge, and construct a three- minute talk. Practise the talk by yourself a num- ber of times. Then give it, if possible, to the group for whom it is intended, or before your class, put- ting into the effort all your force and power. SUMMARY 1. A few thousand students of this course have written the author stating why they enrolled for this training and what they hoped to obtain from it. The prime reason that almost all of them gave was this : they wanted to conquer their nervousness, to be able to think on their feet, and to speak with self-confidence and ease before a group of any size. 2. The ability to do this is not difficult to ac- quire. It is not a gift bestowed by Providence on only a few rarely endowed individuals. It is like the ability to play golf : any man — every man — can # develop his own latent capacity if he has sufficient desire to do so. DEVELOPING SELF-CONFIDENCE 21 3. Many experienced speakers can think better and talk better when facing a group than they can in conversation with an individual. The presence of the larger number proves to be a stimulus, an in- spiration. If you faithfully follow this course, the time may come when that will be your experience, too; and you will look forward with positive pleas- ure to making an address. 4. Do not imagine that your case is unusual. Many men who afterwards became famous speakers were, at the outset of their careers, beset with self- consciousness and almost paralyzed with audience fright. This was the experience of Bryan, Jean Jaures, Lloyd George, Charles Stewart Parnell, John Bright, Disraeli, Sheridan and a host of others. 5. No matter how often you speak, you may always experience this self-consciousness just before you begin; but, in a few seconds after you have got- ten on your feet, it will vanish completely. 6. In order to get the most out of this course and to get it with rapidity and dispatch, do these four things : a. Start this course with a strong and per- sistent desire. Enumerate the benefits this train- ing will bring you. Arouse your enthusiasm for it. Think what it can mean to you financially, socially and in terms of increased influence and leadership. Remember that upon the depth of your desire will depend the swiftness of your progress. b. Prepare. You can’t feel confident unless you know what you are going to say. 22 PUBLIC SPEAKING c. Act confident. “To feel brave,” advises Professor William James, “act as if we were brave, use all of our will to that end, and a cour- age fit will very likely replace the fit of fear.” Roosevelt confessed that he conquered his fear of grizzly bears, mean horses and gun-fighters by that method. You can conquer your fear of au- diences by taking advantage of this psychological fact. d. Practise. This is the most important point of all. Fear is the result of a lack of confidence; and a lack of confidence is the result of not know- ing what you can do; and that is caused by a lack of experience. So get a record of successful experience behind you, and your fears will vanish. SPEECH BUILDING WORDS OFTEN MISPRONOUNCED “One of the really serious things in life for him who would be educated in this country is the learning of English pronunciation .” — Public Speaking Today , by Lockwood and Thorpe. Do you accent the following words on their last syllables? If not, you should do so. aDEPT adDICT adDRESS aDULT conTEST (verb) deTOUR disCHARGE disCOURSE doMAIN enCORE exPERT (adj.) freQUENT (verb) griMACE improVISE magaZINE preTENSE proTEST (verb) reCOURSE reSEARCH reSOURCE roBUST roMANCE rouTINE BolsheVIK — Bol (o as in orange ) ; she (e as in met) ; VIK (i as in hit). BolsheVIki — Bol (o, as in orange) ; she (e as in met) ; VI (z as in police ) ; ki (i as in police). 24 PUBLIC SPEAKING ERRORS IN ENGLISH Shall and Will. Many speakers do not use shall and will with correctness and discrimination. Remember that shall and will always convey either something that will come to pass naturally, or something that the speaker is determined to bring to pass by the power of his own effort. If you mean to state that a thing will come to pass in the natural order of events, use shall when referring to yourself, and will when referring to all other subjects. To express determination on your part to bring things about, you simply reverse this rule. You use will when speaking of yourself and shall when speaking of all other subjects. To illustrate : The following sentences simply prophesy that the persons referred to will come home to-morrow. They are statements of simple futurity. I shall come home to-morrow. We shall come home to-morrow. You will come home to-morrow. They will come home to-morrow. The next ones also imply futurity, and not prom- ises or determination : We shall be glad to send a representative. I shall be glad to call at your office. The fault will not be ours. The following sentences mean that “I am deter- mined to come home to-morrow regardless of what happens”; that “we are determined to come home to-morrow in spite of circumstances”; that “I wish DEVELOPING SELF-CONFIDENCE 25 that you and they will come home to-morrow.” The third and fourth sentences may even mean that “I request or command you to do so regard- less of your desires.” I will come home to-morrow. We will come home to-morrow. You shall come home to-morrow. They shall come home to-morrow. In asking questions, always use shall in connec- tion with I and we. Shall I file the letters lying on my desk? Shall we come home to-morrow? In questions where you and they are used in con- nection with shall and will use shall in the question when shall is expected in the answer, and will in the question if will is expected in the answer. Examples are as follows : Shall you be glad when you finish? (Ans.) I shall. Will you work hard? (Ans.) I will. Shall they pass? (Ans.) They shall not. . Shall they have the goods? (Ans.) They shall. Leave and Let. To leave means to depart from some one or some thing; to let means to permit. Examples: Leave the room at once. Let me do it. 26 PUBLIC SPEAKING CORRECT USAGE OF WORDS Among — Between. Between should be used when referring to only two people or things ; among should be used when referring to more than two. “There is a keen rivalry between our two salesmen.” “There is a decided spirit of friendliness among all our employees.” As — That. Do not use as in this manner: “I do not know as I want to do that.” Say: “I do not know that I want to do that.” Amass — Accumulate. He spent his entire life amassing his wealth.” This use is wrong. Accumu- late expresses a gradual, amass a rapid, gathering. Anticipate — Expect. Anticipate means more than merely expect; it suggests forecasting, taking measures to meet. If you expect a storm you may anticipate it by taking your raincoat. VOICE EXERCISE— CORRECT BREATHING “In the perfection of a beautiful voice,” said Madame Melba, “correct breathing is the greatest technical essential.” Consequently, the mastering of correct breathing should be, must be, our first step in voice improvement. Breath is the very founda- tion of voice; it is the raw material out of which our words are fashioned. The right use of the breath will give one full, deep, round tones ; attractive tones, not thin, harsh sounds ; tones that will please ; tones that will carry. DEVELOPING SELF-CONFIDENCE 27 If correct breathing is so important as all this, we must find out at once what it is and how to practise it. The famous Italian masters of singing have al- ways taught that it is diaphragmatic breathing. And what is that? Something strange and new and arduous? Not at all. It shouldn’t be. You did It perfectly as a baby. You practise it now during a part of every twenty-four hours. When you lie on the flat of your back to-night in bed, you will breathe freely, naturally, correctly — you will use diaphragmatic breathing. For some strange reason, it Is difficult to breathe any other way except correctly when you are lying in that position. Your problem, therefore, is simply this: To use the same breathing methods when you are standing up as you employ when you are on the flat of your back. That does not sound so difficult, does it? Your first exercise then is this: Lie on the flat of your back and breathe deeply. Note that the main activity of the process centers in the middle of the body. When you breathe deeply in this position, you do not raise your shoulders. This is what is happening: your spongy, porous lungs are being filled and extended with air like a toy balloon. The balloon must expand — but how, where? It is encased at the top and on the sides by a bony box made by the ribs, spine and breast bone. To be sure the ribs will give somewhat, but the easiest way for the lungs to expand is by pushing downwards upon a soft muscle that forms the floor of the chest and the roof of the abdomen. This 28 PUBLIC SPEAKING muscle, the diaphragm, divides your body into two distinct compartments. The upper part, the chest, contains your heart and lungs ; the lower part, the abdomen, houses the stomach, liver, intestines and other vital organs. This huge muscle is arched like a roof, like a dome. Suppose you were to take one of the paper plates or dishes that one purchases, at the ten cent store, for picnics. Turn it upside down and press on the arched surface — and what happens? It flattens and spreads and pushes out on all sides as it flattens. That is precisely what your diaphragm does when the lungs, filling with air, press down against the top of its arch. Lie down on the flat of your back now, take a deep breath, put your fingers right below the breast bone. Don’t you feel the diaphragm flattening and pushing out? Now put your hands at your sides, along the lower extremities of your ribs. Breathe deeply. Don’t you feel the balloon-like lungs push- ing out the floating ribs? Practise this diaphragmatic breathing for five minutes the last thing each night in bed, and for five minutes the first thing in the morning. At night, it will tend to soothe and quiet your nerves and make you drowsy. In the morning, it will brighten and freshen you. If this is done faith- fully, it will not only improve your voice, but it will add years to your life. Opera singers and vocal teachers are noted for their longevity. The famous Manuel Garcia lived to be ioi ; and he attributed his long life very largely to this daily exercise of deep breathing. CHAPTER II SELF-CONFIDENCE THROUGH PREPARATION “ The best way for you to gain confidence is to prepare so well on something that you really want to say that there can be little chance to fail ." — Public Speaking Today, Lock - wood-Thorpe. “'To trust to the inspiration of the moment' ' — that is the fatal phrase upon which many promising careers have been wrecked . The surest road to inspiration is preparation. I have seen many men of courage and capacity fail for lack of industry. Mastery in speech can only be reached by mastery in one's subject." — Lloyd George . “ Before a speaker faces his audience, he should write a letter to a friend and say: T am to make an address on a subject, and I want to make these points .' He should then enumerate the things he is going to speak about in their correct order. If he finds that he has nothing to say in his letter, he had better write to the committee that invited him and say that the probable death of his grandmother will possibly prevent his being present on the occasion." — Dr. Edward Everett Hale. “Men give me some credit for genius. All the genius I have lies in this: Whe?i I have a subject in hand, I study it profoundly. Day and night it is before ?ne. I explore it in all its bearings. My mind becomes pervaded with it. Then the efforts that I make are what people are pleased to call the fruits of genius. It is the fruit of labor and thought." = — A lex and er Hamilton. CHAPTER II SELF-CONFIDENCE THROUGH PREPARATION It has been the author’s professional duty as well as his pleasure to listen to and criticize approxi- mately six thousand speeches a year each season since 1912. These were made, not by college stu- dents, but by mature business and professional men. If that experience has engraved on his mind any one thing more deeply than another, surely it is this : the urgent necessity of preparing a talk before one starts to make it and of having something clear and definite to say, something that has impressed one, something that won’t stay unsaid. Aren’t you un- consciously drawn to the speaker who, you feel, has a real message in his head and heart that he zeal- ously desires to communicate to your head and heart? That is half the secret of speaking. When a speaker is in that kind of mental and emotional state he will discover a significant fact: namely, that his talk will almost make itself. Its yoke will be easy, its burden will be light. A well prepared speech is already nine-tenths delivered. The primary reason why most men take this course, as was recorded in Chapter I, is to acquire confidence and courage and self-reliance. And the one fatal mistake many make is neglecting to pre- 32 PUBLIC SPEAKING pare their talks. How can they even hope to sub- due the cohorts of fear, the cavalry of nervousness, when they go into the battle with wet powder and blank shells, or with no ammunition at all ? Under the circumstances, small wonder that they are not exactly at home before an audience. “I believe,” said Lincoln in the White House, “that I shall never be old enough to speak without embarrass- ment when I have nothing to say.” If you want confidence, why not do the things necessary to bring it about? “Perfect love,” wrote the Apostle John, “casteth out fear.” So does perfect preparation. Webster said he would as soon think of appearing before an audience half- clothed as half-prepared. Why don’t those enrolled in this course prepare their talks more carefully? Why? Some don’t clearly understand what preparation is nor how to go about it wisely; others plead a lack of time. So we shall discuss these problems rather fully — and we trust lucidly and profitably — in this chapter. THE RIGHT WAY TO PREPARE What is preparation? Reading a book? That is one kind, but not the best. Reading may help; but if one attempts to lift a lot of “canned” thoughts out of a book and to give them out im- mediately as his own, the whole performance will be lacking- in something. The audience may not know 'precisely what is lacking, but they will not warm to the speaker. SELF-CONFIDENCE AND PREPARATION 33 To illustrate: some time ago, the writer con- ducted a course in public speaking for the senior officers of New York City banks. Naturally, the members of such a group, having many demands upon their time, frequently found it difficult to pre- pare adequately, or to do what they conceived of as preparing. All their lives they had been thinking their own individual thoughts, nurturing their own personal convictions, seeing things from their own distinctive angles, living their own original experi- ences. So, in that fashion, they had spent forty years storing up material for speeches. But it was hard for some of them to l-ealize that. They could not see the foi-est for “the murmuring pines and the hemlocks.” This group met Friday evenings from five to seven. One Friday, a certain gentleman connected with an uptown bank — for our purposes here, we shall designate him as Mr. Jackson — found four- thirty had arrived, and, what was he to talk about? He walked out of his office, bought a copy of Forbes’ Magazine at a news stand and, in the sub- way coming down to the Federal Reserve Bank where the class met, he read an article entitled, “You Have Only Ten Years To Succeed.” He read it, not because he was interested in the article especially; but because he must speak on some- thing, on anything, to fill his quota of time. An hour later, he stood up and attempted to talk convincingly and interestingly on the contents of this article. What was the result, the inevitable result? 34 PUBLIC SPEAKING He had not digested, had not assimilated what he was trying to say. “Trying to say” — that expresses it precisely. He was trying. There was no real message in him seeking for an outlet ; and his whole manner and tone revealed it unmistakably. How could he expect the audience to be any more im- pressed than he himself was? He kept referring to the article saying the author said so and so. There was a surfeit of Forbes’ Magazine in it; but regrettably little of Mr. Jackson. So the writer addressed him somewhat in this fashion: “Mr. Jackson, we are not interested in this shadowy personality who wrote that article. He is not here. We can’t see him. But we are interested in you and your ideas. Tell us what you think, personally, not what somebody else said. Put more of Mr. Jackson in this. Why not take this same subject for next week? Why not read this article again, and ask yourself whether you agree with the author or not? If you do, think out his suggestions and illustrate them with observations from your own experience. If you don’t agree with him, say so and tell us why. Let this article be merely the starting point from which you launch your own speech.” Mr. Jackson accepted the suggestion, reread the article and concluded that he did not agree with the author at all. He did not sit down in the sub- way and try to prepare this next speech to order. He let it grow. It was a child of his own brain; . and it developed and expanded and took on stature just as his physical children had done. And like his SELF-CONFIDENCE AND PREPARATION 35 daughters, this other child grew day and night when he was least conscious of it. One thought was sug- gested to him while reading some item in the news- paper; another illustration swam into his mind un- expectedly when he was discussing the subject with a friend. The thing deepened and heightened, lengthened and thickened as he thought over it during the odd moments of the week. The next time Mr. Jackson spoke on this subject, he had something that was his, ore that he dug out of his own mine, currency coined in his own mint. And he spoke all the better because he was dis- agreeing with the author of the article. There is no spur to rouse one like a little opposition. What an incredible contrast between these two speeches by the same man, in the same fortnight, on the same subject. What a colossal difference the right kind of preparation makes ! Let us cite another illustration of how to do it and how not to do it. A gentleman, whom we shall call Mr. Flynn, was a student of this course in Washington, D. C. One afternoon he devoted his talk to eulogizing the capital city of the nation. He had hastily and superficially gleaned his facts from a booster booklet issued by the Evening Star. They sounded like it — dry, disconnected, undigested. He had not thought over his subject adequately. It had not elicited his enthusiasm. He did not feel what he was saying deeply enough to make it worth while expressing. The whole affair was flat and flavorless and unprofitable. 36 PUBLIC SPEAKING A SPEECH THAT COULD NOT FAIL A fortnight later, something happened that touched Mr. Flynn to the core: a thief stole his Cadillac out of a public garage. He rushed to the police and offered rewards, but it was all in vain. The police admitted that it was well nigh impossible for them to cope with the crime situation; yet, only a week previously, they had found time to walk about the street, chalk in hand, and fine Mr. Flynn because he had parked his car fifteen minutes overtime. These “chalk cops,” who were so busy annoying respectable citizens that they could not catch criminals, aroused his ire. He was indig- nant. He had something now to say, not something that he had gotten out of a book issued by the Evening Star, but something that was leaping hot out of his own life and experience. Here was some- thing that was part and parcel of the real man — something that had aroused his feelings and convic- tions. In his speech eulogizing the city of Wash- ington, he had laboriously pulled out sentence by sentence; but now he had but to stand on his feet and open his mouth, and his condemnation of the police welled up and boiled forth like Vesuvius in action. A speech like that is almost foolproof. It can hardly fail. It was experience plus reflection. WHAT PREPARATION REALLY IS Does the preparation of a speech mean the get- ting together of some faultless phrases written down or memorized? No. Does it mean the assembling SELF-CONFIDENCE AND PREPARATION 37 of a few casual thoughts that really convey very little to you personally? Not at all. It means the assembling of your thoughts, your ideas, your con- victions, your urges. And you have such thoughts, such urges. You have them every day of your waking life. They even swarm through your dreams. Your whole existence has been filled with feelings and experiences. These things are lying deep in your subconscious mind as thick as pebbles on the seashore. Preparation means thinking, brooding, recalling, selecting the ones that appeal to you most, polishing them, working them into a pattern, a mosaic of your own. That doesn’t sound like such a difficult program, does it? It isn’t. Just requires a little concentration and thinking to a purpose. How did Dwight L. Moody prepare those ad- dresses of his which made spiritual history during the last generation? “I have no secret,” he replied in answer to that question. “When I choose a subject, I write the name of it on the outside of a large envelope. I have many such envelopes. If, .when I am reading, I meet a good thing on any subject I am to speak on, I slip it into the right envelope, and let it lie there. I always carry a notebook, and if I hear anything in a sermon that will throw light on that subject, I put it down, and slip it into the envelope. Perhaps I let it lie there for a year or more. When I want a new sermon, I take everything that has been accumulating. Between what I find there and the results of my own study, I have material enough. Then, all the time I am going over my sermons, taking out a little here, adding a little there. In that way they never get old / 5 38 PUBLIC SPEAKING THE SAGE ADVICE OF DEAN BROWN OF YALE A few years ago the Yale Divinity School cele- brated the one hundredth anniversary of Its found- ing. On that occasion, the Dean, Dr. Charles Rey- nold Brown, delivered a series of lectures on the Art of Preaching. These are now published in book form under that name by the Macmillan Company, New York. Dr. Brown has been pre- paring addresses himself weekly for a third of a century, and also training others to prepare and deliver; so he was in a position to dispense some sage advice on the subject, advice that will hold good regardless of whether the speaker is a man of the cloth preparing a discourse on the Ninety-first Psalm, or a shoe manufacturer preparing a speech on Labor Unions. So I am taking the liberty of quoting Dr. Brown here : “Brood over your text and your topic. Brood over them until they become mellow and responsive. You will hatch out of them a whole flock of promising ideas as you cause the tiny germs of life there contained to expand and develop. ... “It will be all the better if this process can go on for a long time and not be postponed until Saturday forenoon when you are actually making your final preparation for next Sunday. If a minister can hold a certain truth in his mind for a month, for six months perhaps, for a year it may be, before he preaches on it he will find new ideas perpetu- ally sprouting out of it, until it shows an abundant growth. He may meditate on it as he walks the streets, or as he spends some hours on a train, when his eyes are too tired to read. “He may indeed brood upon it in the night-time. It is better for the minister not to take his church or his SELF-CONFIDENCE AND PREPARATION 39 sermon to bed with him habitually — a pulpit is a splendid thing to preach from, but it is not a good bed-fellow. Yet, for all that, I have sometimes gotten out of bed in the middle of the night to put down the thoughts which came to me, for fear I might forget them before morning. . . . “When you are actually engaged in assembling the ma- terial for a particular sermon, write down everything that comes to you bearing upon that text and topic. Write down what you saw in the text when you first chose it. Write down all the associated ideas which now occur to you. . . . “Put all these ideas of yours down in writing, just a few words, enough to fix the idea, and keep your mind reaching for more all the time as if it were never to see another book as long as it lived. This is the way to train the mind in productiveness. You will by this method keep your own mental processes fresh, original, creative. . . . “Put down all of those ideas which you have brought to the birth yourself, unaided. They are more precious for your mental unfolding than rubies and diamonds and much fine gold. Put them down, preferably on scraps of paper, backs of old letters, fragments of envelopes, waste paper, anything which comes to your hand. This is much better every way than to use nice, long, clean sheets of foolscap. It is not a mere matter of economy — you will find it easier to arrange and organize these loose bits when you come to set your material in order. “Keep on putting down all the ideas which come to your mind, thinking hard all the while. You need not hurry this process. It is one of the most important mental trans- actions in which you will be privileged to engage. It is this method which causes the mind to grow in real productive power. . . .” “You will find that the sermons you enjoy preaching the most and the ones which actually accomplish the most good in the lives of your people will be those sermons which you 40 PUBLIC SPEAKING take most largely out of your own interiors. They are bone of your bone, flesh of your flesh, the children of your own mental labor, the output of your own creative energy. The sermons which are garbled and compiled will always have a kind of second-hand, warmed-over flavor about them. The sermons which live and move and enter into the temple, walking and leaping and praising God, the sermons which enter into the hearts of men causing them to mount up with wings like eagles and to walk in the way of duty and not faint — these real sermons are the ones which are actually bom from the vital energies of the man who utters them,” HOW LINCOLN PREPARED HIS SPEECHES How did Lincoln prepare his speeches? For- tunately, we know the facts ; and, as you read here of his method, you will observe that Dean Brown, in his lecture, commended several of the procedures that Lincoln had employed three-quarters of a cen- tury previously. One of Lincoln’s most famous addresses was that in which he declared with pro- phetic vision: “ ‘A house divided against itself can- not stand.’ I believe this government cannot en- dure, permanently, half slave and half free.” This speech was thought out as he went about his usual work, as he ate his meals, as he walked the street, as he sat in his barn milking his cow, as he made his daily trip to the butcher shop and grocery, an old gray shawl over his shoulders, his market basket over his arm, his little son at his side, chattering and questioning, growing peeved, and jerking at the long bony fingers in a vain effort to make his father talk to him. But Lincoln stalked on, absorbed in his own reflections, thinking of his speech, appar- ently unconscious of the boy’s existence. SELF-CONFIDENCE AND PREPARATION 41 From time to time during this brooding and hatching process, he jotted down notes, fragments, sentences here and there on stray envelopes, scraps of paper, bits torn from paper sacks — anything that was near. These he stowed away in the top of his hat and carried them there until he was ready to sit down and arrange them in order, and to write and revise the whole thing, and to shape it up for delivery and publication. In the joint debates of 1858, Senator Douglas delivered the same speech wherever he went; but Lincoln kept studying and contemplating and re- flecting until he found it easier, he said, to make a new speech each day than to repeat an old one. The subject was forever widening and enlarging in his mind. A short time before he moved into the White House, he took a copy of the Constitution and three speeches, and with only these for reference, he locked himself in a dingy, dusty back room over a store in Springfield; and there, away from all in- trusion and interruption, he wrote out his inaugural address. How did Lincoln prepare his Gettysburg ad- dress? Unfortunately, false reports have been cir- culated about it. The true story, however, is fas- cinating. Let us have it : When the commission in charge of the Gettys- burg cemetery decided to arrange for a formal dedi- cation, they invited Edward Everett to deliver the speech. He had been a Boston minister, President of Harvard, governor of Massachusetts, United States senator, minister to England, secretary of S3 8S0 42 PUBLIC SPEAKING state, and was generally considered to be America’s most capable speaker. The date first set for the dedication ceremonies was October 23, 1863. Mr. Everett very wisely declared that it would be im- possible for him to prepare adequately on such short notice. So the dedication was postponed until November 19, nearly a month, to give him time to prepare. The last three days of that period he spent in Gettysburg, going over the battlefield, familiarizing himself with all that had taken place there. That period of brooding and thinking was most excellent preparation. It made the battle real to him. Invitations to be present were despatched to all the members of Congress, to the President and his cabinet. Most of these declined; the committee was surprised when Lincoln agreed to come. Should they ask him to speak? They had not intended to do so. Objections were raised. He would not have time to prepare. Besides, even if he did have time, had he the ability ? True, he could handle himself well in a debate on slavery or in a Cooper Union address; but no one had ever heard him deliver a dedicatory address. This was a grave and solemn occasion. They ought not to take any chances. Should they ask him to speak? They wondered, wondered. . . . But they would have wondered a thousand times more had they been able to look into the future and to see that this man, whose ability they were questioning, was to deliver on that occasion what is very generally accepted now as one of the most enduring addresses ever deliv- ered by the lips of mortal man. v i SELF-CONFIDENCE AND PREPARATION 43 Finally, a fortnight before the event, they sent Lincoln a belated invitation to make “a few appro- priate remarks.” Yes, that is the way they worded it: “a few appropriate remarks.” Think of writing that to the President of the United States ! Lincoln immediately set about preparing. He wrote to Edward Everett, secured a copy of the address that that classic scholar was to deliver; and, a day or two later, going to a photographer’s gal- lery to pose for his photograph, Lincoln took Everett’s manuscript with him and read it during the spare time that he had at the studio. He thought over his talk for days, thought over it while walking back and forth between the White House and the war office, thought over it while stretched out on a leather couch in the war office waiting for the late telegraphic reports. He wrote a rough draft of it on a piece of foolscap paper, and carried it about in the top of his tall silk hat. Ceaselessly he was brooding over it, ceaselessly it was taking shape. The Sunday before it was deliv- ered he said to Noah Brooks: “It is not exactly written. It is not finished anyway. I have written it over two or three times, and I shall have to give it another lick before I am satisfied.” He arrived in Gettysburg the night before the dedication. The little tow r n was filled to overflow- ing. Its usual population of thirteen hundred had been suddenly swelled to fifteen thousand. The sidewalks became clogged, impassable, men and women took to the dirt streets. Half a dozen bands were playing; crow’ds were singing “John Brown’s Body.” People foregathered before the home of 44 PUBLIC SPEAKING Mr. Wills where Lincoln was being entertained. They serenaded him ; they demanded a speech. Lin- coln responded with a few words which conveyed with more clearness than .tact, perhaps, that he was unwilling to speak until the morrow. The facts are that he was spending the latter part of that evening giving his speech “another lick.” He even went to an adjoining house where Secretary Seward was staying and read the speech aloud to him for his criticism. After breakfast the next morning, he continued “to give it another lick,” working on it until a rap came at the door informing him that it was time for him to take his place in the proces- sion. “Colonel Carr, who rode just behind the President, stated that when the procession started, the President sat erect on his horse, and looked the part of the commander-in-chief of the army; but, as the procession moved on, his body leaned for- ward, his arms hung limp, and his head was bowed. He seemed absorbed in thought. 1 ’ We can only guess that even then he was going over his little speech of ten immortal sentences, giving it “another lick.” Some of Lincoln’s speeches, in which he had only a superficial interest, were unquestioned failures; but he was possessed of extraordinary power when he spoke of slavery and the union. Why? Because he thought ceaselessly on these problems and felt deeply. A companion who shared a room with him one night in an Illinois tavern awoke next morn- ing at daylight to find Lincoln sitting up in bed, staring at the wall, and his first words were: “This* SELF-CONFIDENCE AND PREPARATION 45' government cannot endure permanently, half slave and half free.” How did Christ prepare His addresses? He withdrew from the crowd. He thought. He brooded. Fie pondered. He went out alone into the wilderness and meditated and fasted for forty days and forty nights. “From that time on,” re- cords Saint Matthew, “Jesus began to preach.” Shortly after that, He delivered one of the world’s most celebrated speeches : the Sermon on the Mount. “That is all very interesting,” you may protest; “but I have no desire to become an immortal orator. I merely want to make a few simple talks in busi- ness occasionally.” True, and we realize your wants fully. This course is for the specific purpose of helping you and other business men like you to do just that. But, unpretending as the talks of yours may prove to be, you can profit by and utilize in some measure the methods of the famous speakers of the past. HOW TO PREPARE YOUR TALK What topics ought you to speak on during the sessions of this course? Anything that interests you. If possible, choose your own topics ; you will be more fortunate still if your topic chooses you. However, you will often have topics suggested for you by your instructor. Don’t make the almost universal mistake of try- ing to cover too much ground in a brief talk. Just take one or two angles of a subject and attempt to cover them adequately. You will be fortunate 46 PUBLIC SPEAKING if you can do that in the short speeches that are necessitated by the time schedule of this course. Determine your subject a week in advance, so that you will have time to think it over in odd moments. Think over it for seven days; dream over it for seven nights. Think of it the last thing when you retire. Think of it the next morning while you are shaving, while you are bathing, while you are riding down town, while you are waiting for elevators, for lunch, for appointments. Dis- cuss it with your friends. Make it a topic of con- versation. Ask yourself all possible questions concerning it. If, for example, you are to speak on divorce, ask yourself what causes divorce, what are the effects economically, socially. How can the evil be rem- edied? Should we have uniform divorce laws? Why? Or should we have any divorce laws? Should divorce be made impossible? More diffi- cult? Easier? Suppose you were going to talk on why you enrolled for this course. You ought then to ask yourself such questions as these: What are my troubles? What do I hope to get out of this in- struction? Have I ever made a public' talk? If so, when? Where? What happened? Why do I think this training is valuable for a business man? Do I know men who are forging ahead commer- cially largely because of their self-confidence, their presence, their ability to talk convincingly ? Do I know others who will probably never achieve a gratifying measure of success because they lack these SELF-CONFIDENCE AND PREPARATION 47 positive assets? Be specific. Tell the stories of these men without mentioning their names. If you stand up and think clearly and keep going for two or three minutes, that is all that will be expected of you during your first few talks. A topic, such as why you enrolled for this course, is very easy; that is obvious. If you will spend a little time selecting and arranging your material on that topic, you will be almost sure to remember it, for you will be speaking of your own observations, your own desires, your own experiences. On the other hand, let us suppose that you have decided to speak on your business or profession. How shall you set about preparing such a talk? You already have a wealth of material on that sub- ject. Your problem, then, will be to select and arrange it. Do not attempt to tell us all about it in three minutes. It can’t be done. The attempt will be too sketchy, too fragmentary. Take one and only one phase of your topic: expand and en- large that. For example, why not tell us how you came to be in your particular business or profession? Was it a result of accident or choice? Relate your early struggles, your defeats, your hopes, your triumphs. Give us a human interest narrative, a real life picture based on first hand experiences. The truthful, inside story of almost any man’s life — if told modestly and without offending egotism — is most entertaining. It is almost sure-fire speech ma- terial. ■ Or take another angle of your business: what are its troubles? What advice would you give to a young man entering it? 48 PUBLIC SPEAKING Or tell us about the people with whom you come in contact — the honest and dishonest ones. Tell us of your problems with labor, your problems with your customers. What has your business taught you about the most interesting topic in the world: human nature? If you speak about the technical side of your business, about things, your talk may very easily prove uninteresting to others. But people, personalities — one can hardly go w r rong with that kind of material. Above all else, don’t make your talk an abstract preachment. That will bore us. Make your talk a regular layer cake of illustrations and general statements. Think of concrete cases you have ob- served, and of the fundamental truths which you believe those specific instances illustrate. You will also discover that these concrete cases are far easier to remember than abstractions; are far easier to talk about. They will also aid and brighten your delivery. Here is the way a very interesting writer does it. This is an excerpt from an article by B. A. Forbes on the necessity of executives delegating re- sponsibilities to their associates. Note the illus- trations — the gossip about people. “Many of our present-day gigantic enterprises were at one time one-man affairs. But most of them have outgrown this status. The reason is that, while every great organ- ization is ‘the lengthened shadow of one man, 5 business and industry are now conducted on such a colossal scale that of necessity even the ablest giant must gather about him brainy associates to help in handling all the reins. “Woolworth once told me that his was essentially a one- man business for years. Then he ruined his health, and it SELF-CONFIDENCE AND PREPARATION 49 i f' I f * t K jf. was while he lay week after week in the hospital that he awakened to the fact that if his business was to expand as he hoped, he would have to share the managerial responsibilities. “Bethlehem Steel for a number of years was distinctly of the one-man type. Charles M. Schwab was the whole works. By and by Eugene G. Grace grew in stature and developed into an abler steel man than Schwab, according to the repeated declarations of the latter. To-day Bethlehem Steel is no longer simply Schwab. “Eastman Kodak in its earlier stages consisted mainly of George Eastman, but he was wise enough to create an efficient organization long ago. All the greatest Chicago packing houses underwent a similar experience during the time of their founders. Standard Oil, contrary to the popu- lar notion, never was a one man organization after it grew to large dimensions. “J. P. Morgan, although a towering giant, was an ardent believer in choosing the most capable partners and sharing the burdens with them. “There are still ambitious business leaders who would like to run their business on the one-man principle, but, wilfy-nilly, they are forced by the very magnitude of modern operations to delegate responsibilities to others.” Some men, in speaking of their businesses, commit the unforgivable error of talking only of the fea- tures that interest them. Shouldn’t the speaker try to ascertain what will entertain not himself but his hearers? Shouldn’t he try to appeal to their selfish interests? If, for example, he sells fire insurance, shouldn’t he tell them how to prevent fires on their own property? If he is a banker, shouldn’t he give them advice on finance or investments? While preparing, study your audience. Think of their wants, their wishes. That is sometimes half the battle. 50 PUBLIC SPEAKING In preparing some topics, it is very advisable — if time permits — to do some reading, to discover what others have thought, what others have said on the same subject. But don’t read until you have first thought 1 yourself dry. That is important' — very. Then go to the public library and lay your needs before the librarian. Tell her you are pre- paring a speech on such and such a topic. Ask her frankly for help. If you are not in the habit of doing research work, you will probably be surprised at the aids she can put at your disposal; perhaps a special volume on your very topic, outlines and briefs for debate, giving the principal arguments on both sides of the public questions of the day; the Reader’s Guide to Periodical Literature listing the magazine articles that have appeared on various topics since the beginning of the century; the Cen- tury Book of Facts, the World Almanac, the Ency- clopedias, and dozens of reference books. They are tools in your workshop. Use them. THE SECRET OF RESERVE POWER Luther Burbank said, shortly before his death: “I have often produced a million plant specimens to find but one or two superlatively good ones, and have then destroyed all the inferior specimens.” A speech ought to be prepared somewhat in, that lavish and discriminating spirit. Assemble a hun- dred thoughts, and discard ninety. Collect more material, more information, than there is any possibility of employing. Get it for the additional confidence it will give you, for the sure- SELF-CONFIDENCE AND PREPARATION 51 ness of touch. Get it for the effect it will have on your mind and heart and whole manner of speaking. This is a basic, important factor of preparation; yet it is constantly ignored by speakers, both in public and private. “I have drilled hundreds of salesmen, canvassers, and demonstrators,” says Arthur Dunn, “and the principal weakness which I have discovered in most of them has been their failure to realize the im- portance of knowing everything possible about their products and getting such knowledge before they start to sell. “Many salesmen have come to my office and after getting a description of the article and a line of sales talk have been eager to get right out and try to sell. Many of these salesmen have not lasted a week and a large number have not lasted forty- eight hours. In educating and drilling canvassers and salesmen in the sale of a food specialty, I have endeavored to make food experts of them. I have compelled them to study food charts issued by the U. S. Department of Agriculture, which show in food the amount of water, the amount of protein, the amount of carbohydrates, the amount of fat, and ash. I have had them study the elements which make up the products which they are to sell. I have had them go to school for several days and then pass examinations. I have had them sell the product to other salesmen. I have offered prizes for the best sales talks. “I have often found salesmen who get impatient at the preliminary time required for the study of ' their articles. They have said, T will never have J 52 PUBLIC SPEAKING time to tell all of this to a retail grocer. He is too busy. If I talk protein and carbohydrates, he won’t listen and, if he does listen, he won’t know what I am talking about.’ My reply has been, ‘You don’t get all of this knowledge for the benefit of your customer, but for the benefit of yourself. If you know your product from A to Z you will have a feeling about it that is difficult to describe. You will be so positively charged, so fortified, so strengthened in your own mental attitude that you will be both irresistible and unconquerable.’ ” Miss Ida M. Tarbell, the well known historian of the Standard Oil Company, told the writer that years ago, when she was in Paris, Mr. S. S. Mc- Clure, the founder of McClure’s Magazine, cabled her to write a short article about the Atlantic Cable. She went to London, interviewed the Euro- pean manager of the principal cable, and obtained sufficient data for her assignment. But she did not stop there. She wanted a reserve supply of facts; so she studied all manner of cables on display in the British Museum ; she read books on the history of the cable and even went to manufacturing con- cerns on the edge of London and saw cables in the process of construction. Why did she collect ten times as much informa- tion as she could possibly use? She did it because she felt it would give her reserve power; because she realized that the things she knew and did not express would lend force and color to the little she did express. Edwin James Cattell has spoken to approximately thirty million people; yet he confided to me recently SELF-CONFIDENCE AND PREPARATION 53 that if he did not, on the way home, kick himself for the good things he had left out of his talk, he felt that the performance must have been a failure. Why? Because he knew from long experience that the talks of distinct merit are those in which there abounds a reserve of material, a plethora, a pro- fusion of it — far more than the speaker has time to use. “What!” you object. “Does this author imagine that I can find time for all this? I would like him to know that I have a business to conduct and a wife and two children and a couple of Airedale dogs to support. ... I can’t be running to museums and looking at cables and reading books and sitting up in bed at daylight mumbling my speeches.” My dear sir, we know all about your case, and sympathetic allowance has been made for it. The assigned topics will be questions on which you have already done considerable thinking. Sometimes you will not be asked to plan any kind of a speech in advance; but you .will be given an easy topic for impromptu speaking after you face your audience. This will afford you most useful practise in thinking on your feet — “the sort of thing that you may be forced to do in business discussions. Some of the men who join this course are only slightly interested in learning to prepare talks in advance. They want to be able to think on their feet and to join in discussions that come up at vari- ous business meetings. Such students sometimes prefer to come to the class, listen, and then take their cue from some of the preceding speakers. A limited amount of this may be advisable; but don’t 54 PUBLIC SPEAKING overdo it. Follow the suggestions given in this chapter. They will give you the ease and freedom you are seeking and also the ability to prepare talks effectively. If you procrastinate until you have leisure to prepare and plan your talk, the leisure will prob- ably never be found. How r ever, it is easy to do the habitual, the accustomed thing, isn’t it? So why not set aside one specific evening a week, from eight to ten o’clock, to be devoted to nothing but this task? That is the sure way, the systematic way. Why not try it? SUMMARY 1. When a speaker has a real message in his head and heart — an inner urge to speak, he is almost sure to do himself credit. A well-prepared speech is already nine-tenths delivered. 2. What is preparation? The setting dow T n of some mechanical sentences on paper? The memor- izing of phrases? Not at all. Real preparation consists in digging something out of yourself, in assembling and arranging your ozvn thoughts, in cherishing and nurturing your ozvn convictions. (Il- lustrations : Mr. Jackson of New York failed when he attempted merely to reiterate another man’s thoughts he had culled from an article in Forbes 9 Magazine. He succeeded when he used that article merely as a starting point for his ow r n speech — when he thought out his own ideas, developed his ozvn illustrations. SELF-CONFIDENCE AND PREPARATION 55 3. Do not sit down and try to manufacture a speech in thirty minutes. A speech can’t be cooked to order like a steak. A speech must grow. Select your topic early in the week, think over it during odd moments, brood over it, sleep over it, dream over it. Discuss it with friends. Make it a topic of conversation. Ask yourself all possible questions concerning it. Put down on pieces of paper all thoughts and illustrations that come to you and keep reaching out for more. Ideas, suggestions, illustra- tions will come drifting to you at sundry times — when you are bathing, when you are driving down town, when you are waiting for dinner to be served. That was Lincoln’s method. It has been the method of almost all successful speakers. 4. After you have done a bit of independent thinking, go to the library and do some reading on your topic — if time permits. Tell the librarian your needs. She can render you great assistance. 5. Collect far more material than you intend to use. Imitate Luther Burbank. He often produced a million plant specimens to find one or two superla- tively good ones. Assemble a hundred thoughts; discard ninety. 6. The way to develop reserve power is to know far more than you can use, to have a full reservoir of information. In preparing a speech, use the methods Arthur Dunn employed in training his salesmen to sell a breakfast food specialty, the methods that Ida Tarbell employed in preparing her article on the Atlantic cable. SPEECH BUILDING WORDS OFTEN MISPRONOUNCED “ Your most inexcusable sin is the mispronunciation of a word in common, every-day use. The pronunciation of the word ‘municipal,’ with the accent on the third syllable, is decidedly offensive to an audience of any intellectual stand- ing.” — George Rowland Collins, in Platform Speaking. Do you always accent the second syllables of the following words? abDOmen acCLImate alTERnately conDOLence exPOnent fiNANCE (noun and verb) inCOGnito inCOMparable inEXplicable inQUIry irREVocable lyCEum muNICipal muSEum SeATtle The first syllable of finance — both verb and noun — may be pronounced fin (i as in it), or ft (i as in ice) ; but remember that the accent must go on the last syllable. This word is commonly mispro- nounced. Watch it. The first syllable of predecessor may be pred (e as ir\ met), or pre ( e as in eel) ; but the third, 56 SELF-CONFIDENCE AND PREPARATION 5? not the first, syllable must be accented — prede- CESSor. Can you pronounce correctly the italicized words in the following sentences? If in doubt, see Chap- ter I. 1. In his address , the expert agriculturist made no pretense whatever to having done any original re- search. 2. Do adults read the romances appearing in the magazines? 3. He protested that we would not detour . 4. He said in a robust voice that he would con- test the decision as a matter of routine . ERRORS IN ENGLISH Review. For the purposes of review, a para- graph or so will head this section of each chapter. A number of mistakes previously discussed will be given. Finding them will be an interesting game and, at the same time, will increase your ability to detect errors and to profit by them. There are four errors in the following para- graph : I am determined that I shall go, even though it shall cause the heavens to fall and will bring unhappiness to all concerned. So leave me do it, whatever can come. New Study Material. The English language is burdened with a number of verbs which cause trouble. A thorough understanding of their defini- tions and of their principal parts will soon cause you to use them correctly. 58 PUBLIC SPEAKING Let us consider three different sets of verbs in this category. They are lay and lie; set and sit; raise and rise . Lay — Lie To lay means to put an object somewhere. So, you may say: I am laying the stamps here. He lays the book on the table. I have laid the matter before the board of directors. He laid the foundation for an immense fortune. To lie means to recline. Examples of use are as follows : I am lying down. I lie down. He lay on his bed yesterday. They have lain down on the whole proposi- tion. In addition, there is another use of lie in the sense of prevarication. The principal parts are lie, lied , lying, lied . No examples are necessary to show the usage of these verbs. Set — Sit To set means to put something somewhere, or to make some one to sit. Of course, the latter usage is merely a corollary of the first. Examples are as follows: SELF-CONFIDENCE AND PREPARATION 59 I set it here as I want to use it. I am setting the medicine on the table. I set my watch by standard time last night. I had set the trap before he came. I set the baby on the bed. To sit means to rest, as upon a chair with the body bent at the hips, or to rest upon the haunches, it also means to take or occupy a seat. Examples are: I sit to take my meals. I am sitting down now. I sat in the ante-room. I have sat and waited for hourSo Sit here. Raise — Rise T o raise means to move upward, to cause to rise 3 to exalt. Examples are : I raised the flag. I am raising the floor. He raised his price. He has raised a new r question. To rise means to ascend, as a hill; to become erect; to emerge; to revolt; etc. Examples are: I rise to a point of order. I am rising to ask a question. The river rose last night. The price has risen. 60 PUBLIC SPEAKING CORRECT USAGE OF WORDS Antipathy — Dislike. Antipathy is instinctive; dislike is often acquired. You have an antipathy for hoboes ; you may dislike your landlord. Authentic — Genuine. Authentic suggests possessing authority and being true to the facts; genuine means, not counterfeit. If a Sandwich Islander wrote a book on ice hockey and signed his name to it, the treatise would be genuine but prob- ably not authentic. Behavior — Conduct. Behavior refers to our mode of acting in the presence of others — it gener- ally refers to a specific instance. Conduct refers to the general tone of our actions in the more seri- ous aspects of life. Bound — Determine. We are bound to do things by outside influences. We determine to do a thing by our own decisions. You may be bound by law to send your child to school and determined to send him to college. VOICE EXERCISE— CORRECT BREATHING The famous singer, Jean De Reszke, advised, “carry the necktie high.” Let us stand up now and obey his admonition, not by raising the shoul- ders, but by lifting the chest to its proper position. Stand with your weight on the balls of your feet. Put your hand on the top of your head. Without lifting your heels from the floor, try now to shove your hand off your hair. Try to do it, not with your arm muscles, but by standing as tall as pos- SELF-CONFIDENCE AND PREPARATION 61 sible. There. That is it. Fine! You are now standing straight, abdomen in, necktie and chest high, the back of your neck against the back of your collar. Have you raised your shoulders? If so, relax, drop them. You want to carry your chest high, not your shoulders. Without lowering the chest, exhale. Hold it high as the last bit of breath escapes. Now you are ready to breathe correctly. Close your eyes. Inhale deeply, slowly, easily through the nose. Try to feel the same sensation that you felt when you were practising diaphragmatic breath- ing in bed, as we suggested in Chapter I. Feel the bottom of your lungs expanding, expanding, ex- panding, pushing out the lower ribs to the side; feel the sensation under your arms; feel it at the back; feel the diaphragm being pushed down and flattening like an inverted paper dish under pres- sure from above; feel the diaphragm expanding as you place your fingers over the soft spot, “the doll squeak,” children call it, just underneath the breast bone. Exhale slowly. Now, once more. Inhale through your nose. Let me caution you again : do not raise your shoul- ders, and do not try to enlarge your lungs at the top. With your necktie high, breathe in again, feel- ing the expansion in the middle of your body. “I practise deep breathing every day of my life,” said Madame Schumann-Heink. Caruso did the same; consequently he developed a diaphragm of extraordinary power. When stu- dents came to him — as they often did — seeking ad- vice about this all-important matter of correct 62 PUBLIC SPEAKING breathing, he usually said to them: “Press your fist with all your strength against my relaxed dia- phragm.” Then with a quick, sharp intake of breath, the famous tenor forced his diaphragm down and his body out with such force as to fling off the pressure of the fist. However, the mere knowledge of correct breath- ing that you are gathering now will avail you naught unless you apply it. So practise it daily as you walk along the street. Practise it when you have an odd moment in the office. After you have been concentrating on some task for an hour, throw open the window and fill your lungs with air. This won’t be time lost. It will be time saved, vigor reinforced, health strengthened. This practise cannot be indulged in too often. It will, if faithfully followed, become a habit. You will wonder then that you ever breathed in any other fashion. To breathe from the top of the lungs is only half breathing. And “he who only half breathes,” says a passage from the Sanskrit, “only half lives.” If you follow daily the directions given here, you will not only improve your voice but you will find that the chances of your ever contracting tubercu- losis will be very slight; and the chances of your escaping the winter’s supply of colds that attack others, will be very good. CHAPTER III HOW FAMOUS SPEAKERS PREPARED THEIR ADDRESSES “There s a vast difference between having a carload of miscellaneous facts sloshing around loose in your head and getting all mixed up in transit , and carrying the same assort- ment properly boxed and crated for convenient handling and immediate delivery" — Lorimer : Letters from a Self- Made Merchant to His Son at College. “ The power to grasp the essential features of problems is the great differentiation between the educated and the non- educated man . Undoubtedly the greatest advantage to be gamed from a college education is the acquisition of a dis- ciplined mind " — John Grier Hibben, President of Princeton University . “What is it that first strikes us, arid strikes us at once , in a man of education and which , among educated men, so instantly distinguishes the man of superior mind ? . . . The true cause of the impression made upon us is that his mind is methodical — S. T. Coleridge. “The common error in regard to speaking is the assump- tion that all that is necessary is to have 'something to say / Utterly false! Unless that ' something to say * is said in accordance with the laws of the human mind which govern conviction, it might as well be spoken to the winds. . , . The modern speaker must realize that besides f something to say J he must learn how best to convey it. He must remem- ber that the Chathams and the W ebsters and the Beechers not only had ‘ something to say but that they realized that careful study had to be given to the order and manner of its presentation — Arthur Edward Phillips, Effective Speaking. CHAPTER III HOW FAMOUS SPEAKERS PREPARED THEIR ADDRESSES I was present once at a luncheon of the New York Rotary Club when the principal speaker was a prominent government official. The high posi- tion that he occupied gave him prestige, and we were looking forward with pleasure to hearing him. He had promised to tell us about the activities of his own department; and it was one in which almost every New York business man was interested. He knew his subject thoroughly, knew far more about it than he could possibly use ; but he had not planned his speech. He had not selected his ma- terial. He had not arranged it in orderly fashion. Nevertheless, with a courage born of inexperience, he plunged heedlessly, blindly, into his speech. He did not know where he was going, but he was on his way. His mind was, in short, a mere hodgepodge, and so was the mental feast he served us. He brought on the ice cream first, and then placed the soup before us. Fish and nuts came next. And, on top of that, there was something that seemed to be a mixture of soup and ice cream and good red her- ring. I have never, anywhere or at any time, seen a speaker more utterly confused. 66 PUBLIC SPEAKING He had been trying to talk impromptu; but, in desperation now, he drew a bundle of notes out of his pocket, confessing that his secretary had com- piled them for him — and no one questioned the veracity of his assertion. The notes themselves evidently had no more order than a flat car full of scrap iron. He fumbled through them nervously, glancing from one page to another, trying to orient himself, trying to find a way out of the wilderness, and he attempted to talk as he did so. It was im- possible. He apologized and, calling for water, took a drink with a trembling hand, uttered a few more scattering sentences, repeated himself, dug into his notes again. . . . Minute by minute he grew more helpless, more lost, more bewildered, more embarrassed. Nervous perspiration stood out on his forehead, and his handkerchief shook as he wiped it away. We in the audience sat watching the fiasco, our sympathies stirred, our feelings har- rowed. We suffered positive and vicarious embar- rassment. But with more doggedness than discre- tion, the speaker continued, floundering, studying his notes, apologizing and drinking. Every one except him felt that the spectacle was rapidly ap- proaching total disaster, and it was a relief to us all when he sat down and ceased his death struggles. It was one of the most uncomfortable audiences I have ever been in; and he was the most ashamed and humiliated speaker I have ever seen. He had made his talk as Rousseau said a love letter should be written: he had begun without knowing what he was going to say, and he had finished without knowing what he had uttered. METHODS OF FAMOUS SPEAKERS 67 The moral of the tale is just this: “When a man’s knowledge is not in order,” said Herbert Spencer, “the more of it he has, the greater will be his confusion of thought.” No sane man would start to build a house with- out some sort of plan; but why will he begin to deliver a speech without the vaguest kind of outline or program? A speech is a voyage with a purpose, and it must be charted. The man who starts nowhere, gener- ally gets there. I wish that I could paint this saying of Napoleon’s in flaming letters of red a foot high over every doorway on the globe where students of public speaking foregather: “The art of war is a science in which nothing succeeds which has not been calcu- lated and thought out.” That is just as true of speaking as of shooting. But do speakers realize it — or, if they do — do they always act on it? They do not. Most emphatic- ally they do not. Many a talk has just a trifle more plan and arrangement than a bowl of Irish stew. What is the best and most effective arrangement for a given set of ideas? No one can say until he has studied them. It is always a new problem, an eternal question that every speaker must ask and and answer himself again and again. No infallible rules can be given ; but we can, at any rate, illustrate briefly here, with a concrete case, just what we mean by orderly arrangements. 68 PUBLIC SPEAKING HOW A PRIZE-WINNING SPEECH WAS CONSTRUCTED Here is a speech that was delivered by a student of this course before the Thirteenth Annual Con- vention of the National Association of Real Estate Boards. It won first prize in competition with twenty-seven other speeches on various cities. This speech is well constructed, full of facts stated clearly, vividly, interestingly. It has spirit. It marches. It will merit reading and study. Mr. Chairman and Friends: Back 144 years ago, this great nation, the United States of America, was born in my City of Philadelphia, and so it is quite natural that a city having such an historical record should have that strong American spirit that has not only made it the greatest industrial center in this country, but also one of the largest and most beautiful cities in the whole world. Philadelphia has a population close to two millions of people, and our city has an area that is equal to the com- bined size of Milwaukee and Boston, Paris and Berlin, and out of our 130 square miles of territory we have given up nearly 8,000 acres of our best land for beautiful parks, squares and boulevards, so that our people would have the proper places for recreation and pleasure, and the right kind of environment that belongs to every decent American. Philadelphia, friends, is not only a large, clean and beau- tiful city, but it is also known everywhere as the great work- shop of the world, and the reason it is called the workshop of the world is because we have a vast army of over 400,000 people employed in 9,200 industrial establishments that turn out one hundred thousand dollars’ worth of useful commodi- ties every ten minutes of the working day, and, according to a well-known statistician, there is no city in this coun- try that equals Philadelphia in the production of woolen METHODS OF FAMOUS SPEAKERS 69 goods, leather goods, knit goods, textiles, felt hats, hardware, tools, storage batteries, steel ships and a great many other things. We build a railroad locomotive every two hours day and night, and more than one-half the people in this great country ride in street cars made in the City of Phila- delphia. We manufacture a thousand cigars every minute, and last year, in our 115 hosiery mills, we made two pairs of stockings for every man, woman and child in this coun- try. We make more carpets and rugs than all of Great Britain and Ireland combined, and, in fact, our total com- mercial and industrial business is so stupendous that our bank clearings last year, amounting to thirtjr-seven billions of dollars, would have paid for every Liberty Bond in the entire country. But, friends, while we are very proud of our wonderful industrial progress, and while we are also very proud of being one of the largest medical, art and educational centers in this country, yet, we feel a still greater pride in the fact that we have more individual homes in the City of Phila- delphia than there are in any other city in the whole world. In Philadelphia w T e have 397,000 separate homes, and if these homes were placed on twenty-five-foot lots, side by side, in one single row, that row would reach all the way from Philadelphia clear through to this Convention Flail, at Kansas City, and then on to Denver, a distance of 1,881 miles. But, what I want to call your special attention to, is the significance of the fact, that tens of thousands of these homes are owned and occupied by the working people of our city, j and when a man owns the ground upon which he stands and the roof over his head, there is no I. W. W. argument ever presented that would infect that man with those imported diseases, known as Socialism and Bolshevism. I Philadelphia is not a fertile soil for European anarchy, } because our homes, our educational institutions and our gigantic industry have been produced by that true American I spirit that was born in our city, and is a heritage from our forefathers. Philadelphia is the mother city of this great country, and the very fountain head of American liberty. I 70 PUBLIC SPEAKING It is the city where the first American flag was made; it is the city where the first Congress of the United States met; it is the city where the Declaration of Independence was signed; it is the city where that best loved relic in America, the Liberty Bell, has inspired tens of thousands of our men, women and children, so that we believe, we have a sacred mission, which is not to worship the golden calf, but to spread the American spirit, and to keep the fires of freedom burning, so that with God’s permission, the Government of Washington, Lincoln and Theodore Roosevelt may be an inspiration to all humanity., Let us analyze that speech. Let us see how it is constructed, how it gets its effects. In the first place, it has a beginning and an ending. That is a rare virtue, my dear reader, more rare than you may be inclined to think. It starts somewhere. It goes there straight as wild geese on the wing. It doesn’t dawdle. It loses no time. It has freshness, individuality. The speaker opens by saying something about his city that the other speakers could not possibly say about theirs : he points out that his city is the birthplace of the entire nation. He states that it is one of the largest and most beautiful cities in the world. But that claim is general, trite; standing by itself, it would not im- press anyone very much. The speaker knew that; so he helped his audience visualize the magnitude of Philadelphia by stating it “has an area equal to the combined size of Milwaukee, Boston, Paris and Berlin.” That is definite, concrete. It is inter- esting. It is surprising. It makes a mark. It drives home the idea better than a whole page of statistics would have done. METHODS OF FAMOUS SPEAKERS 71 Next he declares that Philadelphia is “known everywhere as the great workshop of the world.” Sounds exaggerated, doesn’t it ? Like propaganda. Had he proceeded immediately to the next point no one would have been convinced. But he doesn’t. He pauses to enumerate the products in which Philadelphia leads the world : “woolen goods, leather goods, knit goods, textiles, felt hats, hard- ware, tools,, storage batteries, steel ships.” Doesn’t sound so much like propaganda now, does it? Philadelphia “builds a railroad locomotive every tw r o hours day and night, and more than one-half the people in this great country ride in street cars made in the city of Philadelphia.” “Well, I never knew that,” we muse. “Perhaps I rode down town yesterday in one of those street cars. I’ll look to-morrow and see where my town buys its cars.” “A thousand cigars every minute . . two pairs of stockings for every man, woman and child in this country.” We are still more impressed. . . . “Maybe my favorite cigar is made in Philadelphia . . . and these socks I have on. . . .” What does the speaker do next? Jump back to the subject of the size of Philadelphia that he cov- ered first and give us some fact that he forgot then? No, not at all. He sticks to a point until he fin- ishes it, has done with it, and need never return to it again. For that we are duly grateful, Mr. Speaker. For what is more confusing and muddling than to have a speaker darting from one thing to 72 PUBLIC SPEAKING another and back again as erratic as a bat in the twilight? Yet many a speaker does just that. In- stead of covering his points in order i, 2, 3, 4, 5, he covers them as a football captain calls out signals — 27, 34, 19, 2. No, he is worse than that. He covers them like this — 27, 34, 27, 19, 2, 34, 19. But this speaker, however, steams straight ahead on schedule time, never idling, never turning back, swerving neither to the right nor left; like one of those locomotives he has been talking about. But, he makes now the weakest point of his entire speech: Philadelphia, he declares, is “one of the largest medical, art and educational centers in this country/’ He merely announces that; then speeds on to something else — only twelve words to animate that fact, to make it vivid, to engrave it on the memory. Only twelve words lost, submerged, in a sentence containing a total of sixty-five. It doesn’t work. Of course not. The human mind does not operate like a string of steel traps. He devotes so little time to this point, is so general, so vague, seems so unimpressed himself that the effect on the hearer is almost nil. What should he have done? He realized that he could establish this point with the selfsame technique that he just employed to establish the fact that Philadelphia is the workshop of the world. He knew that. He also knew that he would have a stop watch held on him during the contest, that he would have five minutes, not a sec- ond more; so he had to slur over this point or slight others. There are “more individual homes in the city of Philadelphia than there are in any other city in the METHODS OF FAMOUS SPEAKERS 73 world.” How does he make this phase of his topic impressive and convincing? First, he gives the number: 397,000. Second, he visualizes the num- ber: “If these homes were placed on twenty-five foot lots, side by side, in one single row, that row would reach all the way from Philadelphia clear through this Convention Hall at Kansas City, and then on to Denver, a distance of 1,881 miles.” His audience probably forgot the number he gave before he had finished the sentence. But forget that picture? That would have been well nigh impossible. So much for cold material facts. But they are not the stuff out of which eloquence is fashioned. This speaker aspired to build up to a climax, to touch the heart, to stir the feelings. So now on the home stretch, he deals with emotional material. He tells what the ownership of those homes means to the spirit of the city. He denounced “those im- ported diseases, known as Socialism and Bolshe- vism . . . European anarchy.” He eulogizes Phila- delphia as “the very fountain head of American liberty.” Liberty! A magic word, a word full of feeling, a sentiment for which millions have laid down their lives. That phrase in itself is good, but it is a thousand times better when he backs it up with concrete references to historic events and docu- ments, dear, sacred, to the hearts of his hearers. . . . “It is the city where the first American Flag was made; it is the city where the first Congress of the United States met; it is the city where the Declaration of Independence was signed . . . 74 PUBLIC SPEAKING Liberty Bell ... a sacred mission . . . , to spread the American spirit ... to keep the fires of freedom burning, so that with God’s permission, the Gov- ernment of Washington, Lincoln and Theodore Roosevelt may be an inspiration to all humanity.” That is a real climax! So much for the composition of this talk. But admirable as it is from the standpoint of construc- tion, this speech could have come to grief, could easily have been brought to naught, had it been expressed in a calm manner devoid of all spirit and vitality. But the speaker delivered it as he com- posed it; with a feeling and enthusiasm born of the deepest sincerity. Small wonder that it won first prize, that it was awarded the Chicago cup. THE WAY DOCTOR CONWELL PLANNED HIS SPEECHES There are not, as I have already said, any infal- lible rules that will solve the question of the best arrangement. There are no designs or schemes or charts that will fit all or even a majority of speeches; yet here are a few speech plans that will prove usable in some instances. The late Dr. Russell H. Conwell, the author of the famous “Acres of Dia- monds” — -see Appendix — once informed me that he had built many of his innumerable speeches on this outline : 1. State your facts. 2. Argue from them. 3. Appeal for action. METHODS OF FAMOUS SPEAKERS 75 Many students of this course have found this plan very helpful and stimulating. 1. Show something that is wrong. 2. Show how to remedy it. 3. Ask for cooperation. Or, to put it in another way : 1. Here is a situation that ought to be rem- edied. 2. We ought to do so and so about the matter. 3. You ought to help for these reasons. Chapter XV of this course, entitled How To Get Action, outlines still another speech plan. Briefly it is this : 1. Secure interested attention. 2. Win confidence. 3. State your facts; educate people regarding the merits of your proposition. 4. Appeal to the motives that make men act. If interested, turn now to Chapter XV and study this plan in detail. SENATOR BEVERIDGE’S METHOD OF BUILDING A TALK Senator Albert J. Beveridge wrote a very short and very practical book entitled “The Art of Public Speaking.” “The speaker must be master of his subject,” says this noted political campaigner. “That means that all the facts must be collected, 76 PUBLIC SPEAKING arranged, studied, digested — not only data on one side, but material on the other side and on every side — all of it. And be sure that they are facts, not mere assumptions or unproved assertions. Take nothing for granted. “Therefore check up and reverify every item. This means painstaking research, to be sure, but what of it? — are you not proposing to inform, in- struct, and advise your fellow citizens? Are you not setting yourself up as an authority? “Having assembled and marshalled the facts of any problem, think out for yourself the solution those facts compel. Thus your speech will have originality and personal force — it will be vital and compelling. There will be you in it. Then write out your ideas as clearly and logically as you can.” In other words, present the facts on both sides, and then present the conclusion that those facts make clear and definite. WOODROW WILSON FITS THE BONES TOGETHER *T begin,” said Woodrow Wilson when asked to explain his methods, “with a list of the topics I want to cover, arranging them in my mind in their natural relations — that is, I fit the bones of the thing together; then I write it out in shorthand. I have always been accustomed to writing in short- hand, finding it a great saver of time. This done, I copy It on my own typewriter, changing phrases, correcting sentences, and adding material as I go along.” METHODS OF FAMOUS SPEAKERS 77 Roosevelt prepared his talks in the characteristic Rooseveltian manner: he dug up all the facts, re- viewed them, appraised them, determined their find- ings, arrived at his conclusions, arrived with a feel- ing of certainty that was unshakable. Then, with a pad of notes before him, he started dictating and he dictated his speech very rapidly so that it would have rush and spontaneity and the spirit of life. Then he went over this typewritten copy, revised it, inserted, deleted, filled it with pencil marks, and then dictated it all over again. “I never won anything,” said he, “without hard labor and the exercise of my best judgment and care- ful planning and working long in advance.” Often he called in critics to listen to him as he dictated or read his speech to them. He refused to debate with them the wisdom of what he had said. His mind was already made up on that point, and made up irrevocably. He wanted to be told, not what to say, but how to say it. Again and again he went over his typewritten copies, cutting, correcting, improving. That was the speech that the newspapers printed. Of course, he did not memorize it. He spoke extemporaneously. So the talk he actually delivered often differed somewhat from the published and polished one. But the task of dictating and revising was excellent preparation. It made him familiar with his material, with the order of his points. It gave him a smoothness and sureness and polish that he could hardly have ob- tained in any other fashion. Sir Oliver Lodge told me that dictating his talks —dictating them rapidly and with substance, die- 78 PUBLIC SPEAKING fating them just as if he were actually talking to an audience — he had discovered to be an excellent means of preparation and practise. Many of the students of this course have found it illuminating to dictate their talks to the dictaphone, and then to listen to themselves. Illuminating? Yes, and sometimes disillusioning and chastening also, I fear. It is a most wholesome exercise. I recommend it. This practise of actually writing out what you are going to say, will force you to think. It will clarify your ideas. It will hook them in your mem- ory. It will reduce your mental wandering to a minimum. It will improve your diction. BENJAMIN FRANKLIN’S CLASSIC TALE Benjamin Franklin tells in his Autobiography how he improved his diction, how he developed readiness in using words and how he taught him- self method in arranging his thoughts. This story of his life is a literary classic, and, unlike most classics, it is easy to read and thoroughly enjoyable. It is almost a model of plain, straightforward Eng- lish. Every business man can peruse it with pleasure and profit. I think you will like the selection I refer to; here it is: “About this time I met with an odd volume of the Spectator. It was the third. I had never before seen any of them. I bought it, read it over and over and was much delighted with it. I thought the writing excellent, and wished, if possible, to imitate it. With this view I took some of the papers, and, making short hints of the sentiment METHODS OF FAMOUS SPEAKERS 79 m each sentence laid them by a few days, and then, without looking at the book, try’d to compleat the papers again, by expressing each hinted sentiment at length, and as fully as it had been expressed before, in any suitable words that should come to hand. Then I compared my Spectator with the original, discovered some of my faults and corrected them. But I found a stock of words, and a readiness in recollecting and using them, which I thought I should have acquired before that time if I had gone on making verses; since the continual occasion for words of the same import, but of different length, to suit the measure, or of different sounds for the rhyme, would have laid me under a constant necessity of searching for variety, and also have tended to fix that variety in my mind, and make me master of it. There- fore I took some of the tales and turned them back again. I also sometimes jumbled my collections of hints into con- fusion, and after some weeks endeavored to reduce them into the best order, before I began to form the full sentences and compleat the paper. This was to teach me method in the arrangement of thoughts . By comparing my work after- wards with the original, I discovered many faults and amended them ; but I sometimes had the pleasure of fancying that, in certain particulars of small import, I had been lucky enough to improve the method ■ of the language, and this encouraged me to think I might possibly in time come to be a tolerable English writer, of which I was extremely ambitious.” PLAY SOLITAIRE WITH YOUR NOTES You were advised in the last lesson to make notes. Having gotten your various ideas and illustrations down on scraps of paper, play solitaire with them — toss them into series of related piles. These main piles ought to represent, approximately, the main points of your talk. Subdivide them into smaller lots. Throw out the chaff until there is nothing but number one wheat left — and even some of the wheat 80 PUBLIC SPEAKING will probably have to be put aside and not used. No man, if he works right, is ever able to use but a percentage of the material he gathers. One ought never to cease this process of revision until the speech has been made — even then he is very likely to think of points and improvements and refinements that ought to have been made. A good speaker usually finds when he finishes that there have been four versions of his speech : the one that he prepared, the one that he delivered, the one that the newspapers said that he delivered, and the one that he wishes, on his way home, that, he had delivered. “SHALL I USE NOTES WHILE SPEAKING?” Although he was an excellent impromptu speaker, Lincoln, after he reached the White House, never made any address, not even an informal talk to his cabinet, until he had carefully put it all down in writing beforehand. Of course, he was obliged to read his inaugural addresses. The exact phrase- ology of historical state papers of that character is too important to be left to extemporizing. But, back in Illinois, Lincoln never used even notes in his speaking. “They always tend to tire and con- fuse the listener,” he said. And who of us, pray, would contradict him? Don’t notes destroy about fifty per cent of your in- terest in a talk? Don’t they prevent, or at least render difficult, a very precious contact and intimacy that ought to exist between the speaker and the METHODS OF FAMOUS SPEAKERS 81 audience? Don’t they create an air of artificiality? Don’t they restrain an audience from feeling that the speaker has the confidence and reserve power that he ought to have? Make notes, I repeat, during the preparation — elaborate ones, profuse ones. You may wish to refer to them when you are practising your talk alone. You may possibly feel more comfortable if you have them stored away in your pocket when you are facing an audience ; but, like the hammer and saw and axe in a Pullman coach, they should be emergency tools, only for use in the case of a smash-up, a total wreck, and threatening death and disaster. If you must use notes, make them extremely brief and write them in large letters on an ample sheet of paper. Then arrive early at the place where you are to speak and hide your notes behind some books on a table. Glance at them when you must, but endeavor to screen your weakness from the audi- ence. John Bright used to secrete his notes in his big hat lying on the table before him. However in spite of all that has been said there may be times when it is the part of wisdom to use notes. For example, some men during their first few talks, are so nervous and self-conscious that they are utterly unable to remember their prepared speeches. The result? They shoot off at a tan- gent; they forget the material they had so carefully rehearsed; they drift off the high road and flounder about in a morass. Why should not such men hold a few very condensed notes in their hands during 82 PUBLIC SPEAKING their maiden efforts? A child clutches the furniture when it is first attempting to walk; but it does not continue it very long. DO NOT MEMORIZE VERBATIM Don’t read, and don’t attempt to memorize your talk word for word. That consumes time, and courts disaster. Yet, in spite of this warning, some of the men reading these lines will try it ; if they do, when they stand up to speak they will be thinking of what? Of their messages? No, they will be at- tempting to recall their exact phraseology. They will be thinking backwards, not forwards, reversing the usual processes of the human mind. The whole exhibition will be stiff and cold and colorless and inhuman. Do not, I beg of you, waste hours and energy in such futility. When you have an important business interview, do you sit down and memorize, verbatim, what you are going to say? Do you? Of course not. You reflect until you get your main ideas clearly in mind. You may make a few notes and consult some rec- ords. You say to yourself: “I shall bring out this point and that. I am going to say that a certain thing ought to be done for these reasons. . . Then you enumerate the reasons to yourself and illustrate them with concrete cases. Isn’t that the way you prepare for a business interview? Why not use the same common sense method in prepay mg a talk? METHODS OF FAMOUS SPEAKERS 83 GRANT AT APPOMATTOX When Lee asked Grant to write down the terms of surrender, the leader of the Union forces turned to General Parker, asking for writing material. “When I put my pen to paper,” Grant records in his Memoirs, “I did not know the first word I should make use of in w r riting the terms. I only knew what was in my mind, and I wished to express it clearly, so there could be no mistaking it.” General Grant, you did not need to know the first word. You had ideas. You had convictions, You had something that you vei*y much wanted to say and to say clearly. The result was that your habitual phraseology came tumbling out without conscious effort. The same holds good for any man. If you doubt it, knock a street cleaner down; when he gets up, he will discover that he is hardly at a loss to find words to express himself. Two thousand years ago, Horace wrote : “Seek not for words, seek only fact and thought, And crowding in will come the words unsought.” After you have your ideas firmly in mind, then rehearse your talk from beginning to end. Do it silently, mentally, as you walk the street, as you w T ait for cars and elevators. Get off in a room by yourself and go over it aloud, gesturing, saying it with life and energy. Canon Knox Little, of Canterbury, used to say a preacher never got the real message out of a sermon until he had preached it half a dozen times. Can you hope, then, to get 84 PUBLIC SPEAKING the real message out of your talk unless you have at least rehearsed it that many times ? As you prac- tise, imagine there is a real audience before you. Imagine it so strongly that when there is one, it will seem like an old experience. That is the reason why so many criminals are able to go to the scaffold with such bravado; they have already done it so many thousand times in their imagination that they have lost fear of it. When the actual execution does take place, it seems like something that they have gone through very often before. WHY THE FARMERS THOUGHT LINCOLN a AWFULLY LAZY” If you practise your talks in this fashion, you will be faithfully following the examples of many fa- mous speakers. Lloyd George, when he was a member of a debating society in his home town in W ales, often strolled along the country lanes, talk- ing and gesturing to the trees and fence posts. Lincoln, in his younger days, often walked a round trip of thirty or forty miles to hear a famous speaker like Breckenridge. He came home from these scenes so stirred, so determined to be a speaker that he gathered the other hired workers about him in the fields and, mounting a stump, he made speeches and told them stories. His employers grew angry, declaring that this country Cicero was “awfully lazy,” that his jokes and his oratory were ruining the rest of the workers. Asquith gained his first facility by becoming an active worker in the Union Debating Society in Ox- METHODS OF FAMOUS SPEAKERS 85 f ford. Later he organized one of his own. Wood- row Wilson learned to speak in a debating society. So did Henry Ward Beecher. So did the mighty Burke. Elihu Root practised before a literary so- ciety in the Twenty-Third Street Y.M.C.A. in New York. Study the careers of famous speakers and you will find one fact that is true of them all : they prac- tised. THEY PRACTISED. And the men who make the most rapid progress in this course are those who practise most. No time for all this? Then do what Joseph Choate used to do. He bought a newspaper of a morning and buried his head in it as he rode to work so no one would bother him. Then, instead of reading the ephemeral scandal and gossip of the day, he thought out and planned his talks. Chauncey M. Depew led a fairly active life as a railroad president and a United States Senator. Yet, during it all, he made speeches almost every night. “I did not let them interfere with my busi- ness/’ he says. “They were all prepared after I had arrived home from my office late in the after- noon.” We all have three hours a day that we can da with as we please. That was all Darwin had to work with, as he had poor health. Three hours out: of twenty-four, wisely used, made him famous. Roosevelt, when he was in the White House, often had an entire forenoon given over to a series of five minute interviews. Yet he kept a book by his side to utilize even the few spare seconds that came between his engagements. PUBLIC SPEAKING If you are very busy and pushed for time, read Arnold Bennett’s “How To Live On Twenty-Four Hours A Day.” Rip out a hundred pages, put them in your hip pocket, read them during your spare seconds. I got through the book in two days in that fashion. It will show you how to save time, how to get more out of the day. You must have relaxation and a change from your regular work. That is what the practising of your talks ought to be. If possible, arrange with the other men in this course to meet together an addi- tional night each week for rehearsal. If you can- not do that, play the game of extemporaneous speaking in your own home with your own family. HOW DOUGLAS FAIRBANKS AND CHARLIE CHAPLIN ENTERTAINED THEMSELVES It is common knowledge that Douglas Fairbanks and Charlie Chaplin have incomes permitting them to enjoy a little recreation; yet, with all their wealth and fame, they were able to find no greater en- tertainment, no more enjoyable way of spending their evenings, than by practising extemporaneous speaking. Here is their story as Douglas Fairbanks told it in the American Magazine a few years ago: “One evening we were fooling and I pretended to intro- duce Charlie Chaplin at a dinner. He had to rise and make a speech to fit the introduction. And out of that developed a game that we have been playing almost every night for two years. We three (Mary Pickford, Fairbanks, and Chap- lin) each write a subject on a slip of paper and fold the METHODS OF FAMOUS SPEAKERS 87 slips and shake them up. Each of us draws. No matter what the word is, each of us has to rise and talk for sixty seconds on that word. We never use the same word again. That’s what keeps the stunt new. And we use all kinds of words. I remember one evening when two of the words were ‘Faith’ and ‘Lampshades.’ ‘Lampshades’ fell to me, and I had one of the hardest times I ever had, talking for sixty seconds on ‘Lampshades.’ Just try if you think it is easy. You start out bravely: ‘Lampshades have two uses. They modify and soften the glare of light, and they are decorative.’ Then you are through unless you know a lot more about lampshades than I do. I got through somehow. But the point is how all three of us have sharpened up since we began that game. We know a lot more about a variety of miscellaneous subjects. But, far better than that, we are learning to assembje our knowledge and thoughts on any topic at a moment’s notice and to give it out briefly. We are learning to think on our feet. I say ‘we are learn- ing’ because we are still at this game. We haven’t tired of it in almost two years, which means that it is still making us grow.” SUMMARY 1. “The art of -war,” said Napoleon, “is a sci- ence in which nothing succeeds which has not been calculated and thought out.” That is as true of speaking as of shooting. A talk is a voyage. It must be charted. The speaker who starts nowhere, usually gets there. 2. No infallible, iron-clad rules can be given for the arrangement of ideas and the construction of all talks. Each address presents its own partial- lar problems. 3. The speaker should cover a point thoroughly while he is on it, and then not refer to it again. As an illustration, see the prize-winning address on 88 PUBLIC SPEAKING Philadelphia. There should be no darting from one thing to another and then back again as aim** lesslv as a bat in the twilight. 4. The late Dr. Conwell built many of his talks on this plan : a. State your facts. b. Argue from them. c. Appeal for action. 5. You will probably find this plan very help** ful: a. Show something that is wrong. b. Show how to remedy it. c. Appeal for action. 6. Here is an excellent speech plan (for fur* ther details see Chapter XV) : a. Secure interested attention. b. Win confidence. c. State your facts. d. Appeal to the motives that make men act. 7. ‘‘All the facts on both sides of your subject,” advised Senator Albert J. Beveridge, “must be col- lected, arranged, studied, digested. Prove them; be sure they are facts; then think out for yourself the solution those facts compel.” 8. Before speaking, Lincoln thought out his con- clusions with mathematical exactness. When he was forty years of age, and after he had been a mem- ber of Congress, he studied Euclid so that he could detect sophistry and demonstrate his conclusions. 9. When Roosevelt was preparing a speech, he dug up all the facts, appraised them, then dictated METHODS OF FAMOUS SPEAKERS 89 his speech very rapidly, corrected the typewritten copy, and finally dictated it all over again. 10. If possible, dictate your talk to a dictaphone and listen to it. 11. Notes destroy about fifty per cent of the in- terest in your talk. Avoid them. Above all, do not read your talk. An audience can hardly be brought to endure listening to a read speech, 12. After you have thought out and arranged your talk, then practise it silently as you walk along the street. Also get off somewhere by yourself and go over it from beginning to end, using gestures, let- ting yourself go. Imagine that you are addressing a real audience. The more of this you do, the more comfortable you will feel when the time comes for you to make your talk. SPEECH BUILDING WORDS OFTEN MISPRONOUNCED “Correct pronunciation and enunciation are the infallible hallmarks of education and association with well-bred peo- ple .” — The Gentle Art of Good Talking' , by Beatrice Knollys. Do you always accent the following words on their first syllables? This is required for good Eng- lish. ADmirable DEFicit MISchievous ADvent DESpicable ORdeal ADverse EXquisite ORdinarily AFfluence FORmidable PACifist Alias GONdola PREamble CARton HARass PREFerable CHAStisement HOSpitable PRImarily COMbat IMpotent RESpite COMbatant INdustry REVocable COMparable INterested TEMpo'rarily CONcrete (noun INteresting TRAVerse and adjective) justifiable THEater CONtrary LAMentable VEhement CONversant MAINtenance VOLuntarily DECade Can you pronounce correctly the italicized words in these sentences? If in doubt, will you please METHOD'S OF FAMOUS SPEAKERS 91 refer to the exercises in pronunciation at the end of Chapters I and II. 1. An inquiry was instituted to determine why the adult was traveling incognito. 2. Each of the municipal employees made a pre- tense of having a robust pain in his abdomen. 3. The adult told in his address how the mu- seum is financed . 4. After he becomes acclimated, he will be more robust physically and more adept at his duties. 5. The order for his discharge was irrevocable. 6. He financed the entire domain . 7. She went to the lyceum in a gondola of in- comparable beauty of lines. ERRORS IN ENGLISH “There is no more revealing symbol of education than one’s style of speech. It will be recognized by discerning men more quickly than a Roman nose or a cauliflower ear.” •—Harry Collins Spillman. Review. There are five errors in the following paragraph. Find them, please. The letters had laid on his desk for several days without answer because he was accustomed to set there and do nothing. He had rose to the position of superintendent and did not know how to set either himself or his staff to work. As the sun sat in the west, he was still setting there. New Study Material . As one listens to the ordi- nary conversation of his fellows he finds that most of the mistakes occur in the use of verbs. Those that are most commonly misused are given in the ex- amples below. Run over these carefully. You will 92 PUBLIC SPEAKING find that a short drill every now and then with the first set of examples will teach you to overcome any irregularities which you may have had. The second set contains the ordinary wrong uses. Observe these mistakes enough so that you will see your errors, but do not impress the errors on your memory. It is one of the best rules of modern pedagogy that one learns far more rapidly and more efficiently by impressing the right than by ob- serving the wrong. Right He became wealthy. They began to complain. I bade him to come, (invited) We were bidden to the party* I bid $5.00. (offer) $5.00 was bid . The wind blew hard all day. The wind has blown hard. I brought my purse. The purse was brought . They broke down on the roado They have broken down. The pipes have burst . He came home. He has come home. She dived off the bridge. She had dived off the bridge. He did the best he could. He has done the best he could* He drank heavily for years. He has drunk heavily for years* METHODS OF FAMOUS SPEAKERS 93 Wrong He become wealthy. They begun to complain. I bid him to come. We were bid to the party. The wind Mowed hard all day* The wind has Mowed hard. I brung my purse. The purse was brung . They break down on the roacL They have broke down. The pipes have busted . He come home. He has came home. She dove off the bridge. She had dove off the bridge. He done the best he could. He has did the best he could. He drunk heavily for years. He has drank heavily for years. CORRECT USAGE OF WORDS A man is fortunate when he gets things by good luck. If he accomplishes what he sets out to do, he is successful . If he gains the things that most men desire, he is said to be prosperous . Lincoln was for- tunate in having a strong, rugged constitution. When he tried to run a grocery store, he was neither successful nor prosperous. Flourishing is derived from a Latin word meaning to bloom and flower. 94 PUBLIC SPEAKING Thriving literally means to grasp for one’s self, and carries with it a sense of thriftiness. Try is a very general and comprehensive term. One may try almost anything without much concern about the success of the trial. We generally at- tempt only those things which we very much want to do. An endeavor is a continuous attempt. One should endeavor to increase each day his knowledge of words. Aim is more general and less specific than attempt. Almost every one vaguely aims to do many things which he really never attempts or en- deavors to do. Strive implies hard, earnest effort or a struggle; as, “He had to strive against all kinds of difficulties.” To struggle is to use much effort. VOICE EXERCISE— RELAXATION “Probably more voices are ruined by strain,” said Madame Schumann-Heink, “than through any other cause. The singer must relax all the time. This does not mean flabbiness. It does not mean that the singer should collapse before singing. Relaxa- tion, in the singer’s sense, is a delicious condition of buoyancy, of lightness, of freedom, of ease and an entire lack of tightening in any part. When I relax, I feel as though every atom in my body were float- ing in space. There is not one single little nerve on tension.” Madame Schumann-Heink is referring to sing- ing; but, of course, the same facts apply to speaking. Strain ruins voices, she says ; yet what is more com- mon in this hurried age than strain and nervous ten- sion? These things show in the voice as plainly as METHODS OF FAMOUS SPEAKERS 95 they show in the face. Relaxation ! That should be our watchword. Relaxation ! That should be our shibboleth. Signor Bonci, a famous opera singer, used to say that relaxation was the secret of good voice. How are we to set about cultivating it? First, learn to relax the whole body. Your entire physical being acts as a sounding board for your voice. The least imperfection in the sounding board of a piano, even a screw loose in the case, will affect the tone. And, as your voice is affected by every part of your body, tension here and there will impair its perfect functioning. How can you relax? It is simple. Just relax, that is all. It is not a question of doing anything. It is a question of not doing. It is not effort that is wanted; it is the lack of it. Hold your arm out straight from your shoulder and in front of you. Relax it now. ... When it fell, did it swing back and forth a few times like a pendulum? If it did not swing at all, you did not relax it; you pulled it down. Try it once more. . . . How was that? Each night when you go to bed, lie on the flat of your back and practise the deep, diaphragmatic breathing that we discussed in the first two chap- ters. But before you begin your deep breathing, relax. Relax your whole body. Relax thoroughly. Feel as inert as a bag of wool. Try to imagine that all the energy that is in your arms, your legs, your neck, is flowing into the center of the body. You ought to be so relaxed that your jaw will fall open. Let your arms and legs and body feel heavy on the bed, so heavy and lifeless that it seems as if 96 PUBLIC SPEAKING you would never have the strength to lift them again. Feel lazy. Now, breathe deeply, slowly, naturally, thinking nothing but ease and relaxation. True, thoughts of the worries, the problems, the anxieties of the day just past and the day to come, may swarm through your brain like an army of mosquitoes to pester and annoy you, to keep you taut. If they do, smoke out such thoughts as you would smoke out the mosquitoes. Smoke them out with such soothing declarations as these: ‘Tm at ease. Pm thoroughly relaxed. I feel as though I hadn’t the strength to lift my arm. I’m thor- oughly relaxed.” That thought and the rhythm of your deep breathing ought to induce drowsiness very quickly; and you will drift away into the deep sleep that Shakespeare says “knits up the ravell’d sleave of care, the death of each day’s life, sore labor’s bath, balm of hurt minds, etc.” How refreshing, how soothing, how sustaining such a sleep will be. When you have developed the delightful feeling of this kind of relaxation, try to induct more of it into your daily life. And when you speak, try to feel as Madame Schumann-Heink did when she sang: “I feel as though every atom in my body were floating in space. There is not one single little nerve on tension.” When you can do that and breathe correctly and control your breath, you are on the high road to good voice production. CHAPTER IV THE IMPROVEMENT OF MEMORY “It is safe to say that the business man s most immediate need is a serviceable memory ” — E. B. Gowin, Developing Executive Ability. “One of the most irritating and costly things in business is forgetfulness. ... No matter what walk of life one is in 3 a well developed memory is sure to prove of incalculable value ” — Saturday Evening Post. “The man whose acquisitions stick is the man who is always achieving and advancing whilst his neighbors , spend- ing most of their time in relearning what they once knew \ but have forgotten , simply hold their own." — Professor William James. “When I intend to speak on anything that seems to me important I consider what it is that I wish to impress upon my audience. I do not write my facts or my arguments , but make notes on two or three or four slips of note paper , giving the line of argument and the facts as they occur to my mind, and I leave the words to come at call while I am speaking. There are occasionally short passages which for accuracy , I may write down ; as sometimes , also — almost invariably — the concluding words or sentences may be written T — J ohn Bright. CHAPTER IV THE IMPROVEMENT OF MEMORY “The average man,” says the noted psychologist, Professor Carl Seashore, “does not use above ten per cent of his actual inherited capacity for memory. He wastes the ninety per cent by violating the nat- ural laws of remembering.” Are you one of these average men? If so, you are struggling under a handicap both socially and commercially; consequently, you will be interested in, and profit by, reading and rereading this chap- ter. It describes and explains these natural laws of remembering and shows how to use them in business as well as in speaking. These “natural laws of remembering” are very simple. There are only three. Every so-called “memory system” has been founded upon them. Briefly, they are impression , repetition , and associa - tion . The first mandate of memory is: get a deep, vivid and lasting impression of the thing you wish to re- tain. And to do that, you must concentrate. Theo- dore Roosevelt’s remarkable memory impressed everyone he met. And no little amount of- his ex- traordinary facility was due to this : his impressions were scratched on steel, not written in water. He had, by persistence and practise, trained himself to 100 PUBLIC SPEAKING concentrate under the most adverse conditions. In 1912, during the Bull Moose Convention in Chi- cago, his headquarters were in the Congress Hotel. Crqwds surged through the street below, crying, waving banners, shouting “We want Teddy! We want Teddy!” The roar of the throng, the music of bands, the coming and going of politicians, the hurried conferences, the consultations — would have driven the ordinary individual to distraction; but Roosevelt sat in a rocking chair in his room, ob- livious to it all, reading Herodotus, the Greek his- torian. On his trip through the Brazilian wilder- ness, as soon as he reached the camping ground in the evening, he found a dry spot under some huge tree, got out a camp stool and his copy of Gibbon’s “Decline and Fall of the Roman Empire,” and, at once, he was so immersed in the book that he was oblivious to the rain, to the noise and activity of the camp, to the sounds of the tropical forest. Small wonder that the man remembered what he read. Five minutes of vivid, energetic concentration will produce greater results than days of mooning about in a mental haze. “One intense hour,” wrote Henry Ward Beecher, “will do more than dreamy years.” “If there is any one thing that I have learned which is more important than anything else,” says Eugene Grace, who makes over a million a year as president of the Bethlehem Steel Company, “and which I practise every day under any and all circumstances, it is concentration on the particular job I have in hand ” THE IMPROVEMENT OF MEMORY 101 This Is one of the secrets of power, especially memory power, THEY COULDN’T SEE A CHERRY TREE Thomas Edison found that 27 of his assistants had used, every day for six months, a certain path which led from his lamp factory to the main woi'ks at Menlo Park, New Jersey. A cherry tree grew along that path, and yet not one of these 27 men had, when questioned, ever been conscious of that tree’s existence. “The average person’s brain,” observes Mr. Edi- son with heat and energy, “does not observe a thousandth part of what the eye observes. It is almost incredible how poor our powers of observa- tion — genuine observation — are.” Introduce the average man to two or three of your friends and, the chances are that two minutes afterwards he cannot recall the name of a single one of them. And why? Because he never paid sufficient attention to them in the first place, he never accurately observed them. He will likely tell you he has a poor memory. No, he has a poor obser- vation. He would not condemn a camera because it failed to take pictures In a fog, but he expects his mind to retain impressions that are hazy and foggy to a degree. Of course, it can’t be done. The late Mr. Pulitzer, who made the New York World, had three words placed over the desk of every man in his editorial offices: 102 PUBLIC SPEAKING Accuracy ACCURACY ACCURACY That is what we want. Hear the man’s name precisely. Insist on it. Ask him to repeat it. Inquire how it is spelled. He will be flattered by your interest and you will be able to remember his name because you have concentrated on it. You have got a clear accurate impression. WHY LINCOLN READ ALOUD Lincoln, in his youth, attended a country school where the floor was made out of split logs : greased pages, torn from the copybooks and pasted over the windows, served instead of glass to let in the light. Only one copy of the textbook existed, and the teacher read from it aloud. The pupils re- peated the lesson after him, all of them talking at once. It made a constant uproar, and the neigh- bors called it the “blab school.” At the “blab school,” Lincoln formed a habit that clung to him all his life : he forever after read aloud everything he wished to remember. Each morn- ing, as soon as he reached his law office in Spring- field, he spread himself out on the couch, hooked one long, ungainly leg over 'a neighboring chair, and read the newspaper audibly. “He annoyed me,” said his partner, “almost beyond endurance. I once asked him why he read in this fashion. This was his explanation: ‘When I read aloud, two senses THE IMPROVEMENT OF MEMORY 103 catch the idea: first, I see what I read; second, I hear it, and therefore I can remember it better.’ ” His memory was extraordinarily retentive. “My mind,” he said, “is like a piece of steel — very hard to scratch anything on it, but almost impossible, after you get it there, to rub it out.” Appealing to two of the senses was the method he used to do the scratching. Go thou, and do likewise. . . . The ideal thing would be not only to see and hear the thing to be remembered, but to touch it, and smell it, and taste it. But, above all else, see it. We are visual minded. Eye impressions stick. We can often remember a man’s face, even though we cannot recall his name. The nerves that lead from the eye to the brain are twenty times as large as those leading from the ear to the brain. The Chinese have a proverb that says “one time seeing is worth a thousand times hearing.” Write down the name, the telephone number, the speech outline you want to remember. Look at it. Close your eyes. Visualize it in flaming letters of fire. HOW MARK TWAIN LEARNED TO SPEAK WITHOUT NOTES The discovery of how to use his visual memory enabled Mark Twain to discard the notes that had hampered his speeches for years. Here is his story as he told it in Harper’s Magazine: 104 PUBLIC SPEAKING “Dates are hard to- remember because they consist of figures: figures are monotonously unstriking in appearance, and they don't take hold; they form no pictures, and so they give the eye no chance to take hold. Pictures can make dates stick. They can make nearly anything stick — particularly if you make the picture yourself. Indeed, that is the great point — make the picture yourself. I know about this from experience. Thirty years ago I was delivering a memorized lecture every night, and every night I had to help myself with a page of notes to keep from getting myself mixed. The notes consisted of beginnings of sentences, and were eleven in number, and they ran something like this; In that region the weather — At that time it was a custom — But in California one never heard — “Eleven of them. They initialed the brief of the lecture and protected me against skipping. But they all looked about alike on the page ; they formed no picture ; I had them by heart, but I could never with certainty remember the order of their succession; therefore, I always had to keep those notes by me and look at them every little while. Once I mislaid them ; you will not be able to imagine the terrors of that evening. I now saw that I must invent some other protection. So I got ten of the initial letters by heart in their proper order — I, A, B, and so on — and I went on the platform the next night with these marked in ink on my ten finger nails. But it didn’t answer. I kept track of the fingers for awhile; then I lost it, and after that I was never quite sure which finger I had used last. I couldn’t lick off a letter after using it, for while that would have made success certain, it would also have provoked too much curiosity. There was curiosity enough without that. To the audience I seemed more interested in my finger nails than I was in my subject; one or two persons asked after- ward what was the matter with my hands. “It was then that the idea of pictures occurred to me! Then my troubles passed away. In two minutes I made six pictures with my pen, and they did the work of the eleven catch-sentences and did it perfectly. I threw the pictures THE IMPROVEMENT OF MEMORY 105 away as soon as they were made, for I was sure I could shut my eyes and see them any time. That was a quarter of a century ago ; the lecture vanished out of my head more than twenty years ago, but I* could rewrite it from the pic- tures — for they remain.” I recently had occasion to deliver a talk on mem- ory. I wanted to use, very largely, the material in this chapter. I memorized the points by pictures. I visualized Roosevelt reading history while the crowds were yelling and bands playing outside his window. I saw Thomas Edison looking at a cherry tree. I pictured Lincoln reading a newspaper aloud. I imagined Mark Twain licking ink off his finger nails as he faced an audience. How did I remember the order of the pictures? By one, two, three, and four? No, that would have been too difficult. I turned these numbers into pictures, and combined the pictures of the numbers with the pictures of the points. To illustrate. Number one sounds like run, so I made a race horse stand for one. I pictured Roosevelt in his room, reading astride a race horse. For two , I chose a word that sounds like two — zoo . I had the cherry tree that Thomas Edison was looking at standing in the bear cage at the zoo. For three , I pictured an object that sounds like three — tree. I had Lin- coln sprawled out in the top of a tree, reading aloud to his partner. For four I imagined a picture that sounds like four — door. Mark Twain stood in an open door, leaning against the jamb, licking the ink off his fingers as he talked to the audience. I realize full well that many men who read this will think that such a method verges on the ridicu- 106 PUBLIC SPEAKING lous. It does. That is one reason why it works. It is comparatively easy to remember the bizarre and ridiculous. Had I tried to remember the order of my points by numbers only, I might easily have forgotten ; but by the system I have just described, it was almost impossible to forget. When I wished to recall my third point, I had but to ask myself what was in the top of the tree. Instantly I saw Lincoln. I have, very largely for my own convenience, turned the numbers from one to twenty into pictures, choosing pictures that sound like the num- bers. I have set them down here. If you will spend half an hour memorizing these picture-numerals you will then be able, after having a list of twenty objects called to you but once, to repeat them in their exact order and to skip about at random an- nouncing which object was called to you eighth, which fourteenth, which third, and so on. Here are the picture numbers. Try the test. Tou will find it decidedly amusing. x. Run — visualize a race horse. 2. Zoo — see the bear cage in the zoo. 3. Tree — picture the third object called to you as lying in the top of a tree. 4. Door — or wild boar. Take any object or animal that sounds like four. 5. Bee hive. 6. Sick — see a Red Cross nurse. 7 . Heaven — a street paved with gold, and angels playing on harps. 8. Gate. 9. Wine — the bottle has fallen over on the table, and the wine is streaming out and pouring down THE IMPROVEMENT OF MEMORY 107 on something below. Put action into the pic- tures. It helps to make them stick. 10. Den of wild animals in a rocky cave in the deep woods. II’. A football eleven, rushing madly across the field, I picture them carrying aloft the object that I wish to recall as number eleven. 22 o Shelve — see some one shoving something back on a shelf. 13. Hurting— see the blood spurting out of a wound and reddening the thirteenth object. 14. Courting — a couple are sitting on something and making love. 15. Lifting — a strong man, a regular John L. Sullivan, is lifting something high above his head. 160 Licking — a fist fight. 17. Leavening — a housewife is kneading dough, and into the dough she kneads the seventeenth object. 18. Waiting — a woman is standing at a forked path in the deep woods waiting for some one. 19. Pining — a woman is weeping. See her tears fall- ing on the nineteenth thing you wish to recall. 20« Horn of Plenty — a goat’s horn overflowing with flowers and fruit and corn. If you wish to try the test, spend a few minutes memorizing these picture-numbers. If you prefer, make pictures of your own. For ten, think of wren or fountain pen or hen or sen-sen — anything that sounds like ten. Suppose that the tenth object re- called to you a windmill. See the hen sitting on the windmill or see it pumping ink to fill the fountain pen. Then, when you are asked what was the tenth object called, do not think of ten at all; but merely ask yourself where was the hen sitting. You may not think it will work, but try it. You can soon 108 PUBLIC SPEAKING astound people with what they will consider to be an extraordinary capacity for remembering. You will find it entertaining if nothing else. MEMORIZING A BOOK AS LONG AS THE NEW TESTAMENT One of the largest universities in the world is the El Hazar at Cairo. It is a Mohammedan institu- tion with twenty-one thousand students. The en- trance examination requires every applicant to re- peat the Koran from memory. The Koran is about as long as the New Testament, and three days are required to recite it ! The Chinese students, or “study boys” as they are called, have to memorize some of the religious and classical books of China. How are these Arab and Chinese students — many of them men of mediocre ability — able to per- form these apparently prodigious feats of memory? By repetition , the second “natural law of remem- bering.” You can memorize an almost endless amount of material if you will repeat it often enough. Go over the knowledge you want to remember. Use it. Apply it. Employ the new word in your con- versation. Call the stranger by his name if you want to remember it. Talk over in conversation the points you want to make in your public address. The knowledge that is used tends to stick. THE IMPROVEMENT OF MEMORY 109 THE KIND OF REPETITION THAT COUNTS But the mere blind, mechanical going over a thing by rote is not enough. Intelligent repetition, repetition done in accordance with certain well-es- tablished traits of the mind — that is what we must have. For example, Professor Ebbinghaus gave his students a long list of nonsense syllables to memorize, such as “deyux,” “qoli,” and so on. He found that these students memorized as many of these syllables by thirty-eight repetitions, distrib- uted over a period of three days, as they did by sixty-eight repetitions done at a single sitting. . . . Other psychological tests have repeatedly shown similar results. That is a very significant discovery about the working of our memories. It means that we know now that the man who sits down and repeats a thing over and over until he finally fastens it in his memory, is using twice as much time and energy as is necessary to achieve the same results when the repeating process is done at judicious intervals. This peculiarity of the mind — if we can call it such — can be explained by two factors : First, during the intervals between repetitions, our subconscious minds are busy making the asso- ciations more secure. As Professor James sagely remarks: “We learn to swim during the winter and to skate during the summer.” Second, the mind, coming to the task at intervals, is not fatigued by the strain of an unbroken appli- cation. Sir Richard Burton, the translator of the 110 PUBLIC SPEAKING “Arabian Nights,” spoke twenty-seven languages like a native : yet he confessed that he never studied or practised any language for more than fifteen minutes at a time, “for, after that, the brain lost its freshness.” Surely, now, in the face of these facts, no man who prides himself on his common sense, will delay the preparation of a talk until the night before it is to be given. If he does, his memory will, of neces- sity, be working at only one-half its possible ef- ficiency. Here is a very helpful discovery about the way in which we forget. Psychological experiments have repeatedly shown that of the new material we have learned, we forget more during the first eight hours than during the next thirty days. An amaz- ing ratio ! So, immediately before you go into a business conference, immediately before you make a speech, look over your data, think over your facts, refresh your memory. Lincoln knew the value of such a practise, and employed it. The scholarly Edward Everett pre- ceded him on the program of speech-making at Gettysburg. When he saw that Everett was ap- proaching the close of his long, formal oration, Lin- coln “grew visibly nervous, as he always did when another man was speaking and he was to follow.” Hastily adjusting his spectacles, he took his manu- script from his pocket and read it silently to himself to refresh his memory. THE IMPROVEMENT OF MEMORY 111 PROFESSOR WILLIAM JAMES EXPLAINS THE SECRET OF A GOOD MEMORY So much for the first two laws of remembering. The third one, association , however, is the indis- pensable element in recalling. In fact, it is the ex- planation of memory itself. “Our mind is,” as Professor James, has sagely observed, “essentially an associating machine. . . . Suppose I am silent for a moment, and then say in commanding accents : ‘Remember! Recollect!’ Does your faculty of memory obey the order, and reproduce any definite image from your past? Certainly not. It stands staring into vacancy, and asking, ‘What kind of thing do you wish me to remember?’ It needs, in short, a cue. But, if I say, remember the date of your birth, or remember what you had for breakfast, or remember the succession of notes in the musical scale; then your faculty of memory immediately produces the required result : the cue determines its vast set of potentialities toward a particular point. And if you now look to see how this happens, you immediately perceive that the cue is something contiguously associated with the thing recalled. The words, ‘date of my birth,’ have an ingrained as- sociation with a particular number, month, and year; the words, ‘breakfast this morning,’ cut off all other lines of recall except those which lead to coffee and bacon and eggs; the words, ‘musical scale,’ are in- veterate mental neighbors of do, re, mi, fa, sol, la, etc. The laws of association govern, in fact, all the trains of our thinking which are not interrupted by sensations breaking on us from without. What- 112 PUBLIC SPEAKING ever appears in the mind must be introduced; and, when introduced, it is as the associate of something already there. This is as true of what you are recol- lecting as it is of everything else you think of. . . . An educated memory depends upon an organized system of associations; and its goodness depends on two of their peculiarities: first, on the persistency of the associations; and, second, on their number. . . . The ‘secret of a good memory’ is thus the secret of forming diverse and multiple associations with every fact we care to retain. But this forming of associations with a fact — what is it but thinking about the fact as much as possible? Briefly, then, of two men with the same outward experiences, the one who thinks over his experiences most } and weaves them into the most systematic relations with each other, will be the one with the best memory.” HOW TO LINK YOUR FACTS TOGETHER Very good, but how are we to set about weaving our facts into systematic relations with each other? The answer is : by finding their meaning, by think- ing them over. For example, if you will ask and answer these questions about any new fact, that process will help to weave it into a systematic rela- tion with other facts. a. Why is this so? b. How is this so? c. When is it so? d. Where is it so ? e. Who said it is so? THE IMPROVEMENT OF MEMORY 113 If it is a stranger’s name, for example, and it is a common one, we can perhaps tie it to some busi- ness friend who bears the same name. On the other hand, if it is unusual, we can take occasion to say so. This often leads the stranger to talk about his name. For example : while writing this chapter, I was introduced to a Mrs. Soter. I re- quested her to spell the name and remarked upon its unusualness. “Yes,” she replied, “it is very uncommon. It is a Greek word meaning ‘the Savior’.” Then she told me about her husband’s people who had come from Athens and of the high positions they had held in the government there. I have found it quite easy to get people to talk about their names, and it always helps me to re- member them. Observe the stranger’s looks sharply. Note the color of his eyes and his hair, and look closely at his features. Note how he is dressed. Listen to his manner of talking. Get a clear, keen, vivid im- pression of his looks and personality, and associate these with his name. The next time these sharp impressions return to your mind, they will help bring the name with them. Haven’t you had the experience, when meeting a man for the second or third time, to discover that although you could remember his business or pro- fession, you could not recall his name? The reason is this : a man’s business is something definite and concrete. It has a meaning. It will adhere like a court plaster while his meaningless name will roll away like hail falling on a steep roof. Conse- quently, to make sure of your ability to recall a 114 PUBLIC SPEAKING man’s name, fashion a phrase about It that will tie It up to his business. There can be no doubt what- ever about the efficacy of this method. For example, twenty men, strangers to one another, recently met in the Penn Athletic Club of Philadelphia to study this course. Each man was asked to rise, announce his name and business. A phrase was then manu- factured to connect the two ; and, within a few min- utes, each person present could repeat the name of every other individual in the room. Even to the end of the course, neither the names nor businesses were forgotten, for they were linked together. They adhered. Here are the first ten names, in alphabetical order, from that group; and here are the crude phrases that were used to tie the names to the businesses : Mr. G. P. Albrecht (Sand business) — “Sand makes all bright.” Mr. George A. Ansley (Real estate) — “To sell real estate, advertise in Ansley V Magazine.” Mr. G. W. Bayless (Asphalt) — “Use asphalt and pay less.” Mr. H. M. Biddle (Woolen cloth)— “Mr. Biddle piddles about the wool business.” Mr. Gideon Boericke (Mining) — “Boericke bores quickly for mines.” Mr. Thomas J. Devery (Printing) — “Every man needs Devery’s printing.” Mr. O. W. Doolittle (Automobiles) — “Do little and you won’t succeed in selling cars.” Mr. Thomas Fischer (Coal)— “He fishes for coal orders.” Mr. Frank H. Goldey (Lumber) — “There is gold in the lumber business.” Mr. J. H. Hancock (Saturday Evening; Post) — “Sign your John Hancock to a subscription blank for the Saturday Evening Post" THE IMPROVEMENT OF MEMORY 115 HOW TO REMEMBER DATES Dates can best be retained by connecting them with important dates already firmly established in the mind. Isn’t it far more difficult, for example, for an American to remember that the Suez Canal was opened in 1869 than to remember that the first ship passed through it four years after the close of the Civil War? If an American tried to remember that the first settlement in Australia was made in 1788, the date is likely to drop out of his mind like a loose bolt out of a car; it is far more likely to stick if he thinks of it in connection with July 4, 1776, and remembers that it occurred twelve years after the Declaration of Independence. That is like screwing a nut on the loose bolt. It holds. It is well to bear this principle in mind when you are selecting a telephone number. For example, the writer’s phone number, during the war, was 177 6. No one had difficulty in remembering it. If you can secure from the phone company some such number as 1492, x 86 1 , 1865, 1914, 1918, your friends will not have to consult the directory. They might forget that your phone number was 1492, if you gave them the information in a colorless fashion; but would it slip their minds if you said, “You can easily remember my phone number; 1492, the year Columbus discovered America.” The Australians, New Zealanders, and Cana- dians who are reading these lines would, of course, substitute for 1776, 1861, 1865 significant dates in their own histqry. 116 PUBLIC SPEAKING What is the best way to memorize the following dates ? a. 1564 — Birth of Shakespeare. b. 1607 — The first English settlement in Amer- ica was made in Jamestown. c. 1819 — The birth of Queen Victoria. d. 1807' — The birth of Robert E. Lee. e. 1789 — The Bastile was destroyed. You would doubtlessly find it tiresome to mem- orize, by sheer mechanical repetition, the names of the thirteen original states in the order in which they entered the Union. But tie them together with a story and the memorizing can be done with a frac- tion of the time and trying. Read the following paragraph just once. Concentrate. When you have finished, see if you cannot name the thirteen states in their correct order: One Saturday afternoon a young lady from Delaware bought a ticket over the Pennsylvania railroad for a little outing. She packed a New Jersey sweater in her suitcase, and visited a friend, Georgia, in Connecticut. The next morning the hostess and her visitor attended Mass in a church on Mary’s land. Then they took the South car. line home, and dined on a new ham, which had been roasted by Virginia, the colored cook, from New York. After dinner they took the North car line and rode to the island. HOW TO REMEMBER THE POINTS OF YOUR TALK There are only two ways by which we can pos- sibly think of a thing : first, by means of an outside stimulus; second, by association with something THE IMPROVEMENT OF MEMORY 117 already in the mind. Applied to speeches, that means just this : first, you can recall your points by the aid of some outside stimulus such as notes — but who likes to see a speaker use notes? Second, you can remember your points by associating them with something already in the mind. They should be arranged in such a logical order that the first one leads inevitably to the second, and the second to the third as naturally as the door of one room leads into another. That sounds simple, but it may not prove so for the beginner whose thinking powers are rendered hors de combat with fear. There is, however, a method of tying your points together that is easy, rapid, and all but fool-proof. I refer to the use of a nonsense sentence. To illustrate: suppose you wish to discuss a veritable jumble of ideas, unasso- ciated and hence hard to remember, such as, for example, cow , cigar , Napoleon, house, religion. Let us see if we cannot weld those ideas like the links of a chain by means of this absurd sentence : “The cow smoked a cigar and hooked Napoleon, and the house burned down with religion.” Now, will you please cover the above sentence with your hand while you answer these questions? What is the third point, in that talk; the fifth; fourth; second; first? Does the method work? It does! And the members of this course are urged to use it. Any group of ideas can be linked together i a some such fashion, and the more ridiculous the sen- tence used for the linking, the easier it will be to recall. 118 PUBLIC SPEAKING WHAT TO DO IN CASE OF A COMPLETE BREAKDOWN Let us suppose that, in spite of all his prepara- tion and precaution, a speaker, in the middle of his talk, suddenly finds his mind a blank — suddenly finds himself staring at his hearers completely balked, unable to go on — a terrifying situation. His pride rebels at sitting down in confusion and defeat. He feels that he might be able to think of his next point, of some point, if he had only ten, fifteen seconds of grace; but even fifteen seconds of frantic silence before an audience would be little less than dis- astrous. What is to be done? When a certain well known U. S. Senator recently found himself in this situation he asked his audience if he were speak- ing loudly enough, if he could be heard distinctly in the back of the room. He knew that he was. He was not seeking information. He was seeking time. And in that momentary pause, he grasped his thought and proceeded. But perhaps the best life-saver in such a mental hurricane is this: use the last word, or phrase, or idea in your last sentence for the beginning of a new sentence. This will make an endless chain that, like Tennyson’s brook and, I regret to say, with as little purpose as Tennyson’s brook, will run on forever. Let us see how it works in practise. Let us imagine that a speaker, talking on Business Success, finds himself in a blind mental alley after having said: “The average employe does not get ahead because he takes so little real interest in his work; displays so little initiative.” THE IMPROVEMENT OF MEMORY 119 u Initiative !* Start a sentence with “initiative ” You will probably have no idea of what you are going to say or how you are going to end the sen- tence, but, nevertheless, begin. Even a poor show- ing is more to be desired than utter defeat. “Initiative means originality, doing a thing on your own, without eternally waiting to be told. 5 ’ That is not a scintillating observation. It won’t make speech history. But isn’t it better than an agonizing silence? Our last phrase was what? — “waiting to be told.” All right, let us start a new sentence with that idea. “The constant telling and guiding and driving of employees who refuse to do any original thinking is one of the most exasperating things imaginable.” Well, we got through that one. Let us plunge again. This time we must say something about imagination : “Imagination — that is what is needed. Vision. ‘Where there is no vision/ Solomon said, £ the people perish.’ ” We did two that time without a hitch. Let us take heart and continue: “The number of employees who perish each year in the battle of business is really lamentable. I say lamentable, because with just a little more loyalty, a little more ambi- tion, a little more enthusiasm, these same men and women might have lifted themselves over the line of demarcation between success and failure. Yet the failure in business never admits that this is the case.” 120 PUBLIC SPEAKING And so on. . . . While the speaker is saying these platitudes off the top of his mind, he should, at the same time, be thinking hard of the next point in his planned speech, of the thing he had orig- inally intended to say. This endless chain method of talking will, if con- tinued very long, trap the speaker into discussing plum pudding or the price of canary birds. How- ever, it is a splendid first aid to the injured mind broken down temporarily through forgetfulness : and, as such, it has been the means of resuscitating many a gasping and dying speech. WE CANNOT IMPROVE OUR MEMORIES FOR ALL CLASSES OF THINGS I have pointed out in this chapter how we may improve our methods of getting vivid impressions, of repeating and of tying our facts together. But memory is so essentially a matter of association that “there can be,” as Professor James points out, “no improvement of the general or elementary fac- ulty of memory; there can only be improvement of our memory for special systems of associated things.” By memorizing, for instance, a quotation a day from Shakespeare, we may improve our memory for literary quotations to a surprising degree. Each additional quotation will find many friends in the mind to tie to. But the memorizing of everything from Hamlet to Romeo will not necessarily aid one in retaining facts about the cotton market or the Bessemer process for desiliconizing pig iron. THE IMPROVEMENT OF MEMORY 121 Let us repeat: if we apply and use the principles discussed in this chapter, we will improve our man- ner and efficiency for memorizing anything; but, if we do not apply these principles, then the memoriz- ing of ten million facts about baseball will not help us in the slightest in memorizing facts about the stock market. Such unrelated data cannot be tied together. “Our mind is essentially an associating machine.” SUMMARY 1. “The average man,” says the noted psychol- ogist, Professor Carl Seashore, “does not use above ten per cent of his actual inherited capacity for memory. He wastes the ninety per cent by violating the natural laws of remembering.” 2. These “natural laws of remembering” are three : impression , repetition > association . 3. Get a deep, vivid impression of the thing you wish to remember. To do that you must — a. Concentrate. That was the secret of Roosevelt’s memory. b. Observe closely. Get an accurate impres- sion. A camera won’t take pictures in a fog; neither will your mind retain foggy impressions. c. Get your impressions through as many of the senses as possible. Lincoln read aloud what- ever he wished to remember so that he would get both a visual and an auditory impression. d. Above all else, be sure to get eye impres- sions. They stick. The nerves leading from the eye to the brain are twenty times as large as those 122 PUBLIC SPEAKING leading from the ear to the brain. Mark Twain could not remember the outline of his speech when he used notes; but when he threw away his notes and used pictures to recall his various head- ings, all his troubles vanished. 4. The second law of memory is repetition. Thousands of Mohammedan students memorize the Koran — a book about as long as the New Testa- ment — and they do it very largely through the power of repetition. We can memorize anything within reason if we repeat it often enough. But bear these facts in mind as you repeat : a. Do not sit down and repeat a thing over and over until you have it engraved on your memory. Go over it once or twice, then drop it; come back later and go over it again. Re- peating at intervals, in that manner, will enable you to memorize a thing in about one-half the time required to do it at one sitting. b. After we memorize a thing, we forget as much during the first eight hours as we do during the next thirty days ; so go over your notes just a few minutes before you rise to make your talk. 5. The third law of memory is association. The only way anything can possibly be remembered at all is by associating it with some other fact. “What" ever appears in the mind," says Professor James, “must be introduced; and, when introduced, it is as the associate of something already there. . . . The one who thinks over his experiences most, and weaves them into the most systematic relation with each other, will be the one with the best memory.” THE IMPROVEMENT OF MEMORY 123 t I. i 6. When you wish to associate one fact with others already in the mind, think over the new fact from all angles. Ask about it such questions as these: “Why is this so? How is this so? When is it so ? Where is it so ? Who said it is so ?” 7. To remember a stranger’s name, ask ques- tions about it — how is it spelled, etc.? Observe his looks sharply. Try to connect the name with his face. Find out his business and try to invent some nonsense phrase that will connect his name with his business, such as was done in the Penn Athletic Club group. 8. To remember dates, associate them with prominent dates already in the mind. For example, the three hundredth anniversary of Shakespeare’s birth occurred during the Civil War. 9. To remember the points of your address, ar- range them in such logical order that one leads naturally to the next. In addition, one can make a nonsense sentence out of the main points — for example, “The cow smoked a cigar and hooked Napoleon, and the house burned down with re- ligion.” 10. If, in spite of all precautions, you suddenly forget what you intended to say, you may be able to save yourself from complete defeat by using the last words of your last sentence as the first words in a new one. This can be continued until you are able to think of your next point. SPEECH BUILDING WORDS OFTEN MISPRONOUNCED How many of the following words do you hear mispronounced almost daily? One may say AD- dress for ad-DRESS, and A-dult for a-DULT, and find his errors undetected by many educated people ; but who can forgive such slovenly, such gross faults as “praps” and “presidunt” and “program”? They are as offensive to the cultivated ear as soiled linen to the eye. For them and their ilk, there can be no excuse, no forgiveness, no explanation except sheer intellectual lethargy and frowziness. Their use condemns one as lacking in culture, as deficient in mental self-respect. Yet I have heard an occa- sional radio announcer speak of the “program.” Have you ? Do not say : except for accept agin a again ailmunt u ailment ambassadur u ambassador becuz u because unuther u another barrul u barrel cramberry u cranberry crejulus u credulous 124 THE IMPROVEMENT OF MEMORY ejucation tt education fillum it film forchin a fortune frum u from fu-ul it fuel genl’mun guv’ment u gentlemen a government indivijual a individual kep ? “ a kept lemme u let me levul u level literachoor a literature marvul it marvel meludy tt melody modust it modest nearust tc nearest novus it novice parsnup it parsnip praps tt perhaps perul tt peril pitcher tt picture poum tt poem portrut it portrait perdicament ti predicament presidunt it president progrum 1 1 program reco’nize tt recognize sassy it saucy savij it savage slep it slept spirut i t spirit stiddy it steady supprised it surprised 125 126 PUBLIC SPEAKING swep swept turnup u turnip victum u victim wuz u was Read the following sentences aloud. Are you sure of the pronunciations of all the italicized words? If not, will you kindly look them up in Chapters I, II and III? He made an admirable address in the theater on the prob- lem of finance in our industry f and interested us all. He declared that ordinarily there would have been a lamentable deficit; but this decade , owing to our admirable and expert management, we were, contrary to the expectations of those who were conversant with the conditions, in a state of affluence . He protested , however, that there were mischievous and despicable forces at work in Seattle , for?nidable and adverse influences which we, as adults and exponents of the new order in industry , must combat irrevocably and render impotent . ERRORS IN ENGLISH Review . There are nine errors in the following paragraphs. Show your ability by finding them and by noting how glaring they appear. The excitement become intense as the crowd begun to mill around; the wind blowed and brung clouds of dust. “The dam has busted,” shouted the rider as he come hurrying up to the people. “I dove off the bank and done the mile in two minutes flat,” said he as he drunk some water with deep draughts. THE IMPROVEMENT OF MEMORY 127 New Study Material . Right The girl drowned in the bay. The boy was drowned as he tried to aid. I ate dinner. I have eaten dinner. They have all gone . The meat was hung. (object) The man was hanged . (person) I knew the man. The man was known by his hair. I rang the bell. I have rung the bell. He ran home. He has run home. I saw him. I have seen him. The dress shrank . The dress has shrunk . She sang a song. She has sung a song. The car sank in the mud. The car has sunk in the mud. The tiger sprang put. The tiger has sprung out. Wrong The girl drownded in the bay. The boy was drownded as he tried to aid. I et dinner. I have ate dinner. They have all went. The man was hung . I knowed the man. The man was knowed by his hair. I rung the bell. I have rang the bell. He run home. He has ran home. I seen him. I have saw him. The dress shrunk . The dress has shrank . She sung a song. She has sang a song. The car sunk in the mud. The car has sank in the mud. The tiger sprung out. The tiger has sprang out. 128 PUBLIC SPEAKING His face is swollen . He swam across the lake. He has swum across the lake. His face is swelled . He swum across the lake. He has swam across the lake. CORRECT USAGE OF WORDS “The study of synonyms has always been regarded as one of the most valuable of intellectual disciplines, independently of its great importance as a guide to the right, practical use of words.” — G. P. Marsh, Lectures On The English Language . But — -And. “Poor but honest,” suggests that the ordinary man is dishonest. What would u old but respectable” imply? Calm — Cool. If you keep yourself from be- coming excited at a train wreck, you are calm ; if you don’t have to try to control yourself, you are cool . If you are always composed and have poise, your mind is tranquil and your disposition placid . Capacity — Ability. (Wrong.) “He has an ex- traordinary capacity for hard work.” Capacity is the power to receive ; ability the power to do. Ability includes capacity. An actor may have an unusual capacity for memorizing lines, and not have the ability to act well. Can — May. Can denotes power and ability. Do not confuse can with may which refers to per- mission. “Can I use your knife?” literally means have I the power to use it. The chances are that I have, unless I am paralyzed. If I wish to ask for permission, I should say, “May I use your knife.” THE IMPROVEMENT OF MEMORY 129 VOICE EXERCISE— RELAXING THE THROAT Strain and tension, we learned in the last chap- ter, impair the voice and render it disagreeable. Where does this tension usually get in its deadly work? In what part of the body? There can be no question about that. It raises its head like a viper and licks out its fiery tongue almost always in the same place ; the throat. The nervous gripping of the muscles there causes rough- ness of the voice, fatigue, hoarseness and even sore throat. There is the so-called “teacher’s sore throat,” the well-known “minister’s sore throat,” and the “speaker’s sore throat.” A man can con- verse in business all day, month after month, with- out suffering from a sore throat. Why, then, should he contract that affliction when he attempts to do considerable public speaking? The answer can be given in one word: tension. He does not use his organs of speech properly. He is nervous ; and he unconsciously contracts the muscles of his throat. He takes a deep breath, raises his chest by muscular effort and continues to hold it high by muscular effort; and the strain of these chest muscles tightens his throat. He wants to be emphatic, and he strains and tightens his throat. He wants to be heard; and he tries to force the words out of his throat. The result? Breathy tones, harsh tones, unpleasant tones, tones that will not carry. That is not the way to do it at all. “Behold, I show unto you a more excellent way.” Relax the throat entirely. It ought to be merely the chimney up which the column of air passes from your lungs. 130 PUBLIC SPEAKING “There must be as little consciousness of effort in the throat as possible,” says Galli-Curci. The old Italian singing masters used to boast: “l’ltaliano non ha gola” — “The Italian singer has no throat.” None of the great singers, Caruso, Melba, Patti, Mary Garden, none of them sang as if he or she had a throat. That is the way a speaker should speak. All the muscles above the collar bone should be relaxed. In reality, all the muscles from the waist up should be relaxed. How are you going to be sure of this highly- desired relaxed and open throat? Here is a very simple way to do it, one that you cannot easily forget. Suppose that someone has asked you, “Do the Italian singers have a throat?” You are going to reply with a “no.” Close your eyes. Think of a yawn. Feel yourself starting to make one. It begins, you know, with a deep breath — in fact, it is the need for more breath that causes the yawn. As you take the breath, and the moment before the yawn breaks, your throat is open and relaxed. Now, instead of yawning, speak. Think “no,” say “no.” Didn’t that tone sound well to your ears? Why? Because the conditions for it were right. We have learned some fundamental lessons now in tone production: deep diaphragmatic breathing, a relaxed body, an open throat. Practise this exercise twenty times a day. Start to yawn. Feel the lower part of your lungs fill- ing with air, pushing against the lower ribs, the back, flattening and pressing down that arched muscle called the diaphragm. Now, instead of yawning, speak. Speak a musical sentence like this : Lovely THE IMPROVEMENT OF MEMORY 131 Lolita drifting along in the moonlight over the mur- muring lagoon . As you speak, feel that you are drinking in the words — not back into your throat — but up into the open chambers of your head. Feel the same open- ness in the headchambers that you feel when drink- ing in a deep breath through the nose. Lastly, after taking in the deep breath, relax the chest entirely. Feel it pivoted on, riding on, the cushion of air inside. Your relaxed breast ought to ride on the breath just as your tires and your car ride on the air in the blown up inner tubes. If you do not relax your chest in this manner, the muscular effort that you use in holding it high will tighten your throat. On the other hand, do not construe this to mean that you are to have a caved-in chest as you are breathing. No. Hold the chest, not the shoulders, high during inspiration and then let the weight of it ride on the air pressure in the middle of your body. } CHAPTER V KEEPING THE AUDIENCE AWAKE "Genius is intensify . The man mho gets anything worth having is the man who goes after his object as a bulldog goes after a cat — with every fiber in him tense with eagerness and determination T — W . C. Holman, formerly Sales Man- ager for the National Cash Register Company . “ The man or woman of enthusiastic trend always exer- cises a magnetic mfiue7ice over those with whom he or she comes in contact ” — H. Addington Bruce. "Be intensely in earnest . Enthusiasm invites enthusiasm . * — Russell H. Conwell. "I like the man who bubbles over with enthusiasm . Better be a geyser than a mud puddle ” — John G . Shedd, Former President of Marshall Field and Co. "He did it with all his heart and prospered ” — Second Chronicles. "Merit begets confidence f confidence begets enthusiasm r enthusiasm conquers the world F — Walter H. Cottingham v President of Sherwin Williams Company. "Honesty is one part of eloquence: we persuade others by being in earnest ourselves T — Hazlitt. CHAPTER V KEEPING THE AUDIENCE AWAKE Sherman Rogers and I once addressed the same meeting of the St. Louis Chamber of Commerce. I spoke first and, had I had a good excuse, I would have left immediately afterwards, for he was billed as “the lumberjack orator.” I frankly expected to be bored for, like Mr. Dooley, I class the usual so-called “oratory” with wax flowers. This day, however, I was delightfully surprised; Mr. Rogers made easily one of the best talks I have ever heard. And who is Sherman Rogers ? A genuine lumber- jack — he has spent most of his life in the big woods of the West. He knows nothing and cares less than nothing about the rules for public speaking that have been set down so elaborately in learned books on eloquence. His talk did not have polish; but it had punch. It lacked finesse ; but it had fire. He made grammatical errors, and did half a dozen things that are not according to Hoyle ; but it is not faults that kill a talk ; it is a lack of virtues. His speech was a huge, raw piece of palpitating experience torn right out of his own life as a la- borer and a boss of laborers. It didn’t smack of books. It was a live thing. It fairly crouched and sprang at you. Everything that he said leaped 135 136 PUBLIC SPEAKING flaming hot from his heart. The effect on the audience was electrical. The secret of his success? The secret of every phenomenal success : “Every great movement in the annals of history,” said Emerson, “is the triumph of enthusiasm.” It is derived, that magic name, from two Greek words: en, meaning in; and theos , meaning God . Enthusiasm is literally God in us. The enthusiastic man is one who speaks as if he were possessed by God. This quality is the most effective, the most im- portant factor in advertising and selling goods and getting things done. The largest advertiser of any single product in the world came to Chicago thirty years ago with less than fifty dollars in his pocket. Wrigley now sells thirty million dollars worth of his chewing gum every year, and on the wall of his private office hang these framed words of Emer- son: “Nothing great was ever achieved without enthusiasm.” There was a time when I put considerable reli- ance in the rules of public speaking; but with the passing of the years I have come to put more and more faith in the spirit of speaking. “Eloquence, said the late Mr. Bryan, “may be defined as the speech of one who knows what he is talking about, and means what he says — it is thought on fire. . . . Knowledge is of little use to the speaker without earnestness. Persuasive speech is from heart to heart, not from mind to mind. It is difficult for a speaker to deceive his audience as to his own feeling. . . . Nearly tw y o thousand years KEEPING THE AUDIENCE AWAKE 137 ago, one of the Latin poets expressed this thought when he said: Tf you would draw tears from others’ eyes, yourself the signs of grief must show.’ ” “If I wish to compose or write or pray or preach well,” said Martin Luther, “I must be angry. Then all the blood in my veins is stirred, and my understanding is sharpened.” Perhaps we don’t have to be exactly angry, you and I, but we must be aroused and sincere and in- tensely in earnest. Even a horse is affected by spirited talk. Rainey, the famous animal trainer, said that he had known an angry word to raise the pulse of a horse ten beats per minute. Surely, an audience is as sensitive as a horse. This is a most important fact to remember : every lime we speak we determine the attitude of our hearers. We hold them in the hollow of our hands. If we are lackadaisical, they will be lackadaisical. If we are reserved, they will be reserved. If we are only mildly concerned, they will be only mildly concerned. But if we are deadly in earnest about what we say, and if we say it with feeling and spontaneity and force and contagious conviction, they cannot keep from catching our spirit to a de- gree. “Much as we would like to think we are moved by reason,” says Martin W. Littleton, a famous New York after-dinner speaker, “the whole world is, in fact, mqved by emotion. The man who tries to be very serious or very witty may easily fail, but the speaker who appeals to you with real con- 138 PUBLIC SPEAKING victions never fails. No matter whether the great- est subject to him is the breeding of White Leg- horns, the plight of Christians in Armenia, or the League of Nations — if he is really deeply convinced so that he has a message for you , his speech will go like a flame. It won’t matter how his convic- tions are clothed, either, but only with what sincerity and emotional power they are launched at you.” Given heat and earnestness and enthusiasm, a speaker’s influence expands like steam. He can have five hundred faults; but he can hardly fail. The great Rubinstein, it is said, played myriads of false notes; but nobody cared, for he could get the poetry of Chopin into souls that had never seen anything in a sunset before except a big red disk sinking behind a barn on the horizon. History records that before Pericles, the mighty Athenian leader, spoke, he prayed to the gods that not a single unworthy word might escape his lips. He had his heart in his messages; and they went straight to the heart of a nation. Willa Gather, one of America’s most distin- guished woman novelists, says: “Every artist’s se- cret” — and every public speaker ought to be an artist — “is passion. It is an open secret and per- fectly safe. Like heroism, it is inimitable in cheap materials.” Passion. . . . Feeling. . . . Spirit. . . . Emotional sincerity — get these qualities in your talk and your auditors will condone — yes, will hardly be con- scious of — minor shortcomings. History bears this out: Lincoln spoke in an unpleasantly high KEEPING THE AUDIENCE AWAKE 139 tone. Demosthenes stammered. Hooker’s voice was weak. Curran stuttered notoriously. Sheil almost squealed. The younger Pitt’s voice was neither clear nor pleasant. Yet all these men had an earnestness that triumphed over all handicaps — an emotional urge that blasted all handicaps to nothingness. HAVE SOMETHING THAT YOU VERY MUCH WANT TO SAY “The essence of a good speech,” said Professor Brander Matthews in an interesting article in the New York Times, “is that the speaker really has something which he really wants to say.” “This was brought home to me a few years ago when I was one of three judges called on to award the Curtis medal at Columbia University. There were half a dozen undergraduates, all of them elab- orately trained, all of them anxious to acquit them- selves well. But — with only a single exception — what they were striving for was to win the medal. They had little or no desire to persuade. They had chosen their topics because these topics per- mitted oratorical development. They had no deep personal interest in the arguments they were mak- ing. And their successive speeches were merely exercises in the art of delivery. The exception was a Zulu Prince. He had selected as his theme ‘The Contribution of Africa to Modern Civilization.’ He put intense feeling into every word he uttered. His speech was no mere exercise; it was a living thing, born of conviction and enthusiasm. He 140 PUBLIC SPEAKING spoke as the representative of his people, of his continent; he had something to say that he wanted to say; and he said it with sympathetic sincerity. So we gave him the medal, although he was pos- sibly no more accomplished in the art than two or three of his competitors. What we judges recog- nized was that his address had the true fire of the orator. In comparison with his fervid appeal, the other speeches were only gas-logs.” Right here is where many a speaker fails. His expression is motivated by no conviction; no desire, no impetus is stirring in his talk; there is no powder behind his shot. “Ah, very good,” you say, “but how am I to develop this earnestness and spirit and enthusiasm that you praise so highly?” This much is sure: you will never develop it by talking from the sur- face. Any discerning listener can detect whether a speaker is talking from skin-deep impressions or whether his expression is welling up from deep within him. So shake yourself out of your inertia. Put your heart in your work. Dig. Seek for the hidden resources that lie buried away inside you. Get the facts and the causes behind the facts. Con- centrate. Dwell on them, brood over them until they matter to you. In the last analysis, you see it is all conditioned back upon thorough preparation and the right kind of preparation. Heart preparation is as essential as head preparation. To illustrate: I trained a number of men in the New York City Chapter of the American Institute of Banking to speak during a thrift campaign. One of the men KEEPING THE AUDIENCE AWAKE 141 in particular lacked force. He was talking merely because he wanted to speak, not because he was fired with zeal for thrift. The first step in train- ing that man was to warm his mind and heart. I told him to go off by himself and to think over his subject until he became enthusiastic about it. I asked him to remember that the Probate Court Records in New York show that more than 85% of the people leave nothing at all at death; that only 3.3% leave $10,000 or over. He was to keep constantly in mind that he was not asking people to do him a favor or something that they could not afford to do. He was to say to himself: “I am preparing these people to have meat and bread and clothes and comfort in their old age, and to leave their wives and children protected.” He must re- member he was going out to perform a great social service. He must be inspired by the crusader’s faith that he was preaching the practical, applied gospel of Jesus Christ. He thought over these facts. He burned them into his mind. He got a realizing sense of their importance. He aroused his own interest, stirred his own enthusiasm, and came to feel that his mis- sion was almost holy. Then, when he went out to talk, there was a ring to his words that carried conviction. In fact, his talks on thrift attracted so much attention that he was invited to join the organ- ization of the largest bank in America, and was later sent to one of its South American branches. 142 PUBLIC SPEAKING THE SECRET OF A TRIUMPH “I must live,” cried a young man to Voltaire; and the philosopher replied: “I do not perceive the necessity.” That, in many instances, will be the attitude of the world towards what you have to say: it won’t perceive the necessity of its being said. But you, if you would succeed, must feel the necessity — ■ if there is one. The thing ought to grip you. It ought, for the time being, to seem to you like the most important thing on terra firma. Dwight L. Moody became so stirred in the prep- aration of his sermon on Grace, so wrought up in his search for truth, that he seized his hat, left his study, strode out into the street and accosted the first man he met with the abrupt inquiry: “Do you know what Grace is?” Is it any wonder that a man, fired with such emotional earnestness and in- tensity, exerted a magic power over audiences? Some time ago a member of a course I was con- ducting in Paris spoke evening after evening in a colorless fashion. He was something of a stu- dent, and he had his facts all right, piles of them. But he had not welded them together with the heat of his own interest. He lacked spirit. He didn’t talk as if what he had to say was very vital, so naturally the audience paid little heed. They took his speech at his own appraisement. Time and again, stopping him, I endeavored to drill force into him, to wake him up; but I often felt as if I were trying to coax steam out of a cold radiator. Finally, I did succeed in persuading him that his KEEPING THE AUDIENCE AWAKE 143 method of preparation was at fault. I convinced him that he ought to establish some kind of tele- graphic communication between his head and his heart. I told him that he must give us not only the facts, but that he ought to reveal his attitude towards those facts. The next week he appeared with ideas about which he felt strongly enough to make the expres- sion of them worth while. At last, he was passion- ately concerned about something. He had a mes- sage that he loved as Thackeray loved Becky Sharp. He was willing to sweat blood for it, and his talk won long and hearty applause. It was an abrupt triumph. He had generated a little heart-felt earn- estness. That is a fundamental part of preparation. As we learned in Chapter II, the preparation of a speech, a real speech, does not consist in merely getting some mechanical words down on paper, nor of memorizing phrases. Neither does it consist in lifting a few thoughts second hand from some book or newspaper article. No, no. But it does consist in digging away down deep into your own mind and heart and life, and bringing forth some convictions and enthusiasms that are essentially yours. Yours! YOURS! Dig. Dig. Dig. It is there. Never doubt it. Mines of it, quantities of it, of whose existence you have never even dreamed. Do you, yourself, realize the strength of your own potentialities? I doubt it. The late Professor James said that the average man does not develop more than ten per cent of his possible mental powers. Worse than an eight-cylinder ma- chine with only one cylinder sparking! 144 PUBLIC SPEAKING Yes, the great thing in a speech is not the cold phraseology, but the man, the spirit, the convic- tions' behind that phraseology. Sheridan’s re- nowned attack on Warren Hastings in the House of Commons was declared by the famous speakers, who heard it — by Burke and Pitt, by Wilberforce and Fox — to be the most eloquent oration ever de- livered on England’s soil. Yet Sheridan felt that the superlative merit of it was too spiritual and evanescent a thing to be caught and enmeshed in cold type; so he refused an offer of five thousand dollars for its publication. No copy of it exists to-day. If we could read the address, no doubt it would be disappointing. The quality that made it great would be gone. Only the empty skin would remain, like some stuffed eagle with outspread wings in a taxidermist’s shop. Always remember that you are the most import- ant factor in your talk. Hear these golden words from Emerson! They contain a world of wisdom: “Use what language you will , you can never say anything but what you are! } That is one of the most significant statements I ever heard about the art of self-expression; and, for the sake of em- phasis, I am going to repeat it: “Use what lan- guage you will , you can never say anything but what you are! } A LINCOLN SPEECH THAT WON A LAWSUIT Lincoln may never have read that, but one thing is certain: he knew the truth of it. One day the widow of a Revolutionary War soldier, an old KEEPING THE AUDIENCE AWAKE 145 woman bent with age, hobbled into his office, tell- ing him of a pension agent who had taken from her the exorbitant fee of two hundred dollars for collecting a sum of twice that amount that was due her. Lincoln was indignant, and he brought suit immediately. How did he prepare for this case? He prepared by reading a biography of Washington and a his- tory of the Revolutionary War, by quickening his enthusiasm, by kindling his feelings and emotions. When he spoke, he recounted the oppressions that had stirred the patriots to turn and fight for lib- erty. He pictured the untold hardships they had gone through, the suffering they had endured at Valley Forge, hungry, barefooted and with bleed- ing feet creeping over the ice and snow. Then, in wrath, he turned to the rascal who had fleeced a widow of one of those heroes out of half her pen- sion. His eyes flashed as he poured out his bit- terest denunciation, “skinning” the defendant, as he declared he would do. “Time rolls by,” he said in conclusion. “The heroes of ’76 have passed away, and are encamped on the other shore. The soldier has gone to rest and now, crippled, blinded, and broken, his widow comes to you and to me, gentlemen of the jury, to right her wrongs. She was not always thus. She w r as once a beautiful young woman. Her step was as elastic, her face as fair, and her voice as sweet as any that rang in the mountains of old, Virginia. But now she is poor and defenseless. Out here on the prairies of Illinois, many hundreds of miles away from the scenes of her childhood, she appeals 146 PUBLIC SPEAKING to us who enjoy the privileges achieved for us by the patriots of the Revolution, for our sympathetic aid and manly protection. All I ask is, shall we befriend her?” As he finished, some of the jury were in tears, and they returned a verdict for every cent the old woman asked. Lincoln became her surety for costs, paid her hotel bill and her fare home, and charged ■ her nothing for his legal services. A few days later, Lincoln’s partner picked up a little scrap of paper in the office, read Lincoln’s outline for his speech, and burst into laughter: “No contract. — Not professional services — Unreasonable charge. — Money retained by Deft not given to Pl’ff. — Revolutionary war. — Describe Valley Forge privations. — • Pl’ffs husband. — Soldier leaving for army. — Skin Deft. — Close. ,, I hope that I have made plain that the first requi- site in generating your warmth and enthusiasm is to prepare until you have a real message you want to get across. The next step is — ACT IN EARNEST As we noted in Chapter I, Professor James has pointed out “action and feeling go together; and, by regulating the action which is under the most direct control of the will, we can indirectly regulate the feeling which is not.” So, to feel earnest and enthusiastic, stand up and act in earnest and be enthusiastic. Stop leaning against the table. Stand tall. Stand still. Don’t rock back and forth. Don’t bob up and down. KEEPING THE AUDIENCE AWAKE 14? Don’t shift your weight from one foot to the other and back again like a tired horse. In short, don’t make a lot of nervous movements which will proclaim your lack of ease and self-possession to the housetops. Control yourself physically. It will convey a sense of poise and power. Stand up and stand out “like a strong man rejoicing to run a race.” I repeat: fill your lungs with oxygen. Fill them to the full. Look straight at your audience. Look at them as if you had something urgent to say and as if you knew it was urgent. Look at them with the confidence and courage of a teacher view- ing his pupils, for you are a teacher, and they are there to hear you and to be taught. So speak out confidently and with energy. “Lift up your voice,” said the Prophet Isaiah, “lift it up. Be not afraid.” And use emphatic gestures. Never mind, just now, whether they are beautiful or graceful. Think only of making them forceful and spontaneous. Make them now, not for the sense they will convey to others, but for what they will do for you. And they will do wonders. Even if you are speaking to a radio audience, gesture, gesture. Your gestures won’t, of course, be visible to the unseen hearers, but the result of your gestures will be audible to them. They will give increased aliveness and en- ergy to your tones and to your whole manner. How often have I stopped a lifeless speaker in the midst of his talk and drilled him and com- pelled him to use emphatic gestures which he did not at the time feel like using. But the physical action of the forced gestures finally awakened and stimulated him until he gestured spontaneously. 148 PUBLIC SPEAKING Even his face brightened and his whole bearing and attitude became more earnest, more emphatic. Acting in earnest makes one feel in earnest. “Assume a virtue,” Shakespeare advised, “if you have it not.” Above all else, open your mouth, and speak out. Attorney General Wickersham once remarked to me: “The average man who attempts to speak in public cannot be heard even thirty feet away.” Does that sound exaggerated? I recently lis- tened to a public address by the head of a great university. I sat in the fourth row and could hardly hear more than half he said. The ambassador of an important European nation recently delivered the commencement address before Union College; his delivery was so flabby that his words were almost inaudible twenty feet from the platform. If experienced speakers commit such errors, what is to be expected of the beginner? He is not used to having his voice enlarged so that it will carry over an audience ; so, when he speaks with sufficient vitality, he will imagine that he is fairly shouting, and that people are ready to laugh at him. Use conversational tones; but enlarge them. In- tensify them. We can read fine print a foot from the eye; but it takes bold headlines to be seen across a hall THE FIRST THING TO DO WHEN THE AUDIENCE GOES TO SLEEP A country preacher once asked Henry Ward Beecher how to keep an audience awake on a hot KEEPING THE AUDIENCE AWAKE 149 Sunday afternoon, and Beecher told him to have an usher take a sharp stick and prod the preacher. I like that. It is superb. It is glorified common sense. It would do more for the average speaker than nine-tenths of all the erudite tomes that have ever been written on the art of eloquence. One of the surest ways to get a student to limber up and abandon and really let himself go, would be to knock him down before he started. It would put fire and spirit and aliveness into his speech. Actors know the value of shaking themselves awake before they make their stage entrance. Houdini did it by leaping about the back stage, striking the air vigorously with his fists, sparring with an imagin- ary antagonist. Mansfield sometimes deliberately planned to work himself into a perfect rage over any pretext — perhaps it was because some stage hand was breathing too audibly — any excuse that would serve to give him the heightened energy, the surging of spirit that he courted. I have seen actors standing in the wings, waiting for their cues and beating their breasts savagely. I have sent stu dents, just before they spoke, into an adjoining room to pummel their bodies until their blood leaped and their faces and eyes glowed with life. I frequently force a student to preface his practise talks in this course, repeating the A.B.Cds with vio- lent gestures and all the vigor and anger that he can possibly command. Isn’t it highly desirable to go before your hearers like a thoroughbred strain- ing at the bit? Immediately before you speak, get, if possible, a thorough rest. The ideal thing is to undress and go 150 PUBLIC SPEAKING to bed for a few hours. If possible, follow that with a cold plunge and a vigorous rubdown. Better still, far better, take a swim. Charles Frohman used to say that he hired actors because of their vitality. The kind of acting or speaking that counts consumes a lot of nerve force and physical energy; and Frohman knew it. I have chopped down hickory trees and split logs; and I have talked to audiences for two hours at a time. I have found one of these tasks about as exhaust- ing as the other. During the War, Dudley Field Malone made a passionate appeal to a large audi- ence assembled in the Century Theatre, New York. At the climax of it, after speaking for an hour and a half, he fainted from sheer exhaustion and was carried unconscious from the stage. Sydney Smith described Daniel Webster as “a steam engine in trousers.” “The most successful speakers,” declared Beecher, “are men of great vitality and recupera- tive force, men who have preeminently the explosive power by which they can thrust their materials out. They are catapults and men go down before them.” “WEASEL WORDS” AND ONIONS Put energy behind what you say, and say it posi- tively. But don’t be too positive. Only an ignora- mus is positive about everything; but only a weak- ling prefaces every remark with an it seems to me, or perhaps , or in my opinion. The almost universal trouble with beginning speakers is not that they are too positive, but that KEEPING THE AUDIENCE AWAKE 151 they vitiate their talks with these timid phrases. I remember listening to a New York business man describe a motor trip through Connecticut. “Gn the left side of the road,” he said, “there seemed to be a field of onions.” Now, there is no seeming about onions. They either are or are not. And it does not require extraordinary powers to recognize an onion field when one sees it. Yet this shows to what absurd lengths a speaker will sometimes go. “Weasel words” is what Roosevelt called such expressions, for a weasel sucks the heart out of an egg, and leaves nothing but the empty shell. That is what these phrases do to your talk. Shrinking, apologetic tones and egg-shell phrases will not beget much confidence and conviction. Imagine business houses using such slogans as these : “It seems to us the Underwood is the machine you will eventually buy.” “In our opinion, the Pruden- tial has the strength of Gibraltar.” “We think you will use our flour eventually — why not now?” In 1896, when Bryan first ran for the presidency, I, as a boy, wondered why he so emphatically and so often declared that he would be elected, that McKinley would go down in defeat. The explana- tion is simple, Bryan knew that people in the mass cannot differentiate between emphasis and proof. He knew that if he said a thing often enough and vigorously enough, most of his hearers would end by believing it. The world’s great leaders have always thun- dered forth as if there were no possibility on top of the Seven Seas of anyone invalidating their as- sertions. When Buddha was dying he did not rea- 152 PUBLIC SPEAKING son or whine or argue; he spoke as one having authority: “Walk as I have commanded you.” The Koran, which has been the dominant factor in millions of lives, immediately following the pre- liminary prayer, opens with these words: “There is no doubt in this book; it is a direction.” When the jailer at Philippi asked Paul, “What must I do to be saved?” the answer was not an argu- ment, an equivocation, an it-seems-to-me or an I- should-think assertion. It came, a superior com- mand: “Believe on the Lord Jesus Christ, and thou shalt be saved.” But do not, as I have said, be too positive on all occasions. There are times, there are places, there are subjects, there are audiences, where too much positiveness will hinder rather than help. In general, the higher the level of intelligence of one’s hearers, the less successful mere forceful assertions will be. Thinking people want to be led, not driven. They want to have the facts presented and to draw their own conclusions. They like to be asked ques- tions, not to have a ceaseless stream of direct state- ments poured at them. LOVE YOUR AUDIENCE A few years ago I had to employ and train a number of public lecturers in England. After pain- ful and costly trials, three of them had to be dis- missed, and one had to be sent back three thousand miles to America. Their main trouble was that they were not genuinely interested in serving their audiences. They were chiefly concerned, not about KEEPING THE AUDIENCE AWAKE 153 others, but about themselves and their pay envel- opes. Everyone could feel it. They were cold to their audiences; and their audiences, in return, were cold to them. Consequently, these speakers re- mained sounding brasses and tinkling cymbals. The well known human race is very quick to detect whether a talk is coming from above the eyebrows or back of the breast bone. Even a dog can sense that. I have made a special study of Lincoln as a public speaker. He is undoubtedly the most loved man America has ever produced; and unquestionably he has delivered some of America’s best speeches. Al- though he was a genius in some ways, I am inclined to believe that his power with audiences was due, in no small measure, to his sympathy and honesty and goodness. He loved people. “His heart,” said his wife, “is as large as his arms are long.” He was Christlike. And two thousand years ago, one of the first books ever written on this art described the eloquent talker as “a good man skilled in speaking.” “The secret of my success,” said Madam Schu- mann-Heink, the famous prima donna, “is abso- lute devotion to the audience. I love my audiences. They are all my friends. I feel a bond with them the moment I step before them.” So that was the secret of her world-wide triumph. . . . Let us try to cultivate the same spirit. The finest thing in speaking is neither physical nor mental. It is spiritual. The Book that Daniel Webster had on his pillow while dying is a book that every speaker should have on his desk while living. 154 PUBLIC SPEAKING Jesus loved men and their hearts burned within them as He talked with them by the way. If you want a splendid text on public speaking, why not read your New Testament? SUMMARY 1. Every time you speak, you determine the atti- tude of your hearers toward what you say. If you are lackadaisical, they will be lackadaisical. If you are only mildly concerned, they will be only mildly concerned. If you are enthusiastic, they will be sure to catch something of your spirit. Enthusiasm is one of the biggest — if not the biggest — factors in delivery. 2. “The man who tries to be very serious or very witty,” says Martin W. Littleton, “may easily fail, but the speaker who appeals to you with real con- viction never fails. ... If he is really deeply con- vinced so that he has a message for you, his speech will go like a flame.” 3. In spite of the tremendous importance of this quality of contagious conviction and enthusiasm, most men lack it. 4. “The essence of a good speech,” says Pro- fessor Brander Matthews, “is that the speaker really has something which he really wants to say.” 5. Think over your facts, burn their real import- ance into your mind. Try your own enthusiasm before you attempt to convince others. 6. Establish a telegraphic communication be- tween your head and heart. We want you not only KEEPING THE AUDIENCE AWAKE 155 to give us the facts but to reveal your attitude towards those facts. 7. “Use what language you will, you can never say anything but what you are.” The big thing in a speech is not his words but the spirit of the man behind the words. 8. To develop earnestness, to feel enthusiastic,, act enthusiastic. Stand tall, look straight at your audience. Use emphatic gestures. 9. Above all else, open your mouth and speak so you can be heard. Many speakers cannot be heard thirty feet away. 10. When a country minister asked Henry Ward Beecher what to do when an audience went to sleep on a hot Sunday afternoon, Beecher replied, “Have an usher get a sharp stick and prod the preacher.” This is one of the best bits of advice ever given on the art of public speaking. xi. Don’t weaken your speech with “weasel” words, such as “it seems to me,” “in my humble opinion.” 12 . Love your audience. SPEECH BUILDING WORDS OFTEN MISPRONOUNCED “In spoken language, pronunciation is the most striking element, and thus it happens that it is, more than any other one thing, the most obvious test of general culture.” — From the preface to “18,000 Words Often Mispronounced ” by W. H. P. Phyfe. Do you sound the Vs capitalized in the follow- ing, as the “i” in ice? Do it. biography finis clientele tribunal digest (noun) viand (not veand) Do you sound the Vs and the Y 7 s capitalized in the following like the I in it! This is the correct sound. admirable anti antidote civilization conspiracy cowardice digestion diploma diplomacy divorce Fasclstl — ( f a-shis-ti ) financial fragile genuine heml- hYpocrisy indigestion Italian Italic lubricate nitro-glycerlne semi- since (not sens) mischievous (chiv-us» not she-vus ) ni KEEPING THE AUDIENCE AWAKE 157 The I in mercantile should be sounded, not as the e in eel, but as either i in it or i in ice. The E>s capitalized in the following should be Sounded as e in eel. abstEmious amEnable cafEteria ( e not a) crEdence hystEria pEnalize pEriod pEriodic sacrilEgious sEnile Do not say “crik” for “creek”; “ldik” for “clique” (klek) : “slik” for “sleek”; nor “soot” for “suite” (swet). The E’s capitalized in the following should be sounded as e in ebb. carburEtor eugEnics dEaf tEpid ephEmeral ERRORS IN ENGLISH “The language of the individual is one of the qualities by which he is judged.” Management of Men , E. L. Munson. Review. There are seven mistakes in the first paragraph of the following selection. The second paragraph contains six, and the third has seven. You will note that all the errors contained in these paragraphs have been considered in the course so far. He continued his story. “ 'I will be drownded/ thinks I, but I shall do the best I can and leave the rest to God/ 158 PUBLIC SPEAKING I laid down on a log but it wouldn’t leave me ride it. I set up as the end raised and run straight upon the top of a rock. “I shrunk from being hit by some piece of timber and et my heart from fear as I seen men sunk in the whirlpools. I would have went under surely or would have been hung by something catching around my neck, if I had stayed with the log. “But I looked around and seen the bank near at hand with a clear passage to it. I sprung from my perch and swum for all I knowed. When I reached shore, I sung out and rung the alarm bell. Then I hopped a horse and run him hard to reach you people in time.” New Study Material Like sometimes means similar to, as “His hat is like mine.” Occasionally, like means in the same manner as . As an example of this latter use, “He laughs like me.” Be very sure that you never use like to introduce a subject with a verb. You will find below two examples where it is used improperly. Observe them. Right Wrong It looks as if it might It looks like it might rain. rain. Talk as I do. Talk like I do. As — as is used in positive statements; so — as is used in negative statements. Right : She is as well as may be expected. Right : It is not so good as it was last time. Wrong: It is not as good as it was last time. Rule: Either and neither should be used only when referring to two things ; when designating one of three or more, use any one or none. KEEPING THE AUDIENCE AWAKE 159 Right: He had all three of his saddle horses in the show ring, but none of them got a ribbon. Wrong: He had all three of his saddle horses in the show ring, but neither of them got a ribbon. Right : He had two sons in the school but neither of them got honors. Wrong: He had two sons in the school but none of them got honors. Right : Either war or peace must be decided upon. Wrong: Either of three things must be passed upon by the commission. Rule: You , even though it refers to one person only, is never followed by was . Right: You were the only man there. Wrong: You was the only man there. Rule: Do not use except to join two clauses or sentences. For example: Right: You will not get the order unless you cut your price. Wrong: You will not get the order except you cut your price. Rule : The expression, had ought f is always in- correct. Examples are : Right: He ought to have taken the offer. Wrong: He had ought to have taken the offer. CORRECT USAGE OF WORDS Care — Caution. Care suggests watchful at- tention; caution is a stronger word and implies that strict observation must be exercised to avoid harm. 160 PUBLIC SPEAKING A department store marks a package of dishes, “Handle with care We exercise caution in cross- ing a condemned bridge, or caution may keep us from attempting it. Watchfulness looks for a pos- sible danger, zvariness for a probable one. You must be watchful when driving a machine in city traffic ; you must be wary in fording a swollen river. Concern implies a serious but more mild interest than is denoted by anxiety . One may be concerned about the outcome of an election, one feels anxious and distressed about a mother hurt in an accident. Solicitude is a stronger word than concern ; but sug- gests less mental disturbance than anxiety. Solici- tude often implies tender care; we speak of a parent’s solicitude for a child. Got — Secure — Receive. The correct mean- ing of got is to secure through your own de- sire and effort. In these sentences, for example, got is used incorrectly: “What has that got to do with it?” “Have you got time to listen?” “We have got to hurry.” In each of these sentences the word got should be dropped. It is not needed. It is incorrect. Say: “Have you time to listen?” It is all right to say: “I have got his prices,” if I have secured them. “I got the position I applied for,” is correct for it implies action on my part. But we violate the laws of good usage when we say, “We got your letter this morning,” unless, of# course, we made a special trip or effort to get it. If the post- man brought it, we received it. KEEPING THE AUDIENCE AWAKE 161 VOICE EXERCISE— BREATH CONTROL “If I were to teach a young girl right at this moment,” declared Madame Julia Claussen, a well- known concert singer, during the course of an inter- view, “I would simply ask her to take a deep breath, and note the expansion at the waist just above the diaphragm. Then I would ask her to say as many words as possible upon that breath, at the same time having the muscles adjacent to the diaphragm to support the breath; that is, to sustain it and not collapse or try to push it up. The trick is to get the most tone, not with the most breath, but with the least breath and especially the very least possible strain at the throat which must be kept in a floating, gossamer-like condition all the time. . . . For me the most difficult vowel is “ah.” The throat then is most open and the breath stream most difficult to control properly. Therefore I make it a habit to begin my practice with oo, oh, ah, ay, ee in succession.” Very good, Madame Julia Claussen. We are not young girls, and neither are we interested in sing- ing; but we are going to accept your suggestions and use them to improve our speaking voices. First, let us take a deep breath, as she suggests. Start to yawn as you drink it in, deep, now, deep; feel your pqrous lungs expanding like a toy balloon; feel them pushing out the lower ribs at both sides and in the back. Feel them shoving down and flattening out that arched muscle called the dia- phragm. Give your principal attention to the dia- 162 PUBLIC SPEAKING phragm. It is a soft muscle. It needs strength- ening. Now, before the yawn breaks, with your throat open, begin to sing “ah.” Sing it for as long a time as your supply of breath will permit. How long will that be ? That depends upon how good your breath control is. The natural tendency will be for your deep breath to rush out suddenly like air from a punctured balloon. Why? Because the lungs are elastic, they are expanded now, and they want to contract. The floating ribs have been pushed outward by the extending lungs ; and they are tend- ing now to press the air out of the lungs. The diaphragm, too, unless you control it, will quickly resume its arched position, pushing the breath out of the inflated porous lungs. However, if you permit the air to escape with a rush, your tones will be breathy. They will not be clear. They will not be pleasant. They will not have carrying power. How, then, are we to control this escape of carrying power? “It is im- possible,” said Caruso, “to sing artistically without a thorough mastery of breath control.” It is also impossible to have the ideal speaking voice without it. How, then, are we to set about controlling the escape of the breath? Unless we are careful, our first tendency may be to control it by tightening the throat. Than that, what could be more ill advised? In the words of Madame Julia Claussen, the throat “must be kept in a floating, gossamer- like condition all the time.” KEEPING THE AUDIENCE AWAKE 163 The throat should have nothing to do with the escape of the breath. The throat Isn’t pressing against our expanded lungs. So we should direct our control to the things that are: the diaphragm and the ribs. Control them. Let them press easily, gently, as you sing “ah.” See how long a time you can hold that tone firm, without wavering. Now let us try the other notes that Madame Julia Claussen suggests: “ oo , oh, ah, ay, ee ” CHAPTER VI ESSENTIAL ELEMENTS IN SUCCESSFUL SPEAKING “I never allow myself to become discouraged under any circumstances. . . . The three great essentials to achieve anything worth while are , first , hard work ; second , stick - to-itiveness, third, common sense .” — Thomas A. Edison . “Much good work is lost for the lack of a little more ?’ — E. H. Harriman. “Never despair, but, if you do, work on in despair .” — Edmund Burke . “Patience is the best remedy for every trouble .” — Plautus, 22 5 B.C. “Let patience have her perfect work .” — Favorite motto of Dr. Russell H. Conwell. “They can conquer who believe they can . . . . He has not learned the first lesson of life who does not every day surmount a fear.” — Emerson. “Victory is will.” - — Napoleon. “I believe that the intense purpose, the moral integrity, the self -loyalty that makes a man carry through whatever he undertakes, is the biggest single factor in fitting his mind for great accomplishments.”— ^Frederick B. Robinson, Presi- dent of the College of the City of New York . “When once a decision is reached and execution is the order of the day, disiniss absolutely all responsibility and care about the outcome — Professor William James. CHAPTER VI ESSENTIAL ELEMENTS IN SUCCESS- FUL SPEAKING The day these lines are written, January 5th, is the anniversary of the death of Sir Ernest Shackle- ton. He died while steaming southward on the good ship “Quest- to explore the Antarctic. The first thing that attracted one’s eyes on going aboard the “Quest” were these lines engraved on a brass plate : “If you can dream and not make dreams your master; If you can think and not make thoughts your aim; If you can meet with triumph and disaster ; And treat those two imposters just the same, “If you can force your heart, and nerve, and sinew To serve your turn long after they are gone; And so hold on when there is nothing in you Except the will which says to them, ‘Hold on,' “If you can fill the unforgiving minute With sixty seconds’ worth of distance run, Yours is the earth and everything that’s in it, And, what is more, you’ll be a man, my son.” “The spirit of the Quest,” Shackleton called those verses; and, truly, they are the proper spirit with which a man should start out to reach the South. Pole or to gain confidence in public speaking. 168 PUBLIC SPEAKING But that is not the spirit, I regret to add, in which all men begin the study of public speaking. Years ago, when I first engaged in educational work, I was astounded to learn how large a percentage of students who enrolled in night schools of all sorts grew weary and fainted by the wayside before their goals were attained. The number is both lament- able and amazing. It is a sad commentary on human nature. This is the sixth lesson of this course, and I know from experience that some of the men who are reading these lines are already growing dis- heartened because they have not, in six short weeks, conquered their fear of audiences and gained self- confidence. What a pity, for u how poor are they that have not patience. What wound did ever heal but by degrees?” THE NECESSITY OF PERSISTENCE When we start to learn any new thing, like French, or golf, or public speaking, we never ad- vance steadily. We do not improve gradually. We do it by sudden jerks, by abrupt starts. Then we remain stationary a time, or we may even slip back and lose some of the ground we have previ- ously gained. These periods of stagnation, or retro- gression, are well known by all psychologists; and they have been named “plateaus in the curve of learning.” Students of public speaking will some- times be stalled for weeks on one of these plateaus. Work as hard as they may, they cannot get off it. The weak ones give up in despair. Those with grit ESSENTIAL ELEMENTS 169 persist, and they find that suddenly, overnight, with- out their knowing how T or why it has happened, they have made great progress. They have lifted from the plateau like an aeroplane. Abruptly they have gotten the knack of the thing. Abruptly they have acquired naturalness and force and confidence in their speaking. You may always, as we have noted elsewhere in these pages, experience some fleeting fear, some shock, some nervous anxiety the first few moments you face an audience. John Bright felt it to the end of his busy career; so did Gladstone; so did Bishop Wilberforce; so did a score of other eminent speakers. Even the greatest of the musicians have felt it in spite of their innumerable public appear- ances. Paderewski always fidgeted nervously with his cuffs immediately before he sat down at the piano. Nordica felt her heart racing. So did Sem- brich. So did Emma Eames. But it vanished quickly, all of this audience fear, like a mist in the August sunshine. Their experience will be yours. If you will but persevere, you will soon eradicate everything but this initial fear; and that will be initial fear, and nothing more. After the first few sentences, you will have control of yourself. You will be speaking with positive pleasure. KEEPING EVERLASTINGLY AT IT One time a young man who aspired to study law, wrote to Lincoln for advice, and Lincoln replied: “If you are resolutely determined to make a lawyer 170 PUBLIC SPEAKING of yourself, the thing is more than half done al- ready. ... Always bear in mind that your own resolution to succeed is more important than any other one thing.” Lincoln knew. He had gone through it all. He had never, in his entire life, had more than a total of one year’s schooling. And books? Lincoln once said he had walked and borrowed every book within fifty miles of his home. A log fire was usually kept going all night in the cabin. Sometimes he read by the light of that fire. There were cracks between the logs, and Lincoln often kept a book sticking in a crack. As soon as it was light enough to read in the morning, he rolled over on his bed of leaves, rubbed his eyes, pulled out the book and began de vouring it. He walked twenty and thirty miles to hear a speaker and, returning home, he practised his talks everywhere — in the fields, in the woods, before the crowds gathered at Jones’ grocery at Gentryville. He joined literary and debating societies in New Salem and Springfield, and practised speaking on the topics of the day much as you are doing now as a member of this course. A sense of inferiority always troubled him. In the presence of women he was shy and dumb. When he courted Mary Todd he used to sit in the parlor, bashful and silent, unable to find words, listening while she did the talking. Yet that was the man who, by practise and home study, made himself into the speaker who debated with the accomplished orator, Senator Douglas. That was the man who, at Gettysburg, and again in his second inaugural ESSENTIAL ELEMENTS 171 address, rose to heights of eloquence that have rarely been attained in all the annals of mankind. Small wonder that, in view of his own terrific handicaps and pitiful struggle, he wrote: “If you are resolutely determined to make a lawyer out of yourself, the thing is more than half done already.” There is an excellent picture of Abraham Lincoln in the President’s office. “Often when I had some matter to decide,” said Theodore Roosevelt, “some- thing involved and difficult to dispose of, some- thing where there were conflicting rights and inter- ests, I would look up at Lincoln, try to imagine him in my place, try to figure out what he would do in the same circumstances. It may sound odd to you, but, frankly, it seemed to make my troubles easier of solution.” Why not try Roosevelt’s plan? Why not, if you are discouraged and feeling like giving up the fight to make a speaker of yourself, why not pull out of your pocket one of the five dollar bills that bear a likeness of Lincoln, and ask yourself what he would do under the circumstances. You know what he would do. You know what he did do. After he had been beaten by Stephen A. Douglas in the race for the U. S. Senate, he admonished his followers not to “give up after one nor one hundred defeats.” THE CERTAINTY OF REWARD How I wish I could get you to prop this book Dpen on your breakfast table every morning for a week until you had memorized these words from 172 PUBLIC SPEAKING Professor William James, the famous Harvard psychologist : “Let no youth have any anxiety about the upshot of his education, whatever the line of it may be. If he keeps faith- fully busy each hour of the working day, he may safely leave the final result to itself. He can, with perfect cer- tainty, count on waking up some fine morning to find him- self one of the competent ones of his generation, in whatever pursuit he may have singled out.” And now, with the renowned Professor James to fall back upon, I shall go so far as to say that if you pursue this course faithfully and with enthusi- asm, and keep right on practising intelligently, you may confidently hope to wake up one fine morning and find yourself one of the competent speakers of your city or community. Regardless of how fantastic that may sound to you now, it is true as a general principle . Excep- tions, of course, there are. A man with an inferior mentality and personality, and with nothing to talk about, is not going to develop into a local Daniel Webster; but, within reason t the assertion is correct. Let me illustrate by a concrete example : Former Governor Stokes of New Jersey attended the closing banquet of a public speaking class at Trenton. He remarked that the talks that he had heard the students make that evening were as good as the speeches that he had heard in the House of Representatives and Senate at Washington. Those Trenton speeches were made by business men who had been tongue-tied with audience-fear a few months previously. They were not incipient ESSENTIAL ELEMENTS 173 Ciceros, those New Jersey business men; they were typical of the business men one finds in any Ameri- can city. Yet they woke up one fine morning to find themselves among the competent speakers of their city. The entire question of your success as a speaker hinges upon only two things — your native ability, and the depth and strength of your desires. “In almost any subject,” said Professor James, “your passion for the subject will save you. If you only care enough for a result, you will most certainly attain it. If you wish to be rich, you will be rich; if you wish to be learned, you will be learned; if you wish to be good, you will be good. Only you must, then, really wish these things and wish them with exclusiveness, and not wish at the same time a hundred other incompatible things just as strongly.” And Professor James might have added, with equal truth, “If you want to be a confident public speaker, you will be a confident public speaker. But you must really wish it.” I have known and carefully watched literally thousands of men trying to gain self-confidence and the ability to talk in public. Those that succeeded were, in only a few instances, men of unusual bril- liancy. For the most part, they were the ordinary run of business men that you will find in your own home town. But they kept on. Smarter men some- times got discouraged or too deeply immersed in money making, and they did not get very far; but the ordinary individual with grit and singleness of purpose — at the end of the chapter, he was at the top. 174 PUBLIC SPEAKING That is only human and natural. Don’t you see the same thing occurring all the time in commerce and the professions? Rockefeller said some time ago that the first essential for success in business was patience. It is likewise one of the first essentials for success in this course. Marshal Foch led to victory by far the greatest army the world has ever seen, and he declared that he had only one virtue : never despairing. When the French had retreated to the Marne in 1914, General Joffre instructed the generals under him in charge of two million men to stop retreating and begin an offensive. This new battle, one of the most decisive in the world’s history, had raged for two days when General Foch, in command of Joffre’s center, sent him one of the most impres- sive messages in military records : “My center gives way. My right recedes. The situation is excellent. I shall attack.” That attack saved Paris. So, my dear speaker, when the fight seems hardest and most hopeless, when your center gives way and your right recedes, “the situation is excellent.” Attack! Attack! Attack, and you will save the best part of your manhood — your courage and faith. CLIMBING THE “WILD KAISER” A few summers ago, I started out to scale a peak in the Austrian Alps called the Wilder Kaiser. Baedeker said that the ascent was difficult, and a guide was essential for amateur climbers. We, a ESSENTIAL ELEMENTS 175 friend and 1, had none, and we were certainly ama- teurs; so a third party asked us if we thought we were going to succeed. “Of course,” we replied, “What makes you think so?” he inquired. “Others have done it without guides,” I said, “so I know it is within reason, and I never undertake anything thinking defeat ” As an Alpinist, I am the merest, bungling novice ; but that is the proper psychology for anything from essaying public speaking to an assault on Mount Everest. Think success in this course. See yourself in your imagination talking in public with perfect self- control. It is easily in your power to do this . Believe that you will succeed . Believe it firmly and you will then do what is necessary to bring success about . Admiral Dupont gave half a dozen excellent rea- sons why he had not taken his gunboats into Charleston harbor. Admiral Farragut listened in- tently to the recital. “But there was another rea- son that you have not mentioned,” he replied. “What is that?” questioned Admiral Dupont. The answer came : “You did not believe you could doit.” The most valuable thing that most members ac- quire from a course in public speaking is an increased confidence in themselves, an additional faith in their ability to achieve. And than that, what is more important for one’s success in almost any undertaking? 176 PUBLIC SPEAKING THE WILL TO WIN Here is a bit of sage advice from Elbert Hub- bard that I cannot refrain from quoting. If the average man would only apply and live the wisdom contained in it, he would be happier, more pros- perous : “Whenever you go out of doors, draw the chin in, carry the crown of the head high and fill the lungs to the utmost ; drink in the sunshine; greet your friends with a smile and put soul into every handclasp. Do not fear being mis- understood and do not waste a minute thinking about your enemies. Try to fix firmly in your mind what you would like to do, and then, without veering of direction, you will move straight to the goal. Keep your mind on the great and splendid things you would like to do, and then, as the days go gliding by, you will find yourself unconsciously seizing upon the opportunities that are required for the fulfilment of your desire, just as the coral insect takes from the running tide the elements it needs. Picture in your mind the able, earnest, useful person you desire to be, and the thought you hold is hourly transforming you into that particular individual. ... Thought is supreme. Preserve a right mental attitude — the attitude of courage, frankness and good cheer. To think rightly is to create. All things come through desire and every sincere prayer is answered. We become like that on which our hearts are fixed. Carry your chin in and the crown of your head high. We are gods in the chrysalis.” Napoleon, Wellington, Lee, Grant, Foch — all great military leaders have recognized that an army’s will to win and its confidence in its ability to win, do more than any other one thing to deter- mine its success. ESSENTIAL ELEMENTS 177 “Ninety thousand conquered men / 5 says Marshall Foch, “retire before ninety thousand conquering men only because they have had enough, because they no longer believe in victory, because they are demoralized — at the end of their moral resistance.” In other words, the ninety thousand retiring men are not really whipped physically ; but they are con- quered because they are whipped mentally, because they have lost their courage and confidence. There is no hope for an army like that. There is no hope for a man like that. Chaplain Frazier, the ranking chaplain of the U.S. Navy, interviewed those who wished to enlist for the chaplaincy service during the World War. When asked what qualities were essential for the success of a navy chaplain, he replied with four G’s : “Grace, gumption, grit, and guts ” Those are also the requisites for success in speak- ing. Take them as your motto. Take this Robert Service poem as your battle song : “When you’re lost in the wild, and you’re scared as a child. And death looks you bang in the eye. And you’re sore as a boil, it’s according to Hoyle To cock your revolver and . , . die. But the code of a man, says : Tight all you can,’ And self-dissolution is barred. In hunger and woe, oh, it’s easy to blow It’s the heil-served-for-breakfast that’s hard. “You’re sick of the game! ‘Well, now, that’s a shame/ You’re young and you’re brave and you’re bright. ‘You’ve had a raw deal !’ I know — but don’t squeak Buck up, do your damnedest, and fight. It’s the plugging away that will win you the day, 178 PUBLIC SPEAKING So don't be a piker, old pard ! Just draw on your grit; it's so easy to quit: It's the keeping-your-chin-up that's hard. “It's easy to cry that you're beaten — and die. It’s easy to crawfish and crawl ; But to fight and to fight when hope's out of sight. Why, that’s the best game of them all! And though you come out of each gruelling bout All broken and beaten and scarred, Just have one more try — it's dead easy to die, It's the keeping-on-living that’s hard. SUMMARY 1. We never learn anything — be it golf, French, or public speaking — by means of gradual improve- ment. We advance by sudden jerks and abrupt starts. Then we may remain stationary for a few weeks, or even lose some of the proficiency we have gained. Psychologists call these periods of stagna- tion “plateaus in the curve of learning.” We may strive hard for a long time and not be able to get off one of these “plateaus” and onto an upward ascent again. Some men, not realizing this curious fact about the way we progress, get discouraged on these plateaus and abandon all effort. That is ex- tremely regrettable, for if they were to persist, if they were to keep on practising, they would suddenly find that they had lifted like an aeroplane and made tremendous progress again overnight. 2. You may never be able to speak without some nervous anxiety just before you begin. Bright, Gladstone, Bishop Wilber force, to the end of their careers, experienced some initial nervousness. But, ESSENTIAL ELEMENTS 179 if you will persevere, you will soon eradicate every- thing but this initial fear; and, after you have spoken for a few seconds, that too will disappear. 3. Professor James has pointed out that one need have no anxiety about the upshot of his edu- cation, that if he keeps faithfully busy, “he can, with perfect certainty, count on waking up some fine morning to find himself one of the competent ones of his generation, in whatever pursuit he may have singled out.” This psychological truth that the famous sage of Harvard has enunciated, applies to you and your efforts in learning to speak. There can be no question about that. The men who have succeeded in this course have not been, as a general rule, men of extraordinary ability. But they were endowed with persistence and dogged determina- tion. They kept on. They arrived. 4. Think success in your public speaking work. You will then do the things necessary to bring suc- cess about. 5. If you get discouraged, try Roosevelt’s plan of looking at Lincoln’s picture and asking yourself what he would have done under similar circum- stances. 6. The ranking chaplain of the U. S. Navy during the world war said that the qualities essen- tial for the success of a chaplain in the service could be enumerated with four words commencing with G. What are they? SPEECH BUILDING WORDS OFTEN MISPRONOUNCED Many persons have the careless habit of dropping the g in words ending in ing. To correct this ten- dency the following passage from Southey’s “The Cataract of Lodore” should be read aloud daily with distinctness and precision until the student’s own ears become sensitive to his sins of omission* The cataract strong Then plunges along, Striking and raging As if a war waging Its caverns and rocks among; Rising and leaping, Sinking and creeping, Swelling and sweeping, Showering and springing, Flying and flinging, Writhing and wringing, Eddying and whisking, Spouting and frisking, Turning and twisting, Around and around With endless rebound : Smiting and fighting, A sight to delight in; Confounding, astounding, Dizzying and deafening the ear with its sound 0 Collecting, projecting, Receding and speeding, 180 ESSENTIAL ELEMENTS 181 And shocking and rocking, And darting and parting, And threading and spreading, And whizzing and hissing, And dropping and skipping, And hitting and splitting, And shining and twining, And rattling and battling, And shaking and quaking, And pouring and roaring, And waving and raving, And tossing and crossing, And flowing and going, And running and stunning, And foaming and roaming, And dinning and spinning, And dropping and hopping, And working and jerking, And guggling and struggling, And heaving and cleaving, And moaning and groaning, And glittering and frittering, And gathering and feathering, And whitening and brightening, And quivering and shivering, And hurrying and skurrying, And thundering and floundering; Dividing and gliding and sliding, And falling and brawling and sprawling, And driving and riving and striving, And sprinkling and twinkling and wrinkling, And sounding and bounding and rounding, And bubbling and troubling and doubling, And grumbling and rumbling and tumbling, And clattering and battering and shattering; Retreating and beating and meeting and sheeting Delaying and straying and playing and spraying, Advancing and prancing and glancing and dancing, Recoiling, turmoiling and toiling and boiling, 182 PUBLIC SPEAKING And gleaming and streaming and steaming and beaming, And rushing and flushing and brushing and gushing, And flapping and rapping and clapping and slapping, And curling and whirling and purling and twirling, And thumping and plumping and bumping and jumping, And dashing and flashing and splashing and clashing ; And so never ending, but always descending, Sounds and motions forever and ever are blending, All at once and all o’er, with a mighty uproar, And this way the water comes down at Lodore. ERRORS IN ENGLISH “There is no need to tell an experienced man of the world what books you have read, with whom you have been in the habit of associating, or what your degree of culture is. He can learn all these things from your speech. ‘Thy conver- sation betrayeth thee.’ Every sentence you utter betrays its source. He can tell whether your speech is pauperized or vulgarized by association with the ignorant and the vulgar, or enriched and refined by companionship with the well-bred and educated.” — Orison S. Marden. Review . There are five errors in the following paragraph : As you was the only man there, you had ought to have offered to help. Neither of the three ladies could do it like you could. They did not know you as intimately as we do and may think you boorish. New Study Material . Rule: A singular sub- ject demands a singular verb. Right: If coffee doesn't agree, use Postum. Wrong: “If coffee don't agree, use Postum.” — « Advertisement. Right: The landlord, as near as I can find out, doesn't intend to make any repairs. ESSENTIAL ELEMENTS 183 Wrong: John Adams, a short time before his death, in speaking of his ill health, said to Daniel Webster: “I am a poor tenant occupying a house much shattered by time. It sways and trembles with every wind, and has in fact almost gone to decay; and, what is worse, sir, the landlord, as near as I can find out, don’t intend to make any repairs.” Right: A sack of potatoes was sitting by the stove. Wrong: A sack of potatoes were sitting by the stove. Rule: Neither and either, as pronouns, always require a singular verb. For example: Right: Neither of the offers was accepted. Wrong: Neither of the offers were accepted. Right: Either of the houses is suitable. Wrong: Either of the houses are suitable. Rule: If a first personal pronoun is used with some other word or words in a compound subject, it should stand second in accordance with courtesy. The verb must agree with this pronoun in number if or is used as the connecting word. For example: Right : He or I am going. Wrong: He or I are going. Right : The school in a body, or I as a representa- tive, am going. Wrong: The school in a body, or / as a repre- sentative, are going. For the sake of euphony, it is better to avoid such awkward construction even though it may be cor- rect. It is much easier to say “Either the school in a body will attend, or I shall go as its representa- 184 PUBLIC SPEAKING Rule: There is always some difficulty in the use of verbs after what are known as collective nouns. A collective noun is one that stands for a group or a class considered as a unit. The singular verb is always used when the group is considered as a unit. For example: “The jury is ready to bring in its verdict.” Occasionally, the component parts of the group are considered as acting each for himself or as having diverse opinions. In this case the verb must be plural. For example : “The jury were divided in their opinions.” Rule : Certain words denoting quantity are usu- ally followed by the word of. Such words are plenty , abundance f residence f rest , variety f etc. In this class would be included fractions/ In all such cases, if of is followed by a noun denoting a plural number, a plural verb must be used. If there is a singular subject, of course a singular verb is the one that is correct. Right: Nine-tenths of the land is under water. Right: One-quarter of the men were without in- telligence. Right: Plenty of people are without means of support. Right : A variety of silks were on the counter. Rule: Occasionally we speak about something that is plural in form but which still represents a singular thing. In this case it takes the singular vtrb. Example ; Right : Six dollars is too dear. Right: Two years is a long sentence,, ESSENTIAL ELEMENTS 185 CORRECT USAGE OF WORDS Clear — Translucent. Water may be dear; but ground glass, which allows light, but not form or color, to pass through it, is translucent . Compare — Contrast. To compare things is to seek qualities they possess in common; to con- trast is to search for differences. You might com- pare a Ford to a cheap car , but you would contrast it with a Pierce-Arrow. Compulsion — Obligation. Compulsion means forced by physical powers; obligation refers to a moral necessity. During the war some who felt no obligation to join the army were compelled to put on khaki. Concise — Brief. A concise address is con- densed; a brief address is merely short. Trite suggests a loss of novelty and interest by constant use. The hackneyed thing is worn and commonplace. The word comes from the hackney carriage or hacks that were used and knocked about by everyone. Banal , meaning commonplace, was originally a feudal word. A ban or proclamation was issued decreeing that every tenant should bake his bread in the common oven and use the common mill. This came to be called the banal mill, so the word banal means much used and common to all. Stale suggests something that is tasteless with age. Insipid means without taste or flavor. Vapid sug- gests the loss of life and flavor. 186 PUBLIC SPEAKING VOICE EXERCISE— USING THE TIP OF THE TONGUE Caruso attributed much of his success as a sLiger to his extraordinary command of his tongue. So does Madame Galli-Curci. So do a host of other singers. Caruso trained until the tip of his tongue was extremely strong and agile. He made the tip do all the work while the back of the tongue lay inert and relaxed. That is extremely important, for the muscles at the back of the tongue are con- nected with the larynx. So using that part of the tongue causes unnecessary tension and constriction in the throat. One of the very best ways to develop strength and activity in the end of the tongue is by trilling the sound of R. Sound it incessantly like a tattoo. Imitate a machine gun in the distance. It is not merely a succession of R sounds that is wanted; it is a trill. Did you ever see the rattles on a rattle- snake vibrating rapidly in anger just before he strikes? If so, you will have some idea of the way the tip of your tongue ought to trill against the roof of your mouth just back of your front teeth. Haven’t you heard a woodpecker on a rotten limb in early spring? The trill you make ought to be as rapid as his staccato. This trilling is something like the roll of a kettle drum. Start to say burr ; when you come to the R sound, break into a trill. Brrrrrrrrrrrr. Try the same exercise with cur and slur. Now start to yawn, breathing deeply, feeling the activity in the middle of the body. . . . Before you ESSENTIAL ELEMENTS 187 break into the yawn, start to trill the sound of j R. Trill it as long as your breath will permit. Use the methods of breath control described in Chap- ter V. Trilling the R is an important exercise; but do not imagine that doing it and the other voice ex- ercises in class once a week for sixty seconds and ignoring them the rest of the time, will produce the desired results. “The gods,” said Emerson, “sell everything at a fair price.” The fair price that you must pay for voice improvement is practise, practise, practise. These exercises, however, do not need to consume any of the time usually devoted to other things; you can do them mornings in your bathtub. Read the following poem aloud often. Feel the tip of the tongue touching quickly, decisively, against the back of the teeth. Feel the tip of it striking off the emphatic ideas with a neat, elastic touch. SONG OF THE BROOK I come from haunts of coot and hern, I make a sudden sally, And sparkle out among the fern, To bicker down a valley. By thirty hills I hurry down, Or slip between the ridges, By twenty thorps, a little town, And half a hundred bridges. Till at last by Philip’s farm I flow To join the brimming river, For men may come and men may go, But I go on forever. 188 PUBLIC SPEAKING I chatter over stony ways, In little sharps and trebles, I bubble into eddying bays, I babble on the pebbles. With many a curve my banks I fret By many a field and fallow, And many a fairy foreland set With willow-weed and mallow. I chatter, chatter, as I flow To join the brimming river, For men may come and men may go ? But I go on forever. I wind about, and in and out, With here a blossom sailing, And here and there a lusty trout, And here and there a grayling, And here and there a foamy flake Upon me, as I travel With many a silvery water-break Above the golden gravel, And draw them all along, and flow To join the brimming river, For men may come and men may go* But I go on forever. I steal by lawns and grassy plots, I slide by hazel covers; I move the sweet forget-me-nots That grow for happy lovers. I slip, I slide, I gloom, I glance, Among my skimming swallows; I make the netted sunbeam dance Against my sandy shallows. ESSENTIAL ELEMENTS 189 I murmur under moon and stars In brambly wildernesses; I linger by my shingly bars, I loiter round my cresses; And out again I curve and flow To join the brimming river, For men may come and men may go, But I go on forever. — Tennyson. After you have read this poem through once in the manner we have just indicated, read it a second time, employing the principles that Madame Julia Claussen discussed in the voice exercises given in Chapter V. Breathe from the diaphragm. Prepare to yawn. Speak. Think of drinking in the sound up into the head chambers — not into the throat. Control your diaphragm. Keep the air from rush- ing out. See if you can read the entire poem dis- tinctly with four breathso CHAPTER VII THE SECRET OF GOOD DELIVERY “Know the fact — huff the fact. For the essential thing is heat , and heat comes from sincerity — Emerson. “It is necessary to have somethinff more than knowledge of the subject. You must have earnestness in its presentation . You must feel that you have something to say that people ought to hear V — Bryan. Let the counsel of thine own heart stand, for no man is more faithful unto thee than it. It is sometimes wont to shoiv thee more than seven watchmen who sit above in a high tower ” — Kipling. “Do one thing at a time , and do that one thing as if your life depended upon itr- — Motto of Eugene Grace , President Bethlehem Steel Company . “ A good sermon or a good address is most effective when it is sustained conversation in order of thought , tone, spontaneous gesture , and the force which the interest in the subject naturally and necessarily inspires. Let men team in every-day conversation to speak with accuracy , naturalness, and earnestness, and when they rise to speak on the rostrum, in the pulpit , at the bar, they will express themselves spontaneously and naturally and people will forget all about f oratory / as they ought to do. JJ — Bishop lohn H. Vincent. CHAPTER VII THE SECRET OF GOOD DELIVERY Shortly after the close of the war, I met two brothers in London, Sir Ross and Sir Keith Smith, They had just made the first aeroplane flight from London to Australia, had won the fifty thousand dollar prize offered by the Australian government, had created a sensation throughout the British Em- pire, and had been knighted by the King. Captain Hurley, a well-known scenic photogra- pher, had flown with them over a part of their trip, taking motion pictures; so I helped them pre- pare an illustrated travel talk of their flight and trained them in the delivery of it. They gave it twice daily for four months in Philharmonic Hall, London, one speaking in the afternoon and the other at night. They had had identically the same experience, had sat side by side as they flew half way around the world; and they delivered the same talk, almost word for word. Yet, somehow it didn’t sound like the same talk at all. There is something besides the mere words in a talk which counts. It is the flavor with which they are delivered. “It is not so much what you say as how you say it.” 194 PUBLIC SPEAKING I once sat beside a young woman at a public concert who was reading, as Paderewski played them, the notes of a Mazurka by Chopin. She was mystified. She couldn’t understand. His fingers were touching precisely the same notes that hers had touched when she had played it; yet her rendition had been commonplace, and his was in- spired, a thing of surpassing beauty, a perform- ance that held the audience enthralled. It was not the mere notes that he touched; it was the way he touched them, a feeling, an artistry, a personality that he put into the touching that made all the difference between mediocrity and genius. Brullof, the great Russian painter, once cor- rected a pupil’s study. The pupil looked in amaze- ment at the altered drawing, exclaiming: “Why, you have touched it only a tiny bit, but it is quite another thing.” Brullof replied: “Art begins where the tiny bit begins.” That is as true of speaking as it is of painting and of Paderewski’s playing. The same thing holds true when one is touching words. There is an old saying in the English Par- liament that everything depends upon the manner in which one speaks and not upon the matter, Quintilian said that long ago when England was one of the outlying colonies of Rome. Like most old sayings, it needs to be taken cum grano salts; but good delivery will make very thin matter go a very long way. I have often noticed in college contests that it is not always the speaker with the best material who wins. Rather, it is the THE SECRET OF GOOD DELIVERY 195 speaker who can talk so well that his material sounds best. “Three things matter in a speech,” Lord Morley once observed with gay cynicism, “who says it, how he says it, and what he says — and, of the three, the last matters the least.” An exaggeration? Yes, but scratch the surface of it and you will find the truth shining through. Edmund Burke wrote speeches so excellent in logic and reasoning and composition that they are to-day studied as classic models of oration in half the colleges of the land; yet Burke, as a speaker, was a notorious failure. He didn’t have the ability to deliver his gems, to make them interesting and forceful; so he was called “the dinner bell” of the House of Commons. When he arose to talk, the other members coughed and shuffled and went out in droves. You can throw a steel-jacketed bullet at a man with all your might, and you cannot make even a dent in his clothing. But put powder behind a tal- low candle and you can shoot it through a pine board. Many a tallow-candle speech with powder makes, I regret to say, more of an impression than a steel-jacketed talk with no force behind it. Look well, therefore, to your delivery. WHAT IS DELIVERY? What does a department store do when it “de- livers” the article you have bought? ■ Does the driver just toss the package into the backyard and let it go at that? Is merely getting a thing out of 196 PUBLIC SPEAKING one’s own hands the same as getting it delivered? The messenger boy with a telegram delivers the “wire” into the direct possession of the person for whom it is intended. But do all speakers? Let me give you an illustration that is typical of the fashion in which thousands of men talk. I happened on one occasion to be stopping in Miir- ren, a summer resort in the Swiss Alps. I was living at a hotel operated by a London company; and they usually sent out from England a couple of lecturers each week to talk to the guests. One of them was a well-known English novelist. Her topic was “The Future of the Novel.” She ad- mitted that she had not selected the subject her- self; and, the long and short of it was that she had nothing to say about it that she really cared enough about saying to make it worth while ex- pressing. She had hurriedly made some rambling notes; and she stood before the audience, ignoring her hearers, not even looking at them, staring sometimes over their heads, sometimes at her notes, sometimes at the floor. She called off her words into the primeval void with a far-away look in her eyes and a far-away ring in her voice. That kind of performance isn’t delivering a talk at all. It is a soliloquy. It has no sense of com- munication. And that is the first essential of good talking: a sense of communication. The audi- ence must feel that there is a message being de- livered straight from the mind and heart of the speaker to their minds and their hearts. The kind of talk I have just described might just as well have been spoken out in the sandy, waterless wastes THE SECRET OF GOOD DELIVERY 19? of the Gobi desert. In fact, it sounded as if it were being delivered in some such spot rather than to a group of living human beings. This matter of delivering a talk is, at the same t time, a very simple and a very intricate process. It is also a very much misunderstood and abused one. THE SECRET OF GOOD DELIVERY An enormous amount of nonsense and twaddle has been written about delivery. It has been shrouded in rules and rites and made mysterious. Old-fashioned “elocution,” that abomination in the sight of God and man, has often made it ridiculous, t- The business man, going to the library or book shop, has found volumes on “oratory” that were utterly useless. In spite of progress in other directions, > in almost every state in the Union to-day, school- boys are still being forced to recite the ornate “oratory” of Webster and Ingersoll — a thing that is as much out of style and as far removed from the spirit of this age as the hats worn by Mrs. Ingersoll and Mrs. Webster would be if they were resurrected to-day. * An entirely new school of speaking has sprung up since the Civil War. In keeping with the spirit of the times, it is as modern as the Saturday Evening Post, direct as a telegram, businesslike as an auto- mobile advertisement. The verbal fireworks that were once the vogue would no longer be tolerated by an audience in this year of grace. A modern audience, regardless of whether it is fifteen people at a business conference or a thtiusand 198 PUBLIC SPEAKING people under a tent, wants the speaker to talk just as directly as he would in a chat, and in the same general manner that he would employ in speaking to one of them in conversation. In the same manner, but not with the same amount of force. If he tries that, he will hardly be heard. In order to appear natural he has to use much more energy in talking to forty people than he does in talking to one; just as a statue on top of a building has to be of heroic size in order to make it appear of lifelike proportions to an ob- server on the ground. At the close of Mark Twain’s lecture in a Nevada mining camp, an old prospector approached him and inquired: “Be them your natural tones of eloquence?” That is what the audience wants : “your natural tones of eloquence,” enlarged a bit. Speak to the Chamber of Commerce just as you would to John Henry Smith. What is a meeting of the Chamber of Commerce, after all, but a mere collection of John Henry Smiths? Won’t the same methods that are successful with those men individ- ually be successful with them collectively? I have just described the delivery of a certain novelist. In the same ballroom in which she had spoken, I had the pleasure, a few nights later, of hearing Sir Oliver Lodge. His subject was “Atoms and Worlds.” He had devoted to it more than half a century of thought and study and experiment and investigation. He had something that was essen- tially a part of his heart and mind and life, some- thing that he wanted very much to say. He forgot THE SECRET OF GOOD DELIVERY 199 ‘-'—and I, for one, thanked God that he did forget — that he was trying to make a speech* That was the least of his worries. He was concerned only with telling the audience about atoms, telling us accurately and lucidly and feelingly. He was earn- estly trying to get us to see what he saw and to feel what he felt. And what was the result? He delivered a re- markable talk. It had both charm and power. It made a deep impression. He is a speaker of un- usual ability. Yet I am sure he doesn’t regard him- self in that light. I am sure that few people who hear him ever think of him as a public speaker at all. If you, my dear reader, speak in public so that people hearing you will suspect that you have had training in public speaking, you will not be a credit to your instructor. He desires you to speak with such intensified and exalted naturalness that your auditors will never dream that you have been trained. A good window does not call attention to itself. It merely lets in the light. A good speaker is like that He is so natural that his hearers never notice his manner of speaking; they are conscious only of his matter. HENRY FORD’S ADVICE “All Fords are exactly alike,” their maker used to say, '“but no two men are just alike. Every new life is a new thing under the sun; there has never been anything just like it before, and never will be again, A young man ought to get that idea about 200 PUBLIC SPEAKING himself; he should look for the single spark of individuality that makes him different from other folks, and develop that for all he is worth. Society and schools may try to iron it out of him; their tendency is to put us all in the same mould, but I say don’t let that spark be lost; it’s your only real claim to importance.” All that is doubly true of public speaking. There is no other human being in the world like you. Hundreds of millions of people have two eyes and a nose and a mouth; but none of them look precisely like you ; and none of them have exactly your traits and methods and cast of mind. Few of them will talk and express themselves just as you do when you are speaking naturally. In other words, you have an individuality. As a speaker, it is your most precious possession. Cling to it. Cherish it. De- velop it. It is the spark that will put force and sin- cerity into your speaking. “It is your only real claim to importance.” Sir Oliver Lodge speaks differently from other men, because he himself is different. The man’s manner of speaking is as essentially a part of his own individuality as are his beard and bald head. If he had tried to imitate Lloyd George, he would have been false, he would have failed. The most famous debates ever held in America took place in 1858 in the prairie towns of Illinois between Senator Stephen A. Douglas and Abraham Lincoln. Lincoln was tall and awkward. Douglas was short and graceful. These men were as unlike in their characters and mentality and personalities and dispositions as they were in their physiques. THE SECRET OF GOOD DELIVERY 201 Douglas was the cultured man of the world. Lincoln was the rail splitter who went to the front door in his sock feet to receive company. Douglas’ gestures were graceful. Lincoln’s were ungainly. Douglas was utterly destitute of humor. Lincoln was one of the greatest story tellers who ever lived. Douglas seldom used a simile. Lincoln con- stantly argued by analogy and illustration. Douglas was haughty and overbearing. Lincoln was humble and forgiving. Douglas thought in quick flashes, Lincoln’s mental processes were much slower. Douglas spoke with the impetuous rush of a whirl- wind. Lincoln was quieter and deeper and more deliberate. Both of these men, unlike as they were, were able speakers because they had the courage and good sense to be themselves. If either had tried to imitate the other, he would have failed miserably. But each one, by using to the utmost his own pecu- liar talents, made himself individual and powerful. Go thou and do likewise . That is an easy direction to give. But is it an easy one to follow? Most emphatically it is not. As Marshal Foch said of the art of war: “It is simple enough in its conception, but unfortunately complicated in its execution.” It takes practise to be natural before an audience. Actors know that. When you were a little boy, four years old, you probably could, had you but tried, have mounted a platform and “recited” nat- urally to an audience. But when you are twenty- and-four, or forty-and-four, what will happen if you mount a platform and start to speak? Will you 202 PUBLIC SPEAKING retain that unconscious naturalness that you pos- sessed at four? You may, but it is dollars to doughnuts that you will become stiff and stilted and mechanical, and draw back into your shell like a snapping turtle. The problem of teaching or of training men in delivery is not one of superimposing additional characteristics; it is largely one of removing im- pediments, of freeing men, of getting them to speak with the same naturalness that they would display if some one were to knock them down. Hundreds of times I have stopped speakers in the midst of their talks and implored them to “talk like a human being.” Hundreds of nights I have come home mentally fatigued and nervously ex- hausted from trying to drill and force men to talk naturally. No, believe me, it is not so easy as it sounds. And the only way under high Heaven by which you can get the knack of this enlarged naturalness is by practise. And, as you practise, if you find yourself talking in a stilted manner, pause and say sharply to yourself mentally : “Here ! What is wrong? Wake up. Be human.” Then pick out some man in the audience, some man in the back, the dullest looking chap you can find, and talk to him. Forget there is anyone else present at all. Converse with him. Imagine that he has asked you a question and that you are answering it. If he were to stand up and talk to you, and you were to talk back to him, that process would immedi- ately and inevitably make your talking more con- THE SECRET' OF GOOD DELIVERY 203 versational, more natural, more direct. So, imagine that that is precisely what is taking place. You may go so far as actually to ask questions and answer them. For example, in the midst of your talk, you may say, “and you ask what proof have I for this assertion? I have adequate proof and here it is . . Then proceed to answer the imaginary question. That sort of thing can be done very naturally. It will break up the monotony of one’s delivery; it will make it direct and pleasant and conversational Sincerity and enthusiasm and high earnestness will help you, too. When a man is under the influ- ence of his feelings, his real self comes to the sur- face. The bars are down. The heat of his emo- tions has burned all barriers away. He acts spon- taneously. He talks spontaneously. He is natural So, in the end, even this matter of delivery comes back to the thing which has already been empha- sized repeatedly in these pages : namely, put your heart in your talks. “I shall never forget,” said Dean Brown in his lectures on Preaching before the Tale Divinity School, “the description given by a friend of mine of a service which he once attended in the city of London. The preacher was George MacDonald. He read for the Scripture lesson that morning the eleventh Chapter of Hebrews. When the time came for the sermon, he said: ‘You have all heard about these men of faith. I shall not try to tell you what faith is. There are theological professors who could do that much better than I could do it. I am here to help you believe.’ Then followed such a 204 PUBLIC SPEAKING simple, heartfelt and majestic manifestation of the man’s own faith in those unseen realities which are eternal, as to beget faith in the minds and hearts of all his hearers. His heart was in his work, and his delivery was effective because it rested back upon the genuine beauty of his own inner life.” “His heart was in his work.” That is the secret. Yet I know that advice like this is not popular. It seems vague. It sounds indefinite. The average student wants foolproof rules. Something definite. Something he can put his hands on. Rules as precise as the directions for operating a Ford. That is what he wants. That is what I would like to give him. It would be easy for him. It would be easy for me. There are such rules, and there is only one little thing wrong with them : they don’t work. They take all the naturalness and spontaneity and life and juice out of a man’s speak- ing. I know. In my younger days I wasted a great deal of energy trying them. They won’t appear in these pages for, as Josh Billings observed in one of his lighter moments: “There ain’t no use in knowin’ so many things that ain’t so.” DO YOU DO THESE THINGS WHEN YOU TALK IN PUBLIC? We are going to discuss here some of the features of natural speaking in order to make them more clear, more vivid. I have hesitated about doing it, for someone is almost sure to say: “Ah, I see, just force myself to do these things and I’ll be all right.” THE SECRET OF GOOD DELIVERY 205 No, you won’t. Force yourself to do them and you will be all wooden and all mechanical. You used most of these principles yesterday in your conversation, used them as unconsciously as you digested your dinner last night. That is the way to use them. It is the only way. And it will come, as far as public speaking is concerned, as we have already said, only by practise. FIRST: STRESS IMPORTANT WORDS, SUB- ORDINATE UNIMPORTANT ONES In conversation, we hit one syllable in a word, and hit it hard, and hurry over the others like a pay car passing a string of hoboes; e.g., Massa- CHUsetts, afFLICtion, atTRACtiveness, enVIR- onment. We do almost the same thing with a sentence. We make one or two important words tower up like the Woolworth skyscraper on lower Broadway. This is not a strange or unusual process I am describing. Listen. You can hear it going on about you all the time. You yourself did it a hun- dred, maybe a thousand, times yesterday. You will doubtless do it a hundred times to-morrow. Here is an example. Read the following quota- tion, striking the words in big type hard. Run over the others quickly. What is the effect? “I have SUCCEEDED in whatever I have undertaken, because I have WILLED it. I have NEVER HESI- TATED which has given me an ADVANTAGE over the rest of mankind.” — Napoleon. 206 PUBLIC SPEAKING This is not the only way to read these lines. Another speaker would do it differently perhaps. There are no ironclad rules for emphasis. It all depends. Read these selections aloud in an earnest manner, trying to make the ideas clear and convincing. Don’t you find yourself stressing the big, important words and hurrying over the others? “If you think you are beaten, you are. If you think you dare not, you don’t. If you’d like to win, but think you can’t, It’s almost a cinch you won’t. Life’s battles don’t always go To the stronger or faster man; But soon or late the man who wins Is the one who thinks he can.” — Anon. “Perhaps there is no more important component of char- acter than steadfast resolution. The boy who is going to make a great man, or is going to count in any way in after* life, must make up his mind not merely to overcome a thou- sand obstacles, but to win in spite of a thousand repulses and defeats.’ —Theodore Roosevelt. SECOND: CHANGE YOUR PITCH The pitch of our voices in conversation flows up and down the scale from high to low and back again, never resting, but always shifting like the face of the sea. Why? No one knows, and no one cares. The effect is pleasing, and it is the way of nature. We never had to learn to do this: it came to us as children, unsought and unaware, but let us stand up and face an audience, and the THE SECRET OF GOOD DELIVERY 207 chances are our voices will become as dull and fiat and monotonous as the alkali deserts of Nevada. When you find yourself talking in a monotonous pitch — and usually it will be a high one- — just pause for a second and say to yourself: “I am speaking like a wooden Indian. Talk to these people. Be human. Be natural.” Will that kind of lecture to yourself help you any? A little, perhaps. The pause itself will help you. You have to work out your own salvation by practice. You can make any phrase or word that you choose stand out like a green bay tree in the front yard by either suddenly lowering or raising your pitch on it. Dr. Cadman, the famous Congregational minister of Brooklyn, often did it. So does Sir Oliver Lodge. So did Bryan. So did Roosevelt. So does almost every speaker of note. In the following quotations, try saying the ital- icized words in a much lower pitch than you use for the rest of the sentence. What is the effect? “I have but one merit, that of never despairing?* — Mar- shal Foch. “The great aim of education is not knowledge, but action?* — Herbert Spencer. “I have lived eighty-six years. I have watched men climb up to success, hundreds of them, and of all the ele- ments that are important for success, the most important is faith ” — Cardinal Gibbons. THIRD: VARY YOUR RATE OF SPEAKING When a little child talks, or when we talk in ordinary conversation, we constantly change our 208 PUBLIC SPEAKING rate of speaking. It is pleasing. It is natural. It is unconscious. It is emphatic. It is, in fact, one of the very best of all possible ways to make an idea stand out prominently. Walter B. Stevens, in his Reporter’s Lincoln , issued by the Missouri Historical Society, tells us that this was one of Lincoln’s favorite methods of driving a point home : “He would speak several words with great rapidity, come to the word or phrase he wished to emphasize, and let his voice linger and bear hard on that, and then he would rush to the end of his sentence like lightning. . . . He would devote as much time to the word or two he wished to emphasize as he did to half a dozen less important words following it.” Such a method invariably arrests attention. To illustrate: I have often quoted in a public talk the following statement by Cardinal Gibbons. I wanted to emphasize the idea of courage; so I lingered on these italicized words, drew them out and spoke as if I, myself, were impressed with them' — and I was. Will you please read the selection aloud, try- ing the same method and note the results. “A short time before his death, Cardinal Gibbons said: *1 have lived eighty-six years . I have watched men climb up to success j hundreds of them, and of all the elements that are important for success, the most important is faith . No great thing comes to any man unless he has courage?” Try this: say “thirty million dollars” quickly and with an air of triviality so that it sounds like a very small sum. Now, say “thirty thousand dollars” : say THE SECRET OF GOOD DELIVERY 209 It slowly; say It feelingly; say it as if you were tremendously impressed with the hugeness of the amount. Haven’t you now made the thirty thou- sand sound larger than the thirty million? FOURTH: PAUSE BEFORE AND AFTER IMPORTANT IDEAS Lincoln often paused in his speaking. When he had come to a big idea that he wished to impress deeply on the minds of his hearers, he bent forward, looked directly into their eyes for a moment and said nothing at all. This sudden silence had the same effect as a sudden noise : it attracted notice. It made everyone attentive, alert, awake to what was coming next. For example, when his famous debates with Douglas were drawing to a close, w r hen all the indications pointed to his defeat, he became depressed, his old habitual melancholy stealing over him at times, and imparting to his words a touching pathos. In one of his concluding speeches, he sud- denly u stopped and stood silent for a moment , look- ing around upon the throng of half-indifferent, half- friendly faces before him, with those deep-sunken weary eyes that always seemed full of unshed tears. Folding his hands, as if they too were tired of the helpless fight, he said, in his peculiar monotone: ‘My friends, it makes little difference, very little difference, whether Judge Douglas or myself is elected to the United States Senate; but the great issue which we have submitted to you to-day is far above and beyond any personal interests or the political fortunes of any man. And my friends/ 210 PUBLIC SPEAKING here he paused again, and the audience were intent on every word, ‘that issue will live and breathe and burn when the poor, feeble, stammering tongues of Judge Douglas and myself are silent in the grave . 5 55 “These simple words , 55 relates one of his bi- ographers, “and the manner in which they were spoken, touched every heart to the core . 55 Lincoln also paused after the phrase he wanted to emphasize. He added to their force by keeping silent while the meaning sank in and effected its mission. Sir Oliver Lodge pauses frequently in his speak- ing, both before and after important ideas; pauses as often as three or four times in one sentence, but he does it naturally and unconsciously. No man, unless he were analyzing Sir Oliver’s methods, would notice it. “By your silence , 55 says Kipling, “ye shall speak.” Nowhere is silence more golden than when it is judiciously used in talking. It is a powerful tool, too important to be ignored, yet it is usually neg- lected by the beginning speaker. In the following excerpt from Holman’s Ginger Talks, I have marked the places where a speaker might profitably pause. I do not say that these are the only places where one ought to pause, or even the best places. I say only that it is one way of doing it. Where to pause is not a matter of hard and fast rules. It is a matter of meaning and temperament and feeling. You might pause one place in a speech to-day, and in another place in the same speech to-morrow. THE SECRET OF GOOD DELIVERY 211 Read this selection aloud without pausing; then read it again, making the pauses 1 have indicated. What is the effect of the pauses? “Selling goods is a battle” (pause and let the idea of battle soak in) “and only fighters can win in it.” (Pause and let that point soak in.) “We may not like these con- ditions, but we didn’t have the making of them and we can’t alter them.” (Pause.) “Take your courage with you when you enter the selling game.” (Pause.) “If you don’t,” (pause and lengthen out suspense for a second) “you’ll strike out every time you come to bat, and score nothing higher than a string of goose eggs.” (Pause.) “No man ever made a three-base hit who was afraid of the pitcher” (pause and let your point soak in) — “remember that.” (Pause and let it soak in some more.) “The fellow who knocks the cover off the ball or lifts it over the fence for a home run is always the chap who steps up to the plate” (pause and increase the suspense as to what you are going to say about this extraordinary player) “with grim deter- mination in his heart.” Read the following quotations aloud and with force and meaning. Observe where you naturally pause. “The great American desert is not located in Idaho, New Mexico or Arizona. It is located under the hat of the average man. The great American desert is a mental desert rather than a physical desert.” — J. S. Knox. “There is no panacea for human ills ; the nearest approach to it is publicity.” — Professor FoxwelL “There are two people I must please — God and Gar- field. I must live with Garfield here, with God hereafter / 5 • — James A. Garfield. 212 PUBLIC SPEAKING A speaker may follow the directions I have set down in this lesson and still have a hundred faults. He may talk in public just as he does in conversa- tion and consequently, he may speak with an un- pleasant voice and make grammatical errors and be awkward and offensive and do a score of un- pleasant things. A man’s natural method of every day talking may need a vast number of improve- ments. Perfect your natural method of talking in conversation, and then carry that method to the platform. SUMMARY 1. There is something besides the mere words in a talk which counts. It is the flavor with which they are delivered. “It is not so much what you say as how you say it.” 2. Many speakers ignore their hearers, stare over their heads or at the floor. They seem to be de- livering a soliloquy. There is no sense of com- munication, no give and take between the audience and the speaker. That kind of attitude would kill a conversation ; it also kills a speech. 3 Good delivery is conversational tone and di- rectness enlarged. Talk to the Chamber of Com- merce just as you would to John Smith. What is the Chamber of Commerce, after all, but a collec- tion of John Smiths? 4. Every man has the ability to deliver a talk. If you question this statement, try it out for your- self ; knock down the most ignorant man you know; when he gets on his feet, he will probably say some things, and his manner of saying them v/ill be almost THE SECRET OF GOOD DELIVERY 213 flawless. We want you to take that same natural- ness with you when you speak in public. To de- velop it, you must practise. Don’t imitate others* If you speak spontaneously you will speak differ- ently from anyone else in the world. Put your own individuality, your own characteristic manner into your delivery. 5. Talk to your hearers just as if you expected them to stand up in a moment and talk back to you. If they were to rise and ask you questions, your de- livery would almost be sure to improve emphatically and at once. So imagine that someone has asked you a question, and that you are repeating it. Say aloud, “You ask how do I know this? I’ll tell you.” . . . That sort of thing will seem perfectly natural; it will break up the formality of your phraseology; it will warm and humanize your man- ner of talking. 6. Put your heart into your talking. Real emo- tional sincerity will help more than all the rules in Christendom. 7. Here are four things that all of us do un- consciously in earnest conversation. But do you do them when you are talking in public ? Most people do not. a. Do you stress the important words in a sentence and subordinate the unimportant ones? Do you give almost every word including the? mid , but / approximately the same amount of at - tention, or do you speak a sentence in much the same way that you say MassaCHUsetts? b. Does the pitch of your voice flow up and down the scale from high to low and back again 224 PUBLIC SPEAKING — as the pitch of a little child does when speak- ing? c. Do you vary your rate of speaking, run- ning rapidly over the unimportant words, spend- ing more time on the ones you wish to make stand out? d. Do you pause before and after your im- portant ideas? SPEECH BUILDING WORDS OFTEN MISPRONOUNCED “In order to deserve a place among the best speakers, It Is not enough that one should have what is commonly termed a good education and good sense: he must have paid par- ticular attention to the subject of pronunciation — unless he has been surrounded during the whole period of his educa- tion with none but correct speakers, which is seldom or never the case, at least in this county.” — -Joseph Thomas, M.D., LL.D. Do you sound the capitalized O f s in the follow- ing, as o In gof You should. HOnOlulu ZOology Orient ZOologicai Do you ever hear anyone say putatuh and tu~ baccuhf Do you always sound the OT in such words as mosquito tomato widow piano Toledo window pillow Toronto swallow Do you sound the capitalized OT in the following as o in odd? You should. catalOg cOllect cOlloquial dOlorous dOmicile hOrrid prOduce (noun) stOlid 215 216 PUBLIC SPEAKING The O’s capitalized in the following should be sounded, not as oo in book , but as the oo in ooze. brOOm hOOp rOOm cOOp nOOn rOOt fOOd pOOr sOOn hOOf rOOf spOOn The cou in coupon is pronounced coo — the oo sounded as in ooze. Do not say cuepon. Can you pronounce, with sureness and ease, the italicized words in the following? The correct pro- nunciation of these words has been given in the pre- ceding chapters. He played an Italian melody of incomparable beauty with admirable and exquisite tenderness. Ordinarily the old Lyceum theater would have been swept with applause, and the President would have demanded an encore. But, this time, lamentable to record, some of the adults in the audi- ence, troubled with indigestion , were suffering from genuine pains in the abdomen; others were deaf; and there was a clique, interested primarily in eugenics, who declared it was sacrilegious to play on Sunday and contrary to the ideals of civilization . They were not amenable to reason; they were bereft of every fragile shred of hospitable diplomacy; so, in a fit of hysteria, they burst into the Italians suite at the hotel, harassed the artist, hurled turnips and cran- berries and nitro- glycerine at him and protested that he must be penalized for playing on Sunday. It was a lamentable display of cowardice and hypocrisy, for their genuine grievance was not with the day but with the financial ar- rangements irrevocably made by their finance committee. THE SECRET OF GOOD DELIVERY 217 ERRORS IN ENGLISH Review . There are three errors in the follow- ing paragraph: Neither of the ears were the type he wanted. As he often said, “It don’t need to be a Rolls-Royce, but either of these automobiles are too cheap for a man like me.” New Study Material This is to be a lesson on the number of pronouns used with certain ordinary words. Rule: Each , one } anyone f anybody , everyone } and everybody are singular, and singular pronouns must be used in referring to them. For example: Right: He never let anyone feel that he had made a mistake. Right : He never let anyone feel that one had made a mistake. Wrong: He never let anyone feel that they had made a mistake. Right : Everybody said he had a good time. Right: (If women are referred to exclu- sively) Everybody said she had a good time. Wrong: Everybody said they had a good time. Right: Anybody else would at least have said good-bye when he went away. Wrong: Anybody else would at least have said good-bye when they went away. Right: Everyone ought to mind his own busi- ness. 218 PUBLIC SPEAKING Wrong: Everyone ought to mind their own business. Right: Each of us is free to follow his own impulses. Wrong: Each of us is free to follow our own impulses. Right: Sometimes one just feels as if one had to rest awhile. Wrong: Sometimes one just feels as if they had to rest awhile. Rule : If you are talking about several subjects connected by and , and these subjects are preceded by each, every , or no, you must use the singular pronoun. Right: Each movement and each gesture has its meaning. Wrong: Each movement and each gesture has their meaning. If the antecedent is female, feminine pronouns are used. Otherwise, masculine pronouns are used. Rule: If you have the pronoun one as a sub- ject, you may use one' s or his in connection with it, as, “ One should do one's (or his ) best before an audience. CORRECT USAGE OF WORDS Egoism is an excessive love of oneself, selfishness. It is the very opposite of altruism. Self-conceit is a flattering opinion of one’s own abilities. Egotism shows self-conceit by words and acts. It reveals THE SECRET OF GOOD DELIVERY 219 egoism. One may be self-conceited and have the good taste to hide it; the egotistical man parades his importance. Pride is high — and sometimes ex- cessive — self-respect. It may be justified, or it may be unreasonable, conceit. A proud man may or may not reveal his pride. Vanity is a show of pride. The vain person longs to be noticed, and admired, and appraised. Vanity literally means empty. It is often applied to pride in such shallow things as dress and personal appearance. Imprudent literally means not seen before — hence not taking results into account. Rash originally meant quick, and has now come to mean overhasty. A rash man does things on a momentary impulse, without deliberation. Foolhardy literally means a brave fool. The adventurous man gets a pleasure out of incurring risks. The adventurous man would rather conduct concert tours than to have an estab- lished hardware business. Precipitate , like the word precipice , is derived from two Latin words and lit- erally means head before or headlong. A precipi- tate action is like plunging headlong over a cliff. Other words with somewhat similar meanings are: Hasty , foolish , ill-advised, unwise, indiscreet , heed- less, thoughtless t incautious , injudicious, impulsive , hazardous , venturesome . VOICE EXERCISE— BRIGHT AND ATTRACTIVE TONES Here are three exercises which, if faithfully fol- lowed, will help to brighten your voice, to make it more attractive. 220 PUBLIC SPEAKING 1. Develop nasal resonance. Take a deep breath, and note the free, open, expansive sensation in your nose as the air is rushing in. Repeat the following syllables. Pitch them in the nose. Dwell on the ng sounds at the end of each word, for two or three seconds. Let them ring in the nasal cavi- ties like the sound of a bell. Singing . . . Wringing Bringing. . Clinging Flinging Winging Hanging Banging Longing. Wronging . . . . 2. For some strange reason, practising the fal- setto voice develops a bright quality in our ordinary speaking tones. Do you know what we mean by the falsetto? I think you can get it by following these directions : pitch your voice in the highest tones of which you are capable — almost a shriek. It is a funny tone, very effeminate. It will soon tire you. Don’t practise it after you begin to feel a strain. Try this verse in a falsetto voice: “A song, oh, a song for the merry May! The cows in the meadow, the lambs at play, A chorus of birds in the maple tree, And a world in blossom for you and me.” The poet Longfellow advised the famous Shakespearean actress, Mary Anderson, to read aloud each day some joyous, lyric poetry to de- velop voice charm. The happiness tones, the tones of cheerfulness and sunshine, are always welcome, always attractive. If you read aloud hopeful, glad THE SECRET OF GOOD DELIVERY 221 poems, and read them with feeling, you will soon develop in yourself and in your tones, the emotions you are imitating. There can be no doubt whatever about the psychological rightness of that statement (See Professor James’ statement, Chapter I.) 3. Madame Galli-Curci says that one of her guid- ing principles has always been that there must be in her practise and her performances, “the joy of singing.” Your hearers ought to feel that you are experiencing the joy of talking. Read the following poem aloud several times. Try to feel what the author felt when he wrote it. Try to make his spirit your own. Let it ring and sing through your tones. Turn to this poem often and read it. Better still, memorize it, and dispense with the book: “It isn’t raining rain to me. It’s raining daffodils; In every dimpled drop I see Wild flowers on distant hills. “The clouds of grey engulf the day And overwhelm the town; It isn’t raining rain to me, It s raining roses down. “It isn’t raining rain to me, But fields of clover bloom, Where every buccaneering bee May find a bed and room. “A health unto the happy, A fig for him who frets; It isn’t raining rain to me, It’s raining violets.” Robert Loveman. CHAPTER VIII PLATFORM P-RESENCE AND PERSONALITY “Action is eloquence , and the eyes of the ignorant are more learned than their ears T — Shakespeare. “Never allow yourself to go physically asleep if you expect to keep yourself mentally awake” — Nathan Sheppard, Before An Audience, “Too little gesture is as unnatural as too much. It is strange that the happy medium is so rarely observed , con- sidering that every child is an illustration of its proper use, and that we may see examples of it in almost every man that talks to his neighbor on the street — Matthews, Oratory and Orators. “ There is often as much eloquence in the tone of the voice, in the eyes, and in the air of a speaker as in his choice of words — La R o ch efo ucauld . “When you speak, forget action entirely . Concentrate your attention on tv hat you have to say and why you want to say it. Put all the fire and spirit of your being into the expression of your thought. Be enthusiastic , sincere, deadly earnest. Some action is bound to result. Your restraints will be broken down if you make the inner thought-urge strong enough. Your body will respond with some kind of expressive action. In all your actual speaking, think only of what you want to say. Do not plan your gestures in ad- vance. Let the natural urge determine the action .” — ' George Rowland Collins, Platform Speaking. “ How truly language must be regarded as a hindrance to thought , though the necessary instrument of it, we shall clearly perceive on remembering the comparative force with which simple ideas are communicated by signs. To say ' Leave the room is less expressive than to point to the door . Placing the finger on the lips is more forcible than whis- pering ‘Do not speak / A beck of the hand is better than ‘Come here I No phrase can convey the idea of surprise so vividly as opening the eyes and raising the eyebrows. A shrug of the shoulders would lose much by translation into words.” — Herbert Spencer. CHAPTER VIII PLATFORM PRESENCE AND PERSONALITY The Carnegie Institute of Technology at one time gave intelligence tests to one hundred prominent business men. The tests were similar to those used in the army during the war; and the results led the Institute to declare that personality con- tributes more to business success than does superior intelligence. That is a very significant pronouncement : very significant for the business man, very significant for the educator, very significant for the professional man, very significant for the speaker. Personality — with the exception of preparation — is probably the most important factor in public address. “In eloquent speaking,” declared Elbert Hubbard, “it is manner that wins, not words.” Rather it is manner plus ideas. But personality is a vague and elusive thing, defying analysis like the perfume of the violet. It is the whole combination of the man, the physical, the spiritual, the mental; his traits, his predilections, his tendencies, his tem- perament, his cast of mind, his vigor, his experience, his training, his life. It is as complex as Einstein’s theory of relativity, almost as little understood. 226 PUBLIC SPEAKING A man’s personality is very largely the result of his inheritances. It is largely determined before birth. True, his later environment has something to do with it. But, all in all, it is an extremely diffi- cult factor to alter or improve. Yet we can, by taking thought, strengthen it to some extent and make it more forceful, more attractive. At any rate, we can strive to get the utmost possible out of this strange thing that nature has given us. The subject is of vast importance to every one of us. The possibilities for improvement, limited as they are, are still large enough to warrant a discussion and investigation. If you wish to make the most of your individu- ality, go before vour audience rested. A tired man is not magnetic nor attractive. Don’t make the all- too-common error of putting off your preparation and your planning until the very last moment, and then working at a furious pace, trying to make up for lost time. If you do, you are bound to store up bodily poisons and brain fatigues that will prove terrific drags, holding you down, sapping your vitality, weakening both your brain and your nerves. If you must make an important talk to a com- mittee meeting at four, do not, if you can well avoid it, come back to the office after lunch. Go home, if possible, have a light lunch and the refresh- ment of a siesta. Rest — that is what you need, physical and mental and nervous. Geraldine Farrar used to shock her newly made friends by saying good night and retiring early, leaving them to talk the remainder of the evening PLATFORM PRESENCE 227 with her husband. She knew the demands of her art. Madame Nordica said that being a prima donna meant giving up everything one liked: social affairs, friends, tempting meals. When you have to make an important talk, be- ware of your hunger. Eat as sparingly as a saint. On Sunday afternoons, Henry Ward Beecher used to have crackers and milk at five, and nothing after that. “When I am singing in the evening,” said Mad- ' ame Melba, “I do not dine but have a very light repast at five o block, consisting of either fish, chicken, or sweetbread, with a baked apple and a glass of water. I always find myself very hungry for supper when I get home from the opera or concert.” How wisely Melba and Beecher acted, I never realized until after I became a professional speaker myself and tried to deliver a two-hour talk each evening after having consumed a hearty meal. Ex- perience taught me that I couldn’t enjoy a filet de sole aux pommes nature and follow that by a beef- steak and French fried potatoes and salad and vegetables and a dessert, and then stand up an hour afterwards and do either myself or my subject or my body justice. The blood that ought to have been in my brain was down in my stomach wrest- ling with that steak and potatoes. Paderewski was right: he said when he ate what he wanted to eat before a concert, the animal in him got uppermost, that it even got into his finger tips and clogged and dulled his playing. 2 28 PUBLIC SPEAKING WHY ONE SPEAKER DRAWS BETTER THAN ANOTHER Do nothing to dull your energy. It is magnetic. Vitality, aliveness, enthusiasm : they are among the first qualities I have always sought for in employ- ing speakers and instructors of speaking. People cluster around the energetic speaker, the human dynamo of energy, like wild geese around a field of autumn wheat. I have often seen this illustrated by the open air speakers in Hyde Park, London. A spot near Marble Arch entrance is a rendezvous for speakers of every creed and color On a Sunday afternoon, one can take his choice and listen to a Catholic ex- plaining the doctrine of the infallibility of the Pope, to a Socialist propounding the economic gospel of Karl Marx, to an Indian explaining why it is right and proper for a Mohammedan to have four wives, and so on. Hundreds crowd about one speaker, while his neighbor has only a handful. Why? Is the topic always an adequate explanation of the disparity between the drawing powers of different speakers? No. More often the explanation is to be found in the speaker himself: he is more inter- ested and, consequently, interesting. He talks with more life and spirit. He radiates vitality and ani- mation; they always challenge attention. HOW ARE YOU AFFECTED BY CLOTHES? An inquiry was sent to a large group of people by a psychologist and university president, asking 229 PLATFORM PRESENCE them the impression clothes made on them. All but unanimously, they testified that when they were well groomed and faultlessly and immaculately attired, the knowledge of it, the feeling of it, had an effect which, while it was difficult to explain, was still very definite, very real. It gave them more confidence; brought them increased faith in themselves ; height- ened their self-respect. They declared that when they had the look of success they found it easier to think success, to achieve success. Such is the effect of clothes on the wearer himself. What effect do they have on an audience? I have noticed time and again that if a speaker has baggy trousers, shapeless coat and footwear, foun- tain pen and pencils peeping out of his breast pocket, a newspaper or a pipe and can of tobacco bulging out the sides of his garment — I have noticed that an audience has as little respect for that man as he has for his own appearance. Aren’t they very likely to assume that his mind is as sloppy as his unkempt hair and unpolished shoes? ONE OF THE REGRETS OF GRANT’S LIFE When General Lee came to Appomattox Court House to surrender his army, he was immaculately attired in a new uniform and, at his side, hung a sword of extraordinary value. Grant was coatless, swordless, and was wearing the shirt and trousers of a private. U 1 must have contrasted very strangely,” he wrote in his Memoirs, *Svith a man so handsomely dressed, six feet high, and of fault- less form.” The fact that he had not been appro- 230 PUBLIC SPEAKING priately attired for this historic occasion came to be one of the real regrets of Grant’s life. The Department of Agriculture in Washington has several hundred stands of bees on its experi- mental farm. Each hive has a large magnifying glass built into it, and the interior can be flooded with electric light by pressing a button; so, any moment, night or day, these bees are liable to be sub- ject to the minutest scrutiny. A speaker is like that : he is under the magnifying glass, he is in the spot- light, all eyes are upon him. The smallest dis- harmony in his personal appearance now looms up like Pike’s Peak from the plains. “EVEN BEFORE WE SPEAK, WE ARE CONDEMNED OR APPROVED” A number of years ago I was writing for the American Magazine the life story of a certain New York banker. I asked one of his friends to explain the reason for his success. No small amount of it, he said, was due to the man’s winning smile. At first thought, that may sound like exaggeration but I be- lieve it is really true. Other men, scores of them, hundreds of them, may have had more experience and as good financial judgment, but he had an addi- tional asset they didn’t possess — he had a most agreeable personality. And a warm, welcoming smile was one of the striking features of it. It gained one’s confidence immediately. It secured one’s good will instantly. We all want to see a man like that succeed; and it is a real pleasure to give him our patronage. PLATFORM PRESENCE 231 “He who cannot smile,' ” says a Chinese proverb, “ought not to keep a shop.” And isn’t a smile just as welcome before an audience as behind a counter? I am thinking now of a particular student who at- tended a course in public speaking conducted by the Brooklyn Chamber of Commerce. He always came out before the audience with an air that said he liked to be there, that he loved the job that w r as before him. He always smiled and acted as if he were glad to see us; and so immediately and in- evitably his hearers warmed towards him and wel- comed him. But I have seen speakers— students of this course, I regret to admit — who walked out before the other members in a cold, perfunctory manner as if they had a disagreeable task to perform, and that, when it was over, they would thank God. We in the audience were soon feeling the same way. These attitudes are contagious. “Like begets like,” observes Professor Over- street in Influencing Human Behavior . “If we are interested in our audience, there is a likelihood that our audience will be interested in us. If we scowl at our audience, there is every likelihood that in- wardly or outwardly they will scowl at us. If we are timid and rather flustered, they likewise will lack confidence in us. If we are brazen and boast- ful, they will react with their own self-protective egotism. Even before we speak, very often, we are condemned or approved. There is every reason, therefore, that we should make certain that our attitude is such as to elicit warm response.” 232 PUBLIC SPEAKING CROWD YOUR AUDIENCE TOGETHER As a public lecturer, I have frequently spoken to a small audience scattered through a large hall in the afternoon, and to a large audience packed into the same hall at night. The evening audience has laughed heartily at the same things that brought only a smile to the faces of the afternoon group; the evening crowd has applauded generously at the very places where the afternoon gathering was ut- terly unresponsive. Why ? For one thing, the elderly women and the children that are likely to come in the afternoon cannot be expected to be as demonstrative as the more vigor- ous and discriminating evening crowd; but that is only a partial explanation. The fact is that no audience will be easily moved when it is scattered. Nothing so dampens enthusi- asm as wide, open spaces and empty chairs between the listeners. Henry Ward Beecher said in his Yale Lectures on Preaching: “People often say, ‘Do you not think it is much more inspiring to speak to a large audience than a small one?’ No, I say; I can speak just as well to twelve persons as to a thousand, provided those twelve are crowded around me and close together, so that they can touch each other. But even a thousand people with four feet of space between every two of them, would be just the same as an empty room. . . . Crowd your audience together and you will set them off with half the effort.” A man in a large audience tends to lose his indi- viduality. He becomes a member of the crowd and PLATFORM PRESENCE 233 is swayed far more easily than he would be as a single individual. He will laugh at and applaud things that would leave him unmoved if he were only one of half a dozen people listening to you. It is far easier to get people to act as a body than to act singly. Men going into battle, for example, invariably want to do the most dangerous and reck- less thing in the world — they want to huddle to- gether. During the late war, German soldiers were known to go into battle at times with their arms locked about one another. Crowds ! Crowds ! Crowds ! They are a curi- ous phenomenon. All great popular movements and reforms have been carried forward by the aid of the crowd mentality. An interesting book on this subject is Everett Dean Martin’s The Behavior of Crowds. If we are going to talk to a small group, we should choose a small room. Better to pack the aisles of a small place than to have people scattered through the lonely, deadening spaces of a large hall. If your hearers are scattered, ask them to move down front and be seated near you. Insist on this, before you start speaking. Unless the audience is a fairly large one, and there is a real reason, a necessity, for the speaker standing on a platform, don’t do so. Get down on the same level with them. Stand near them. Break up all formality. Get an intimate contact. Make the thing conversational. 234 PUBLIC SPEAKING MAJOR POND SMASHED THE WINDOWS Keep the air fresh. In the well known process of public speaking, oxygen is just as essential as the larynx, pharynx and human epiglottis. All the elo- quence of Cicero, and all the feminine pulchritude in Ziegfeld’s Follies, could hardly keep an audi- ence awake in a room poisoned with bad air. So, when I am one of a number of speakers, before be- ginning, I almost always ask the audience to stand up and rest for two minutes while the windows are thrown open. For fourteen years Major James B. Pond trav- eled all over the United States and Canada as man- ager for Henry Ward Beecher when that famous Brooklyn preacher was at his flood tide as a popular lecturer. Before the audience assembled, Pond always visited the hall or church or theater where Beecher was to appear, and rigorously inspected the lighting, seating, temperature and ventilation. Pond had been a blustering, roaring old army officer; he loved to exercise authority; so if the place was too warm or the air was dead and he could not get the windows open, he hurled books through them, smashing and shattering the glass. He believed with Spurgeon that “the next best thing to the Grace of God for a preacher is oxygen.” LET THERE BE LIGHT— ON YOUR FACE Unless you are demonstrating Spiritualism before a group of people, flood the room, if possible, with lights. It is as easy to domesticate a quail as’to develop PLATFORM PRESENCE 235 enthusiasm In a half-lighted room gloomy as the inside of a thermos bottle. Read David Belasco’s articles on stage produc- tion, and you will discover that the average speaker does not have the foggiest shadow of the ghost of an Idea of the tremendous importance of proper lighting. Let the light strike your face. People want to see you. The subtle changes that ought to play across your features are a part, and a very real part, of the process of self-expression. Sometimes they mean more than your words. If you stand di- rectly under a light, your face may be dimmed by a shadow; if you stand directly in front of a light, it is sure to be. Would It not, then, be the part of wi% dom to select, before you arise to speak, the spot that will give you the most advantageous illumina- tion? NO TRUMPERY ON THE PLATFORM And do not hide behind a table. People want to look at the whole man. They will even lean out in the aisles to see all of him. Some well meaning soul is pretty sure to give you a table and a water pitcher and a glass ; but if your throat becomes dry, a pinch of salt or a taste of lemon will start the saliva again better than Niagara. You do not want the water nor the pitcher. Neither do you want all the other useless and ugly impedimenta that clutter up the average platform. The Broadway sales rooms of the various auto- 236 PUBLIC SPEAKING mobile makers are beautiful, orderly, pleasing to the eye. The Paris offices of the large perfumers and jewelers are artistically and luxuriously ap- pointed. Why? It is good business. One has more respect, more confidence, more admiration for a concern housed like that. For the same reason, a speaker ought to have a pleasing background. The ideal arrangement, to my way of thinking, would be no furniture at all. Nothing behind the speaker to attract attention or at either side of him — nothing but a curtain of dark blue velvet. But what does he usually have behind him? Maps and signs and tables, perhaps a lot of dusty ghairs, some piled on top of the others. And what is the result? A cheap, slovenly, disorderly atmos- phere. So clear all the trumpery away. “The most important thing in public speaking,” said Henry Ward Beecher, “is the man.” So let the man stand out like the snow clad top of the Jungfrau towering against the blue skies of Switzerland. NO GUESTS ON THE PLATFORM I was once in London, Ontario, when the Prime Minister of Canada was speaking. Presently the janitor, armed with a long pole, started to ventilate the room, moving about from window to window. What happened? The audience, almost to a man, ignored the speaker for a little while and stared at the janitor as intently as if he had been perform- ing some miracle. PLATFORM PRESENCE 237 An audience cannot resist — -or, what comes to the same thing, it will not resist — the temptation to look at moving objects. If a speaker will only remem- ber that truth, he can save himself some trouble and needless annoyance. First, he can refrain from twiddling his thumbs, playing with his clothes and making little nervous movements that detract from him. I remember seeing a New York audience watch a well-known speaker’s hands for half an hour while he spoke and played with the covering of a pulpit at the same time. Second, the speaker should arrange, if possible, to have the audience seated so they won’t have their attention distracted by seeing the late comers enter. Third, he should have no guests on the platform. A few years ago Raymond Robins delivered a series of talks in Brooklyn. I, along with a num- ber of others, was invited to sit on the platform with him. I declined on the ground that it was unfair to the speaker. I noted the first night how many of these guests shifted about and put one leg over th*e other and back again, and so on; and every time one of them moved, the audience looked away from the speaker to the guest. I called Mr. Robins’ attention to this the next day; and during the remainder of his evenings with us, he very wisely occupied the platform alone. David Belasco did not permit the use of red flowers on the stage because they attract too much attention. Then why should a speaker permit a restless human being to sit facing the audience 238 PUBLIC SPEAKING while he talks ? He shouldn’t. And, if he is wise, he won’t. THE ART OF SITTING DOWN Isn’t it well for the speaker himself not to sit facing the audience before he begins? Isn’t it bet- ter to arrive as a fresh exhibit than an old one ? But, if we must sit, let us be careful of how we sit. You have seen men look around to find a chair with the modified movements of a foxhound lying down for the night. They turned around and when they did locate a chair, they doubled up and flopped down into it with all the self-control of a sack of sand. A man who knows how to sit feels the chaii strike the back of his legs, and, with his body easily erect from head to hips, he sinks into it with his body under perfect control. POISE We just said, a few pages previously, not to play with your clothes because it attracted attention. There is another reason also. It gives an impres- sion of weakness, a lack of self-control. Every movement that does not add to your presence de- tracts from it. There are no neutral movements. None. So stand still and control yourself physic- ally and that will give you an impression of mental control, of poise. After you have risen to address your audience, do not be in a hurry to begin. That is the hallmark PLATFORM PRESENCE 239 of the amateur. Take a deep breath. Look over your audience for a moment; and, if there is a noise or disturbance, pause until it quiets down. Hold your chest high. But why wait until you get before an audience to do this? Why not do it daily in private ? Then you will do it unconsciously in public, “Not one man in ten,” says Luther H. Gulick in his book, The Efficient Life , “carries himself so as to look his best. . . . Keep the neck pressed against the collar.” Here is a daily exercise he recommends: “Inhale slowly and as strongly as possible. At the same time press the neck back firmly against the collar. Now hold it there hard. There is no harm in doing this in an exaggerated way. The object is to straighten out that part of the back which is directly between the shoulders. This deepens the chest.” And what shall you do with your hands? For- get them. If they fall naturally to your sides, that is ideal. If they feel like a bunch of bananas to you, do not be deluded into imagining that anyone else is paying the slightest attention to them or has the slightest interest in them. They will look best hanging relaxed at your sides* They will attract the minimum of attention there. Not even the hypercritical can criticize that posi- tion, Besides, they will be unhampered and free to flow naturally into gestures when the urge makes itself felt. But suppose that you are very nervous and that you find putting them behind your back or shoving them into your pockets helps to relieve your self- 240 PUBLIC SPEAKING consciousness — what should you do? Use your common sense. I have heard a number of the celebrated speakers of this generation. Many, if not most, put their hands into their pockets occa- sionally while speaking. Bryan did it. Chauncey M. Depew did it. Teddy Roosevelt did it. Even so fastidious a dandy as Disraeli sometimes succumbed to this temptation. But the sky did not fall and, according to the weather reports, if my memory serves me right, the sun came up on time as usual the next morning. If a man has something to say worth while, and says it with contagious convic- tion, surely it will matter little what he does with his hands and feet. If his head is full and heart stirred, these secondary details will very largely take care of themselves. After all, the stupendously important thing in making a talk is the psycholog- ical aspect of it, not the position of the hands and feet. ABSURD ANTICS TAUGHT IN THE NAME OF GESTURE And this brings us very naturally to the much- abused question of gesture. My first lesson in public speaking was given by the president of a college in the middle west. This lesson, as I re- member it, was chiefly concerned with gesturing; it was not only useless but misleading and positively harmful. I v r as taught to let my arm hang loosely at my side palm facing the rear, fingers half closed and thumb touching my leg. I was drilled to bring the arm up in a graceful curve, to make a classical PLATFORM PRESENCE 241 swing with the wrist and then to unfold the fore- finger first, the second finger next, and the little finger last. When the whole aesthetic and orna- mental movement had been executed, the arm was then to retrace the same graceful and unnatural curve and rest again by the side of the leg. The whole performance was wooden and affected. There was nothing sensible or honest about it. I was drilled to act as no man, in his right mind, ever acted anywhere. There was no attempt whatever to get me to put my own individuality into my movements; no at- tempt to spur me on to feeling like gesturing; no endeavor to get the flow and blood of life in the process, and make it natural and unconscious and inevitable; no urging me to let go, to be spontane- ous, to break through my shell of reserve, to talk and act like a human being. No, the whole regret- table performance was as mechanical as a type- writer, as lifeless as a last year’s bird nest, as ridicu- lous as a Punch and Judy show. That was in 1902. It seems incredible that such absurd antics could have been taught in the twem tieth century; but they are still going on. Only a few years ago a whole book about gesturing was published by a professor teaching in one of the large colleges of the East — a whole book trying to make automatons out of men, telling them which gesture to make on this sentence, which to make on that, which to make with one hand, which with both, which to make high, which to make medium, which to make low, how to hold this finger and how to hold that. I have seen twenty men at a time stand- 242 PUBLIC SPEAKING ing before a class, all reading the same ornate ora- torical selections from such a book, all making pre- cisely the same gestures on precisely the same words, and all making themselves precisely ridiculous. Artificial, time-killing, mechanical, injurious — it has brought this whole subject into disrepute with many men. The dean of a large college in Massachusetts recently said that his institution had no course in public speaking because he had never seen one that was practical, one that taught men to speak sensibly. My sympathy was all with the dean. Nine-tenths of the stuff that has been written on gestures has been a waste and worse than a waste of good white paper and good black ink. Any ges- ture that is gotten out of a book is very likely to look like it. The place to get it is out of your- self, out of your heart, out of your mind, out of your own interest in the subject, out of your own desire to make some one else see as you see, out of your own impulses. The only gestures that are worth one, two, three, are those that are born on the spur of the instant. An ounce of spontaneity is worth a ton of rules. Gesture is not a thing to be put on at will like a dinner jacket. It is merely an outward expression of inward condition just as are kisses and colic and laughter and sea sickness. And a man’s gestures, like his tooth brush, should be very personal things. And, as all men are dif- ferent, their gestures will be individual if they will only act natural. No two men should be drilled to gesture in pre- cisely the same fashion. In the last chapter, I dis- PLATFORM PRESENCE 243 cussed the difference between Lincoln and Douglas as speakers* Imagine trying to make the long, awk- ward, slow-thinking Lincoln gesture in the same fashion as did the rapidly-talking, impetuous and polished Douglas, It would be ridiculous. “Lincoln,” according to his biographer and law partner, Herndon, “did not gesticulate as much with his hands as with his head. He used the latter frequently, throwing it with vim this way and that. This movement was a significant one when he sought to enforce his statement. It sometimes came with a quick jerk, as if throwing off electric sparks into combustible material. He never sawed the air or rent space into tatters and rags as some orators do* He never acted for stage effect. . . , As he moved along in his speech he became freer and less uneasy in his movements; to that extent he was graceful. He had a perfect naturalness, a strong individu- ality; and to that extent he was dignified. He de- spised glitter, show, set forms and shams. * . . There was a world of meaning and emphasis in the long, bony finger of his right hand as he dotted the ideas on the, minds of his hearers. Sometimes, to express joy or pleasure, he would raise both hands at an angle of about fifty degrees, the palms up- ward, as if desirous of embracing the spirit of that which he loved. If the sentiment was one of detes- tation — denunciation of slavery, for example — both arms, thrown upward and fists clenched, swept through the air, and he expressed an execration that was truly sublime. This was one of his most effec- tive gestures, and signified most vividly a fixed de- termination to drag down the object of his hatred 244 PUBLIC SPEAKING and trample it in the dust. He always stood squarely on his feet, toe even with toe; that is, he never put one foot before the other. He neither touched nor leaned on anything for support. He made but few changes in his positions and attitudes. He never ranted, never walked backward and for- ward on the platform. To ease his arms, he fre- quently caught hold, with his left hand, of the lapel of his coat, keeping his thumb upright and leaving his right hand free to gesticulate.” St. Gaudens caught him in just that attitude in the statue which stands in Lincoln Park, Chicago. Such was Lincoln’s method. Theodore Roosevelt was more vigorous, fiery, active, his whole face alive with feeling, his fist clenched, his entire body an instrument of expression. Bryan often used the outstretched hand with open palm. Gladstone often struck a table or his open palm with his fist, or stamped his foot with a resounding thud on the floor. Lord Rosebery used to raise his right arm and bring it down with a bold sweep that had tre- mendous force. Ah, but there was force first in the speaker’s thoughts and convictions; th,at was what made the gesture strong and spontaneous. Spontaneity . . . life . . . they are the summum bonum of action. Burke was angular and exceed- ingly awkward in his gestures. Pitt sawed the air with his arms “like a clumsy clown.” Sir Henry Irving was handicapped by a lame leg and decidedly odd movements. Lord Macaulay’s actions on the platform were ungainly. So were Grattan’s. So were Parnell’s. “The answer then appears to be,” said the late Lord Curzon at Cambridge University, PLATFORM PRESENCE 245 m an address on Parliamentary Eloquence, “that great public speakers make their own gestures ; and that while a great orator is doubtless aided by a handsome exterior and graceful action, it does not matter very much if he happens to be ugly and awkward.” Some years ago, I heard the famous Gypsy Smith preach. I was enthralled by the eloquence of this man who has led so many thousands to Christ. He used gestures- — lots of them — and was no more con- scious of them than of the air he breathed. Such is the ideal way. And such is the way you, my dear reader, will find yourself making gestures if you will but prac- tise and apply the principles already enunciated in this course. I can’t give you any rules for gestur- ing, for everything depends upon the temperament of the speaker, upon his preparation, his enthusi- asm, his personality, the subject, the audience, the occasion. SUGGESTIONS THAT MAY PROVE HELPFUL Here are, however, a few limited suggestions that may prove useful. Do not repeat one gesture until it becomes monotonous. Do not make short, jerky movements from the elbow. The movements from the shoulder look better on the platform. Do not end your gestures too quickly. If you are using the index finger to drive home your thought, do not be afraid to hold that gesture through an entire sentence, The failure to do this is a very common 246 PUBLIC SPEAKING error and a serious one. It distorts your emphasis, making small things unimportant, and truly import- ant points seem trivial by comparison. When you are doing real speaking before a real audience, make only the gestures that come natural. But while you are practising before the members of this course, force yourself, if necessary, to use ges- tures. Force yourself to do it and, as I pointed out in Chapter V, the doing of it will so awaken and stimulate you that your gestures will soon be coming unsought. Shut your book. You can’t learn gestures from a printed page. Your own impulses, as you are speaking, are more to be trusted, more valuable than anything any instructor can possibly tell you. If you forget all else we have said about gesture and delivery, remember this : if a man is so wrapped up in what he has to say, if he is so eager to get his message across that he forgets himself and talks and acts spontaneously, then his gestures and his delivery, unstudied though they may be, are very likely to be almost above criticism. If you doubt this, walk up to a man and knock him down. You will probably discover that, when he„ regains his feet, the talk he delivers will be well nigh flawless as a gem of eloquence. Here are the best eleven words I have ever read on the subject of delivery: Fill up the barrel. Knock out the bung. Let nature caper. PLATFORM PRESENCE 247 SUMMARY 1. According to experiments conducted by the Carnegie Institute of Technology, personality has more to do with business success than has superior knowledge. This pronouncement is as true of speaking as of business. Personality, however, is such an intangible, elusive, mysterious thing that it is almost impossible to give directions for devel- oping it, but some of the suggestions given in this chapter will help a speaker to appear at his best. 2. Don’t speak when you are tired. Rest, re- cuperate, store up a reserve of energy. 3. Eat sparingly before you speak. 4. Do nothing to dull your energy. It is mag- netic. People cluster around the energetic speaker like wild geese around a field of autumn wheat. 5. Dress neatly, attractively. The conscious- ness of being well dressed heightens one’s self-re- spect, increases his self-confidence. If a speaker has baggy trousers, unkempt shoes, ungroomed hair, fountain pen and pencils peeping out of his coat pocket, the audience is liable to feel as little respect for him as he seems to feel for himself. 6. Smile. Come before your hearers with an at- titude that seems to say you are glad to be there. “Like begets like,” says Professor Overstreet. “If we are interested in our audience there is every likelihood that our audience will be interested in us. Even before we speak, very often, we are con- demned or approved. There is every reason, therefore, that we should make certain that our attitude is such as to elicit warm response.” 248 PUBLIC SPEAKING 7. Crowd your audience together. No group is easily influenced when it is scattered. An indi- vidual, as a member of a compact audience, will laugh at, applaud and approve things that he might question and oppose if he were addressed singly or if he were one of a group scattered through a large room. 8 . If you are speaking to a small group, pack them in a small room. Don’t stand on a platform. Get down on the same level with them. Make your talk intimate, informal, conversational. 9. Keep the air fresh. 10. Flood the place with lights. Stand so that the light will fall directly in your face, so all your features can be seen. 11. Don’t stand behind furniture. Push the tables and chairs to one side. Clear away all the unsightly signs and trumpery that often clutter up a platform. 12. If you have guests on the platform, they are sure to move occasionally; and, each time they make the slightest movement, they are certain to seize the attention of your hearers. An audience cannot resist the temptation to look at any moving object or animal or person; so why store up trouble and create competition for yourself? 13. Do not flop down in your chair. Feel it strike the back of your legs, and, with your body easily erect, sink into it. 14. Stand still. Do not make a lot of nervous movements. They give an impression of weakness. Every movement that does not add to your pres* ence. detracts from it. PLATFORM PRESENCE 249 15. Let your hands fall easily at your sides. That is the ideal position. However, if it makes you feel more comfortable to hold them behind your back, or even to put them in your pockets — it won’t matter much. If your head and your heart are full of what you are saying, these secondary details will largely take care of themselves. 1 6. Don’t try to get your gestures out of a book. Get them out of your impulses. Let yourself go. Spontaneity and life and abandon are the indispen- sable requisites of gesture, not studied grace and an obedience to rules. 17. In gesturing, do not repeat one movement until it becomes monotonous, do not make short jerky movements from the elbow. Above all else, hold your gestures, continue them until the climax of your movements coincides with the climax of your thought. SPEECH BUILDING WORDS OFTEN MISPRONOUNCED “Pronounce not imperfectly, nor bring out your words too hastily, but orderly and distinctly.” — George Washington. Accent the final 5 sound in the following words : ships nests mists casks guests fists tasks masts posts masks casts roads How do you pronounce gasoline and Jerusalem? Utter the following words in pairs. Make the distinction very plain between the s and z sounds. bows — booze bust — buzz cost — because cease — seize face — phase fest — fez gasoline — gaze gust — guzzle haste — hazed hiss — his lace — glaze mace — maize mess — mezzanine most — mosey muscle — muzzle post — pose puss — puzzle race — raise Can you pronounce correctly all the italicized words in the following paragraph? If in doubt, consult the exercises in pronunciation given in the previous lessons. 2S0 PLATFORM PRESENCE 251 A seed house in Honolulu sent its catalog to the address of a certain adult whose domicile was on the banks of a creek near the Zoological gardens in Toledo . This poor fellow was a drug addict . When he was under the in- fluence of opium, he marveled at the surprisingly beautiful pictures of tomatoes and parsnips and melons in the sales literature , He dreamed dreams, * . . In spite of the fact that he was a poor man, and, at times, found it difficult to keep a roof over his head, nevertheless, he now ordered sur- prisingly large quantities of seeds, far larger quantities than were justifiable , considering his finances . For some in- explicable reason, the credulous chap felt that he could make a fortune raising produce ; so, in order to collect cash, he voluntarily sold his piano , his spoons , his cigar store coupons, the carburetor of his Ford, the broom that swept his rooms and even the very food in his domicile . He wrote the Honolulu concern, saying: "Gentlemen, I am very much interested in your admirable catalog showing the exquisite profits to be made in the truck raising industry , I am an Italian and belong to the Fascist i. I knife the Bolsheviki. I have a diploma. At times, I also have a pain in the abdomen due to indigestion, but as soon as I put a flower on my coat, the mischievous hurt becomes impotent. I can sell to a cafeteria here all the produce I raise, so please send me at once a barrel of tomato and turnip and parsnip seeds, and the roots of a cranberry bush.” . . . Thus ends the rocking and shocking romance . Finis . ERRORS IN ENGLISH As this chapter marks the completion of the first half of the course, it is felt that you should be given an opportunity to show how completely you have made the past seven parts of the chapters dealing with English a part of your regular equip- ment. Some of the following sentences are correct, and others are incorrect, Read them over and in- 252 PUBLIC SPEAKING stantly decide what changes need to be made in any of them. It may be a good thing for you to write them out. 1. Nobody shall help me, I will drown. (Futurity.) 2. I shall fight it to the bitter end. 3. He -was laying down when I came. 4. He laid down to rest every half hour. 5. Set down and take it easy. 6. I set down facing the clock and sat my watch. 7. I shall be setting right here when you want me. 8. The w 7 ater raised three inches in no time. 9. He begun to complain just like he always did. 10. He drunk heavily but not as much as he used to. 11. He rang the bell and ran home. 12. You was there when he sung. 13. One had ought to pay as he goes along. 14. I seen him, and he swims just like she does. 15. It looks as if he were not going to come. 1 6. Neither of the men were so honest as she. 17. Either of the horses is all right. * 18. I see him, and he said he don’t want to come. 19. Everybody ought to mind their own business. 20. Everybody wants his own way. 21. He bid me go, but can I if my superior officer will not leave me depart on such a mission? 22. The shells break around me as I came down the road. The air seemed swelled with the concussions. 23. Each and every person in the audience should have their physical examination once a year. PLATFORM PRESENCE 253 One does not know when their system will succumb to disease. It may have some weak- ness which could be righted in time. 24. “If you want to invent anything, do not try to find it in the wheels in your head or in the wheels in your machine, but first find out what the people need.” R. H. ConwelL 25. “The world will little note, nor long remem- ber what we say here, but it can never for- get what they did here.” A Lincoln. CORRECT USAGE OF WORDS “The habit of thorough investigation into the meaning of words, and of exact discrimination in the use of them, is indispensable to precision and accuracy of thought, and it is surprising how soon the process becomes spontaneous, and almost mechanical and unconscious, so that one finds him- self making nice and yet sound distinctions between par- ticular words which he is not aware that he has ever made the subject of critical analysis.” — G. P. March, Lectures On the English Language . Deceiving. “You are deceiving me.” This use is wrong. He may be trying to deceive you, but your statement shows that he has failed. Decisive — Decided. Decided means unmistak- able, certain. Decisive means putting an end to the question, final, conclusive. A decided victory is not always a decisive victory. Decry — Underestimate — Undervalue. To decry is to talk down in a conspicuous or public manner. A man may, in his own mind, underesti- mate the achievements of friends; underrate and 254 PUBLIC SPEAKING undervalue their achievements when conversing with others. Delightful — Delicious. Chiclets are adver- tised to be “really delightful.” They may be deli- cious, but delightful refers to the gratification of our mental and spiritual desires, as a delightful book. Those things are delicious which please the sense of taste and smell; as a delicious perfume, a delicious pudding. Differ From or With. You differ from a man if you are unlike him; you differ with him if you disagree with him. Difficult — Hard — Arduous. A thing that requires skill and dexterity is difficult; driving an aeroplane is difficult. That which requires much physical exertion is hard; carrying bricks is hard work. An arduous task demands continuous exer- tion ; arduous is usually applied to higher endeavors. Acquiring skill in writing is an arduous task. Pitch- ing hay is laborious and toilsome. VOICE EXERCISE— REVIEW i. Here is an exercise that Lamperti, the famous Italian voice teacher, insisted that his students prac- tise daily. It is the foundation exercise of breath technique. Relax the jaw, let it fall open. Feel an incipient yawn in the throat. Now begin by taking in and letting out very short breaths through the mouth. Increase their rapidity until they sound like the panting of a dog that has been running. This panting sound should be the result of the ex- pelled breath striking against the hard palate of the PLATFORM PRESENCE 255 mouth. It should not come from a narrow, con- stricted throat. Where should the motive power for this pant come from? From the diaphragm. It is acting like a bellows to force the air out in quick spurts. It is fairly pumping it out. You can- not help but feel its action in the middle of your body. Put your hand directly underneath your breast bone and feel its motion there. 2. Relax; feel in the throat the cool, delightful sensation of an oncoming yawn; drink in a deep breath of air ; fee 1 your lungs pushing out the lower ribs at your sides, pushing and flattening the arched diaphragm. Now let us try controlling, by means of the diaphragm, the release of this air. Hold a lighted candle close to your mouth. See if you can empty your lungs now so slowly, so evenly, that the flame of the candle will not flicker in the slightest even though it is held quite close to the mouth. You should practise this until you can exhale stead- ily for thirty or forty seconds without disturbing the flame of the candle. But this exercise will be worse than useless if you constrict your throat. The release of the air must be controlled from the center of body. Never forget that. It must be controlled dowm there where you felt that pumping exercise when you were panting. Try this exercise three or four times. Then blow out the candle by one gust of air forced up by a violent contraction of the diaphragm. 3. We have set down here at the end of this paragraph, Hamlet’s immortal advice to the play- ers. It is excellent advice also to students of public 256 PUBLIC SPEAKING speaking. Read it aloud, putting into practise all we have learned so far about diaphragmatic breath- ing and breath control Think of the tone as com- ing in and up as in a yawning, crying feeling. Keep the throat open. Keep always an ample reserve of breath in the lungs. Strike off the emphatic ideas with the tip of your tongue. Feel it hitting neatly, quickly, against the back of your front teeth and the front part of the roof of the mouth. Do these things ; and you will undoubtedly be highly gratified with the tones you produce. How round and clear they will be. How they will carry. “Speak the speech, I pray you, as I pronounced it to you, — • trippingly on the tongue; but if you mouth it, as many of our players do, I had as lief the town-crier spoke mj ! lines. Nor do not saw the air too much with your hand, thus; but use all gently: for in the very torrent, tempest, and, as I may say, whirlwind of your passion, you must acquire and beget a temperance that may give it smooth- ness. Oh, it offends me to the soul to hear a robustious periwig-pated fellow tear a passion to tatters, to very rags, to split the ear of the groundlings, who, for the most part, are capable of nothing but inexplicable dumb -shows' and noise; I would have such a fellow whipped for o’erdoing Termagant; it out-herods Herod: pray you, avoid it. “Be not too tame neither, but let your own discretion be your tutor: suit the action to the word, the word to the action; with this special observance, that you o’erstep not the modesty of nature: for anything so overdone is from the purpose of playing, whose end, both at the first and now, was and is, to hold, as ’twere, the mirror up to nature; to show virtue her own feature, scorn her own image, and the very age and body of the time his form and pressure. Now this overdone or come tardy off, though it makes the unskillful laugh, cannot but make the judicious grieve; the PLATFORM PRESENCE 257 censure of the which one must in your allowance o’erweigh a whole theater of others. Oh, there be players that I have seen play, and heard others praise, and that highly, not to speak it profanely, that neither having the accent of Christians nor the gait of Christian, pagan, nor man, have so strutted and bellowed, that I thought some of nature’s journeymen had made men, and not made them well, they imitated humanity so abominably.” CHAPTER IX HOW TO OPEN A TALK “If you happen to be one of a circle of public speakers mho are relating their experiences, you mill often hear some one remark apropos of the proper construction of an ad- dress: * Get a good beginning and a good ending ; stuff it with whatever you please S” Victor Murdock. “In public address, it is all-important to make a good start. In the whole hard process of speech-making , there is nothing quite so hard as to make easy and skilful contact with an audience . . . . Much depends upon first impres- sions and opening words. Often an audience is either won or lost by the first half dozen sentences of a speech V Public Speaking Today, by Lockwood-Thoipe. “ The golden rule is clearly: Drive into the heart of your subject as soon as may be. Obey this rule to the point of austerity. Resist the temptation to say ornamental and pretty things. Never , never J never apologize for anything at all. In simple, clear spoken words, get to the point. . . . In ivriting a speech, as in wilting an article, we can usually go back and delete the first paragraph. . . . Begin where you thought your introduction would end V Public Speak- ing for Business Men, by Sidney F. Wicks. “Compared with what we ought to be, we are only half awake . We are making use of only a small part of our physical and mental resources. Stating the thing broadly, the human individual thus lives far within his limits . He possesses* powers of various sorts which he habitually fails to use/' Professor William James . CHAPTER IX HOW TO OPEN A TALK 1 once asked Dr. Lynn Harold Hough, formerly president of Northwestern University, what was the most important fact that his long experience as a speaker had taught him. After pondering for a minute, he replied “To get an arresting opening, something that will seize the attention immedi- ately.” He plans in advance almost the precise words of both his opening and closing. John Bright did the same thing. Gladstone did it. Webster did it. Lincoln did it. Practically every speaker with common sense and experience does it. But does the beginner? Seldom. Planning takes time, requires thought, demands will-power. Cere- bration is a painful process. Thomas Edison has this quotation from Sir Joshua Reynolds nailed on the walls of his plants : “There is no expedient to which a man will not resort to avoid the real labor of thinking.” The tyro usually trusts to the inspiration of the moment with the consequence that he finds : “Beset with pitfall and with gin r The road he is to wander in.” 261 262 PUBLIC SPEAKING The late Lord Northcliffe, who fought his way up from a meager weekly salary to being the richest and most influential newspaper owner in the British Empire, said that these five words from Pascal had done more to help him succeed than anything else he had ever read: “To foresee is to rule.” That is also a most excellent motto to have on your desk when you are planning your talk. Foresee how you are going to begin when the mind is fresh to grasp every word you utter. Foresee what im- pression you are going to leave last — when nothing else follows to obliterate it. Ever since the days of Aristotle, books on this subject have divided the speech into three sections : the introduction, the body, the conclusion. Until comparatively recently, the introduction often was, and could really afford to be, as leisurely as a buggy ride. The speaker then was both a bringer of news and an entertainer. A hundred years ago he often filled the niche in the community that is^ usurped to- day by the newspaper, the radio, the telephone, the movie theater. But conditions have altered amazingly. The world has been made over. Inventions have speeded up life more in the kst hundred years than they had formerly in all the ages since Belshazzar and Nebuchadnezzar. Automobiles, aeroplanes, radio; we are moving with increasing speed. And the speaker must fall in line with the impatient tempo of the times. If you are going to use an HOW TO OPEN A TALK 263 Introduction, believe me, it ought to be short as a billboard advertisement* This is about the temper of the average modern audience : “Got anything to say? All right, let’s have it quickly and with very little trimmings. No oratory! Give us the facts quickly and sit down.” When Woodrow Wilson addressed Congress on such a momentous question as an ultimatum on sub- marine warfare, he announced his topic and cen- tered the audience’s attention on the subject with just twenty-three words : “A situation has arisen in the foreign relations of the country of which it is my plain duty to inform you very frankly.” When Charles Schwab addressed the Pennsyl- vania. Society of New York, he strode right into the heart of his talk with his second sentence : “Uppermost in the minds of American citizens to-day is the question : What is the meaning of the existing slump in business and what of the future? Personally, I am an optimist. ...” ' *v ; , ■ ■ 7 ■ The salesmanager for the National Cash Reg- ister Company opened one of his talks to his men in this fashion. Only three sentences in this intro- duction; and they are all easy to listen to, they all have vigor and drive; “You men- who get the orders are the chaps who are supposed to keep the smoke coming out of the factory chim- ney. The volume of smoke emitted from our chimney dur- ing the past two summer months hasn’t been large enough to darken the landscape to any great extent. Now that 264 PUBLIC SPEAKING the dog days are over and the business-revival season has begun, we are addressing to you a short, sharp request on this subject: We want more smoke.” But do inexperienced speakers usually achieve such commendable swiftness and succinctness in their openings? Strict veracity compels us to re- cord that they do not. The majority of untrained and unskilled speakers will begin in one of two ways- -both of which are bad. Let us discuss them forthwith. BEWARE OF OPENING WITH A SO-CALLED HUMOROUS STORY For some lamentable reason, the novice often feels that he ought to be funny as a speaker. He may, by nature, mind you, be as solemn as the encyclopedia, utterly devoid of the lighter touch ; yet the moment he stands up to talk he imagines he feels, or ought to feel, the spirit of Mark Twain descending upon him. So he is inclined to open with a humorous story, especially if the. occasion is an after-dinner affair. What happens? The chances are twenty to one that the narration, the manner of this hardware merchant newly-turned raconteur, is as heavy as the dictionary. The chances are his stories don’t “click.” In the im- mortal language of the immortal Hamlet, they prove “weary, stale, flat and unprofitable.” If an entertainer were to misfire a few times like that before a vaudeville audience that had paid for their seats, they would “boo” and shout “give him HOW TO OPEN A TALK 265 the hook.” But the average group listening to a speaker is very sympathetic; so, out of sheer char- ity, they will do their best to manufacture a few chuckles; while, deep in their hearts, they pity the would-be humorous speaker for his failure ! They themselves feel uncomfortable. Haven’t you, my dear reader, witnessed this kind of fiasco time after time? The writer has. In all the difficult realm of speech-making, what is more difficult, more rare, than the ability to make an audience laugh? Humor is a hair trigger affair; it is so much a matter of individuality, of personal- ity. You are either born with the predilection for being humorous or you are not — much as you are born with or without brown eyes. Not much can be done about either. Remember, it is seldom the story that is funny of, by, and in itself. It is the way it is told that makes it a success. Ninety-nine men out of a hun- dred will fail woefully with the identical stories that made Mark Twain famous. Read the stories that Lincoln repeated in the taverns of the Eighth Judi- cial District* of Illinois, stories that men drove miles to hear, stories that men sat up all night to hear, stories that, according to an eye witness, sometimes caused the natives to “whoop and roll off their chairs.” Read those stories aloud to your family and see if you conjure up a smile. Here is one Lincoln used to tell with roaring success. Why not try it? Privately, please — not before an audience. A late traveler, trying to reach home over the muddy roads of the Illinois prairies, was overtaken by a storm. The night was black as ink; the rain 266 PUBLIC SPEAKING descended as if some dam in the heavens had broken; thunder rent the angry clouds like the ex- plosion of dynamite. Chain lightning showed trees falling around. The roar of it was very nearly deaf- ening. Finally, a crash more terrific, more terrible, than any the helpless man had ever heard in his life, brought him to his knees. He was not given to praying, usually, but “Oh, Lord,” he gasped, “if it is all the same to you, please give us a little more light and a little less noise.” You may be one of those fortunately endowed in- dividuals who has the rare gift of humor. If so, by all means, cultivate it. You will be thrice wel- come wherever you speak. But if your talent lies in other directions, it is folly — and it ought to be high treason — for you to attempt to wear the mantle of Chauncey M. Depew. Were you to study his speeches, and Lincoln’s, and Job Hedges’, you would probably be surprised at the few stories they told, especially in their open- ings. Edwin James Cattell confided to me that he had never told a funny story for the mere sake of humor. It had to be relevant, had to illustrate a point. Humor ought to be merely the frosting on the cake, merely the chocolate between the layers, not the cake itself. Strickland Gillilan, the best humorous lecturer in these United States makes it a rule never to tell a story during the first three minutes of his talk. If he finds that practise ad- visable, I wonder if you and I would not also. Must the opening, then, be heavy-footed, ele- phantine and excessively solemn? Not at all. Tickle our risibilities, if you can, by some local ref- HOW TO OPEN A TALK 267 erence, something anent the occasion or the remarks of some other speaker. Observe some incongruity. Exaggerate it. That brand of humor is forty times more likely to succeed than stale jokes about Pat and Mike, or a mother-in-law, or a goat. Perhaps the easiest way to create merriment is to tell a joke on yourself. Depict yourself in some ridiculous and embarrassing situation. That gets down to the very essence of much humor. The Eskimos laugh even at a chap who has broken his leg. The Chinese chuckle over the dog that has fallen out of a second story window and killed him- self. We are a bit more sympathetic than that, but don’t we smile at the fellow chasing his hat, or slip- ping on a banana skin? Most any one can make an audience laugh by grouping incongruous ideas or qualities as, for ex- ample, the statement of a newspaper writer that he “hated children, tripe, and Democrats.” Note how cleverly Rudyard Kipling raised laughs in this opening to one of his political talks in Eng- land. He is retailing here, not manufactured anecdotes, ,but some of his own experiences and playfully stressing their incongruities : “My Lords, Ladies and Gentlemen : When I was a young man in India I used to report criminal cases for the news- paper that employed me. It was interesting work because it introduced me to forgers and embezzlers and murderers and enterprising sportsmen of that kind. ( Laughter. ) Sometimes, after I had reported their trials, I used to visit my friends in jail when they were doing their sentences. (Laughter.) I remember one man who got off with a life sentence for murder. He was a clever, smooth-speaking chap, and he told me what he called the story of his life. 268 PUBLIC SPEAKING I He said: ‘Take it from me that when a man gets crooked, one thing leads to another until he finds himself in such a position that he has to put somebody out of the way to get | straight again.’ (Laughter.) Well, that exactly describes the present position of the cabinet. (Laughter and cheers.)” f/T : . ■ This is the way William Howard Taft managed j. a bit of humor at the annual banquet of the Super- j intendents of the Metropolitan Life Insurance i Company. The beautiful part of it is this: he is | humorous and pays his audience a gracious compli- ment at the same time: J; : I "Mr. President and Gentlemen of the Metropolitan Life j In sura n ce C o m party : I was out in my old home about nine months ago, and I heard an after-dinner speech there by a gentleman who had some trepidation in making it; and he said he had con- sulted a friend of his, who had had a great deal of experi- ence in making after-dinner speeches, which friend advised him that the best kind of audience to address, as an after- dinner speaker, was an audience intelligent and well-edu- cated but half-tight. (Laughter and applause.) Now, all I can say is that this audience is one of the best audi- ences I ever saw for an after-dinner speaker. Something has made up for the absence of that element that the re- mark implied (applause), and I must think it is the spirit of the Metropolitan Life Insurance Company. (Prolonged applause. ) ” DO NOT BEGIN WITH AN APOLOGY The second egregious blunder that the beginner is wont to make in his opening, is this: He apolo- gizes. “I am no speaker. ... I am not prepared to talk. ... I have nothing to say. . . HOW TO OPEN A TALK 269 \ Don’t ! Don’t ! The opening words of a poem | by Kipling are : “There’s no use in going further.” j That is precisely the way an audience feels when J a speaker opens in that fashion, i Anyway, if you are not prepared, some of us will discover it without your assistance. Others will not. Why call their attention to it? Why insult your ; audience by suggesting that you did not think them j worth preparing for, that just any old thing you ( happened to have on the fire would be good enough ; to serve them? No. No. We don’t want to hear your apologies. We are there to be informed and interested, to be interested, remember that. The moment you come before the audience, you have our attention naturally, inevitably. It is not | difficult to get it for the first five seconds, but it is difficult to hold it for the next five minutes. If you once lose it, it will be doubly difficult to win it back. So begin with something interesting in your j; very first sentence. Not the second. Not the | third. The first! F-I-R-S-T. First! j “How?” you ask. Rather a large order, I ad- mit. And in attempting to harvest the material to fill it, we must tread our way down devious and dubious paths, for so much depends upon you, upon your audience, your subject, your material, the occa- : sion, and so on. However, we hope that the tenta- j tive suggestions discussed and illustrated in the re- : mainder of this chapter will yield something usable and of value. 270 PUBLIC SPEAKING AROUSE CURIOSITY Here is an opening used by Mr. Howell Healy in a talk given before a session of this course in the Penn Athletic Club, Philadelphia. Do you like it? Does it get your interest immediately? “Eighty-two years ago, and just about this time of year, there was published in London a little volume, a story, which was destined to become immortal. Many people have called it ‘the greatest little book in the world/ When it first appeared, friends meeting one another on the Strand or Pall Mali, asked the question, ‘Have you read it?’ The answer invariably w r as: ‘Yes, God bless him, I have/ “The day it was published a thousand copies were sold. Within a fortnight, the demand had consumed fifteen thou- sand. Since then it has run into countless editions, and has been translated into every language under heaven. A few years ago, J. P. Morgan purchased the original manuscript for a fabulous sum; it now reposes among his other price- less treasures in that magnificent art gallery in New York City which he calls his library. “What is this world-famous book? Dickens’ ‘Christmas Carol/ . . ” Do you consider that a successful opening? Did It hold your attention, heighten your interest as it progressed? Why? Was it not because it aroused your curiosity, held you in suspense? Curiosity! Who is not susceptible to it? I have seen birds In the woods fly about by the hour watching me out of sheer curiosity. I know a hunter in the high Alps who lures chamois by throw- ing a bed sheet around him and crawling about and arousing their curiosity* Dogs have curiosity, and HOW TO OPEN A TALK 271 so have kittens, and all manner of animals including the well-known genus homo . So arouse your audience’s curiosity with your first sentence, and you have their interested attention. The writer used to begin his lecture on Colonel Thomas Lawrence’s adventures in Arabia in this fashion : “Lloyd George says that he regards Colonel Lawrence as one of the most romantic and picturesque characters of modern times.” That opening had two advantages. In the first place, a quotation from an eminent man always has a lot of attention value. Second, it aroused curi- osity: “Why romantic?” was the natural question, and “why picturesque?” “I never heard about him before. . . . What did he do?” Lowell Thomas began his lecture on Colonel Thomas Lawrence with this statement: “I was going down Christian Street in Jerusalem one day when I met a man clad in the gorgeous robes of an oriental potentate; and, at his side, hung the curved gold sword worn only by the descendants of the prophet Moham- med. But this man had none of the appearances of an Arab. He had blue eyes; and the Arabs’ eyes are always black or brown.” That piques your curiosity, doesn’t it? You want to hear more. Who was he? Why was he posing as an Arab? What did he do? What became of him? The student who opened his talk with this ques- 272 PUBLIC SPEAKING “Do you know that slavery exists in seventeen nations of the world to-day ?” not only aroused curiosity, but in addition, he shocked his auditors. “Slavery? To-day? Seven- teen countries? Seems incredible. What nations? Where are they?” One can often arouse curiosity by beginning with an effect, and making people anxious to hear the cause. For example, one student began with this striking statement: “A member of one of our legislatures recently stood up in his legislative assembly and proposed the passage of a law prohibiting tadpoles from becoming frogs within two miles of any school house.” You smile. Is the speaker joking? How absurd. Was that actually done? ... Yes. The speaker went on to explain. An article in The Saturday Evening Post, entitled “With The Gangsters,” began : “Are gangsters really organized? As a rule they are. How? ...” . With ten words, you see, the writer of that article announced his subject, told you something about it, and aroused your curiosity as to how gang- sters are organized. Very creditable. Every man who aspires to speak in public ought to study the technique that magazine writers employ to hook the reader’s interest immediately. You can learn far more from them about how to open a speech than you can by studying collections of printed speeches. HOW TO OPEN A TALK 273 WHY NOT BEGIN WITH A STORY? Harold Bell Wright has admitted In an Interview that his novels have brought him more than a hun- dred thousand dollars a year. Booth Tarkington and Robert W. Chambers have earned similar amounts. For seventeen years Doubleday Page and Company had one large press which did nothing in all that time but turn out a ceaseless flood of the novels by the late Gene Stratton Porter. Over seventeen million copies of her books were sold; and they brought her more than three million dol- lars in royalties. Do people like to hear stories? Those figures sound like it, don’t they? We especially like to hear a man relate narra- tives from his own experience. The late Russell E. Conweli delivered his lecture, “Acres of Dia- monds,” over six thousand times, and received mil- lions for it. And how does this marvelously popular lecture begin? Read it yourself. It is printed in the Appendix to this course. Here is the way it opens : “In 1870 we went down the Tigris River. We hired a guide at Bagdad to show us Persepolis, Nineveh, and Babylon. . . And he is off — with a story . That is what hooks the attention. That kind of opening is almost fool- proof. It can hardly fail. It moves. It marches. We follow. We want to know what is going to happen. The story-opening was used to launch Chapter III of this book. 274 PUBLIC SPEAKING Here are opening sentences taken from two stories that appeared in a single issue of The Satur- day Evening Post: 1. “The sharp crack of a revolver punctuated the silence.” 2. “An incident, trivial in itself but not at all trivial in its possible consequences, occurred at the Montview Hotel, Denver, during the first week of July. It so aroused the curiosity of Goebel, the resident manager, that he referred it to Steve Faraday, owner of the Montview and half a dozen other Faraday hotels, when Steve made his regular visit a few days later on his midsummer swing of inspection/' Note that those openings have action. They start something. They arouse your curiosity. You want to read on ; you want to know more ; you want to find out what it is all about. Even the unpractised beginner can usually man- age a successful opening if he employs the story technique and arouses our curiosity. BEGIN WITH A SPECIFIC ILLUSTRATION It is difficult, it is arduous, for the average audi- ence to follow abstract statements very long. Illustrations are easier to listen to, far easier. Then, why not start with one? It is hard to get men to do that. I know. I have tried. They feel somehow that they must first make a few general statements. Not at all. Open with your illustra- tion, arouse the interest; then follow with your general remarks. If you wish an example of this technique, please turn to the opening of Chapter V of this book, or Chapter VII. HOW TO OPEN A TALK 275 What technique was employed to open this chap- ter you are now reading? USE AN EXHIBIT Perhaps the easiest way in the world to gain attention is to hold up something for people to look at. Even savages and half-wits, and babes in the cradle and monkeys in a store window and dogs on the street will give heed to that kind of stim- ulus. It can be used sometimes with effectiveness before the most dignified audience. For example, Mr. S. S. Ellis, of Philadelphia, opened one of his talks by holding a coin between his thumb and fore- finger, and high above his shoulder. Naturally every one looked. Then he inquired: “Has any one here ever found a coin like this on the sidewalk? It announces that the fortunate finder will be given a lot free in such and such a real estate development. He has but to call and present this coin. . . Mr. Ellis then proceeded to reveal the colored man in the cordwood and to condemn the misleading and unethical practises involved. ASK A QUESTION Mr. Ellis’ opening has another commendable fea- ture. It begins by asking a question, by getting the audience thinking with the speaker, cooperating with him. Note that the Saturday Evening Post article on Gangsters opens with two questions in the first three sentences: “Are gangsters really organized? . . How?” The use of this question-key is really 276 PUBLIC SPEAKING one of the simplest, surest ways to unlock the minds of your audience and let yourself in. When other tools prove useless, you can always fall back on it. WHY NOT OPEN WITH A QUESTION FROM SOME FAMOUS MAN? The words of a prominent man always have attention power; so a suitable quotation is one of the very best ways of launching a harangue. Do you like the following opening of a discussion on Busi- ness Success? “The world bestows its big prizes both in money and honors for but one thing,” says Elbert Hubbard. “And that is initiative. And what is initiative? I’ll tell you: it is doing the right thing without being told.” As a starter, that has several commendable fea- tures. The initial sentence arouses curiosity; it carries us forward, we w’ant to hear more. If the speaker pauses skillfully after the words, “Elbert Hubbard,” it arouses suspense. “What does the world bestow its big prizes for?” we ask. Quick. Tell us. We may not agree with you^ but give us your opinion anyway. . . . The second sentence leads us right into the heart of the subject. The third sentence, a question, invites the audience to get in on the discussion, to think, to do a little some- thing. And how audiences like to do things. They love it ! The fourth sentence defines initiative. . . . After this opening the speaker led off with a human interest story illustrating that quality. As far as construction is concerned, Moody might have rated the stock of that talk Aaa. HOW TO OPEN A TALK 277 TIE YOUR TOPIC UP TO THE VITAL INTERESTS OF YOUR HEARERS Begin on some note that goes straight to the selfish interests of the audience. That is one of the best of all possible ways to start. It is sure to get attention. We are mightily interested in the things that touch us significantly, momentously. That is only common sense, isn’t it? Yet the use of it is very uncommon. For example, recently I heard a speaker begin a talk on the necessity or periodic health examinations. How did he open? By telling the history of the Life Extension Insti- tute, how it was organized and the service it was rendering. Absurd! Our hearers have not the foggiest, not the remotest, interest in how some company somewhere was formed; but they are stu- pendously and eternally interested in themselves* Why not recognize that fundamental fact? Why not show how that company is of vital concern to them? Why not begin something like this? u Do you know how long you are expected to live accord- ing to life insurance tables? Your expectancy of life, as insurance statisticians phrase it, is two-thirds of the time between your present age and eighty. For example, if you are thirty-five now, the differ- ence between your present age and eighty is forty- five; you can expect to live two-thirds of that amount, or another thirty years. ... Is that enough? No, no, we are all passionately eager for more. Yet those tables are based upon millions of records. May you and I, then, hope to beat them? Yes, with proper precaution, we may; but the very 278 PUBLIC SPEAKING first step is to have a thorough physical examina- tion ...” Then, if we explain in detail why the periodic health examination is necessary, the hearer might be interested in some company formed to render that service. But to begin talking about the com- pany in an impersonal way. It is disastrous ! Deadly! Take another example: During the last season, I heard a student begin a talk on the prime urgency of conserving our forests. He opened like this: “We, as Americans, ought to be proud of our na- tional resources. . . .” From that sentence, he went on to show that we were wasting our timber at a shameless and indefensible pace. But the open- ing was bad, too general, too vague. He did not make his subject seem vital to us. There was a printer in that audience. The destruction of our forests will mean something very real to his busi- ness. There was a banker; it is going to affect him for it will affect our general prosperity. . . .and so on. Why not begin, then, by saying: “The sub- ject I am going to speak about affects your business, Mr. Appleby: and yours, Mr. Saul. In fact, it will, in some measure, affect the price of the food we eat and the rent that we pay. It touches the wel- fare and prosperity of us all.” Is that exaggerating the importance of conserv- ing our forests? No, I think not. It is only obey- ing Elbert Hubbard’s injunction to “paint the pic- ture large and put the matter in a way that compels attention.” HOW TO OPEN A TALK 279 THE ATTENTION POWER OF SHOCKING FACTS “A good magazine article,” said S. S. McClure, the founder of the periodical bearing his name, “is a series of shocks.” They jar us out of our day dreams; they seize, they demand attention. Here are some illustra- tions: Mr. N. D. Ballantine, of Baltimore, began his address on The Marvels of Radio with this state- ment : “Do you realize that the sound of a fly walking across a pane of glass in New York can he broadcasted by radio and made to roar away off in Central Africa like the falls of Niagara?” Mr. Harry G. Jones, president of Harry G. Jones Company, of New York City, began his talk on the Criminal Situation with these words : “The administration of our criminal law,” declared William Howard Taft, then chief justice of the supreme court of the United States, “is a disgrace to civilization.” That has the double advantage of being not only a shocking opening, but the shocking statement is quoted from an authority on jurisprudence. Mr. Paul Gibbons, former President of the Opti- mist Club of Philadelphia, opened an address on Crime with these arresting statements : “The American people are the worst criminals in the world. Astounding as that assertion is, it is true. Cieve- 280 PUBLIC SPEAKING land* Ohio, has six times as many murders as all London. It has one hundred and seventy times as many robberies, according to its population, as has London. More peo- ple are robbed every year, or assaulted with intent to rob, in Cleveland than in all England, Scotland and Wales combined. More people are murdered every year in St. Louis than in all England and Wales. There are more murders in New York City than in all France or Germany or Italy or the British Isles. The sad truth of the matter is that the criminal is not punished. If you commit a mur- der, there is less than one chance in a hundred that you will ever be executed for it. You, as a peaceful citizen, are ten times as liable to die from cancer as you would be to be hanged if you shot a man.” That opening was successful, for Mr. Gibbons put the requisite power and earnestness behind his words. They lived. They breathed. However, I have heard other students begin their talks on the crime situation with somewhat similar illustrations ; yet their openings were mediocre. Why? Words. Words. Words. Their technique of construction was flawless, but their spirit was nil. Their man- ner vitiated and emaciated all they said. THE VALUE OF THE SEEMINGLY CASUAL OPENING How do you like the following opening, and why? Mary E. Richmond is addressing the annual meet- ing of the New York League of Women Voters in the days before legislation against child marriages : “Yesterday, as the train passed through a city not far away from here, I was reminded of a marriage that took place there a few years ago. Because many other marriages 1 HOW TO OPEN A TALK 281 in this state have been just as hasty and disastrous as this one, I am going to begin what I have to say to-day with some of the details of this individual instance. “It was on December 12th that a high school girl of fifteen in that city met for the first time a junior in a nearby college who had just attained his majority. On December 15th, only three days later, they procured a marriage license by swearing that the girl was eighteen and was therefore free from the necessity of procuring parental consent. Leaving the city clerk’s office with their license, they applied at once to a priest (the girl was a Catholic), but very properly he refused to marry them. In some way, perhaps through this priest, the child’s mother received news of the attempted marriage. Before she could find her daughter, however, a justice of the peace had united the pair. The bridegroom then took his bride to a hotel where they spent two days and two nights, at the end of which time he abandoned her and never lived with her again.” Personally, I like that opening very much. The very first sentence is good. It forecasts an inter- esting reminiscence. We want to hear the details. We settle down to listen to a human interest story. In addition to that, it seems very natural. It does not smack ofi the study, it is not formal, it does not smell of the lamp. , . . “Yesterday, as the train passed through a city not far from here, I was re- minded of a marriage that took place there a few years ago.” Sounds natural, spontaneous, human. Sounds like one person relating an interesting story to another. An audience likes that. But it is very liable to shy at something too elaborate, something that reeks of preparation with malice aforethought. We want the art that conceals art. 282 PUBLIC SPEAKING SUMMARY 1. The opening of a talk is difficult. It is also highly important, for the minds of our hearers are fresh then and comparatively easy to impress. It is of too much consequence to be left to chance; it ought to be carefully worked out in advance. 2. The introduction ought to be short, only a sentence or two. Often it can be dispensed with altogether. Wade right into the heart of your subject with the smallest possible number of words; No one objects to that. 3. Novices are prone to begin either with at- tempting to tell a humorous story or by making an apology. Both of these are usually bad. Very few men — very, very, very few' — can relate a humorous anecdote successfully. The attempt usually em- barrasses the audience instead of entertaining them. Stories should be relevant, not dragged in just for the sake of the story. Humor should be the icing on the cake, not the cake itself. . . . Never apolo- gize. It is usually an insult to your audience; it bores them. Drive right into what you have to say, say it quickly and sit down. 4. A speaker may be able to win the immediate attention of his audience by: a. Arousing curiosity. (Illustration : Story of Dicken’s “Christmas Carol.”) b. Relating a human interest story. (Illus- tration: “Acres of Diamonds” lecture.) HOW TO OPEN A TALK 283 c. Beginning with a specific illustration. (See the openings of Chapters V and VII of this book.) d. Using an exhibit. (Illustration: The coin that entitled the finder to a free lot.) e. Asking a question. (Illustration : “Has any one here ever found a coin like this on the sidewalk?”) f. Opening with a striking quotation. (Illus- tration: Elbert Hubbard on the Value of Initia- tive.) g. Showing how the topic affects the vital in- terest of the audience. (Illustration: “Your ex- pectancy of life is two-thirds of amount of time between your present age and eighty. You may be able to increase that by having periodic health examinations,” etc.) h. Starting with shocking facts. (Illustra- tion : “The American people are the worst crim- inals in the civilized world.”) 5. Don’t make your opening too formal. Don’t let the bones show. Make it appear free, casual, Inevitable. This can be done by referring to some- thing that has just happened, or something that has just been said. (Illustration : “Yesterday, as the train passed through a city not far from here, I was reminded . . .”) SPEECH BUILDING WORDS OFTEN MISPRONOUNCED “The habitual mispronunciation of such common words as data , status , and apparatus by speakers is almost unfor- givable.” — George Rowland Collins, in Platform Speaking* The A* s which are capitalized in the following should be sounded as “a” in day : alma mAter Apex apparAtus Aviation Aviator blAtant cadAver dAta grAtis ignorAmus implAcable LusitAnia prefAce prorAta quAsi rAdiator sAlient stAtus strAta tornAdo ultimAtum verbAtim utilitArian (sound all Vs as in it.) Can you pronounce correctly all the italicized words in the following story? Once upon a time, a stolid and senile Prince in the Orient read a poem about love. With the advent of spring, a hunger for romance stole over him, and he was unable to combat it. It was so exquisite, so formidable , so inexplicable > so delicious, so dolorous , so shaking and quaking , that he did not even desire to combat it. He felt that no one in the wide domains of his native land could understand the marvelous melody that swept through his heart Conse- 284 285 HOW TO OPEN A TALK quently, he began to freque?it the harbor, watching the stately ships sail in with high masts through the mists . His finances hardly permitted travel; so he went about in- cognito, using an alias, while he sold alternately brooms and cigar store coupons until he was able to stand the financial strain of a trip to Seattle. There he met a fragile widow, who had also recently divorced a drug addict. Although he was not conversant with her language, he was an expert flatterer. However, she was tepid to his advances. She counted the cost because she did not want to marry in haste when her own mind was hazy. She hissed in his face that she was not interested in his proposal, that marriage with him would be horrid , despicable, contrary to her ideals. He received his chastisement in silence, tore up the trousseau that he had depleted his finances to purchase, and, moaning and groaning, he sailed back to Honolulu. ERRORS IN ENGLISH In this, the first chapter in the second half of the course, there will be no specific review. Chapter VIII and the reviews in the preceding chapters ex- amined the use of every word to which attention had been called. We shall now start on the study of various other ordinary mistakes which are made in the English language. Rule: Every pronoun which is the subject of a verb must be in the nominative case, regardless of whether the verb is expressed or understood. In other words, when a pronoun is the subject of a verb, its form used should be : I not me we not us he not him they not them she not her who not whom 286 PUBLIC SPEAKING Right : He can do it as well as /. Wrong: He can do it as well as me. (The last word in this sentence is the sub- ject of the understood verb can ; so this is equivalent to saying, “He can do it as well as me can do it.”) Right: He and I were the first ones here. Wrong: Him and me were the first ones here. Right : PFe Americans will have to take a more active part in world affairs. Wrong: Us Americans will have to take a more active part in world affairs. (Leave out the word Americans and the mistake shocks the ears of even the most undiscerning.) Right: Lincoln was only about twelve years older than I. Wrong: “Lincoln was only about twelve years older than me.” An ex-senator in an interview in the New York Times, June 25, 1922. ( Than is a conjunction and takes the same case after it as before. The me in'the sen- tence just quoted is really the subject of an understood verb. If the entire sentence were written, it would read, “Lincoln was only about twelve years older than me am old.” This lamentable error is very common. ) Rule: Do not use a noun and its pronoun when the pronoun immediately follows the noun. Ex- amples are : HOW TO OPEN A TALK 28 ? Right: Thy rod and Thy staff comfort me. Wrong: u Thy rod and Thy staff they com- fort me.” Rule : Such compound pronouns, as myself , itself, ourselves, etc., are never to be used as sub- jects or objects. This usage often happens because the speaker or writer is not sure whether to use a nominative or objective pronoun. Right: Mr. Jones and you wall handle the w r ork. Wrong: Mr. Jones and yourself will handle the work. Right: He handed the money to Jim and me . Wrong: He handed the money to Jim and myself . Right: It was they who concealed their assets. Wrong: It was themselves who concealed their assets. Rule: They may be used, however, to refer to the subject or to express emphasis. Right : Idle man hurt himself . Right: The girl herself told me so. Rule : Never use hisself, their self , ourself, and theirselves. These are not in the language. CORRECT USAGE OF WORDS The fair man attempts to be honest and just and impartial. The open man speaks freely and exactly what is in his mind. The frank man does it from a natural dislike of restraint. The ingenuous man 288 PUBLIC SPEAKING has a natural simplicity and regard for truth that prompt him to confess his faults and to speak with- out any reserve. ( Ingenuous must not be confused with ingenious , meaning clever at contriving, cleverly contrived.) The sincere man never pre- tends to be anything that he is not; he is genuine, real A man who speaks openly on occasions may not naturally be frank and fair . A frank man may not go so far in his outspokenness and confessions as the ingenuous person. The sincere man may not speak freely, but he never falsely assumes to be what he is not. Candid , candle and chandelier all come from the same Latin word candere , “to be of glowing white.” A candid opinion is a glowing white, shining opinion giving light on both sides without any attempt at concealment. The unsophisticated person is sound and genuine, artless, innocent. He does not deal in sophistry . Unreserved implies freedom and frankness in words and action. The undesigning individual has no schemes or plots or selfish ends to serve. The unvarnished statement has no gloss; it does not attempt to smooth over anything with fair words. Other words related in meaning to these are : artless , free-spoken , guileless , honest , im- partial, open , plain-spoken , equitable, unaffected, undisguised, unfeigned, straightforward . VOICE EXERCISE— RELAXING THE JAW In the voice exercises for Chapters III and IV we pointed out the necessity for relaxation, especially of the throat. The jaw also should be relaxed. HOW TO OPEN A TALK 289 Most of us are inclined to hold it rigidly. And what is the result? The tone is forced to squeeze itself out; so it becomes thin and hard. Such a tone, made under such conditions, does not carry well. Our breath is molded into words in our mouth very largely by means of our lips and tongue — the tongue playing the principal part. The set jaw distorts this mouth-mold, and interferes with the beauty and precision of the sounds which should flow from it. Besides, stiff jaws are very liable to result in clumsy tongues ; but it is tongue speed and firmness and elasticity that we prize. Try these exercises for surrendering the jaw. 1. Drop the head on the breast, until your chin is touching your shirt. Raise all of the head now except the lower jaw. If you relax it thoroughly, gravity will hold it down just as gravity pulls your hands down to your sides when you relax them. 2. Sit with your jaw relaxed in the mouth-open, dull-eyed attitude of an idiot until the jaw feels like a dead weight hanging from the rest of the head. 3. Put ytmr fingers about half an inch in front of your ears where the lower jawbone hinges. Open the jaw deliberately. Chew as if you were masticating your food. Note the action underneath your finger tips. Now close the mouth, surrender the jaw this time and let it fall of its own dead weight. If you have done it correctly, if you have not used force, you will not feel the action under your finger tips this time that you felt before. 4. When you are trying to overhear a conversa- tion in the distance, and you can hardly understand 290 PUBLIC SPEAKING It s what do you do? You unconsciously take a deep breath, let your mouth fall open and listen intently, don't you? Imagine you are now listening under such circumstances. Imagine that you have sud< denly heard in that distant conversation, something that has surprised you exceedingly. What do you do? You expand and lift your body, take a deeper breath and your throat opens unconsciously. Now, say “Oh, do you know what he said?” Doesn’t the tone flow out easily and freely? Remember that the only way you can obtain command of the jaw is by relaxing it, so practise these exercises until your jaw is your docile servant, not a stiff, set and obstreperous one. Review Exercise: i. Read the following Saluta- tion to the Dawn. It is a beautiful passage from the Sanskrit Read it aloud in a falsetto voice to develop brightness. (See Voice Exercise, Chapter VII.) “Look to this day, for it is life — the very life of life. In its brief course lie all the verities and realities of your existence: the bliss of growth, the glory of action, the splendor of beauty. Yesterday is already a dream, and to-morrow is only a vision ; but to-day, well lived, makes every yesterday a dream of happiness and every to-morrow a vision of hope. Look, well, therefore to this day. Such is the salutation of the dawn.” 2. Read this aloud now in your natural voice, using the tip of the tongue to strike off the em- phatic ideas with a light elastic touch. (See Voice Exercise, Chapter VI.) HOW TO OPEN A TALK 291 3. Take a deep breath from the diaphragm, and with an open and relaxed throat, say “ah.” Say it without any effort. Say it with perfect ease. 4. Turn to the Voice Exercise, Chapter VII, and read aloud with bright and happy tones, the four verses beginning : “It isn’t raining rain tt me. It’s raining daffodils.” CHAPTER X CAPTURING YOUR AUDIENCE AT ONCE “You must please the audience . You must lull their fears ; dissipate their suspicions ; get them to lay down their arms and say, ' Come let us reason together / This you will do by finding some common grounds and mutual interest . There are things which bind us that are stronger than the forces that sever . What are they f On your discovery of that will depend the success of your speech . If you really cannot please the audience, then show a splendid courage and extort their admiration and respect . As an illustration of the first s if I were addressing an audience of Orangemen in Belfast 1 should pay a tribute to loyalty to conscience . I should speak of our common admiration for our great ancestors , that is, of the things which we had in common . If I were addressing employees I should not start with raging rebukes, but seek to remind them of happier occasions , of loyal cooperation in the past, of the worries and troubles that press upon all engaged in industry . I should let them see that I was sincerely and without bitterness seeking a way out * In every case appeal to the best instincts in the audience; it is amazing how a group of people will respond to such an appeal ” — Sidney F. Wicks, “Public Speaking for Business Men.” “The way we generally strive for rights is by getting our fighting blood up; and I venture to say that that is the long way and not the short way. If you come at me with your fists doubled, I think I can promise you that mine will double as fast as yours; but if you come to me and say, e . Let us sit down and take counsel together, and, if we differ from one another, understand why it is that we differ from one another J just what the points at issue are / we will presently find that we are not so far apart after all, that the points on which we differ are few and the points on which we agree are many, and that if we o?ily have the patience and the candor and the desire to get together, we will get together T — W oodrow Wilson. CHAPTER X CAPTURING YOUR AUDIENCE AT ONCE Several years ago the Colorado Fuel and Iron Company was suffering from labor troubles. Shoot- ing had taken place; there had been bloodshed. The air was electric with bitter hatreds. The very name of Rockefeller was anathema. Yet John D. Rocke- feller, Jr., wanted to talk to the employes of that concern. He wanted to explain, to persuade them to his way of thinking, to get them to accept his beliefs. He realized that, in the very opening of his speech, he must eradicate all ill feeling, all antagonism. At the very outset, he did it beauti- fully and sincerely. Most public speakers can study his method with profit: .#"■ ' “This is a red-letter day in my life. It is the first time I have ever had the good fortune to meet the representatives of the employees of this great company, its officers and superintendents, together, and I can assure you that I am proud to be here, and that I shall remember this gathering as long as I live. Had this meeting been held two weeks ago, I should have stood here a stranger to most of you, recognizing few faces. Having had the opportunity last week of visiting all the camps in the southern coal fields and of talking individually with practically all of the representa- tives, except those who were away; having visited in your homes, met many of your wives and children, we meet here 295 296 PUBLIC SPEAKING not as strangers but as friends, and it is in that spirit of mutual friendship that I am glad to have this opportunity to discuss with you our common interests. “Since this is a meeting of the officers of the company and the representatives of the employees, it is only by your courtesy that I am here, for I am not so fortunate as to be either one or the other; and yet I feel that I am intimately associated with you men, for, in a sense, I represent both the stockholders and the directors.” That is tact — supreme tact. And the speech, in spite of the bitter hatred that had existed, was successful. The men who had been striking and fighting for higher wages never said anything more about it after Rockefeller had explained all the facts in the situation. A DROP OF HONEY AND TWO-GUN MEN “It is an old and true maxim ‘That a drop of honey catches more flies than a gallon of gall.’ So with men. If you would win a man to your cause, first convince him that you are his sincere friend. Therein is a drop of honey that catches his heart ; which, say what he will, is the great high road to his reason, and when once gained, you will find but little trouble in convincing his judgment of the justice of your cause, if, indeed, that cause really be a just jt ■ one. That was Lincoln’s plan. In 1858, during his campaign for the United States Senate, he was announced to speak in what was, at that time, the semi-barbarous part of Southern Illinois called ‘‘Egypt.” They were a rough lot, the men in that section, and they carried ugly looking knives and pistols strapped to their belts even on public oc- casions- Their hatred of all anti-slavery men was CAPTURING YOUR AUDIENCE 297 equalled only by their love of fighting and corn whiskey. Southern men, some of them slave owners from Kentucky and Missouri, had crossed over the Mississippi and the Ohio to be on hand for the ex- citement and trouble. Plenty of it was in prospect, for the rougher elements had sworn that, if Lincoln tried to talk, they would “run the damned Aboli- tionist out of town,” and “shoot him to fiddle strings.” Lincoln had heard these threats, and he knew the intense feeling that existed, the positive danger. “But If only they will give me a fair chance to say a few opening words,” he declared, “I’ll fix them all right.” So, before beginning to talk, he had himself introduced to the ringleaders, and shook their hands cordially. Pie made one of the most tactful openings I have ever read: “Fellow citizens of Southern Illinois, fellow citizens of the State of Kentucky, fellow citizens of Missouri — I am told there are some of you here present who would like to make trouble for me. I don’t understand why they should. I am a plain, common man, like the rest of you ; and why should I not have as good a right to speak my sentiments as the rest of you? Why, good friends, I am one of you. I am not an interloper here. I was born in Kentucky, and raised in Illinois, just like the most of you, and worked my way along by hard scratching. I know the people of Kentucky, and I know the people of Southern Illinois, and I think I know the Missourians. I am one of them, and therefore ought to know them ; and they ought to know me better, and, if they did know" me better, they would know that I am not disposed to make them trouble. Then, why should they, or any one of them, want to make trouble for me? Don’t do any such foolish thing, fellow citizens. Let us be friends, and treat each other like friends. I am one of 298 PUBLIC SPEAKING the humblest and most peaceful men in the world — would wrong no man, would interfere with no man’s rights. And all I ask is that, having something to say, you give me a decent hearing. And, being Illinoisans, Kentuckians, and Missourians — brave and gallant people — I feel sure that j r ou will do that. And now let us reason together, like the honest fellows we are.” As he spoke these words, his face was the very picture of good nature, and his voice vibrated with sympathetic earnestness. That tactful opening calmed the on-coming storm, silenced his enemies. In fact, it transformed many of them into friends. They cheered his speech, and, later, those rough and rude “Egyptians” were among his most ardent supporters for the Presidency. “Interesting,” you remark, “but what has all this got to do with me? I am no Rockefeller; I am not going to address hungry strikers longing to strangle and batter the life out of me. I am no Lincoln; I am not going to talk to two-gun des- peradoes full of corn whiskey and hatred.” True, true, but aren’t you, almost every day of your life, talking to people who differ from you on some subject under discussion? Aren’t you con- stantly trying to win people to your way of think- ing — at home, in the office, in the market place? Is there room for improvement in your methods? How do you begin? By showing Lincoln’s tact? And Rockefeller’s? If so, you are a person of rare finesse and extraordinary discretion. Most men begin, not by thinking about the other fellow’s views and desires, not by trying to find a common CAPTURING YOUR AUDIENCE 299 ground of agreement, but by unloading their own opinions. For example, I have heard hundreds of speeches on the hotly contested subject of prohibition. In almost every instance, the speaker, with all the tact of a bull in a china shop, opened with some positive and perhaps belligerent statement. He showed once and for all which direction he faced and under which flag he fought. He showed that his mind was made up so firmly that there was not the slightest chance of it being changed; yet he was 'expecting others to abandon their cherished beliefs and to accept his. The effect? About the same that results from all arguments: no one was convinced. Instantly, he lost by his blunt, aggres- sive opening the sympathetic attention of all who differed with him; instantly, they discounted all he said and would say; instantly, they challenged his statements; instantly, they held his opinions in con- tempt. His talk served but to entrench them more strongly behind the bulwark of their own beliefs. You see, he made, at the very outset, the fatal mistake of prodding his listeners, of getting them bending backwards and saying through their shut teeth: “No! No! No!” Is not that a very serious situation if one wishes to win converts to his w T ay of thinking? A most illuminating statement on this point is the following quotation from Professor Overstreet’s lectures be- fore the New School for Social Research in New York City. “A ‘No* response is a most difficult handicap to overcome. When a person has said ‘No,’ all his pride of personality 300 PUBLIC SPEAKING demands that he remain consistent with himself. He may later feel that the ‘No’ was ill advised ; nevertheless, there is his precious pride to consider ! Once having said a thing, he must stick to it. Hence it is of the very greatest im- portance that we start a person in the affirmative direc- tion. . * .” The skillful speaker gets “at the outset a num- ber of ‘yes-responses.’ He has thereby set the psychological processes of his listeners moving in the affirmative direction. It is like the movement of a billiard ball. Propel it in one direction, and it takes some force to deflect it; far more force to send it back in the opposite direction, “The p$} r chological patterns here are quite clear. When a person says ‘No’ and really means it, he is doing far more than saying a word of two letters. His entire organ- ism — glandular, nervous, muscular — gathers itself together into a condition of rejection. There is, usually in minute but sometimes in observable degree, a physical withdrawal, or readiness for withdrawal. The whole neuro-muscular system, in short, sets itself on guard against acceptance. Where, on the contrary, a person says ‘Yes,’ none of the withdrawing activities take place. The organism is in a forward-moving, accepting, open attitude. Hence the more ‘Yesses’ we can, at the very outset, induce, the more likely we are to succeed in capturing the attention for our ultimate proposal. “It is a very simple technique — this Yes-Response. And yet how much neglected ! It often seems as' if people get a sense of their own importance by antagonizing at the outset. The radical comes into a conference with his con- servative brethren; and immediately he must make them furious! What, as a matter of fact, is the good of it? If he simply does it in order to get some pleasure out of it for himself, he may be pardoned. But if he expects to achieve something, he is only psychologically stupid. “Get a student to say ‘No’ at the beginning, or a cus- tomer, child, husband, or wife, and it takes the wisdom and the patience of angels to transform that bristling nega- tive into an affirmative.” CAPTURING YOUR AUDIENCE 301 How is one going to get these desirable “yes- responses” at the very outset? Fairly simple. “My way of opening and winning an argument,” con- fided Lincoln, “is to first find a common ground of agreement.” Lincoln found it even when he was discussing the highly inflammable subject of slavery. “For the first half hour,” declared The Mirror, a neutral paper reporting one of his talks, “his opponents would agree with every word he uttered. From that point he began to lead them off, little by little, until it seemed as if he had got them all into his fold.” SENATOR LODGE’S WAY OF DOING IT Shortly after the close of the World War, the late Senator Lodge and President Lowell of Har- vard were scheduled to debate the League of Na- tions question before a Boston audience. Senator Lodge felt that most of the audience were hostile to his view; yet he must win them to his way of thinking. How? By a direct, frontal, aggressive attack on t,heir convictions? Ah, no. The Sen- ator was far too shrewd a psychologist to bungle his plea with such crude tactics. He began with supreme tact, with admirable finesse. The open- ing of his speech is quoted in a following para- graph. Note that even his most bitter opponents could not have differed w r ith the sentiments exr- pressed in his first dozen sentences. Note how he appeals to their emotion of patriotism in his saluta- tion: “My Fellow Americans.” Observe how he minimizes the differences in the views they are to 302 PUBLIC SPEAKING defend, how he deftly stresses the things they cherish in common. See how he praises his opponent, how he insists upon the fact that they differ only on minor de- tails of method, and not at all upon the vital ques- tion of the welfare of America and the peace of the world. He even goes further and admits that he is in favor of a League of Nations of some kind. So, in the last analysis, he differed from his opponent only in this : he felt that we ought to have a more ideal and efficacious League. “Your Excellenc}', Ladies and Gentlemen, My Fellow Americans: “I am largely indebted to President Lowell for this opportunity to address this great audience. He and I are friends of many years, both Republicans. He is the presi- dent of our great university, one of the most important and influential places in the United States. He is also an eminent student and historian of politics and government. He and I may differ as to methods in this great question now before the people, but I am sure that in regard to the security of the peace of the world and the welfare of the United States we do not differ in purposes. “I am going to say a single word, if you will permit me, as to my own position. I have tried to state it over and over again. I thought I had stated it in plain English. But there are those who find in misrepresentation a convenient weapon for controversy, and there are others, most excellent people, who perhaps have not seen what I have said and who possihly have misunderstood me. It has been said that I am against any League of Nations. I am not ; far from it. I am anxious to have the nations, the free nations of the world, united in a league, as we call it, a society, as the French call it, but united, to do all that can be done to secure the future peace of the world and to bring about a general disarmament.” CAPTURING YOUR AUDIENCE 303 No matter how determined you were beforehand to differ with a speaker, an opening like that would make you soften and relent a bit, wouldn’t it? Wouldn’t it make you willing to listen to more? Wouldn’t it tend to convince you of the speaker’s fairmindedness? What would have been the result had Senator Lodge set out immediately to show those who be- lieved in the League of Nations that they were hopelessly in error, cherishing a delusion? The re- sult w r ould have been futile; the following quota- tion from Professor James Harvey Robinson’s en- lightening and popular book, The Mind in the Making f shows the psychological reason why such an attack would have been futile : “We sometimes find ourselves changing our minds with- out any resistance or heavy emotion, but if we are told we are wrong we resent the imputation and harden our hearts, We are incredibly heedless in the formation of our beliefs, but find ourselves filled with an illicit passion for them when anyone proposes to rob us of their companionship. It is obviously not the ideas themselves that are dear to us, but our self-esteem which is threatened. . , . The little word my is ttje most important one in human affairs, and properly to reckon with it is the beginning of wisdom. It has the same force whether it is my dinner, my dog and my house, or my faith, my country and my God. We not only resent the imputation that our watch is wrong, or our car shabby, but that our conception of the canals of Mars, of the pronunciation of ‘Epictetus/ of the medicinal value of salicine, or of the date of S argon I, are subject to revi- sion, ... We like to continue to believe what we have been accustomed to accept as true, and the resentment aroused when doubt is cast upon any of our assumptions leads us to seek every manner of excuse for clinging to it , The result is that most of our so-called reasoning consists 30+ PUBLIC SPEAKING in finding arguments for going on believing as we already do.” THE BEST ARGUMENT IS AN EXPLANATION Is it not quite evident that the speaker who argues with his audience is merely arousing their stubborn- ness, putting them on the defensive, making it well nigh impossible for them to change their minds? Is it wise to start by saying, “I am going to prove so and so?” Aren’t your hearers liable to accept that as a challenge and remark silently, “Let’s see you do it.” Is it not much more advantageous to begin by stressing something that you and all of your hear- ers believe, and then to raise some pertinent ques- tion that everyone would like to have answered? Then take your audience with you in an earnest search for the answer. While on that search, present the facts as you see them so clearly that they will unconsciously be led to accept your conclusions as their own. They will have much more faith in some truth that they believe they have discovered for themselves. “The best argument is that which seems merely an explanation.” In every controversy, no matter how wide and bitter the differences, there is always some common ground of agreement on which the speaker can in- vite everyone to assemble for the search after facts that he is going to conduct. To illustrate: even if the head of the Communist Party were addressing a convention of the American Bankers’ Association, he could find some mutual beliefs, some analogous CAPTURING YOUR AUDIENCE 305 desires to share with his hearers* Couldn’t he? Let us see: “Poverty has always been one of the cruel problems of human society. As Americans we have always felt it our duty to alleviate, whenever and wherever possible, the suf- ferings of the poor. We are a generous nation. No other people in all history have poured out their wealth so prodigally, so unselfishly to help the unfortunate. Now, with this same mental generosity and spiritual unselfishness that has characterized our givings in the past, let us examine together the facts of our industrial life and see if we can find some means, fair and just and acceptable to all, that will tend to prevent as well as to mitigate, the evils of poverty.” Who could object to that? Could Father Cough- lin, or Norman Thomas, or Doctor Townsend, or J. Pierpont Morgan? Hardly. Do we seem to be contradicting here the gospel of force and energy and enthusiasm so fervently praised in Chapter V? Hardly. There is a time for everything. But the time for force is seldom in the beginning of a talk. Tact is more likely to be needed then. HOW PATRICK HENRY LAUNCHED HIS STORMY ADDRESS Every school boy in the land is familiar with the fiery close of Patrick Henry’s famous speech be- fore the Virginia Convention of 1775: “Give me liberty or give me death.” But few of them realize the comparative calm, the tactful manner in which Henry launched that stormy and emotional and history-making address. Should the American col- 306 PUBLIC SPEAKING onies separate from and go to war with England ? The question was being debated with intense pas- sion, Feelings flamed at white heat; yet Patrick Henry began by complimenting the abilities and praising the patriotism of those who opposed him. Note, in the second paragraph, how he gets his audi- ence thinking with him by asking questions, by letting them draw their own conclusions: “Mr. President: No man thinks more highly than I do of the patriotism, as well as abilities, of the very worthy gentlemen who have just addressed the house. But differ- ent men often see the same subject in different lights ; and, therefore, I hope it will not be thought disrespectful to those gentlemen, if, entertaining as I do opinions of a character very opposite to theirs, I shall speak forth my sentiments freely, and without reserve. This is no time for ceremony. The question before the house is one of awful moment to the country. For my own part, I consider it as nothing less than a question of freedom or slavery. And in proportion to the magnitude of the subject ought to be the freedom of the debate. It is only in this way that we can hope to arrive at truth, and fulfill the great responsibility which we hold to God and our country. Should I keep back my opinions at such a time, through fear of giving offense, I should consider myself as guilty of treason towards my country, and of an act of disloyalty toward the Majesty of Heaven, which I revere above ap earthly things. “Mr. President, it is natural to man to indulge in the illusions of hope. We are apt to shut our eyes against a painful truth, and listen to the song of that Siren till she transforms us into beasts. Is this the part of wise men, engaged in a great and arduous struggle for liberty? Are we disposed to be of the number of those who, having eyes see not, and having ears hear not, the things which so nearly concern their temporal salvation? For my part, whatever anguish of spirit it may cost, I am willing to CAPTURING YOUR AUDIENCE 307 know the whole truth; to know the worst and to provide for it.” THE BEST SPEECH SHAKESPEARE WROTE The most famous speech that Shakespeare put into the mouth of any of his characters — Mark Antony’s funeral oration over the body of Julius Caesar — is a classic example of supreme tact. This was the situation. Caesar had become dictator. Naturally, inevitably, a score of his po- litical enemies were envious, were eager to tear him down, to destroy him, to make his power their own. Twenty-three of them banded together under the leadership of Brutus and Cassius and thrust their daggers into his body. . . . Mark Antony had been Caesar's Secretary of State. He was a hand* some chap, this Antony, a ready writer, a power* ful speaker. He could represent the government well at public affairs. Small wonder Caesar had chosen him as his right hand man. Now, with Caesar out of the way, what should the conspirators do with Antony ? Remove him? Kill him? There had been enough blood shed already; there was enough to justify as it was. Why not win this Antony to their side, why not use his undeniable influence, his moving eloquence, to shield them and further their own ends? Sounded safe and reason- able; so they tried it. They saw him and went so far as to permit him to “say a few words” over the corpse of the man who had all but ruled the world. ... ' Antony mounts the rostrum in the Roman Forum. Before him lies the murdered Caesar. A mob surges 308 PUBLIC SPEAKING noisily and threateningly about Antony, a rabble friendly to Brutus, Cassius and the other assassins. Antony’s purpose is to turn this popular enthusiasm into intense hatred, to stir the plebeians to rise in mutiny and slay those that had struck Caesar down. He raises his hands, the tumult ceases, he starts to speak. Note how ingeniously, how adroitly he begins, praising Brutus and the other conspirators : “For Brutus is an honorable man; So are they all, all honorable men.” Observe that he does not argue. Gradually, un- obtrusively, he presents certain facts about Caesar; tells how the ransom from his captives filled the general coffers, how he wept when the poor cried, how he refused a crown, how he willed his estates to the public. He presents the facts ; asks the mob questions; lets them draw their own conclusions. The evidence is presented, not as something new, but as something they had for the moment for- gotten : “I tell you that which you yourselves .do know.” And with a magic tongue through it all, he whipped up their feelings, stirred their emotions, aroused their pity, heated their anger. Antony’s masterpiece of tact and eloquence is given here in its entirety. Search where you will, range through all the broad fields of literature and oratory, and I doubt if you will find half a dozen speeches to equal this. It merits the serious study of every man who aspires to excel in the fine art of influencing CAPTURING YOUR AUDIENCE 309 human nature. But there is another reason, entirely aside from the one we are considering now, why Shakespeare ought to be read and reread by busi- ness men; he possessed a larger vocabulary than did any other writer who ever lived; he used words more magically, more beautifully. No one can study Macbeth and Hamlet and Julius Caesar without un- consciously brightening and widening and refining his own diction. Ant. Friends, Romans, countrymen, lend me your ears: I come to bury Caesar, not to praise him. The evil that men do lives after them; The good is oft interred with their bones: So let it be with Caesar. The noble Brutus Hath told you Caesar was ambitious: If it were so, it was a grievous fault ; And grievously hath Caesar answer’d it. Here, under leave of Brutus and the rest, — For Brutus is an honorable man ; So are they all, all honorable men, — Come I to speak in Caesar’s funeral. He was my friend, faithful and just to me: But Brutus says he was ambitious; And Brutus is an honorable man. He hath brought many captives home to Rome, Whose ransoms did the general coffers fill: Did this in Caesar seem ambitious? When that the poor have cried, Caesar hath wept: Ambition should be made of sterner stuff: Yet Brutus says he was ambitious; And Brutus is an honorable man. You all did see that on the Lupercal I thrice presented him a kingly crown, Which he did thrice refuse. Was this ambition? Yet Brutus says he was ambitious ; And, sure, he is an honorable man. I speak not to disprove what Brutus spoke. 310 PUBLIC SPEAKING But here I am, to speak what I do know. You all did love him once, — not without cause; What cause withholds you, then, to mourn for him? 0 judgment, thou art fled to brutish beasts, And men have lost their reason! Bear with me; My heart is in the coffin there with Caesar, And I must pause till It come back to me. 1 Cit. Methinks there is much reason in his sayings. 2 Cit. If thou consider rightly of the matter, Caesar has had great wrong. 3 Cit. Has he not, masters? 1 fear there will a worse come in his place. 4 dt. Mark’d ye his words? He would not take the crown ; Therefore ’tis certain he was not ambitious. 1 Cit. If it be found so, some will dear abide it. 2 Cit. Poor soul ! his eyes are red as fire with weeping. 3 Cit. There’s not a nobler man in Rome than Antony. 4 Cit. Now mark him; he begins again to speak. Ant. But yesterday the* word of Caesar might Have stood against the w r orld : now lies he there, And none so poor to do him reverence. 0 masters, if I were dispos’d to stir Your hearts and minds to mutiny and rage, 1 should do Brutus wrong, and Cassius wrong, Who, you all know, are honorable men. I will not do them wrong: I rather choose To wrong the dead, to wrong myself, and you, Than I will wrong such honorable men. But here’s a parchment with the seal of Caesar, — I found it in his closet, — ’tis his will: Let but the commons hear this testament (Which, pardon me, I do not mean to read), And they would go and kiss dead Caesar’s wounds, And dip their napkins in his sacred blood; Yea, beg a hair of him for memory, And, dying, mention it within their wills, Bequeathing it as a rich legacy Unto their issue. CAPTURING YOUR AUDIENCE 311 4 Cit. Well hear the will; read it, Mark Antony, Citizens , The will, the will ! We will hear Caesar’s will. Ant , Have patience, gentle friends; I must not read it; It is not meet you know how Caesar lov’d you. You are not wood, you are not stones, but men; And, being men, hearing the will of Caesar, It will inflame you, it will make you mad. ’Tis good you know not that you are his heirs ; For, if you should, O what would come of it! 4 Ciu Read the will! well hear it, Antony; You shall read us the will — Caesar’s will ! Ant . Will you be patient? will you stay awhile? I have o’ershot myself, to tell you of it. I fear I wrong the honorable men Whose daggers have stabb’d Csesar; I do fear it 4 Ciu They were traitors: honorable men! Citizens . The will! the testament! 2 Git . They were villains, murderers. The will! read the will! Ant . You will compel me, then, to read the will? Then make a ring about the corpse of Caesar, And let me show you him that made the will. Shall I descend? and will you give me leave? Citizens . Come down, 2 Ciu Descend. [He comes down , 3 CiU You shall have leave. 4 Ciu A ring! stand round. 1 Cit. Stand from the hearse; stand from the body, 2 CiU Room for Antony! — most noble Antony! Ant . Nay, press not so upon me; stand far off. Citizens. Stand back; room! bear back. Ant . If you have tears, prepare to shed them now* You all do know this mantle: I remember The first time ever Caesar put it on; ’Twas on a summer’s evening, in his tent, That day he overcame the NerviL Look, in this place ran Cassius’ dagger through : See what a rent the envious Casca made: Through this the well-beloved Brutus stabb’d; 312 PUBLIC SPEAKING And, as he pluck'd his cursed steel away, Mark how the blood of Caesar follow'd it, — As rushing out of doors, to be resolv’d If Brutus so upkindly knock’d, or no; For Brutus, as you know, was Caesar’s angel: Judge, O you gods, how dearly Caesar lov’d him! This was the most unkindest cut of all; For, when the noble Caesar saw him stab, Ingratitude, more strong than traitors’ arms, Quite vanquish’d him: then burst his mighty heart; And, in his mantle muffling up his face, Even at the base of Pompey’s status, Which all the while ran blood, great Caesar fell. O, what a fall was there, my countrymen! Then I, and you, and all of us fell down, Whilst bloody treason flourish’d over us. Q, now you weep ; and, I perceive, you feel The dint of pity : these are gracious drops. Kind souls, what, weep you, when you but behold Our Caesar’s vesture wounded ? Look you here, Here is himself, marr’d, as you see, with traitors. 1 Cit. O piteous spectacle! 2 Cit . O noble Caesar! 3 Cit. O woful day ! 4 Cit. O traitors, villains! 1 Cit . O most bloody sight! 2 Cit . We will be reveng’d. Citizens . Revenge, — about, — seek, — burnj — fire, — kill, — — slay, — let not a traitor live! A nt. Stay, countrymen. 1 Cit . Peace there! hear the noble Antony. 2 Cit. We’ll hear him, we’ll follow him, we’ll die with him. Ant. Good friends, sweet friends, let me not stir you up To such a sudden flood of mutiny. They that have done this deed are honorable: What private griefs they have, alas, I know not, That made them do ’t; they’re wise and honorable, And will, no doubt, with reasons answer you. CAPTURING YOUR AUDIENCE 313 I come not, friends, to steal, away your hearts: I am no orator, as Brutus is; But, as you know me all, a plain blunt man, That love my friend; and that they know full well That gave me public leave to speak of him. For I have neither wit, nor words, nor worth, Action, nor utterance, nor the power of speech, To stir men's blood : I only speak right on ; I tell you that which you yourselves do know ; Show you sweet Caesar’s wounds, poor, poor dumb mouths, And bid them speak for me: but were I Brutus, And Brutus Antony, there were an Antony Would ruffle up your spirit, and put a tongue In every wound of Caesar, that should move The stones of Rome to rise and mutiny. Citizens . We’ll mutiny. 1 Cit. We’ll burn the house of Brutus. 3 Cit. Away, then! come, seek the conspirators. Ant . Yet hear me, countrymen ; yet hear me speak. Citizens . Peace, ho! hear Antony ; most noble Antony. Ant . Why, friends, you go to do you know not what. Wherein hath Caesar thus deserv’d your loves? Alas, you know not; I must tell you, then: You have forgot the will I told you of. Citizens. Most true ; the will ! — let’s stay, and hear the will. Ant. Here is the will, and under Caesar’s seal. To every Romdn citizen he gives. To every several man, seventy-five drachmas. 2 Cit . Most noble Caesar! — well revenge his death 3 Cit. O, royal Caesar! Ant . Hear me with patience. Citizens . Peace, ho! Ant. Moreover, he hath left you all his walks, His private arbors, and new-planted orchards, On this side Tiber; he hath left them you, And to your heirs for ever ; common pleasures, To walk abroad, and recreate yourselves. Here was a Caesar! when comes such another? 314 PUBLIC SPEAKING 1 Git. Never, never. — Come, away, away! We’ll burn his body in the holy place, And with the brands fire the traitors’ houses. Take up the body. 2 Cit. Go, fetch fire. 3 Cit. Pluck down benches. 4 Cit . Pluck down forms, windows, any thing. [Exeunt Citizens with the body Ant . Now let it work: — Mischief, thou art afoot, Take thou what course thou wilt! SUMMARY 1. Begin on common ground. Get everyone agreeing with you at the outset. 2. Don’t state your case so that people will be saying “no, no” at the start. When a person once says “no” his pride demands that he stick to it. “The more ‘yesses’ we can, at the very outset, in- duce, the more likely we are to succeed in capturing the attention for the ultimate proposal.” 3. Do not begin by saying that you are going to prove so and so. That is liable to arouse opposition. Your hearers may say “let’s see you do it.” Raise some pertinent question, and let therq go with you in a hunt for the answer. . . . “The best argument is that which seems merely an explanation.” 4. The most famous speech that Shakespeare ever wrote is Mark Antony’s funeral oration over Caesar. It is a classic example of supreme tact. The Roman populace is friendly to the conspirators. Note how adroitly Antony turns this friendliness into a fury of hate. Note that he does it without arguing. He presents the facts, and lets them form their own opinions. SPEECH BUILDING WORDS OFTEN MISPRONOUNCED "Even in a speaker of recognized ability, his mispronun* nations fall harshly upon the ear and cause the hearers to suspect that his early, if not his later, education, has been wanting in polish; or (what is, perhaps, more to his detri- ment) that he has not betfi accustomed to the society of refined and cultivated people.” — W. H. P. Phyfe. Do you sound the A’s capitalized in the following as the a in arm? Aunt drAma heArth Do you sound all the A’s capitalized in the fol- lowing words as you sound the a in soda and sofa, and as you should sound the a in ask? Few do. This first shade-vowel sound of a is difficult to describe on paper. It is not the a in hat; neither is it the a in arpi. It is between them. However, if one must err, it had better be in under-doing rather than in over-doing it. At all hazards, avoid any- thing that smacks of affectation. Isn’t it far better, at least in the United States, to mispronounce the a in bath and half, giving it the sound of a in cat, rather than to go to the other extreme and use the, sound of a as in arm? advAnce Afternoon Ask advAntage Answer bAsket Ms 316 PUBLIC SPEAKING bAss (fish) demAnd lAss bAth drAft lAst behAlf fAst lAugh blAst flAsk mAster brAnch gAsp pAss brAss ghAstly pAst cAIf girAffe pAstor cAn’t glAnce pAth cAsh glAss plAnt cAsket grAft repAst cAst grAnt shAft ciAsp grAsp shA’n’t (slang) contrAst grAss si An t dAnce hAlf tAsk ERRORS IN ENGLISH Review . There are four mistakes in the follow* lug paragraph. Can you find them ? The president and myself, as officers, sign all checks. He and me were the ones who organized it and know all about the company , As the president often said, “It is our company and no one understands its affairs as well as us. We should reap the benefits of it.” New Study Material . Rule: The various forms of the verb to be — am, is , are, was , were, has been , can be, could be, will be, shall be, would be, should be, may be — are followed by the nomina- tive case. For example: Right: If you were I, what would you say? Wrong: If you were me, what would you say? Right : It was I that telephoned. CAPTURING YOUR AUDIENCE 317 Wrong : It was me that telephoned. Right: If I was (or were) he, I would study at light. Wrong: If I was him, I would study at night. Right : I thought it was she. Wrong: I thought it was her. Right : It is we who are to blame. Wrong: It is us who are to blame. Rule: There are seemingly two exceptions to the first rule given above. When it precedes to be or to have been, the verb form is followed by the objective case of the pronoun. Other subjects may be used like the word it in such construction. Ex- amples : Right : I know it to be her. Wrong: I know it to be she. Right : I know Mary to be her. Wrong : I know Mary to be she. Right : She supposed it to have been them. Wrong: She supposed it to have been they. Right: She supposed the robbers to have been them. Wrong: $he supposed the robbers to have been they. Rule: If to be or to have been do not have it immediately in front of them, the verb form is fol- lowed by the nominative case of the pronoun just the same as in the first rule in this lesson. Right: It was believed to be she. Wrong: It was believed to be her. Right: It was supposed to have been they. Wrong: It was supposed to have been them. Rule: Sometimes the subject of the principal 318 PUBLIC SPEAKING verb of the sentence is the same as the one used wich to be or to have been. In this instance, the infinitive form is followed by the nominative case. Examples are: Right : Mary was believed to be she. Wrong: Mary was believed to be her. Right: Mary was supposed to have been she. Wrong: Mary was supposed to have been her. Rule: Who is used to refer to persons only. Which is used to refer to animals and objects. That may be used to refer to persons, animals, or objects. For example: Right: The only three who discussed the matter with me were very angry. Wrong: The only three which discussed the matter with me were very angry. Right: Every customer with whom I talked. Wrong: Every customer with which I talked. Right: The dog which (or that) won first prize was sold. Wrong: The dog who won first prize was sold. CORRECT USAGE OF WORDS Affected — Effected. Affect mean to influ- ence; as, “The market was affected by the news.” Effect means to accomplish or bring to pass ; as, “He effected a satisfactory settlement of the dispute.” Emigrant — Immigrant. When a red-whiskered and clay-piped hostler from Dublin lands at Ellis Island, he is an emigrant from Ireland and an im- migrant to the United States. Empty — Vacant. That which contains nothing CAPTURING YOUR AUDIENCE 319 is empty; that which is without its regular occupant is vacant. An empty pew may not be vacant , and a vacant pew may not be empty . Enthuse. This word Is not in good use. (Wrong) u His talk enthused the sales force.” Say: “His talk made the sales force enthusiastic.” Even— Exact. Do not use even when you mean exact. Say “An exact (not an even) dozen.” Eager — Earnest — Anxious. Eager is more su- perficial and impatient and less permanent than earnest . Anxious suggests mental distress and pos- sibility of disappointment. One may be eager to send his mother a bouquet of flowers, earnestly hope that the investments she has made will provide for her comfort and be anxious about her health. VOICE EXERCISE— FLEXIBILITY OF THE LIPS Nervous tension — and the beginning speaker is almost always troubled with it, especially at the out set of his talk — is very liable to manifest itself by tightening the muscles of the throat, and stiffening the jaws and bps. We have dealt in previous chap- ters with directions for the relaxation of the throat and jaw. Let us turn our attention now to stiff, inflexible lips. They are a handicap, a liability. The lips ought to be free and flexible to aid in the molding of clear and beautiful tones. You can possess this additional attractiveness and carrying power In your tones, if you are willing to pay for it with attention and practise. All we can do is to write the prescription here; you must take the medicine. : 320 PUBLIC SPEAKING Take the phrase “no man.” As you say no, round and protrude your lips. As you say man, draw them back as far as possible. Exaggerate the action. Draw them into something like a broad grin. Imagine that you are posing for one of those smiles you see in the advertisements for tooth paste.. Now say it rapidly over and over : No man, no man, no man, no man. Add another phrase and try it again : No man, no mind, no man, no mind, no man, no mind , no man, no mind, no man, no mind. . . . Repeat the following sentences many times, ex- aggerating the motion of your lips, using them as much as you can : So — we — do — see — across — the — lea. Make a note of it and say I met the ice man drinking oil and selling booze. I say turn loose the nice cats and let them eat the fat and saucy rats. Ah, get nice ice and bathe his foot in boiling oil. The open sea lures the gulls and calls to me. Review Exercise. I. Surrender your jaw, let it fall like a dead weight from your headr Take in a deep breath, feel as if you were sucking the air down into your stomach, and chant “ah” with ease, without one tiny trace of effort. 2. Take a deep breath again and say with a sweeping gesture of the hand, “I am at ease. My jaw is relaxed. My throat is open and there is no strain anywhere.” 3. Take in a deep breath, and, using all the principles we have learned so far about diaphrag- matic breathing, relaxation, breath control, count as CAPTURING YOUR AUDIENCE 32! far as you can on one breath. Be sure to control the flow of the breath at the only place where It can be controlled without interfering with the voice, at the diaphragm. 4. Repeat in a falsetto voice (see Chapter VII) the following quotation from Elizabeth Barrett Browning. Even though you are using the ridicu- lous falsetto, try to put into the reading of this the spirit that must have moved the famous poetess to write it. Read it over until you yourself feel the meaning of it. “Nothing is small! no lily-muffled hum of summer- bee but finds some coupling with the shining stars; no pebble at your feet but proves a sphere; no chaffinch but implies the cherubim. Earth is crammed with Heaven, and every common bush afire with God, but only he who sees takes off his shoes.” CHAPTER XI HOW TO CLOSE A TALK “The conclusion , too, has definite work to perform . It rounds out the talk ; it holds the audience's earnest attention for a brief moment on the speech as a whole. It draws the thread of thought together ; it binds and finishes the fabric of the speech. . . . Definitely plan and word your conclu- sion. Never break off your speech awkwardly and hurriedly with a mumbled: T guess that's all I have to say.' Com- plete your task and let the audience know it is complete T — Platform Speaking by George Rowland Collins. “The clock has nothing to do with the length of a sermon. Nothing whatever ! . . . A long sermon is a $ej~- mon that seems long. . . . And the short sermon is the one that ends while people are still wishing for more . It may have lasted only twenty minutes or it may have lasted for an hour and a half. If it leaves the people wishing for more, they do not know nor care what the clock said about the length of it. You cannot tell, therefore, how tong a sermon is by watching the hands of a clock — watch the people. See where their hands are. If the hands of the men are for the most part in their vest pockets, pulling out their watches to note again how long you have been at it, this is ominous. See where their eyes aye! See where their minds are, then you will know exactly what time of day it is for that particular sermon. It may be high time for it to come to an end." — The Art of Preaching, by Charles R. Brown, Dean of the Divinity School, Yale U niversity. CHAPTER XI HOW TO CLOSE A TALK Would you like to know in what parts of your speech you are most likely to reveal your inexperi* ence or your expertness, your inaptitude or your finesse? HI tell you : in the opening and the closing. There is an old saying in the theater, referring, of course, to actors, that goes like this: “By- their entrances and their exits shall ye know them.” The beginning and the ending! They are the hardest things in almost any activity to manage adroitly. For example, at a social function aren’t the most trying feats the graceful entrance and the graceful leave-taking? In a business interview, aren’t the most difficult tasks the wanning approach and the successful close? The close* is really the most strategic point in a speech; what one says last, the final w r ords left ringing in the ears when one ceases — these are likely to be remembered longest. Beginners, however, sel- dom appreciate the importance of this coign of vantage. Their endings often leave much to be desired. What are their most common errors? Let us discuss a few and search for remedies. First, there is the man who finishes with: “That is about all I have to say on the matter; so I guess 325 326 PUBLIC SPEAKING I shall stop.” That is not an ending. That is a mistake. That reeks of the amateur. That is almost unpardonable. If that is all you have to say, why not round off your talk, and promptly take your seat and stop without talking about stopping. Do that, and the inference that that is all you have to say may, with safety and good taste, be left to the discernment of the audience. Then there is the speaker -who says all he has to say, but he does not know how to stop. I believe it was Josh Billings who advised people to take the bull by the tail instead of the horns, since it would be easier to let go. This speaker has the bull by the frontal extremities, and wants to part company with him, but try as hard as he will, he can’t get near a friendly fence or tree. So he finally thrashes about in a circle, covering the same ground, repeat- ing himself, leaving a bad impression. . . , The remedy? An ending has to be planned some time, doesn’t it? Is it the part of wisdom to try to do it after you are facing an audience, while you are under the strain and stress of talking, while your mind must be intent on what you r are saying? Or does common sense suggest the advisability of doing it quietly, calmly, beforehand? Even such accomplished speakers as Webster, Bright, Gladstone, with their admirable command of the English language, felt it necessary to write down and all but memorize the exact words of their closings. The beginner, if he follows in their footsteps, will seldom have cause to regret it. He ought to know very definitely with what ideas he is going HOW TO CLOSE A TALK 327 to close. He ought to rehearse the ending several times, using not necessarily the same phraseology during each repetition, but putting the thoughts definitely into words. An extemporaneous talk, during the process of delivery, sometimes has to be altered very mate- rially, has to be cut and slashed to meet unfore- seen developments, to harmonize with the reactions of one’s hearers; so it is really wise to have two or three closings planned. If one does not fit, another may. Some speakers never get to the end at all. Along in the middle of their journey, they begin to sputter and misfire like an engine when the gasoline supply is about exhausted; after a few desperate lunges, they come to a complete standstill, a breakdown. They need, of course, better preparation, more prac- tise — more gasoline in the tank. Many novices stop too abruptly. Their method of closing lacks smoothness, lacks finish. Properly speaking, they have no close ; they merely cease sud- denly, jerkily. The effect is unpleasant, amateurish. It is as if a friend in a social conversation were to break off brusquely and dart out of the room with- out a graceful leave-taking. No less a speaker than Lincoln made that mistake in the original draft of his First Inaugural. That speech was delivered at a tense time. The black storm clouds of dissension and hatred were already milling overhead. A few weeks later, the cyclone of blood and destruction burst upon the nation. Lincoln, addressing his closing words to the people of the South, had intended to end in this fashion : 328 PUBLIC SPEAKING “In your hands, my dissatisfied fellow-countrymen, and not in mine, is the momentous issue of the civil war. The government will not assail you. You can have no conflict without being yourselves the aggressors. You have no oath registered in heaven to destroy the government, while I have a most solemn one to preserve, protect and defend it. You can forbear the assault upon it. I cannot shrink from the defense of it. With you and not with me is the solemn question of “Shall it be peace or a sword ?” He submitted his speech to Secretary Seward. Seward quite appropriately pointed out that the end- ing was too blunt, too abrupt, too provocative. So Seward himself tried his hand at a closing; in fact, he wrote two. Lincoln accepted one of them and used it, with slight modifications, in place of the last three sentences of the close he had originally prepared. The result was that his First Inaugural Address now lost its provocative abruptness and rose to a climax of friendliness, of sheer beauty and poetical eloquence : “I am loth to close. We are not enemies but friends. We must not be enemies. Though passion may have strained, it must not break our bonds of affection. The mystic chords of memory, stretching from every battlefield and patriot’s grave to every living heart and hearthstone all over this broad land, will swell the chorus of the Union when again touched, as surely they will be, by the better angel of our natur:.” How can a beginner develop the proper feeling for the close of an address? By mechanical rules? No. Like culture, it is too delicate for that. It must be a matter of sensing, almost of intuition. Unless a speaker can feel when it is done har- HOW TO CLOSE A TALK 329 moniously, adroitly, how can he himself hope to do it? However, this feeling can be cultivated; this ex- pertness can be developed somewhat, by studying the ways in which accomplished speakers have achieved it. Here is an illustration, the close of an address by the then Prince of Wales before the Empire Club of Toronto: “I am afraid, gentlemen, that I have departed from my reserve, and talked about myself a good deal too much. But I wanted to tell you, as the largest audience that I have been privileged to address in Canada, what I feel about my position and the responsibility which it entails. I can only assure you that I shall always endeavor to live up to that great responsibility and to be worthy of your trust.” A blind man listening to that talk would feel that it was ended. It isn’t left dangling in the air like a loose rope, It isn’t left ragged and jagged. It is rounded off, it is finished. The famous Dr. Harry Emerson Fosdick spoke in the Geneva Cathedral of St Pierre the Sunday after the opening of the sixth assembly of the League of Nations. He chose for his text: “All they that take the sword shall perish with thfe sword.” Note the beautiful and lofty and powerful way in which, he brought his sermon to a close : "We cannot reconcile Jesus Christ and war — that is the essence of the matter. That is the challenge which to-day should stir the conscience of Christendom, War is the most colossal and ruinous social sin that afflicts mankind; it is utterly and irremediably unchristian; in its total method and effect it means everything that Jesus did not 330 PUBLIC SPEAKING mean and it means nothing that he did mean ; it is a more blatant denial of ever}? Christian doctrine about God and man than all the theoretical atheists on earth ever could devise. It would be worth while, would it not, to see the Christian Church claim as her own this greatest moral issue of our time, to see her lift once more as in our fathers’ days, a clear standard against the paganism of this present world and, refusing to hold her conscience at the beck and call of belligerent states, put the kingdom of God above na- tionalism and call the world to peace? That would not be the denial of patriotism but its apotheosis. “Here to-day, as an American, under this high and hos- pitable roof, I cannot speak for my government, but both as an American and as a Christian I do speak for millions of my fellow citizens in wishing your great work, in which we believe, for which we pray, our absence from which we painfully regret, the eminent success which it deserves. We work in many ways for the same end — a world organized for peace. Never was an end better worth working for. The alternative is the most appalling catastrophe mankind has ever faced. Like gravitation in the physical realm, the law of the Lord in the moral realm bends for no man and no nation: ‘All they that take the sword shall perish with the sword.’ ” But this collection of speech endings would not be complete without the majestic tones, the organ- like melody of the close of Lincoln’s Second In- augural. The late Earl Curzon, of Keddleston, Chancellor of Oxford University, declared that this selection was “among the glories and treasures of mankind . . . the purest gold of human eloquence, nay, of eloquence almost divine”: “Fondly do we hope, fervently do we pray, that this mighty scourge of war may speedily pass away. Yet if God Wills that it continue until all the wealth piled by the bondsman’s two hundred and fifty years of unrequited toil HOW TO CLOSE A TALK 331 shall be sunk, and until every drop of blood drawn with the lash shall be paid by another drawn with the sword, as was said three thousand years ago, so still it must be said that ‘the judgments of the Lord are true and righteous altogether/ “With malice toward none; with charity for all; with firmness in the right, as God gives us to see the right, let us strive on to finish the work we are in; to bind up the nation’s wounds; to care for him who shall have borne the battle, and for his widow and his orphan — to do all which may achieve and cherish a just and lasting peace among ourselves, and with all nations.” You have just read, my dear reader, what is, in my opinion, the most beautiful speech ending ever delivered by the lips of mortal man, . . . Do you agree with my estimate? Where, in all the range of speech literature, will you find more humanity, more sheer loveliness, more sympathy? “Noble as was the Gettysburg Address, ” says William E. Barton in Life of Abraham Lincoln , “this rises to a still higher level of nobility. . . . It is the greatest of the addresses of Abraham Lincoln and registers his intellectual and spiritual power at their highest altitude.” “This was like a sacred poem,” wrote Carl Schurz. “No American President had ever spoken words like these to the American people. America had never had a president who had found such words in the depths of his heart.” But you are not going to deliver immortal pro- nouncements as President in Washington or as Prime Minister in Ottawa or Melbourne. Your problem, perhaps, will be how to close a simple talk before a group of business men, How r shall 332 PUBLIC SPEAKING you set about it? Let us search a bit. Let us see if we cannot uncover some fertile suggestions. SUMMARIZE YOUR POINTS Even in a short talk of three to five minutes a speaker is very apt to cover so much ground that at the close the listeners are a little hazy about all his main points. However, few speakers realize that. They are misled into assuming that because these points are crystal clear in their own minds, they must be equally lucid to their hearers. Not at all. The speaker has been pondering over his ideas for some time. But his points are all new to the audience; they are flung at the audience like a handful of shot. Some may stick, but the most are liable to roll off in confusion. The hearers are liable, like lago, to “remember a mass of things but nothing dis- tinctly.” Some anonymous Irish politician is reported to have given this recipe for making a speech : “First, tell them that you are going to tell them; then tell them; then tell them that you have told them.” Not bad, you know. In fact, it is often highly ad- visable to “tell them that you have told them.” Briefly, of course, speedily — a mere outline, a sum- mary. Here is a good example. The speaker is a stu- dent of Mr. Bills’ class in Public Speaking at the Chicago Central Y. M. C. A. He is also a traffic manager for one of Chicago’s railways : “In short, gentlemen, our own back door yard experience with this block device, the experience in its use in the East, HOW TO CLOSE A TALK 333 in the West, in the North — the sound operating principles underlying its operation, the actual demonstration in the money saved in one year in wreck prevention, move me most earnestly and unequivocally to recommend its immediate installation on our Southern branch.” You see what he has done? You can see it and feel it without haying heard the rest of the talk. He has summed up in a few sentences, in sixty-two words, practically all the points he has made in the entire talk. Don’t you feel that a summary like that helps? If so, make that technique your own. APPEAL FOR ACTION The closing just quoted is an excellent illustra- tion of the appeal-for-action ending. The speaker wanted something done: a block device installed on the Southern branch of his road. He based his appeal for it on the money it would save, on the wrecks it would prevent. The speaker wanted action, and he got it. This was not a mere practise talk. It was delivered before the board of directors of a certain Tailway, and it secured the installation of the block device for which it asked. Chapter XV will discuss, in detail, the problems that confront the speaker when he attempts to get action, and how to solve them. A TERSE, SINCERE COMPLIMENT “The great state of Pennsylvania should lead the way in hastening the coming of the new day. Pennsylvania, the great producer of iron and steel, mother of the greatest 334 PUBLIC SPEAKING railroad company in the world, third among oui agricul- tural states — Pennsylvania is the keystone of our business arch. Never was the prospect before her greater, never was her opportunity for leadership more brilliant.” With these words, Charles Schwab closed his ad- dress before the Pennsylvania Society of New York. He left his hearers pleased, happy, optimistic. That is an admirable way to finish; but, in order to be effective, it must be sincere. No gross flattery. No extravagances. This kind of closing, if it does not ring true, will ring false, very false. And like a false coin, people will have none of it. A HUMOROUS CLOSE “Always leave them laughing,” said George Cohan, “when you say good-by.” If you have the ability to do it, and the material, fine! But how? That, as Hamlet said, is the question. Each man must do it in his own individual way. One would hardly expect Lloyd George to leave a gathering of Methodists laughing when he was talking to them on the ultra-solemn subject of John Wesley’s Tomb; but note how cleverly'he managed it. Note, also, how smoothly and beautifully the talk is rounded off : “I am glad you have taken in hand the repair of his tomb. It should be honored. He was a man who had a special abhorrence of any absence of neatness or cleanliness. He it was, I think, who said, 'let no one ever see a ragged Methodist/ It is due to him that you never can see one. (Laughter.) It is a double unkindness to leave his tomb ragged. You remember what he said to a Derbyshire girl who ran to the door as he was passing and cried, 'God HOW TO CLOSE A TALK 335 bless you, Mr. Wesley. 5 'Young woman/ he answered, 'your blessing would be of more value if your face and apron were cleaner.’ (Laughter.) That was his feeling about untidiness. Do not leave his grave untidy. If he passed along, that would hurt him more than anything-. Do look after that. It is a memorable and sacred shrine It is your trust.” (Cheers.) CLOSING WITH A POETICAL QUOTATION Of all methods of ending, none are more accept- able, when well done, than humor or poetry. In fact, if you can get the proper verse of poetry for your closing, it is almost ideal. It will give the desired flavor. It will give dignity. It will give individuality. It will give beauty. Rotarian Sir Harry Lauder closed his address to the American Rotarian delegates at the Edinburgh convention in this fashion: “And when you get back home, some of you send me a postcard. I will send you one if you do not send me one. You will easily know it is from me because there will be no stamp on it. (Laughter.) But I will have some writing on it, $nd the writing will be this : 'Seasons may come and seasons may go, Everything withers in due course, you know, But there is one thing still blooms as fresh as the dew, That is the love and affection I still have for you.’ ” That little verse fits Harry Lauder’s personality, and no doubt it fitted the whole tenor of his talk. Therefore, it was excellent for him. Had some formal and restrained Rotarian used it at the end of a solemn talk, it might have been so out of key 336 PUBLIC SPEAKING as to be almost ridiculous. The longer I teach pub- lic speaking, the more clearly I see, the more vividly I feel, that it is impossible to give general rules that will serve on all occasions. So much depends upon the subject, the time, the place, and the man. Everyone must, as Saint Paul said, “work out his own salvation.” I was a guest recently at a farewell dinner given in honor of the departure of a certain professional man from New York City. A dozen speakers stood up in turn, eulogizing their departing friend, wish- ing him success in his new field of activity. A dozen talks, and only one ended in an unforgettable man- ner. That was one that closed with a poetical quota* tion. The speaker, with emotion in his voice, turned directly to the departing guest, crying: “And now, good-by. Good luck. I wish you every good wish that you can wish yourself! ‘I touch my heart as the Easterns do: May the peace of Allah abide with you. Wherever you come, wherever you go, May the beautiful palms of Allah grow. Through days of labor and nights of rest, May the love of Allah make you blest. r I touch my heart as the Easterns do: May the peace of Allah abide with you/ Mr. J. A. Abbott, Vice President of the L. A. D. Motors Corporation of Brooklyn, spoke to the em- ployes of his organization on the subject of Loyalty and Cooperation. He closed his address with this ringing verse from Kipling’s Second Jungle Book: “Now this is the Law of the Jungle — as old and as true as the sky; HOW TO CLOSE A TALK 337 And the Wolf that shall keep it may prosper, but the Wolf that shall break it must die. As the creeper that girdles the tree-trunk, the Law run- neth forward and back — For the strength of the Pack is the Wolf, and the strength of the Wolf is the Pack.” If you will go to the public library in your town and tell the librarian that you are preparing a talk on a certain subject and that you wish a poetical quotation to express this idea or that, she may be able to help you find something suitable in some reference volume such as Bartlett’s book of quota- tions. THE POWER OF A BIBLICAL QUOTATION If you can quote a passage from Holy Writ to back up your speech, you are fortunate. A choice Biblical quotation often has a profound effect. The well known financier, Frank Vanderlip, used this method in ending his address on the Allied Debts to the United States : “If we insist to the letter upon our claim, our claim will in all probability never be met. If we insist upon it selfishly, we realize in hatreds but not in cash. If we are generous, and wisely generous, those claims can all be paid, and the good we do with them will mean more to us mate- rially than anything we would conceivably be parting with. Tor whosoever will save his life shall lose it; but whosoever shall lose his life for My sake and the Gospel’s, the same shall save it.’ ” THE CLIMAX The climax is a popular way of ending. It Is often difficult to manage and is not an ending for 338 PUBLIC SPEAKING all speakers nor for all subjects. But, when well done, it is excellent. It works up to a crest, a peak, getting stronger sentence by sentence. A good illustration of the climax will be found in the close of the prize winning speech on Philadelphia in Chap- ter III. Lincoln used the climax in preparing his notes for a lecture on Niagara Falls. Note how each comparison is stronger than the preceding, how he gets a cumulative effect by comparing its age to Columbus, Christ, Moses, Adam, and so on: “It calls up the indefinite past. When Columbus first sought this continent — when Christ suffered on the cross — when Moses led Israel through the Red Sea — nay, even when Adam first came from the hands of his Maker; then, now, Niagara was roaring here. The eyes of that species of extinct giants whose bones fill the mounds of America have gazed on Niagara, as ours do now. Contemporary with the first race of men, and older than the first man, Niagara is as strong and fresh to-day as ten thousand years ago. The Mammoth and Mastodon, so long dead that fragments of their monstrous bones alone testify that they ever lived, have gazed on Niagara — in that long, long time never still for a moment, never dried, never frozen, never slept, never rested.” Wendell Phillips employed this selfsame tech- nique in his address on Toussaint l’Ouverture. The close of it is quoted below. This selection is often cited in books on public speaking. It has vigor, vitality. It is interesting even though it is a bit too ornate for this practical age. This speech was written more than half a century ago. Amusing, isn’t it, to note how woefully wrong were Wendell Phillips’ prognostications concerning the historical HOW TO CLOSE A TALK 339 significance of John Brown and Toussaint l’Ouver- ture “fifty years hence when truth gets a hearing”? It is as hard evidently to guess history as it is to foretell next year’s stock market or the price of lard. “I would call him Napoleon, but Napoleon made his way to empire over broken oaths and through a sea of blood. This man never broke his word. ‘No Retaliation’ was his great motto and the rule of his life; and the last words uttered to his son in France were these: ‘My boy, you will one day go back to Santo Domingo; forget that France murdered your father.’ I would call him Cromwell, but Cromwell was only a soldier, and the state he founded went down with him into his grave. I would call him Washington, but the great Virginian held slaves. This man risked his empire rather than permit the slave-trade in the humblest village of his dominions. “You think me a fanatic to-night, for you read history, not with your eyes, but with your prejudices. But fifty years hence, when Truth gets a hearing, the Muse of His- tory will put Phocion for the Greek, and Brutus for the Roman, Hampden for England, Lafayette for France, choose Washington as the bright, consummate flower of our earlier civilization, and John Browm the ripe fruit of our noonday, then, dipping her pen in the sunlight, will write in the clear blue, above them all, the name of the soldier, the statesman, the martyr, Toussaint L’Ouverture.” WHEN THE TOE TOUCHES Hunt, search, experiment until you get a good ending and a good beginning. Then get them close together. The speaker who does not cut his talk to fit in with the prevailing mood of this hurried, rapid age will be unwelcome and, sometimes, positively dis< liked. 340 PUBLIC SPEAKING No less a saint than Saul of Tarsus sinned in this respect. He preached until a chap in the audi- ence, “a young man named Eutychus,” went to sleep and fell out of a window and all but broke his neck. Even then he may not have stopped talk- ing. Who knows ? I remember a speaker, a doctor, standing up one night at the University Club, Brooklyn. It had been a long banquet. Many speakers had already talked. It was two o’clock in the morning when his turn came. Had he been endowed with tact and fine feeling and discretion, he w'ould have said half a dozen sentences and let us go home. But did he? No, not he. He launched into a forty-five minute tirade against vivisection. Long before he was half way through his audience vcere wishing that he, like Eutychus, would fall out of a window and break something, anything, to silence him. Mr. Lorimer, the editor of the Saturday Evening post, told me that he always stopped a series of articles in the Post when they were at the height of their popularity, and people were clamoring for more. Why stop then? Why then of all times? “Because,” said Mr. Lorimer — and he ought to know — “the point of satiation is reached very soon after that peak of popularity.” The same wisdom will apply, and ought to be ap- plied, to speaking. Stop while the audience is still eager to have you go on. The greatest speech Christ ever delivered, the Sermon on the Mount, can be repeated in five min- utes. Lincoln’s Gettysburg address has only ten sentences. One can read the whole story of crea- HOW TO CLOSE A TALK 341 tion in Genesis in less time than it takes to peruse a murder story in the morning paper. . . . Be brief! Be brief ! Doctor Johnson, Archdeacon of Nyasa, has writ- ten a book about the primitive peoples of Africa. He has lived among them, observed them, for forty-nine years. He relates that when a speaker talks too long at a village gathering or the Gwang- wara, the audience silences him with shouts of “Imetosha!” “Imetosha!” — “Enough!” “Enough!” Another tribe is said to permit a speaker to hold forth only so long as he can stand on one foot. When the toe of the lifted member touches the ground, finito. He has come to an end. And the average white audience, even though they are more polite, more restrained, dislike long speeches as much as do those African negroes. So be warned by their lot, Which I know you will not, And learn about speaking from them. SUMMARY x. The close of a speech is really its most strategic element. What is said last is likely to be remem- bered longest. 2. Do not end with: “That is about all I have to say on the matter; so I guess I shall stop.” Stop, but don’t talk about stopping. 3. Plan your ending carefully in advance as Web- ster, Bright, and Gladstone did. Rehearse. Know almost word for word how you are going to close. 342 PUBLIC SPEAKING Round off your talk. Don’t leave it rough and broken like a jagged rock. 4. Seven suggested ways of closing: a. Summarizing, restating, outlining briefly the main points you have covered. b. Appealing for action. c. Paying the audience a sincere compliment. d. Raising a laugh. e. Quoting a fitting verse of poetry. f. Using a Biblical quotation. g. Building up a climax. 5. Get a good ending and a good beginning; and get them close together. Always stop before your audience wants you to. “The point of satiation is reached very soon after the peak of popularity.” SPEECH BUILDING ■ WORDS OFTEN MISPRONOUNCED The o in comely , and the capitalized U ? s in sUpple, sUburban and lUscious are sounded as u in up. The letters capitalized in the following should be sounded, not as the oo in ooze, but as the u in futility and music . This, the long U sound, consists of a close union of the sound of % in it, and the oo in ooze. The precise sounding of the long u is rare and is an infallible sign of cultured pronunciation* In a few words, it is always enunciated correctly. For example, we never say moo sic for music , foo for few, food for feud, footure for future, boogie for bugle , or coopid for cupid; but how many of us say noo for new, dooty for duty, and Toosday for Tuesday! absolute delUde dUty assUme delUsion furnitUre attitUde deW gratitUde avenUe dilUte illUsion carbUretor dUbious institute constitution dUe . institution consUme dUet lUbricate credUlity dUke LUcy cUlinary dUly lUre 343 344 PUBLIC SPEAKING lUte nUtrition subdUe measUre obtUse sUit multitude opportunity sUpine neUtral pictUre tUbe nEW prodUce tUbercUlosis nEWs renEW TUesday nEWspaper resolution tUmor nUcleus seclUde tUmult nUde solution tUne nUisance stUdent tUtor nUmerous stUpid ERRORS IN ENGLISH Review . There are four mistakes in the follow- ing paragraph. See if you can discover them. Which was the man who did the deed? The evidence all pointed to Mr. Watson. I thought it to be he but it was supposed by the others to have been them who escaped in the night. In the long run, it was us who were wrong in both cases. New Study Material . Rule : When a pronoun* is the direct object of a verb, it is always in the objective case. In other words, if the verb in the sentence denotes an action that passes over to or affects the pronoun, then the pronoun must be in the objective case. For example: Right: He asked you and me to lunch. Wrong: He asked you and / to lunch. Right: The manager asked her and me to do it. Wrong: The manager asked she and I to do it. HOW TO CLOSE A TALK 345 Right: I cannot say whom we will hire. (In the above sentence, whom is the object of the transitive verb will hire, and consequently the pronoun must be in the objective case.) Wrong: I cannot say who we will hire. Right: A landslide hit their home, demolishing their house and killing both him and his wife in- stantly. Wrong: “A landslide hit their home, demolishing their house and killing both he and his wife in- stantly.” (From an advertisement issued by the Illinois Commercial Men’s Association.) (There should be another change in this sentence, making it read, in part, “both his wife and him.” This is, perhaps, a rather fine point, but careful speakers usually mention the lady first.) Right: The school graduated us and our class- mates. Wrong: The school graduated we and our class- mates. Here, again, attention should be called to the im- proper use of the compounds. We are prone to use myself, 'yourself, herself, when we do not in- tend to express reflected action or emphasis. You recall that this was discussed in Chapter IX. As stated before, this generally happens because we are not sure whether to use the nominative or objec- tive form of the pronoun. Right: The wrecking car brought the automobile and them back home. Wrong: The wrecking car brought the automo- bile and themselves back home. 346 PUBLIC SPEAKING CORRECT USAGE OF WORDS “We think by words, and therefore thought and words cannot but set and reset on each other. As a man speaks, so he thinks, and, ‘as a man thinketh in his heart, so he is.’ ” G. P. Marsh, Lectures On The English Language. Friendly — Amicable. Friendly is stronger and less formal than amicable. A man who is com- panionable and sociable may not be cordial and genial. The first two words denote manner and be- havior and may be applied where no genuine feeling exists; the last two qualities imply a sincere and warm friendliness. Generous — Liberal — Magnanimous. Gener- ous means giving freely and at a sacrifice. Liberal refers to the amount of the gift. If your washer- woman gave twenty dollars to the Y. M. C. A., it would be generous. If the United States Steel Cor- poration contributed ten millions it would be liberal. Magnanimous means lofty, noble, raised above what is low and mean. It is magnanimous of you to for- give those who have wronged you. , Healthful — Healthy. Healthful means pro- moting or preserving health ; as, a healthful climate. Healthy means enjoying health; as, a healthy man. Do not speak of “healthy food” or “healthy exer- cise.” Honest — Honorable. The honest man does not lie, or steal, or defraud; the honorable man takes no unfair advantage, and he may even will- ingly sacrifice for the cause of right. The honest man does not lie in a horse trade. An honorable HOW TO CLOSE A TALK 347 man deliberately tells you that his nag is balky on cold mornings. VOICE EXERCISE-DEVELOPING RESONANCE The three fundamental principles of good tone production are correct breath control, relaxation and resonance. We have already dealt with the first two principles ; now for the third : resonance. What is it that strengthens and beautifies the tone of your radio or victrola? The horn or loud speaker. Your body acts as a sounding board for your voice much in the same way that the body of a violin or piano amplifies and beautifies the tones produced by the musician. The initial tone is made by the vocal chords, but this rises and reverberates against the hard bony structures of the chest, the teeth, the roof of the mouth, the nasal cavities and other parts of the face. This reverberation gives to the voice its most important quality. Think of the voice as a sky rocket rising from the diaphragm up through the darkness of your relaxed throat and breaking into a shower of sound against the nostrils and other bony parts of the head. Our problem is not to speak with resonance. You have been speaking with it all your life. You could not be heard ten feet without it. Our task is to speak with increased resonance. How shall we set about it? Let me quote an interesting para- graph from a volume by Fucito and Beyer, entitled Caruso and the Art of Singing. “A great deal has been said about the value of humming as a vocal exercise. . . . Humming, if correctly practised. 348 PUBLIC SPEAKING will develop the resonance of the voice. The humming oi most people sounds like a caterwaul because the jaw, the lips, the tongue and the vocal membranes are all painfully rigid. Of course, the vocal organs should be in the same position for humming as for good tone production: there should be complete relaxation of the facial muscles, the jaw, and the tongue, just as they are kept when in a state of repose or while sleeping; the lips are to be lightly united. Thus the tone vibrations will neither be deadened by obstructing muscles nor forced through the nose by the strain; instead they will resonate within the nasal cavities and make the notes round and beautiful,” Now with relaxed tongue, throat, lips and jaw, let us hum the music of My Old Kentucky Home: The sun shines bright in my old Kentucky home, Tis summer, the darkies are gay; The corntop’s ripe, and the meadow’s all in bloom, While the birds make music all the day. The young folks roll on the little cabin floor, All merry, all happy and bright; By’n’by hard times comes a-knocking at the door, Then my old Kentucky home, good-night! CHORUS Weep no more, my lady, Oh! weep no more to-day! We will sing one song for the old Kentucky home, For the old Kentucky home, far away. The first time you hum this, put the palm of your hand on top of your head and feel the vibra- tion there. This is most important: in practising all these exercises for resonance, let your first step be the taking of a deep breath at the diaphragm and re- laxing the chest and feeling it riding on the breath. HOW TO CLOSE A TALK 349 Note the open feeling that you have in your face and nose and head as you drink the air in. As you begin to hum and exhale, do not think of exhaling at all. Imagine that you are still inhaling, still feeling that open sensation in the head. That means open cavities to reenforce and amplify your resonance. Cultivate this inhaling sensation in all your speaking. Now hum this song once more. Place your hand this time on the back of your head and feel the vibration there. A third time, think the tone in your nose. Feel as if it were flowing up and into the nose — the same sensation as in inhaling. Hold the bony part of your nose, just a little below the eyes, with a thumb and a forefinger. Feel the vibration there this time as you hum. For the sake of variety, let us hum now the tune of The Old Folks at Hojne: Way down upon the Swanee River v Far, far away, There’s where my heart is turning ever There’s where the old folks stay. All up and down the whole creation, Sadly I roam, Still longing for the old plantation, And for the old folks at home. CHORUS All the world is sad and dreary, Everywhere I roam, Oh ! darkies, how r my heart grows weary, Far from the old folks at home- 350 PUBLIC SPEAKING As you hum it this time, think it forward on the lips. Place your forefinger on your lips and feel them vibrate. They ought to vibrate until they tickle. Now hum it again in as low a tone as possible; and, placing your open palm on your chest, feel the vibration there. Hum it once more, keeping the palm of your right hand on your chest and moving the palm of the left over various parts of the head and face. Feel your whole body vibrating, causing resonance. I have known singers who, when they hummed, felt the vibrations even in their fingers and toes. Singing is a splendid voice exercise in itself; so, using all the principles of voice production discussed in these lessons, let us sing now these two old fa- miliar songs that we have been humming. CHAPTER XII HOW TO MAKE YOUR MEANING CLEAS " Nine readers out of ten take a lucid statement for a true one !' — Encyclopedia Britannica. “Study carefully what you have to say , and put it into words by writing or by speaking aloud to an imaginary person . Arrange your points in order . Stick to your order . Divide your time among your points according to their importance . Stop when you are through !' — Dr. Edward Everett Hale . “If speaking on Solomon to a group of business men , refer to him as the J . P. Morgan of his day. If talking to base- ball fans about Samson call him the Babe Ruth of his time . When Frank Simonds undertook to describe Foctis strategy in battering down the Hindenhurg line he used the figure of pounding at the two hinges of a gate . In a similar manner Hugo used the letter A to illustrate the battlefield of Water - looj and Elson the horseshoe in describing the battle of Gettysburg . Everyone is acquainted with gates , horseshoes and the alphabet, although not everyone has seen battles !' — ■ Glenn Clark , Self-Cultivation in Extemporaneous Speaking. “One picture is worth ten thousand words !' — Chinese Proverb. “My father was a man of great intellectual energy. My best training came from him . He was intolerant of vague - ness, and from the time I began to write until his death in 1QOJ, when he was eighty-one years old, I carried everything I wrote to him . He would make me read it aloud, which was always painful to me. Every now and then he zvould stop me. ' What do you mean by that?' I would tell him, and, of course, in doing so zvould express znyself more simply than I had on paper. f Why didn't you say so?' he zvould go on. 'Don't shoot at your meaning with birdshot and hit the whole countryside; shoot with a rifle at the thing you have to say! " — W oodrow Wilson . CHAPTER XII HOW TO MAKE YOUR MEANING CLEAR A famous English bishop, during the war, spoke to some unlettered negro troops at Camp Upton, Long Island. They were on their way to the trenches; but a very small percentage of them had any adequate idea why they were being sent. I know: I questioned them. Yet the Lord Bishop talked to these negroes about “International amity,” and “Servia’s right to a place in the sun.” Why, the half of those negroes did not know whether Servia was a town or a disease. He might as well, as far as results were concerned, have delivered a sonorous eulogy on the Nebular Hypothesis. However, not a single trooper left the hall while he was speaking: the military police with revolvers were stationed at every exit to prevent that consummation. I do not wish to belittle the bishop. He is every inch a scholar; and before a body of collegiate men he w r ould probably have been powerful ; but he failed with these negroes, and he failed utterly: he did not know his audience, and he evidently knew neither the precise purpose of his talk nor how to accom- plish it. What do we mean by the purpose of an address? 354 PUBLIC SPEAKING Just this: every talk, regardless of whether the speaker realizes it or not, has one of four major goals. What are they? 1. To make something clear. 2. To impress and convince. 3. To get action. 4: To entertain. Let us illustrate these by a series of concrete examples. Lincoln, who was always more or less interested in mechanics, once invented and patented a device for lifting stranded boats off sand bars and other obstructions. He worked in a mechanic’s shop near his law office, making a model of his apparatus. Although the device finally came to naught, he was decidedly enthusiastic over its possibilities. When friends came to his office to view the model, he took no end of pains to explain it. The main purpose of those explanations was clearness. When he delivered his immortal oration at Gettys- burg, when he gave his first and second inaugural addresses, when Henry Clay died ancj Lincoln de- livered an eulogy on his life — on all these occa- sions, Lincoln’s main purpose was impressiveness and conviction. He had to be clear, of course, be- fore he could be convincing; but, in these instances, clearness was not his major consideration. In his talks to juries, he tried to win favorable decisions. In his political talks, he tried to win votes. His purpose, then, was action. Two years before he was elected President, Lincoln prepared a lecture on Inventions. His pur- MAKING YOUR MEANING CLEAR 355 pose was entertainment. At least, that should have been his goal; but he was evidently not very successful in attaining it. His career as a popular lecturer was, in fact, a distinct disappointment. In one town, not a person came to hear him. But he did succeed and he succeeded famously in the other speeches of his that I have referred to. And why? Because, in those instances, he knew his goal, and he knew how to achieve it. He knew where he wanted to go and how to get there. And because so many speakers don’t know just that, they often flounder and come to grief. For example: I once saw a United States Con- gressman hooted and hissed and forced to leave the stage of the old New York Hippodrome, because he had — unconsciously, no doubt, but nevertheless, unwisely — chosen clearness as his goal. It was dur- ing the war. He talked to his audience about how the United States was preparing. The crowd did not want to be instructed. They wanted to be en- tertained. They listened to him patiently, politely, for ten minutes, a quarter of an hour, hoping the performance would come to a rapid end. But it didn’t. He rambled on and on; patience snapped; the audience would not stand for more. Someone began to cheer ironically. Others took it up. In a moment, a thousand people were whistling and shouting. The speaker, obtuse and incapable as he was of sensing the temper of his audience, had the bad taste to continue. That aroused them. A battle was on. Their impatience mounted to ire. They determined to silence him. Louder and louder grew their storm of protest. Finally, the roar of it, 356 PUBLIC SPEAKING the anger of it drowned his words — he could not have been heard twenty feet away. So he was forced to give up, acknowledge defeat, and retire in humiliation. Profit by his example. Know your goal. Choose it wisely before you set out to prepare your talk. Know how to reach it. Then set about it, doing it skillfully and with science. All this requires knowledge, special and tech- nical instruction. And so important is this phase of speech construction that four chapters of this course will be devoted to it. The remainder of this chapter will show you how to make your talks clear. Chapter XIII will indicate how r to make them im- pressive and convincing. Chapter XIV will show ho^v to make them interesting. Chapter XV will demonstrate a scientific method for getting action. USE COMPARISONS TO PROMOTE CLEARNESS As to clearness : do not underestimate the impor- tance of it nor the difficulty. I recently heard a certain Irish poet give an evening of read- ings from his own poems. Not ten per cent of the audience, half the time, knew what he was talk- ing about. Many talkers, both in public and private, are a lot like that. When I discussed the essentials of public speak* mg with Sir Oliver Lodge, a man who has been lec- turing to university classes and to the public for forty years, he emphasized most of all the impor- tance, first, of knowledge and preparation; second, of “taking good pains to be clear.” MAKING YOUR MEANING CLEAR 357 The great General Yon Moltke, at the outbreak of the Franco-Prussian War, said to his officers: “Remember, gentlemen, that any order that can be misunderstood, will be misunderstood.” Napoleon recognized the same danger. His most emphatic and oft-reiterated instruction to his sec- retaries was: “Be clear! Be clear!” When the disciples asked Christ why He taught the public by parables, He answered : “Because they seeing, see not: and hearing, hear not; neither do they understand.” And when you talk on a subject strange to your hearer or hearers, can you hope that they will un- derstand you any more readily than people under- stood the Master? Hardly. So what can we do about it? What did He do when confronted by a similar situation? Solved it in the most simple and natural manner imaginable : described the things people did not know by likening them to things they did know. The kingdom of Heaven . . . what would it be like? How n could those untutored peasants of Palestine know? So Christ described it in terms of objects and actions with which they were already familiar : “The kingdom of Heaven is like unto leaven, which a. woman took, and hid in three measures of meal, till the whole was leavened.” “Again, the kingdom of Heaven is like unto a merchant- man seeking goodly pearls. . . “Again, the kingdom of Heaven is like unto a net that was cast into the sea. ...” 358 PUBLIC SPEAKING That was lucid; they could understand that. The housewives in the audience were using leaven every week; the fishermen were casting their nets into the sea daily; the merchants were dealing in pearls. And how did David make clear the watchfulness and loving kindness of Jehovah? “The Lord is my shepherd, I shall not want. He maketh me to lie down in green pastures, He leadeth me beside the still waters. . . .” Green grazing grounds in that almost barren country . . . still waters where the sheep could drink — those pastoral people could understand that. Here is a rather striking and half-amusing ex- ample of the use of this principle: some mission- aries were translating the Bible into the dialect of a tribe living near equatorial Africa. They pro- gressed to the verse : “Though your sins be as scar- let, they shall be white as snow.” How were they to translate that? Literally? Meaningless. Ab- surd. The natives had never scooped off the side- walk on a February morning. They did not even have a word for snow. They could not have told the difference between snow and coal tar; but they had climbed cocoanut trees many times and shaken down a few nuts for lunch; so the mission- aries likened the unknown to the known, and changed the verse to read: “Though your sins be as scarlet, they shall be as white as the meat of a cocoanut.” Under the circumstances, it would be hard to improve on that, wouldn’t it? At the State Teachers’ College at Warrensburg, MAKING YOUR MEANING CLEAR 359 Missouri, I once heard a lecturer on Alaska who failed, in many places, to be either clear or inter- esting because, unlike those African missionaries, he neglected to talk in terms of what his audience knew. He told us, for example, that Alaska had a gross area of 590,804 square miles, and a popula- tion of 64,356. Half a million square miles — what does that mean to the average man? Precious little. He is not used to thinking in terms of square miles. They conjure up no mental picture. He does not have any idea whether half a million square miles are approximately the size of Maine or Texas. Sup- pose the speaker had said that the coast line of Alaska and its islands is longer than the distance around the globe, and that its area more than equals the combined areas of Vermont, New Hampshire, Maine, Massachusetts, Rhode Island, Connecticut, New York, New Jersey, Pennsylvania, Delaware, Maryland, West Virginia, North Carolina, South Carolina, Georgia, Florida, Mississippi and Ten- nessee. Would not that give everyone a fairly clear conception qf the area of Alaska? He said the population was 64,356. The chances are that not one person in ten remembered the census figures for five minutes — or even one minute. Why? Because the rapid saying of “sixty- four thousand, three hundred and fifty-six” does not make a very clear impression. It leaves only a loose, insecure impression, like words written on the sand of the seashore. The next wave of atten- tion quite obliterates them. Would it not have been better to have stated the census in terms of some- 360 PUBLIC SPEAKING thing with which they were very familiar? For example: St. Joseph was not very far away from that little Missouri town where the audience lived. Many of them had been to St. Joseph; and, Alaska had, at that time, ten thousand less people than St. Joseph. Better still, why not talk about Alaska in terms of the very town where you are speaking? Wouldn’t the speaker have been far clearer had he said : “Alaska is eight times as large as the state of Missouri; yet it has only thirteen times as many people as live right here in Warrensburg” ? In the following illustrations, which are the clearer, the a statement or the b ? (a) Our nearest star is thirty-five trillion miles away. (b) A train going at the rate of a mile a minute would reach our nearest star in forty-eight million years ; if a song were sung there and the sound could travel here it would be three million, eight hundred thousand years before we could hear it. A spider’s thread reaching to it would weigh five hundred tons. (a) St. Peter’s, the biggest church in the world, is 232 yards long, and 364 feet wide. (b) It is about the size of two buildings like the capitol at Washington piled on top of one another. Sir Oliver Lodge happily uses this method when explaining the size and nature of atoms to a popu- lar audience. I heard him tell a European audience that there were as many atoms in a drop of water as there were drops of w r ater in the Mediterranean Sea; and many of his hearers had spent over a week sailing from Gibraltar to the Suez Canal. To bring the matter still closer home, he said there were MAKING YOUR MEANING CLEAR 361 as many atoms in one drop of water as there were blades of grass on all the earth. Richard Harding Davis told a New York audi- ence that the Mosque of St. Sophia was “about as big as the auditorium of the Fifth i\venue theater.” He said Brindisi “looks like Long Island City when you come into it from the rear.” Use this principle henceforth in your talks. If you. are describing the great pyramid, first tell your hearers it is 45 1 feet, then tell them how high that is in terms of seme building they see every day. Tell how many city blocks the base would cover. Don’t speak about so many thousand gallons of this or so many hundred thousand barrels of that without also telling how many rooms the size of the one you are speaking in could be filled with that much liquid. Instead of saying tw r enty feet high, why not say one and a half times as high as this ceiling? Instead of talking about distance in terms of rods or miles, is it not clearer to say as far as from here to the union station, or to such and such a street? AVOID TECHNICAL TERMS If you belong to a profession the work of which is technical — if you are a lawyer, a physician, an engineer, or are in a highly specialized line of busi- ness — be doubly careful when you talk to outsiders, to express yourself in plain terms and to give neces- sary details. I say be doubly careful, for, as a part of my pro- fessional duties, I have listened to hundreds o r speeches that failed right at this point and failed 362 PUBLIC SPEAKING woefully. The speakers appeared totally uncon- scious of the general public’s widespread and pro- found ignorance regarding their particular special- ties. So what happened? They rambled on and on, uttering thoughts, using phrases that fitted intg their experience and were instantly and continuously meaningful to them; but to the uninitiated, they were about as clear as the Missouri River after the June rains have fallen on the newly-plowed corn fields of Iow r a and Kansas. What should such a speaker do? He ought to read and heed the following advice from the facile pen of Ex-Senator Beveridge of Indiana: “It is a good practice to pick out the least intelligent looking person in the audience and strive to make that person interested in your argument. This can be done only by lucid statement of fact and clear reasoning. An even better method is to center your talk on some small boy or girl present with parents. “Say to yourself — say out loud to your audience, if you like — that you will try to be so plain that the child will understand and remember your explanation of the question discussed, and after the meeting be able to tell what you have said,” I remember hearing a physician, a student of this course, remark in the course of his talk that “dia- phragmatic breathing is a distinct aid to the peristal- tic action of the intestines and a boon to health.” He was about to dismiss that phase of his talk with that one sentence and to rush on to something else. I stopped him; and asked for a show of hands of those who had a clear conception of how diaphrag- matic breathing differs from other kinds of breath- MAKING YOUR MEANING CLEAR 363 mg, why it is especially beneficial to physical well- being and what peristaltic action is. The result of the vote surprised the doctor; so he went back, ex- plained, enlarged in this fashion: “The diaphragm is a thin muscle forming the floor of the chest at the base of the lungs and the roof of the abdominal cavity. When inactive and during chest breath- ing, it is arched like an inverted washbowl. “In abdominal breathing every breath forces this muscular arch down until it becomes nearly flat and you can feel 3 T our stomach muscles pressing against your belt. This downward pressure of the diaphragm massages and stimu- lates the organs of the upper part of the abdominal cavity — the stomach, the liver, the pancreas, the spleen, the solar plexus, “When you breathe out again, your stomach and your intestines will be forced up against the diaphragm and will be given another massage. This massaging helps the process of elimination. “A vast amount of ill health originates in the intestines. Most indigestion, constipation, and auto-intoxication would disappear if our stomachs and intestines were properly exer- cised through deep diaphragmatic breathing.” THE SECRET OF LINCOLN’S CLEARNESS Lincoln had a deep and abiding affection for putting a proposition so that it would be instantly clear to everyone. In his first message to Congress, he used the phrase “sugar-coated.' ” Mr. Defrees, the public printer, being Lincoln’s personal friend, suggested to him that although the phrase might be all right for a stump speech in Illinois, it was not dignified enough for a historical state paper. “Well, Defrees,” Lincoln replied, “if you think the time 364 PUBLIC SPEAKING will ever come when the people will not understand what ‘sugar-coated 1 means, I’ll alter it ; otherwise, I think I’ll let it go.” He once explained to Dr. Gulliver, the President of Knox College, how he developed his “passion 5 ’ for plain language, as he phrased it: “Among my earliest recollections I remember how, when a mere child, I used to get irritated when anybody talked to me in a way I could not understand. I don’t think I ever got angry at anything else in my life. But that always disturbed my temper, and has ever since. I can remember going to my little bedroom, after hearing the neighbors talk of an evening with my father, and spending no small part of the night walking up and down and trying to make out the exact meaning of some of their, to me, dark sayings. I could not sleep, though I often tried to, when I got on such a hunt after an idea, until I had caught it, and when I thought I had got it I was not satisfied until I had re- peated it over and over, until I had put it in language plain enough as I thought for any boy I knew to compre- hend. This was a kind of passion with me, and it has since stuck by me.” A passion? Yes, it must have amounted to that, for Mentor Graham, the schoolmaster of New Salem, testified : “I have known Lincoln to study for hours the best way of three to express an idea.” An all too common reason why men fail to be intelligible is this : the thing they wish to express is not clear even to themselves. Hazy impressions ! Indistinct, vague ideas! The result? Their minds work no better in a mental fog than a camera does in a physical fog. They need to be as disturbed over obscurity and ambiguity as Lincoln was. They need to use his methods. MAKING YOUR MEANING CLEAR 365 APPEAL TO THE SENSE OF SIGHT The nerves that lead from the eye to the brain are, as we observed in Chapter IV, many times larger than those leading from the ear; and science tells us that we give twenty-five times as much at- tention to eye suggestions as we do to ear sugges- tions. “One seeing,” says an old Japanese proverb, “is better than a hundred times telling about.” So, if you wish to be clear, picture your points, visualize your ideas. That was the plan of the late John H. Patterson, president of the well known Na- tional Cash Register Company, He wrote an article for System Magazine, outlining the methods he used in speaking to his workmen and his sales forces : “I hold that one cannot rely on speech alone to make himself understood or to gain and hold attention. A dra- matic supplement is needed. It is better to supplement whenever possible with pictures which show the right and the wrong way; diagrams are more convincing than mere words, and pictures are more convincing than diagrams. The ideal presentation of a subject is one in which every subdivision is "pictured and in which the words are used only to connect them. I early found that in dealing with men, a picture was worth more than anything I could say. “Little grotesque drawings are wonderfully effective. . . . I have a whole system of cartooning or ‘chart talks/ A circle with a dollar mark means a piece of money, a bag marked with a dollar is a lot of money. Many good effects can be had with moon faces. Draw a circle, put in a few dashes for the eyes, nose, mouth, and ears. Twisting these lines gives the expressions. The out-of-date man has the corner of his mouth down; the chipper, up-to-date 366 PUBLIC SPEAKING fellow has the curves up. The drawings are homely, but the most effective cartoonists are not the men who make the prettiest pictures; the thing is to express the idea and the contrast. “The big bag and the little bag of money, side by side, are the natural heads for the right way as opposed to the wrong way; the one brings much money, the other little mone} T . If you sketch these rapidly as you talk, there is no danger of people’s letting their minds wander; they arc bound to look at what you are doing and thus to go with you through the successive stages to the point you want to make. And again, the funny figures put people in good humor. “I used to employ an artist to hang around in the shops with me and quietly make sketches of things that w T ere not being done right. Then the sketches were made into drawings and I called the men together and showed them exactly what they were doing. When I heard of the stereop- ticon I immediately bought one and projected the drawings on the screen, which, of course, made them even more effec- tive than on paper. Then came the moving picture. I think that I had one of the first machines ever made and now we have a big department with many motion picture films and more than 60,000 colored stereopticon slides.” Not every subject or occasion, of course, lends itself to exhibits and drawings ; but let us use them when we can. They attract attention, 'stimulate in- terest and often make our meaning doubly clear. ROCKEFELLER RAKING OFF THE COINS Mr. Rockefeller also used the columns of System Magazine to tell how he appealed to the sense of sight to make clear the financial situation of the Colorado Fuel and Iron Company: MAKING YOUR MEANING CLEAR 367 “I found that they (the employees of the Colorado Fuel and Iron Co.) imagined the Rockefellers had been drawing immense profits from their interests in Colorado ; no end of people had told them so. I explained the exact situation to them. I showed them that during the fourteen years in which we had been connected with the Colorado Fuel and Iron Co., it had never paid one cent in dividends upon the common stock. “At one of our meetings, I gave a practical illustration of the finances of the company. I put a number of coins on the table, I swept oft a portion which represented their wages — for the first claim upon the company is the pay roll. Then I took away more coins to represent the salaries of the officers, and then the remaining coins to represent the fees of the directors. There were no coins left for the stockholders. And when I asked: 'Men, is it fair, in this corporation where we are all partners, that three of the partners should get all the earnings, be they large or small — all of them — and the fourth nothing?’ “After the illustration, one of the men made a speech for higher wages. I asked him, ‘Is it fair for you to want more wages when one of the partners gets nothing?’ He admitted that it did not look like a square deal ; I heard no more about increasing the wages.” Make your eye appeals definite and specific. Paint mental pictures that stand out as sharp and clear as a stag’s horn silhouetted against the setting sun. For example, the word “dog” calls up a more or less definite picture of such an animal — perhaps a cocker spaniel, a Scotch terrier, a St. Bernard, or a Pomeranian. Notice how much more distinct an image springs into your mind when I say “bulldog” — the term is less inclusive. Doesn’t “a brindle bulldog” call up a still more explicit picture? Is it not more vivid to say “a black Shetland pony” than to talk of “a horse”? Doesn’t “a white ban- 368 PUBLIC SPEAKING tam rooster with a broken leg” give a much more definite and sharp picture than merely the word “fowl”? RESTATE YOUR IMPORTANT IDEAS IN DIFFERENT WORDS Napoleon declared repetition to be the only seri- ous principle of rhetoric. He knew that because an idea was clear to him was not always proof that it was instantly grasped by others. He knew that it takes time to comprehend new ideas, that the mind must be kept focussed on them. In short, he knew they must be repeated. Not in exactly the same language. People will rebel at that, and rightly so.. But if the repetition is couched in fresh phraseology, if it is varied, your hearers will never regard it as repetition at all. Let us take a specific example. The late Mr. Bryan said: “You cannot make people understand a subject, unless you understand that subject yourself. The more clearly you have a subject in mind, the more clearly can you present that subject to the minds of othen.” r The last sentence here is merely a restatement of the Idea contained in the first; but when these sentences are spoken, the mind does not have time to see that it is repetition. It only feels that the subject has been made more clear. I seldom teach a single session of this course with- out hearing one or perhaps half a dozen talks that would have been more clear, more impressive, had the speaker but employed this principle of restate- MAKING YOUR MEANING CLEAR 369 ment. It is almost entirely ignored by the be- ginner. And what a pity! USE GENERAL ILLUSTRATIONS AND SPECIFIC INSTANCES One of the surest and easiest ways to make your points clear is to follow them with general illustra- tions and concrete cases. What is the difference between the two? One, as the term implies, is gen- eral; the other, specific. Let us illustrate the difference between them and the uses of each with a concrete example. Suppose we take the statement: “There are professional men and women who earn astonishingly large in- comes. Is that statement very clear? Have you a clear- cut idea of what the speaker really means? No, and the speaker himself cannot be sure of what such an assertion will call up in the minds of others. It may cause the country doctor in the Ozark Moun- tains to think of a family doctor in a small city with an income of five thousand. It may cause a successful mining engineer to think in terms of the men in his profession who make a hundred thousand a year. The statement, as it stands, is entirely too vague and loose. It needs to be tightened. A few illuminating details ought to be given to indicate what professions the speaker refers to and what he means by “astonishingly large.” “There are lawyers, prize fighters, song writers, novel- ists, playwrights, painters, actors and singers who make more than the President of the United States.” 370 PUBLIC SPEAKING Now, hasn’t one a much clearer idea of what the speaker meant ? However, he has not individu- alized. He has used general illustrations, not spe- cific instances. He has said “singers,” not Rosa Pon- selle, Kirsten Flagstad, or Lily Pons. So the statement is still more or less vague. We cannot call up concrete cases to illustrate it. Should not the speaker do it for us? Would he not be clearer if he employed specific examples — as is done in the following paragraph? “The great trial lawyers Samuel Untermeyer and Max Steuer earn as much as one million dollars a year. Jack Dempsey’s annual income has been known to be as high as a half million dollars. Joe Louis, the young, uneducated negro pugilist, while still in his twenties, has earned more than a half million dollars. Irving Berlin’s rag-time music is re- ported to have brought him a half million dollars yearly. Sidney Kingsley has made ten thousand dollars a week roy- alty on his plays. H. G. Wells has admitted, in his auto- biography, that his pen has brought him three million dol- lars. Diego Rivera has earned, from his paintings, more than a half a million dollars in a year. Katherine Cornell has repeatedly refused five thousand dollars a Tveek to go into pictures. Lawrence Tibbet and Grace Moore are re- ported to have an annual income of a quarter million dol- lars.” Notv, has not one an extremely plain and vivid idea of exactly and precisely what the speaker wanted to convey? Be concrete. Be definite. Be specific. This quality of definiteness not only makes for clearness but for impressiveness and conviction and interest also. MAKING YOUR MEANING CLEAR 371 DO NOT EMULATE THE MOUNTAIN GOAT Professor William James, in one of his talks to teachers, pauses to remark that one can make only one point in a lecture, and the lecture he referred to lasted an hour. Yet I recently heard a speaker, who was limited by a stop watch to three minutes, begin by saying that he wanted to call our atten- tion to eleven points. Sixteen and a half seconds to each phase of his subject! Seems incredible, doesn’t it, that an intelligent man should attempt anything so manifestly absurd. True, I am quoting an extreme case; but the tendency to err in that fashion, if not to that degree, handicaps almost every novice. He is like a Cook’s guide who shows Paris to the tourist in one day. It can be done, just as one can walk through the American Museum of Natural History in thirty minutes. But neither clearness nor enjoyment results. Many a talk fails to be clear because the speaker seems intent upon establishing a world’s record for ground covered in the allotted time. He leaps from one point to another with the swiftness and agility of a moun- tain goat. The talks in this course must, owing to the pres- sure of time, be short; so cut your cloth accord- ingly. If, for example, you are to speak on Labor Unions, do not attempt to tell us in three or six minutes why they came into existence, the methods they employ, the good they have accomplished, the evil they have wrought, and how to solve indus- trial disputes. No, no; if you strive to do that, no one will have a very clear conception of what 372 PUBLIC SPEAKING you have said. It will be all confused, a blur, too sketchy, too much of a mere outline. Wouldn’t it be the part of wisdom to take one phase and one phase only of labor unions, and cover that adequately and illustrate it? It would. That kind of speech leaves a single impression. It is lucid, easy to listen to, easy to remember. However, if you must cover several phases of your topic, it is often advisable to summarize briefly at the end. Let us see how that suggestion oper- ates. Here is a summary of this lesson. Does the reading of it help to make the message we have been presenting more lucid, more comprehensible? SUMMARY 1. To be clear is highly important and often very difficult. Christ declared that He had to teach by parables, “Because they (His hearers) seeing, see not; and hearing, hear not; neither do they under- stand.” 2. Christ made the unknown clear by talking of it in terms of the known. He likened the King- dom of Heaven to leaven, to nets cast into the sea, to merchants buying pearls. “Go thou, and do likewise.” If you wish to give a clear conception of the size of Alaska, do not quote its area in square miles; name the states that could be put into it; enumerate its population in terms of the town where you are speaking. 3. Avoid technical terms when addressing a lay audience. Follow Lincoln’s plan of putting your MAKING YOUR MEANING CLEAR 373 ideas into language plain enough for any boy to comprehend. 4* Be sure that the thing you wish to speak about is first as clear as noonday sunshine in your own mind. 5. Appeal to the sense of sight. Use exhibits, pictures, illustrations when possible. Be definite. Don’t say “dog” if you mean “a fox terrier with a black splotch over his right eye.” 6. Restate your big ideas; but don’t repeat, don’t use the same phrases twice. Vary the sentences, but reiterate the idea without letting your hearers de- tect it. 7. Make your abstract statement clear by follow- ing it with general illustrations — and what is often better still — by specific instances and concrete cases. 8. Do not strive to cover too many points. In a short speech, one cannot hope to treat adequately more than one or rwo phases of a big topic. 9. Close with a brief summary of your points. SPEECH BUILDING WORDS OFTEN MISPRONOUNCED “A well educated gentleman may not know many languages — may not be able to speak any but his own. But whatever languages he knows, he knows precisely; whatever word he pronounces, he pronounces rightly.” * — Ruskin. These words have four— not three — syllables, fiead them aloud correctly. ac-cu-ra-cy in-er-ti-a a-e-ri-ai mem-o-ra-ble a-mi-a-ble mis-er-a-ble a-wak-en-ing Na-po-le-on cer-e-mon-y pneu-mo-ni-a de-lir-i-ous pre-pos-ter-ous de-lir-i-um ri-dic-u-lous de-liv-er-y tem-per-a-ment dis-cov-er-y tem-pes-tu-ous ex-pe-di-ent u-su-al-Iy gen-er-al-ly val-u-a-ble ge-og-ra-phy hy-gi-en-ic ven-er-a-ble These words have five — not four — syllables,, ac-com-pa-ni-ment con-si-der-a-ble lab-o-ra-to-ry 374 MAKING YOUR MEANING CLEAR 375 ERRORS IN ENGLISH Review . As this chapter completes three-fourths of the course, you will find that the following sentences review many of the points which have already been taken up in the study of your language. Some of them are incorrect and some are not. Look them over and give your reason for the decision which you make in each case. Us men will have to settle the matter. If you were him, I know what you would do. It is us who are to blame. I interviewed three men, none of which were sat- isfactory. The horse who won the Derby sold for two hun- dred thousand dollars. Nobody knows who he will take. I seen him. Wasn’t you there? It looks as if there was going to be trouble sure. Don’t lay down now. He bored three oil wells and sunk a lot of money, but neither of them paid. He is not so prosperous as he once was. Either of the cars are all* right, but he don’t in- tend to buy nothing. He has always drunk heavily. He had ought to have known better. Everybody ought to take their own bait and tackle. New Study Material . Rule: So many people use who when they should say whom in short ques- tions ending or beginning with a preposition. Look at the sentences given below and you will find that 376 PUBLIC SPEAKING if you turn them around so that the preposition stands first, you will probably not make the mistake. Some authorities claim that you should never close a sentence with a preposition. This is the better rule. Right : Whom did you ask for? or For whom did you ask? Wrong: Who did you ask for? Right: Whom are you going to the dinner with? or With whom are you going to the dinner? Wrong: Who are you going to the dinner with? Rule : Whenever you have any form of the verb to be, the nominative case is used after it in- stead of the objective case. Right: Who did you say the girl was? Wrong: Whom did you say the girl was? Right: Do you know who it is that is doing this? Wrong: Do you know whom it is that is doing this? Rule: We are in the habit of putting certain expressions, like “I am certain,” etc., into sentences. This makes it more difficult to decide whether who or whom should be used. Right: I am giving you an assistant who, I am sure, will render satisfactory service. ( Who is the right word because it is the subject of will render .) Wrong: I am giving you an assistant whom, I am sure, will render satisfactory service. Right : He is a man whom, I am certain, you can place in any position. (Here, whom is the object of can place, therefore it is the correct form.) Wrong: He is a man who, I am sure, you can place in any position. MAKING YOUR MEANING CLEAR 377 Right: The president who, as you know, was to blame, has been impeached. (The key to this is to drop as you know . Who is the subject of was in the clause, who was to blame.) Wrong: The president whom f as you know, was to blame, has been impeached. Rule: Whoever and whomever are used just the same as who and whom . Right : I will fight with whoever gives me the best offer. Wrong: I will fight with whomever gives me the best offer. Right: Whoever wins will take the gate money. Wrong: Whomever wins will take the gate money. Right: You may fight whomever you desire. Wrong: You may fight whoever you desire. Right : When a money order is endorsed to some- one other than the payee, the post office must pay the amount to whoever brings it to the window if he can identify himself. ( Whoever is correct here because it is the subject of brings. The preposition to has an object but it is the wffiole clause, whoever brings it to tJie window , etc., that is so considered.) CORRECT USAGE OF WORDS Indifference — Apathy. Indifference expresses absence of feeling toward certain things. Apathy is an entire lack of feeling. You may be indiffer- ent about an election in your city. You are apa- thetic about the elections in Johnson County, Mis« souri. 578 PUBLIC SPEAKING Likely — Apt — Liable. (Wrong) “His ob- stinacy is likely to get him into trouble.” Better say: “His obstinacy is liable (or apt) to get him into trouble.” Apt suggests a natural tend- ency; as, people are apt to blame their misfortunes on Fate. Likely refers to a probable and not un- pleasant contingency; as, Our horse is likely to win the Bellair Handicap Race. Liable suggests some^ thing unpleasant; as, We are liable to have trouble. Permit — Allow. You permit people to cross a field if you approve, sanction, or authorize the crossing, but if you do not attempt to prevent it, you allow it. Recollect — Remember. Remember does not necessarily suggest an effort; recollect does. VOICE EXERCISE-DEVELOPING RESONANCE The following discussion of resonance and exer- cises for its development were written especially for this course by Professor R. J. Hughes : Do you remember, when you were a boy, how, when you stuck your head into the half-empty *rain barrel, and uttered a sound, the wonderful effect produced fairly made your ears ring? That effect was due to resonance or sympathetic vibration. The sound you produced was mag- nified many times by being communicated to the air par- tially inclosed in the upper part of the barrel. All musical instruments, the drum with its barrel, the horn with its tube and bell, the piano with its sounding-board, the violin with its body of seasoned wood, all these are constructed on the principle that a comparatively weak initial sound can be reinforced and multiplied in power by communica- ing itself to a suitable elastic medium whether it be air. MAKING YOUR MEANING CLEAR 379 nivood, or metal. The human voice is such a musical in- strument. The feeble buzzing of the vocal cords is the initial sound which sets in vibration the chest and the partially open air cavities of the pharynx, mouth, and nose where it is wonderfully re-enforced and gains greatly in power and grandeur. If we heard only the initial buzz of the vocal cords, a voice would be heard only a few feet away and would have none of the characteristics we associate with human speech. The resonance of the chest is largely automatic while that of the cavities of the head is under the control of the will and by skillful use can be made to produce both beautiful and powerful effects, A speaker of my acquaintance who used to have a singularly toneless and empty voice has by careful study and faithful practice gained full use of his head resonance and now for some years has been noted for the ringing quality of his voice and for his ability to fill large auditoriums with ease. Instruction in the proper use of your resonators, especially the mouth and the nose, must be an important part of your education as a public speaker. Taking the vibrating air as it leaves the larynx or voice- box, we follow it up through the open throat until it reaches the veil of the soft palate which you can see hanging at the back of the mouth. Under its arch a part of the breath stream enters the mouth and another part rises through the passageway back of this veil or curtain into the nose. Of these two cavities the nose is the larger and has as irregular and varied a surface as the interior of a rocky cavern. Have you ever talked loudly or hallooed in a cave? Reverberations such as you never heard before greeted your astonished ears. In a similar way brilliant and rich qualities are added to your voice in the queer-shaped cavernous spaces of your nose and head. This is called “head resonance.” At the same time the other stream, which entered the mouth under the arch of the palate, is undergoing an entirely different change. Besides being re- enforced in volume just as was the stream that entered the nasal cavity by the rear door, this second breath stream is modified by the shape given to the interior of the mouth PUBLIC SPEAKING 380 by the plastic tongue and mobile lips. These mouth modifi- cations of the feeble initial tone are called vowels. Thus we learn that vowels are merely mouth resonances, not made at all by the vocal cords. At the larynx all vowels are the same. The mold temporarily given to the inside of the mouth, largelv bv the tongue, determines what vowel shall come out. Thus the mouth is the vowel chamber, where also the interferences called consonants are made. We will now show’ you how to use the three resonating cavities most effectively. The chest cavity resounds automatically when you sup- port your tone firmly on your controlled breath, as you learned in Chapter V. You can feel it when you place your hand upon your upper chest. It is stronger on the deeper tones of low pitch; but can be felt throughout the speaking range of the adult male voice. Support your voice with your deep breath on every word uttered and you will get full aid from your chest resonance. As for your nasal resonance, this valuable aid can only be obtained by special training. At the very outset we must know the difference between nasal resonance and nasal “twang.” The “twang” is produced when the tone does not go through the nose freely. Close both your nostrils with thumb and forefinger. Now try to say, “The moon is beaming.” Notice the disagreeable nasality. Re- move the obstruction and you can imitate the effect by voluntarily preventing the tone from going through the nose. Now say the sentence by allowing the tone to flow freely through the nose. The disagreeable quality has dis- appeared. You must talk with the word pronounced “for- ward” in the mouth but the tone must pass freely through the nose at the same time. Here are some exercises which will help to give you good head-resonance and carrying power. Exercise i. Inhale deeply. Gradually expel the breath with a soft hissing sound forming the consonants. Repeat, and while hissing, suddenly close the lips without stopping the steady flow of breath which will now pass through the nose, making the humming consonant m. MAKING YOUR MEANING CLEAR 331 Exercise 2 . Inhale deeply. Hum m. Then without stopping the hum change it to n by opening the lips and lifting the tip of the tongue to the hard palate. Alternate m and n repeatedly, keeping up a continuous stream of resonance, sounding like “minim,” repeated continuously. Notice where the sensation of vibrating air is felt. Exercise J. Vary Exercise 2 by introducing the vowel sound ee between the hums and m and n; thus, menemene, etc. Notice the clear resonance of the vowel in the front of the mouth-chamber while the hum still continues in the nose without interruption. This humming sound during the utterance of the vowel is important. Feel it as well as hear it. Exercise 4 . Repeat Exercise 3, then without stopping the stream of resonance, change ee into ah, forming mene ah, which will give a clear ringing ah sound heard in the front of the mouth just back of the upper front teeth while the hum must be heard simultaneously in the head cavities. Exercise 5 . Repeat slowly “mean, mine ’ several times without stopping the stream of resonance in the nasal cavities 0 CHAPTER XIII HOW TO BE IMPRESSIVE AND CONVINCING “ The secret of success in life consists in knowing how to change men s minds. It is this power that makes the successful lawyer , grocer , politician or preacher — Dr. Frank Crane . “ Never zvas the power of moving men by speech more potent than now , never was it more useful , more admired as an accomplishment F — Earl Curzon of Kedleston , while Chancellor of the University of Oxford. “ The recipe for perpetual ignorance is be satisfied with your opinions and content with your knowledge T — Elbert Hubbard . “The public speaker must set forth with power and attractiveness the very same topic which others discuss in such tame and bloodless phraseology T — Cicero. “ Nothing else will call out what is in a man so quickly and so effectively as the constant effort to do his best in speaking before an audience. When one undertakes to think on his feet extemporaneously before the public , the power and the skill of the entire man are put to a severe test. “The practice of public speaking , the effort to marshal all ones forces in a logical and forceful manner , to bring to a focus all the power one possesses, is a great awakener of all the faculties. The sense of power that comes from holding the attention, stirring the emotions,* or convincing the reason of an audience, gives self-confidence, assurance, self-reliance, arouses ambition and tends to make one more effective in every way. “One's judgment, education , manhood, character, all the things that go to make a man what he is, are being unrolled like a panorama in his effort to express himself. Every mental faculty is quickened, every power of thought and expression stirred and spurred T — Dr. Orison Swett Marden « CHAPTER XIII HOW TO BE IMPRESSIVE AND CONVINCING Here is a psychological discovery of tremendous import: “Every idea, concept or conclusion which enters the mind,” says Walter Dill Scott, Presi- dent of Northwestern University, “is held as true unless hindered by some contradictory idea. . . . If we can give a man any sort of an idea it is not necessary to convince him of the truth of the idea if we can keep conflicting ideas from arising in his mind. If I can get you to read the sentence, ‘United States tires are good tires,’ you will believe that they are good tires and that too without any fur- ther proof if any contradictory ideas do not surge up into your mind.” Dr. Scott is here speaking about suggestion — one of the most powerful influences the public speaker — or private one, too, for that matter — can employ. Three centuries before the Wise Men of the East followed the star of Bethlehem on the first Christ- mas, Aristotle taught that man was a reasoning ani- mal — that he acted according to the dictates of logic. He flattered us. Acts of pure reasoning are as rare as romantic thoughts before breakfast. Most of our actions are the result of suggestion. Suggestion is getting the mind to accept an idea 38s 386 PUBLIC SPEAKING" without offering any proof or demonstration. If I say to you, “Royal Baking Powder is absolutely pure,” and do not attempt to prove it, I am using suggestion. If I present an analysis of the product and the testimony of well-known chefs regarding it, I am trying to prove my assertion. Those v r ho are most successful in handling others rely more upon suggestion than upon argument. Salesmanship and modern advertising are based chiefly on suggestion. It is easy to believe; doubting is more difficult. Experience and knowledge and thinking are neces- sary before we can doubt and question intelligently. Tell a child that Santa Claus comes down the chim- ney or a savage that thunder is the anger of the gods and the child and the savage will accept your statements until they acquire sufficient knowledge to cause them to demur. Millions in India passion- ately believe that the waters of the Ganges are holy, that snakes are deities in disguise, that it is as wrong to kill a cow as it is to kill a person — and, as for eating roast beef . . . that is no more to be thought of than cannibalism. They accept these absurdities, not because they have been proved, but because the suggestion has been deeply imbedded in their minds, and they have not the intelligence, the knowledge, the experience, necessary to question them. We smile . . . the poor benighted creatures! Yet you and I, if we examine the facts closely, will discover that the majority of our opinions, our most cherished beliefs, our creeds, the principles of com duct on which many of us base our very lives, are TO BE IMPRESSIVE AND CONVINCING 387 the result of suggestion, rather than reasoning. To take a concrete illustration from business. We have come to regard Arrow collars, Royal baking powder, Heinz pickles, Gold Medal flour, Ivory soap as among the leading, if not the best, products of their kind. Why? Have we adequate reason for these judgments? Reason? Most of us have none at all. Have we made a careful comparison of the value of these brands and the output of com- peting firms? No ! We have come to believe things for which no proof has been given. Prejudiced, biased, and reiterated assertions, not logic, have formulated our beliefs. We are creatures of suggestion. There is no denying that. Had you and I been taken from our cradles here in America when we were six months old, and had we been reared by a Hindoo family on the banks of the mighty Brahmaputra, we would have been taught from infancy that cows are holy; we too, would be kissing them when we met them on the streets of Benares ; we, too, would look with horror on the “Christian dogs” who ate beefsteak; we, too, would then be bowing down to monkey gods a’nd elephant gods and gods of wood and stone. So our beliefs are seldom due to reason- ing. They are almost all due to suggestion and geography. Let us take a homely illustration that shows how most of us are being influenced by suggestion every day: You have read many times that coffee is harmful. Let us suppose you intend to abstain from drinking it. You go into your favorite restau- 388 PUBLIC SPEAKING rant for dinner. If the waitress is not skilled in the niceties of salesmanship, she may inquire, “Do you wish coffee?” If she does, the arguments for and against it may battle momentarily in your mind, and your self-control perhaps wins. You want good digestion more than you wish the immediate gratifi- cation of your palate. However, if she phrases it negatively, “You don’t want any coffee, do you?” you find it still simpler to say “no.” The idea of refusing what she has put into your mind passes into action. (Haven’t you heard many an unschooled and undiscerning salesman greet his prospective cus- tomer with just such a negative proposal?) But suppose she asks, “Will you have your coffee now or later ?” What happens ? She has subtly assumed that there is no question about your wanting it; she concentrates your entire attention on when you wish it served; and so she excludes other considera- tions from your mind, rendering it difficult for con- tradictory ideas to arise, making it easy for the thought of ordering coffee to pass into action. The result? You say “bring it now,” when you really didn’t intend to order it at all. This has happened to the writer. It has happened to most of the men who read these lines. It, and a thousand things like it, are happening every day. Department stores train their sales people to inquire, “Will you take it wffth you?” because they have learned that “Do you wash to have it sent?” increases delivery costs immediately. Not only does every idea that enters the mind tend to be accepted as true; but it is a well-known psychological fact that it also tends to pass into TO BE IMPkESSIVE AND CONVINCING 389 action. For example, you cannot even think of a letter of the alphabet without moving ever so slightly the muscles used in pronouncing it. You cannot think of swallowing without moving ever so slightly the muscles used in that act. The move- ment may be imperceptible to you ; but there are machines delicate enough to register that muscular reaction. The only reason that you do not do every- thing you think of is because another idea — the uselessness of it, the expense, the trouble, the ab- surdity, the danger or some such thought' — arises to slay the impulse. OUR MAIN PROBLEM So in the last analysis, our problem of getting people to accept our beliefs or to act upon our suggestions, is just this : to plant the idea in their minds and to keep contradictory and opposing ideas from arising. He who is skilled in doing that will have power in speaking and profit in business. HELPS PSYCHOLOGY HAS TO OFFER Has psychology any suggestions that will prove helpful to you in this connection? Emphatically, yes. Let us see what they are. First, haven’t you noticed that contradictory ideas are much less likely to arise in your mind when the main idea is pre- sented with feeling and contagious enthusiasm? I say “contagious,” for enthusiasm is just that. It lulls the critical faculties. It is a veritable “rough- on-rats” to all dissenting, to all negative and oppos- ing ideas. When your aim is impressiveness, re- 390 PUBLIC SPEAKING member it is more productive to stir emotions than to arouse thoughts. Feelings are more powerful than cold ideas. To arouse feelings one must be intensely in earnest. Insincerity rips the vitals out of delivery. Regardless of the pretty phrases a man may concoct ; regardless of the illustrations he may assemble; regardless of the harmony of his voice, and the grace of his gestures : if he does not speak sincerely, these are hollow and glittering trappings. If you would impress an audience, be impressed yourself. Your spirit, shining through your eyes, radiating through your voice, and pro- claiming itself through your manner, will communi- cate itself to your auditors. LIKEN WHAT YOU WISH PEOPLE TO ACCEPT TO SOMETHING THEY ALREADY BELIEVE An atheist once declared to William Paley that there was no God, and he challenged the English rector to disprove his contention. Paley very quietly took out his watch, opened the case and showed the works to the unbeliever, saying: “If I were to tell you that those levers and wheels' and springs made themselves and fitted themselves together and started running on their own account, wouldn’t you question my intelligence? Of course, you would. But look up at the stars. Every one of them has its perfect appointed course and motion — the earth and planets around the sun, and the whole group pitching along at more than a million miles a day. Each star is another sun with its own group of worlds, rushing on through space like our own TO BE IMPRESSIVE AND CONVINCING 391 solar system. Yet there are no collisions, no dis- turbance, no confusion. All quiet, efficient, and controlled. Is it easier to believe that they just happened or that someone made them so?” Rather impressive, isn’t it? What technique did the speaker use? Let us see. He began on com- mon ground, got his opponent saying “yes,” and agreeing with him at the outset, as we advised in Chapter X. Then he went on to show that belief in a deity is as simple, as inevitable, as belief in a watchmaker. Suppose he had retorted to his antagonist at the outset: “No God? Don’t be a silly ass. You don’t know what you are talking about.” What would have happened? Doubtlessly a verbal joust — a wordy war would have ensued, as futile as it was fiery. The atheist would have risen with an unholy zeal upon him to fight with all the fury of a Fuzzy Wuzzy for his opinions. Why? Be- cause, as Professor Robinson has pointed out, they were his opinions, and his precious, indispensable self-esteem would have been threatened; his pride would have been at stake. Since pride is such a fundamentally explosive characteristic of human nature, wouldn’t it be the part of wisdom to get a man’s pride working for us, instead of against us? How? By showing, as Paley did, that the thing we propose is very similar to something that our opponent already believes. That renders it easier for him to accept than to re- ject your proposal. That prevents contradictory and opposing ideas from arising in the mind to vitiate what we have said. 392 PUBLIC SPEAKING Paley showed delicate appreciation of how the human mind functions. Most men, however, lack this subtle ability to enter the citadel of d man’s beliefs arm in arm with the owner. They errone- ously imagine that in order to take the citadel, they must storm it, batter it down by a frontal attack. What happens? The moment hostilities commence, the drawbridge is lifted, the great gates are slammed and bolted, the mailed archers draw their long bows — the battle of words and wounds is on. Such frays always end in a draw; neither has con- vinced the other of anything. SAINT PAUL’S SAGACITY This more sensible method we are advocating is not new. It was used long ago by Saint Paul. He employed it in that famous address of his to the Athenians on Mars Hill — employed it with an adroitness and finesse that compels our admiration across nineteen centuries. He was a man of finished education; and, after his conversion to Christianity, his eloquence made him its leading advocate. One day he arrived at Athens — the post-Pericles Athens, an xAthens that had passed the summit of its glory and was now on the decline. The Bible says of it at this period: “All the Athenians and strangers which were there spent their time in nothing else but either to tell or to hear some new thing.” No radios, no cables, no A. P. dispatches; those Athenians must have been hard put in those days to scratch up something fresh every afternoon. m TO BE IMPRESSIVE AND CONVINCING 393 Then Paul came. Here was something new. They crowded about him, amused, curious, interested. Taking him to the Areopagus, they said: “May we know what this new doctrine, whereof thou speaKest, is t “For thou bringest certain strange things to our ears: we would know therefore what these things mean.” In other w r ords, they invited a speech; and, noth- ing loth, Paul agreed. In fact, that was what he had come for. He probably stood up on a block or stone, and, being a bit nervous, as all good speak- ers are at the very outset, he may have given his hands a dry wash, and have cleared his throat be- fore he began. However, he did not altogether approve of the way they had worded their invitation;. “New doc- trines „ . . strange things.’' That was poison. He must eradicate those ideas. They were fertile ground for the propagating of contradictory and clashing opinions. He did not wish to present his faith as something strange and alien. He wanted to tie it up to, liken it to, something they already believed. That would smother dissenting sugges- tions. But how? He thought a moment; hit upon a brilliant plan; he began his immortal address: “Ye men of Athens, I perceive that in all things ye are very superstitious.” Some translations read: “ye are very religious.” I think that is better, more accurate. They wor- shipped many gods ; they were very religious. They were proud of it. He complimented them, pleased them. They began to warm toward him. One of 394 PUBLIC SPEAKING the rules of the art of public speaking is to support a statement by an illustration. He does just that : c “For, as I passed by, and beheld your devotions, I found an altar with this inscription, TO THE UNKNOWN GOD/’ That proves, you see, that they were very re- ligious. They were so afraid of slighting one of the deities that they had put up an altar to the unknown God, a sort of blanket insurance policy to provide against all unconscious slights and uninten- tional oversights. Paul, by mentioning this specific altar, indicated that he was not dealing in flattery; he showed that his remark was a genuine apprecia- tion born of observation. Now, here comes the consummate rightness of this opening: “Whom therefore ye ignorantly worship, Him declare I unto you.” “Mew doctrine . . . strange things” ? Not a bit of it. He was there merely to explain a few truths about a God they were already worshipping without being conscious of it. Likening the things they did not believe, you see, to something they already passionately accepted — such was his superb technique. He propounded his doctrine of salvation and res- urrection, quoted a few words from one of their own Greek poets; and he was done. The whole speech had consumed less than two minutes. Some of his hearers mocked, but others said : “We will hear thee again on this matter.” TO BE IMPRESSIVE AND CONVINCING 395 Just in passing, let us note that that is one of the advantages of a two minute talk: you may be asked*to speak again, as Paul was. A Philadelphia politician once remarked to me that the main rules to remember in making a speech were : make it short, and make it snappy. Saint Paul, on this occasion, did both. This technique that Saint Paul used at Athens is employed by the more discriminating business men of to-day in their selling talks and advertising. For example, here is a paragraph lifted from a sales letter that recently arrived at my desk: “Old Hampshire Bond costs less than one half cent more per letter than the cheapest paper available. If you write a customer or a prospect ten letters a year, the influence of Old Hampshire will cost you less than a car fare — less than giving your customer a good cigar once every five years.” Who could possibly object to paying a car fare for a customer once a year or offering him a Havana twice in a decade? Surely, no one. And using Old Hampshire Bond would cost no more than that in additional expense? Doesn’t that tend to forestall ’contradictory ideas regarding prohibi- tive cost? MAKING SMALL SUMS APPEAR LARGE AND LARGE SUMS APPEAR SMALL In much the same way, a large sum can be made to appear small by distributing it over a long pe- riod of time and comparing the daily outlay with something that seems trivial. For example, a life 396 PUBLIC SPEAKING insurance president, addressing the sales organiza- tion of his company, impressed his men with the low cost of insurance in this fashion : r “A man below thirty can at death leave his family one thousand dollars by cutting out his daily five cent shine, doing the job himself, and investing the sum saved in in- surance, The man of thirty-four who smokes a quarter’s worth of cigars daily can stay with his family longer, and leave them three thousand dollars more, by spending his cigar money for insurance.” Small sums, on the other hand, can be made to appear huge by reversing this process — by massing them. A telephone company official heaped insignifi- cant minutes together to impress his audience with the vast amount of time lost by New Yorkers neg- lecting to answer telephones promptly : “Out of each one hundred telephone connections made, seven show a delay of more than a minute before the person called answers. Every day 280,000 minutes are lost in this way. In the course of six months, this minute’s delay in New York is about equal to all the business days that have elapsed since Columbus discovered America.” HOW TO MAKE FIGURES IMPRESSIVE Mere numbers and amounts, taken by themselves, are never very impressive. They have to be illus- trated; they ought, if possible, to be put in terms of our experiences, our recent experiences and our feeling experiences. For example, Alderman Lam- beth used this technique when he was addressing the Borough Council of London anent labor con- ditions. He stopped abruptly in the middle of his speech, took out his watch, and stood staring in TO BE IMPRESSIVE AND CONVINCING 397 blank silence at the audience for one minute and twelve seconds. The other members of the Borough Council? twisted in their seats uneasily, looked ques- tioningly at the speaker, at one another. What was wrong? Had Alderman Lambeth suddenly lost his mind? Resuming his speech, he declared: “You have just sat through and fidgeted through the seventy-second eternity of time which it takes the average workman to lay one brick.” Was this method of doing it effective? It was so effective that it was cabled to all parts of the world, printed in newspapers across the seas. It was so effective that the Amalgamated Union of Building Trades at once called a strike “in protest against this insult to our dignity.” Which of the two following statements drives the point home with the greater force? 1. The Vatican has 15,000 rooms. 2, The Vatican has so many rooms that one might occupy a different one every day for forty years without having lived in them all. $ Which of the following methods gives you a more impressive conception of the incredible amount of money that Great Britain spent during the world war? 1. Great Britain spent approximately seven billion pounds sterling or about thirty-four billion dollars during the war. 2. Would you be surprised to learn that Great Britain spent, during the four and a half years of the world war, a sum 39 S PUBLIC SPEAKING equal to thirty-four dollars for every minute that has passed night and day since the Pilgrim Fathers landed at Plymouth Rock? The sum is even more stupendous than that. Great Britain spent in the World War thirty-four dollars for every minute that has passed, night and day, since Columbus discovered America. The sum is even more colossal than that. Great Britain spent during the world war, thirty-four dollars for every minute that has passed night and day since Wil- liam, Duke of Normandy, came over and conquered England in 1066. The sum is even more fabulous than that. Great Britain spent during the world war a sum equal to thirty- four dollars for every minute that has passed night and day since Christ was born. In other words, Great Britain spent thirty-four billion dollars; and there have been approxi- mately only a billion minutes elapsed since the birth of Christ. WHAT RESTATEMENT WILL DO Restatement is another club that we can use to prevent contradictory and dissenting ideas from aris- ing to challenge our assertions. “It is not by ad- vancing a political truth once or twice, or even ten times, that the public will take it up and adopt it,” declared Daniel O’Connell, the famous Irish orator. O’Connell had had a lot of experience with audiences and the public. His testimony ought to merit consideration. “Incessant repetition,” he continued, “is required to impress political truths upon the mind. Men, by always hearing the same thing, insensibly associate them with truisms. They find the facts at last quietly reposing in a corner of their minds, and no more think of doubting them than if they formed a part of their religious beliefs.” Hiram Johnson knew the truth O’Connell ex- pressed. That was why he went up and down the TO BE IMPRESSIVE AND CONVINCING 399 state of California for seven months, ending almost everyone of his addresses with this same prediction: *» “Remember this, my friends, I am going to be the next Governor of California; and, when I am, I am going to kick out of this government William F. Herrin and the Southern Pacific railroad — Good night.” John Wesley’s mother knew the truth O’Connell expressed. That is why, when her husband asked her why she repeated the same truths to her sons twenty times, she replied: “Because they have not learned the lesson when I have repeated it nineteen times.” Woodrow Wilson knew the truth O’Connell ex- pressed. That is why he used it in his addresses. Note that he merely reiterates and rephrases in the last two sentences, the idea he had stated in the first. “You know that the pupils in the colleges in the last several decades have not been educated. You know that with all of our teaching we train nobody. You know that with all of our instructing, we educate nobody.” * However, in spite of all that we have said in praise of the principle of restatement, we ought to be warned that in the hands of an inexpert speaker, it may prove to be a dangerous tool. Unless he has a fairly rich phraseology, his restatement may deteriorate into an unadorned and all-too-evident repetition. That is deadly. If the audience catches you at that, they will begin twisting in their seats, looking at their watches. 400 PUBLIC SPEAKING GENERAL ILLUSTRATIONS AND SPECIFIC INSTANCES <3 There is little danger, however, of boring peo- ple when you employ general illustrations and spe- cific instances. Interesting, easy to pay attention to,, they are extremely valuable when the purpose of your talk is to impress and convince. They help to keep contradictory ideas from rising. For example, Dr. Newell Dwight Hillis, in one of his addresses, declared that “disobedience is slavery; obedience is liberty.” He felt that such a statement, unless it was illustrated, would not be either clear or impressive; so he continued: “Dis- obedience to the law T of fire or water or acid is death. Obedience to the law of color gives the artist his skill; obedience to the law of eloquence gives the orator his force; obedience to the law of iron gives the inventor his tools.” Those illustrations help ; they impress, don’t they? Could we have given still more life and vitality to his statement by citing concrete cases ? Let us see. “Obedience to the law of color gave Leonardo da Vinci his Last Supper; obedience to the law of elo- quence gave Henry Ward Beecher his Liverpool address; obedience to the law of iron gave Mc- Cormick his reaper.” Isn’t that better? People like to have a speaker give names and dates — something they can examine for themselves if they wish. That kind of procedure is frank, hon- est. It wins confidence. It impresses. For example, suppose I say, “Many wealthy men TO BE IMPRESSIVE AND CONVINCING 401 lead very simple lives.*’ I have not been impressive. The statement is too vague, isn’t it? It does not leap off' •> the page and strike you between the eyes. It will soon drop out of your mind. It is neither clear nor interesting nor convincing. Memories of newspaper reports to the contrary will probably arise to cast doubt upon the assertion. If I believe that many rich men lead simple lives, how did I reach that conclusion? Through observing several concrete cases; so the best way to make you believe as I do, is to exhibit those spe- cific instances to you. If I can show you what I have seen, you may arrive at the same conclusion that I have arrived at; and you will probably do it without any urging on my part. A conclusion that I let you discover for yourself from concrete cases and evidence that I supply, will have twice, three, five times the force of a ready made conclusion that I might hand you on a platter. To illustrate: John D. Rockefeller, Sr., had a leather couch in his office at 26 Broadway, and took a midday nap each day. The late J. Ogden Armour used to retire at nine o’clock, and get up at six. George F. Baker, who controlled at one time more corporations than any other man, never tasted a cocktail. He began to smoke only a few years before his death. The late John H. Patterson, President of the National Cash Register Company, neither smoked nor drank. Frank Vanderlip, at one time the president of the 402 PUBLIC SPEAKING largest bank in America, eats only two meals a day. Milk and old fashioned ginger wafers constituted Hamman’s midday meal. Jacob H. Schiff used to lunch on a glass of milk. Andrew Carnegie’s favorite dish was oatmeal and cream. Cyrus H. Curtis, owner of the Saturday Evening Post and the Ladies Home Journal } loves no food better than baked beans. What is the effect of these specific instances on your mind? Do they dramatize the statement that rich men often lead simple lives? Do they im- press you with the truth of it? As you listen to them, isn’t it very unlikely that contradictory ideas will arise in your mind? THE PRINCIPLE OF CUMULATION Do not expect a hurried reference to one or pos- sibly two specific instances to have the desired effect. “There must be,” says Professor Phillips in Effec- tive Speaking ; “a succession of impressions all em- phasizing the first. Over and over again must the mind have its attention riveted upon the thought; experience upon experience must be piled up until the very weight imbeds the thought deep in the tissues of the brain. Then it becomes a part of him and neither time nor events can rub it out. And the working principle that does this is Cumulation.” Note how this principle of cumulation was used in marshalling an array of specific instances on page TO BE IMPRESSIVE AND CONVINCING 403 401 to prove that rich men often lead simple lives. Note how it was employed on pages 68 and 69 to prove that Philadelphia is “the greatest workshop of the world.” Note how Senator Thurston em- ployed it in the following paragraph to prove that humanity has been able to right the w r rongs of in- justice and oppression only by force. What would have been the result had two-thirds of these specific references been omitted? “When has a battle for humanity and liberty ever been won except by force? What barricade of wrong, injustice, and oppression has ever been carried except by force? “Force compelled the signature of unwilling royalty to the great Magna Charta; force put life into the Declaration of Independence and made effective the Emancipation Proclamation; force beat with naked hands upon the iron gateway of the Bastile and made reprisal in one awful hour for centuries of kingly crime ; force waved the flag of revo- lution over Bunker Hill and marked the snows of Valley Forge with blood-stained feet; force held the broken line of Shiloh, climbed the flame-swept hill at Chattanooga, and stormed the clouds on Lookout Heights; force marched with Sherman to the sea, rode with Sheridan in the valley of the Shenandoah, and gave Grant victory at Appomattox; force saved the,-, Union, kept the stars in the flag, made ‘niggers’ men.” GRAPHIC COMPARISONS Many years ago, a student of this course at the Brooklyn Central Y. M. C. A., told in a speech the number of houses that had been destroyed by fire during the previous year. He further said that, if these burned buildings had been placed side by side, the line would have reached from New York to 404 PUBLIC SPEAKING Chicago, and that if the people who had been killed In those fires had been placed half a mile apart, that gruesome line would reach back again from Chicago to Brooklyn. The figures he gave I forgot almost Immediately; but ten years have passed, and, without any effort on my part, I can still see that line of burning build- ings stretching from Manhattan Island to Cook County, Illinois. Why is that so? Because ear impressions are hard to retain. They roll away like sleet striking the smooth bark of a beech tree. But eye impres- sions? I saw, a few years ago, a cannon ball im- bedded in an old house standing on the banks of Danube — a cannon ball that Napoleon’s artillery had fired at the battle of Ulm. Visual impressions are like that cannon ball : they come with a terrific impact. They imbed themselves. They stick. They tend to drive out all opposing suggestions as Bona- parte drove away the Austrians. The power of William Paley’s reply to the atheist was due in no small degree to the fact that it was visual. Burke used this technique when, in denounc- ing the taxation of the American colonies, he de- clared with prophetic vision: u We are shearing, not a sheep, but a wolf.” CALL IN AUTHORITY TO BACK YOU UP As a boy in the middle west, I used to amuse myself by holding a stick across a gateway that the sheep had to pass through. After the first few sheep had jumped over the stick, I took it away; TO BE IMPRESSIVE AND CONVINCING 405 but all the other sheep leaped through the gate- way over an imaginary barrier. The only reason for their jumping was that those in front had jumped. The sheep is not the only animal with that tendency. Almost all of us are prone to do what others are doing, to believe what others are believing, to accept, without question, the testimony of prominent men. The student in the New York Chapter of the American Institute of Banking who began his talk on thrift in this manner had a distinct advantage: “James J. Hill said: ‘If you want to know whether you are going to succeed, the test is easy. Are you able to save money? If not, drop out. You will surely lose. You may not think it, but you will lose as sure as you live.’ ” That was the next best thing to having James J. Hill himself there. His words impressed. Their influence tended to prevent opposing ideas from arising. However, in quoting authorities, bear these four points in mind. i. j B e Definite. Which of these statements is the more impressive and convincing? (a) Statistics show that Seattle is the healthiest city in the world. (b) “According to the official federal mortality statistics, Seattle’s annual death rate for the last fifteen years has been 9.78 per thousand; Chicago’s, 14.65; New York’s, 15.83; New Orleans’, 21.02.” Beware of beginning “statistics show . . What statistics? Who gathered them and why? 406 PUBLIC SPEAKING Be careful ! “Figures won’t lie, but liars will figure. 5 ’ The usual phrase — “many authorities declare” — is ridiculously vague. Who are the authorities? Name one or two. If you do not know who they are, how can you be sure of what they said? Be definite. It wins confidence. It demonstrates to the audience that you know whereof you speak. Even Theodore Roosevelt thought he could not af- ford to be vague. In an address at Louisville, Kentucky, during the administration of Woodrow Wilson, he said: “Mr. Wilson’s promises before election, both those made in his own speeches and those made in the platform, have been so well nigh invariably broken that the breaking of them has become a subject for jest even among his own friends. One of Mr. Wilson’s prominent Democratic sup- porters in Congress stated with refreshing frankness the exact truth about Mr. Wilson’s pre-election promises and those made on his behalf when, in answer to some charge of inconsistency, he responded by saying that £ our platform was made to get into office on — and we have won.’ You will find this remark on page 4618 of the Congressional Record, the third session of the Sixty-second Congress " 2. Quote a Popular Man . Our likes and dislikes have more to do with our beliefs than most of us would care to admit. I once saw Samuel Untermyer hissed while he was engaged in a socialistic debate at Carnegie Hall, New York. What he said was polite enough, and, it seemed to me, in all truth, harmless enough, quiet enough. But most of the audience were socialists. They despised him. They would almost have been TO BE IMPRESSIVE AND CONVINCING 407 inclined to question the veracity of the multiplica- tion table had he but quoted it. On the other hand, the James J. Hill quotation referred to previously was especially appropriate before a chapter of the American Institute of Bank- ing, for the bewhiskered railroad builder stood well with the banking fraternity. 3. Quote Local Authorities. If you are speaking in Detroit, quote a Detroit man. Your hearers can look him up, can investi- gate the matter. They will be more impressed with his testimony than with the words of some un- known individual away off in Spokane or San Antonio. 4. Quote Someone Qualified to Speak. Ask yourself such questions as these: Is this per- son generally recognized as an authority on this sub- ject? Why? Is he a prejudiced witness? Has he any selfish ends to serve? The student at the Brooklyn Chamber of Com- merce who opened his talk on Specialization with the following" quotation from Andrew Carnegie chose wisely. Why? Because the business men in his audience had an abiding respect for the great steel magnate. Besides, Mr. Carnegie was being quoted on business success, a subject on which a lifetime of experience and observation had quali- fied him to speak. “I believe the true road to- pre-eminent success in any line is to make yourself master in that line. I have no faith in the policy of scattering one’s resources, and in my ex- 408 PUBLIC SPEAKING perience I have rarely if ever met a man who achieved pre- eminence in money-making — certainly never one in manu- facturing — who was interested in many concerns. ,The men who have succeeded are the men who have chosen one line and stuck to it.” SUMMARY a Every idea, concept or conclusion which enters the mind is held as true unless hindered by some contradictory idea.” Our problem then, when the purpose of our talk is impressiveness and conviction, is twofold: first, to set forth our own ideas; second, to prevent opposing ideas from arising to render them null and void. Here are eight suggestions that will aid in achieving that consummation : 1. Convince yourself before you attempt to com vince others. Speak with contagious enthusiasm. 2. Show how the thing you want people to accept is very similar to something they already believe. (Illustrations : Paley and the atheist, Saint Paul in Athens, Old Hampshire Bond.) 3. Restate your ideas. (Illustrations: Hiram Johnson, U I am going to be the next governor of California . . Woodrow Wilson, “We edu- cate nobody. . . .”) When restating figures, illustrate them. For ex- ample, Great Britain spent thirty-four billion dollars during the world war — a sum equal to thirty-four dollars for every minute that has passed night and day since Christ was born. 4. Use general illustrations. (Illustration: Di\ Hillis, “Obedience to the law of color gives the artist his skill. . . .” ) TO BE IMPRESSIVE AND CONVINCING 409 5. Use specific Instances, cite concrete cases. (Illustrations: “Many wealthy men lead very simple Fives. . . . Frank Vanderlip eats only two meals a day. . . . etc.) 6. Use the principle of cumulation. “Experi- ence upon experience must be piled up until the very weight imbeds the thought deep in the tissues of the brain.” (Illustrations: “Force compelled the signature of unwilling royalty to the great Magna Charta. . . and so on.) 7. Use graphic comparisons. Ear Impressions are easily obliterated. Visual impressions stick like an imbedded cannon ball. (Illustration: The line of burning buildings stretching from Brooklyn tc Chicago.) 8. Back up your statements with unprejudiced au- thority. Be definite as Roosevelt was in his quota* tion. Quote a popular man. Quote a local man Quote someone qualified to speak. SPEECH BUILDING WORDS OFTEN MISPRONOUNCED The words ath-lete and al-ien have two — nof three — syllables. These words have three — not two syllables : ac-cu-rate fed-er-al bar-ri-er fo-li-age bev-er-age gal-ler-y bois-ter-ous gen-er-al boun-da-ry gen-tle-men bur-i-al gro-cer-y eas-u-al his-tor-y Cath-o-lic i-vo-ry cel-er-y jo-vi-al ce-re-al la-bor-er Ches-a-peake Laz-a-rus choc-o-late li-bra-ry ' dex-ter-ous lit-er-al di-a-mond me-di-um em-per-or fam-i-ly mem-o-ry ERRORS IN ENGLISH As Chapter XII contained a thorough review, this chapter will start right off with some new ex- amples of English as it should be spoken. 410 TO BE IMPRESSIVE AND CONVINCING 411 Rule: When two or more pronouns are united by “and” and governed by the same preposition or verb, they must both be in the same case. Many a speaker blunders here. You will note that the same matter is discussed as was taken up in Chap- ter XI, where the rule stated that, when a pronoun is a direct object of a verb, it is always in the objective case. Here we have added examples where pronouns are objects of prepositions. Ex- amples: Right: Between you and me. Wrong: Between you and /. (It is the I coming after the “and” that causes the trouble. Few would be guilty of between I and you, or between I and he.) Right: There was not much said about you and me. Wrong: There was not much said about you and /. Right: Let you and me. . . . Wrong: Let you and 1. . . . Right: Every member was present except you and me. Wrong: Every member was present except you and I. [ Right: He said he would wait for you and me. Wrong: He said he would wait for you and I. Right: The letters were mailed by the secretary and me. Wrong: The letters w T ere mailed by the secretary and I . Right : The bank was started by him and his wife. Wrong: The bank was started by he and his wife c 412 PUBLIC SPEAKING Right: The civil service jobs were won by her and her sister. Wrong: The civil service jobs were wot? by she and her sister. Right: It was too late for him and me to be out. Wrong: It was too late for him and I to be out. Right: The loan was made by her and him . Wrong: The loan was made by she and he. Right: The house was built for them and me. Wrong: The house was built for them and I. Right: The sales were put on by him and them . Wrong: The sales were put on by him and they. Right: The statements w^ere made to her and them . Wrong: The statements were made to she and they. Right: Life has been happy for them, him and me. Wrong: Life has been happy for them, he and L Right: Business between her and me was done through them. Wrong: Business between she and I w 7 as done through them. Right: The manufacturing was done by them and ns. Wrong: The manufacturing was done by them and we. Right: The dividends were issued to them, him and us. Wrong: The dividends were issued to them, he and we. You and me must never be used as the subject of a sentence. For example: TO BE IMPRESSIVE AND CONVINCING 413 Right : You and I ought to go right now. Wrong: You and me ought to go right now. Right: Were you and I invited? Wrong: Were you and me invited? CORRECT USAGE OF WORDS Reticent — Reserved — Taciturn. The re- ticent man keeps his own counsel; the reserved man usually is cold and restrained in addition to being reticent; the taciturn man is habitually uncommunica- tive. Select — Choose — Prefer. (Wrong) “He has no preference, so he selected the first one he put his hands on.” Select suggests a careful choice. Pref- erence implies a desire. Out of regard for his wife, a man may choose (not select) the seashore for his vacation, when he himself prefers a fortnight in the Canadian woods. Social — Sociable. (Wrong) “He is a social man.” Social refers to society; as, social inter- course, social questions. Sociable means companion- able; as, he is a sociable man. Transpire — Happen. Happen means occur; transpire means become known. A mine disaster might not transpire until hours after it had hap- pened. Unique — Rare. Unique means the only one of its kind. Rare signifies infrequent. Enduring speeches are rare . Lincoln’s Gettysburg address is unique . 414 PUBLIC SPEAKING VOICE EXERCISE— NASAL RESONANCE Theodore Roosevelt, during his first political cam- paign, found his voice giving out on him very soon after he started on a strenuous speaking tour. He secured a vocal instructor to travel with him on the train; and between stations Roosevelt was practis- ing “ding-dong, sing-song, hong-kong,” accentuating the ng sound, making it ring through his nose to develop nasal resonance. Nasal resonance gives both brightness and carrying power; and is highly desirable when one is speaking at a distance. Practise the exercise that Roosevelt used. Then read aloud, not once, but once a day, the following verse from Poe’s The Bells. I am asking you to read these for the following reasons. 1. Practise it for nasal resonance. Let the sound of bells, bells, bells ring through the cavern of your nose, and, in fact, through all the irregular cavities of your head. As we have pointed out in previous chapters, breathe in deeply and then try to feel while you are reading and using breath that same open feeling in the head that you experienced when inhaling. 2. Read this also as an exercise for develop- ing strength and agility in the tip of your tongue. The l sounds, so frequent in these verses, are almost ideal for that purpose. To refresh your mind on this exercise, turn to the voice exercise in Chapter VI. 3. Read these verses as a means of developing the bright, happy overtones of your voice. (See Voice Exercise, Chapter VII.) TO BE IMPRESSIVE AND CONVINCING 415 4. Read the first verse aloud in a falsetto pitch* (See Chapter VII.) “Hear the sledges with the bells — Silver bells — What a world of merriment their melody foretells! How they tinkle, tinkle, tinkle, In the icy air of night! While the stars that oversprinkle All the heavens seem to twinkle With a crystalline delight ; Keeping time, time, In a sort of Runic rhyme To the tintinnabulation that so musically wells From the bells, bells, bells, bells, Bells, bells, bells, — From the jingling and the tinkling of the bells. Hear the mellow wedding-bells — Golden bells! What a world of happiness their harmony foretells? Through the balmy air of night How they ring out their delight! From the molten-golden notes, And all in tune, What a liquid ditty floats To the tuj:tle-dove that listens while she gloats On the moon! Oh, from out the sounding cells, What a world of happiness their harmony foretells! How it swells! How it dwells. On the Future! How it tells Of the rapture that impels To the swinging and the ringing Of the bells, bells, bells, Of the bells, bells, bells, bells, Bells, bells, bells — To the rhyming and the chiming of the bells!” CHAPTER XIV HOW TO INTEREST YOUR AUDIENCE “There is in all communication — written or spoken — a certain dead line of interest. If we can cross that dead line , we have the world with us — temporarily at least. If we cannot cross itj we may as well retire . The world will have none of us T — H. A. Overstreet, in Influencing Human Behavior. “Always have something to say. The man who has something to say, and who is knozvn never to speak unless he has, is sure to be listened to. Always know before what you mean to say. If your own mind is muddled, much more will the minds of your hearers be confused. Always arrange your thoughts in some sort of order. No matter how brief they are to be, they will be better for having a beginning, a middle, and an end. At all hazards, be clear . Make your meaning , whatever it is, plain to your audience . hi controversial speaking, aim to anticipate your adversary's argument . Reply to his jests seriously and to his earnest- ness by jest. Always reflect before hand upon the kind of audience you are likely to have. , „ . Never, if you can help it, be dull." — Lord Bryce . CHAPTER XIV HOW TO INTEREST YOUR AUDIENCE If you were invited to dine at the home of a rich man in certain sections of China, it would be proper to toss chicken bones and olive seeds over your shoulder onto the floor. You pay your host a compli- ment when you do that. You show that you realize that he is wealthy, that he has plenty of servants to tidy up after the meal. And he likes it. You can be reckless with the remains of your sumptuous meal in a rich man’s home; but in some parts of China the poorer people must save even the water they bathe in. To heat water costs so much that they must buy it at a hot water shop. After they have bathed in it, they can take it back and sell it second hand to the shopkeeper from whom they purchased it. 'When the second customer has soiled it, the water still retains a market value, although the price has softened a bit. Have you found these facts about Chinese life interesting? If so, do you know why? Because those are very unusual aspects of very usual things. They are strange truths about such commonplace events as dining out and bathing. That is what interests us — something new about the old. 4-IQ 420 PUBLIC SPEAKIN& Let us take another illustration. This page you are reading now, this sheet of paper you are look- ing at — it is very ordinary, isn’t it? You have seen countless thousands of such pages. It seems dull and insipid now; but if I tell you a strange fact about it, you are almost sure to be interested. Let us see ! This page seems like solid matter as you look at it now. But, in reality, it is more like a cobweb than solid matter. The physicist knows it is composed of atoms. And how small is an atom? We learned in Chapter XII that there are as many atoms in one drop of water as there are drops of water in the Mediterranean sea, that there are as many atoms in one drop of water as there are blades of grass in all the world. And the atoms that make this paper are composed of what? Still smaller things called electrons and protons. These electrons are all rotating around the central proton of the atom, as far from it, relatively speaking, as the moon is from the earth. And they are swinging through their orbits, these electrons of this tiny universe, at the inconceivable speed of approxi mately ten thousand miles a second. So the elec trons that compose this sheet of papef you are hold- ing, have moved, since you began reading this very sentence, a distance equal to that which stretcher between New York and Tokio. . . . And only two minutes ago you may have thought this piece of paper was still and dull and dead; but, in reality, it is one of God’s mysteries. It is a veritable cyclone of energy. If you are interested in it now, it is because you have learned a new and strange fact about it. There pi INTERESTING YOUR AUDIENCE 42! lies one of the secrets of interesting people. That is a significant truth, one that we ought to profit by in our every day intercourse. The entirely new is not interesting; the entirely old has no attractive- ness for us. We want to be told something new about the old. You cannot, for example, interest an Illinois farmer with a description of the Cathe- dral at Bourges, or the Mona Lisa. They are too new to him. There is no tie-up to his old interests. But you can interest him by relating the fact that farmers in Holland till land below the level of the sea and dig ditches to act as fences and build bridges to serve as gates. Your Illinois farmer will listen open-mouthed while you tell him that Dutch farmers keep the cows, during the winter, under the same roof that houses the family, and sometimes the cows look out through lace curtains at driving snows. He knows about cows and fences — new slants, you see, on old things. “Lace curtains! For a cow!” he’ll exclaim. “I’ll be doggoned!” And he will retail that story to his friends. Here is a talk delivered by a New York City student of this course. As you read it, see if it interests you. * If it does, do you know why? HOW SULPHURIC ACID AFFECTS YOU “Most liquids are measured by the pint, quart, gallon or barrel. We ordinarily speak of quarts of wine, gallons of milk, and barrels of molasses. When a new oil gusher is discovered, we speak of its output as so many barrels per day. There is one liquid, however, that is manufactured and consumed in such large quantities that the unit of measurement employed is the ton. This liquid is sulphuric acid. 422 PUBLIC SPEAKING “It touches you in your daily life in a score of ways. If it were not for sulphuric acid, your car would stop, and you would go back to “old Dobbin” and ths buggy, for it is used extensively in the refining of kerosene and gasoline. The electric lights that illuminate your office, that shine upon your dinner table, that show you the way to bed at night, would not be possible without it. “When you get up in the morning and turn on the water for your bath, you use a nickel-plated faucet, which requires sulphuric acid in its manufacture. It was required also in the finishing of your enameled tub. The soap you use has possibly been made from greases or oils that have been treated with the acid. . . . Your towel has made its ac- quaintance before you made the acquaintance of your towel. The bristles in your hair-brush have required it, and your celluloid comb could not have been produced with- out it. Your razor, no doubt, has been pickled in it after annealing. “You put on your underwear; you button up your outer garments. The bleacher, the manufacturer of dyes and the dyer himself used it. The button-maker possibly found the acid necessary to complete your buttons. The tanner used sulphuric acid in making the leather for your shoes, and it serves us again when we wish to polish them. “You come down to breakfast. The cup and saucer, if they be other than plain white, could not have come into being without it. It is used to produce the gilt and other ornamental colorings. Your spoon, 'knife and fork have seen a bath of sulphuric acid, if they be silver-plated. “The wheat of which your bread or rolls are made has possibly been grown by the use of a phosphate fertilizer, whose manufacture rests upon this acid. If you have buck- wheat cakes and syrup, your syrup needed it. . . . “And so on through the whole day, its work affects you at every turn. Go where you will, you cannot escape its influence. We can neither go to war without it nor live in peace without it. So it hardly seems possible that this acid, so essential to mankind, should be totally unfamiliar to the average man. . . . But such is the case.” INTERESTING YOUR AUDIENCE 423 THE THREE MOST INTERESTING THINGS IN THE WORLD What would you say they are — the three most in- teresting subjects in the world? Sex, property and religion. By the first we can create life, by the second we maintain it, by the third we hope to con- tinue it in the world to come. But it is our sex, our property, our religion that interests us. Our interests swarm about our own egos. We are not interested in a talk on How to Make Wills in Peru ; but we may be interested in a talk entitled : How to Make Our Wills. We are not interested — except, perhaps, out of curiosity — in the religion of the Hindoo; but we are vitally inter- ested in a religion that insures us unending happiness in the world to come. When the late Lord Northcliffe was asked what interests people, he answered with one word- — and that word was “themselves.” Northcliffe ought to have known for he was the wealthiest newspaper owner in Great Britain. Do you want to know what kind of person you are? Ah, now we are on an interesting topic. We are talking about you. Here is a way for you to hold the mirror up to your real self, and see you as you really are. Watch your reveries. What do we mean by reveries? Let Professor James Harvey Robinson answer. We are quoting from The Mind in the Making: “We all appear to ourselves to be thinking all the time during our waking hours, and most of us are aware that 424 PUBLIC SPEAKING we go on thinking while we are asleep, even more foolishly than when awake. When uninterrupted by some practical Issue we are engaged in what is now known as a* reverie . This is our spontaneous and favorite kind of thinking. We allow our ideas to take their own course and this course is determined by our hopes and fears, our spontaneous de- sires, their fulfillment or frustration; by our likes and dis- likes, our loves and hates and resentments. There is nothing else anything like so interesting to ourselves as ourselves . All thought that is not more or less laboriously controlled and directed will inevitably circle about the beloved Ego. It is amusing and pathetic to observe this tendency in ourselves and in others. We learn politely and generously to overlook this truth, but if we dare to think of it, it blazes forth like the noontide sun. “Our reveries form the chief index of our fundamental character. They are a reflection of our nature as modified by often hidden and forgotten experiences. . . „ The reverie doubtless influences all our speculations in its persistent tendency to self-magnification and self-justification, which are its chief preoccupations.’ V So remember that the people you are to talk to spend most of their time when they are not con- cerned with the problems of business, in thinking about and justifying and glorifying themselves. Re- member that the average man will be more con- cerned about the cook leaving than about Italy pay- ing her debts to the United States. He will be more wrought up over a dull razor blade than over a revolution in South America. His own toothache will distress him more than an earthquake in Asia destroying half a million lives. He would rather listen to you say some nice thing about him than hear you discuss the ten greatest men in history. INTERESTING YOUR AUDIENCE 425 HOW TO BE A GOOD CONVERSA- TIONALIST The reason so many people are poor conversa- tionalist's is because they talk about only the things that interest them. That may be deadly boring to others. Reverse the process. Lead the other per- son into talking about his interests, his business, his golf score, his success — or, if it is a mother, her children. Do that and listen intently and you will give pleasure ; consequently you will be considered a good conversationalist — even though you have done very little of the talking. Mr. Harold Dwight of Philadelphia recently made an extraordinarily successful speech at a banquet which marked the final session of a pub- lic speaking course. He talked about each man in turn around the entire table, told how he had talked when the course started, how he had improved; recalled the talks various members had made, the subjects they had discussed; he mimicked some of them, exaggerated their peculiarities, had everyone laughing, had everyone pleased. With such mate- rial, he could not possibly have failed. It was absolutely ideal. No other topic under the blue dome of Heaven would have so interested that group. Mr. Dwight knew how to handle human nature. AN IDEA THAT WON TWO MILLION READERS A few years ago, the American Magazine en- joyed an amazing growth. Its sudden leap in cir- 426 PUBLIC SPEAKING culation became one of the sensations of the pub- lishing world. The secret? The secret was the late John M. Siddall and his ideas. When I first met Siddall he had charge of the Interesting People De- partment of that periodical. I had written a few articles for him; and one day he sat down and talked to me for a long time: “People are selfish,” he said. “They are inter- ested chiefly in themselves. They are not very much concerned about whether the government should own the railroads; but they do want to know how to get ahead, how to draw more salary, how to keep healthy. If I were editor of this magazine,” he went on, “I would tell them how to take care of their teeth, how to take baths, how to keep cool in summer, how to get a position, how to handle employees, how to buy homes, how to remember, how to avoid grammatical errors, and so on. Peo- ple are always interested in human stories, so I would have some rich man tell how he made a million in real estate. I would get prominent bank- ers and presidents of various corporations to tell the stories of how they battled their ways up from the ranks to power and wealth.” Shortly after that, Siddall was made editor. The magazine then had a small circulation, was com- paratively a failure. Siddall did just what he said he would do. The response? It was overwhelm- ing. The circulation figures climbed up to two hun- dred thousand, three, four, half a million. . . . Here was something the public wanted. Soon a million people a month were buying it, then a mil- lion and a half, finally two millions. It did not stop INTERESTING YOUR AUDIENCE 427 there, but continued to grow for many years. Sid- dall appealed to the selfish interests of his readers. HOW DR. CONWELL INTERESTED MILLIONS OF HEARERS What was the secret of the world’s most popular lecture, “Acres of Diamonds”? Just the thing we have been talking about. John M. Siddall discussed this lecture in the conversation I have just referred to ; and I think that its enormous success had some- thing to do with determining the policy of his magazine. Turn to it again, please, in the Appendix. It tells people how they can get ahead, how they can make more out of themselves in their present environment. It was never a static lecture. Dr. Conwell made it personal to each town where he spoke. That was of immense importance. The local references made it appear fresh and new. They made that town, that audience, seem important. Here is his own story of how he did it : “I visit a town or city, and try to arrive there early enough to see the postmaster, the barber, the keeper of the hotel, the principal of the schools, and the ministers of some of the churches, and then go into some of the factories and stores, and talk with the people, and get into sympathy with the local conditions of that town or city and see what has been their history, what opportunities they had and what they had failed to do — and every town fails to do something — and then go to the lecture and talk to those people about the subjects which apply to their locality. Acres of Dia- monds — the idea — has continuously been precisely the same. 428 PUBLIC SPEAKING The idea is that in this country of ours, every man has the opportunity to make more of himself than he does in his own environment, with his own skill, with his own energy, and with his own friends.” THE KIND OF SPEECH MATERIAL THAT ALWAYS HOLDS ATTENTION You may possibly bore people if you talk about things and ideas, but you can hardly fail to hold their attention when you talk about people. To- morrow there will be millions of conversations float- ing over fences in the backyards of America, over tea tables and dinner tables — and what will be the predominating note in most of them? Personalities. He said this. Mrs. So-and-so did that. I saw her doing this, that and the other. He is making a “killing,” and so on. I have addressed many gatherings of school chil- dren in the United States and Canada; and I soon learned by experience that in order to keep them interested I had to tell them stories about people. As soon as I became general and dealt with ab- stract ideas, Johnny became restless and wiggled in his seat, Tommy made a face at someone, Billy threw something across the aisle. True, these were audiences of children; but the intelligence tests used in the army during the war revealed the startling fact that 49% of the peo- ple in the United States have a mental age of about 13. So one can hardly go w r rong in making a gen- erous use of human interest stories. Our magazines that are read by millions, periodicals such as the- INTERESTING YOUR AUDIENCE 429 American , Cosmopolitan , Saturday Evening Post f are filled with them. I once asked a group of American business men in Paris to talk on How to Succeed . Most of them praised the homely virtues, preached at, lectured to, and bored their hearers. (Incidentally, I recently heard one of the most prominent business men in America make this identical mistake in a radio talk on this identical topic.) So I halted this class, and said something like this : “We don’t want to be lectured to. No one enjoys that. Remember you must be entertaining or we will pay no attention whatever to what you are saying. Also remember that one of the most in- teresting things in the world is sublimated, glorified gossip. So tell us the stories of two men you have known. Tell why one succeeded and why the other failed. We will gladly listen to that, remember it and possibly profit by it. It will also, by the way, be far easier for you to deliver than are these wordy, abstract preachments.” There was a certain member of that course who invariably found it difficult to interest either himself or his audience. This night, however, he seized the human story suggestion; and told us of two of his classmates in college. One of them had been so conservative that he had bought shirts at the differ- ent stores in town, and made charts showing which ones laundered best, wore longest and gave the most service per dollar invested. His mind was always on pennies ; yet, when he was graduated — it was an engineering college — he had such a high opinion of his own importance that he was not willing to 430 PUBLIC SPEAKING begin at the bottom and work his way up, as the other graduates were doing. Even when the third annual reunion of the class came, he was still mak- ing laundry charts of his shirts, while waiting for some extraordinarily good thing to come his way. It never came. A quarter of a century has passed since then, and this man, dissatisfied and soured on life, still holds a minor position. The speaker then contrasted with this failure the story of one of his classmates who had surpassed all expectations. This particular chap was a good mixer. Everyone liked him. Although he was ambitious to do big things later, he started as a draughtsman. But he was always on the lookout for opportunity. Plans were then being made for the Pan-American exposition in Buffalo. He knew engineering talent would be needed there; so he resigned from his position in Philadelphia and moved to Buffalo. Through his agreeable personal- ity, he soon won the friendship of a Buffalo man with considerable political influence. The two formed a partnership, and engaged immediately in the contracting business. They did considerable work for the telephone company, and -this man was finally taken over by that concern at a large salary. To-day he is a multimillionaire, one of the prin- cipal owners of Western Union. We have recorded here only the bare outline of what the speaker told. He made his talk interest- ing and illuminating with a score of amusing and human details. . . . He talked on and on — this man w r ho could not ordinarily find material for a three minute speech— and he was surprised beyond INTERESTING YOUR AUDIENCE 431 words to learn when he stopped that he had held the floor on this occasion for half an hour. The speech had been so interesting that it seemed short to everyone. It was this student’s first real triumph. Almost every student can profit by this incident. The average speech would be far more appealing if it were rich and replete with human interest stories. The speaker ought to attempt to make only a few points and to illustrate them with concrete cases. Such a method of speech building can hardly fail to get and hold attention. If possible, these stories ought to tell of struggles, of things fought for and victories won. All of us are tremendously interested In fights and combats. There is an old saying that all the world loves a lover. It doesn’t. What all the world loves is a scrap. It wants to see tw T o lovers struggling for the hand of one woman. As an illustration of this fact, read almost any novel, magazine story, or go to see almost any film drama. When all the obstacles are removed and the reputed hero takes the so-called heroine in his arms, the audience be- gins reaching for their hats and coats. Five minutes later c the sweeping women are gossiping over their broom handles. Almost all magazine fiction is based on this for- mula. Make the reader like the hero or heroine. Make him or her long for something intensely. Make that something seem impossible to get. Show how the hero or heroine fights and gets it. The story of how a man battled In business or profession against discouraging odds, and won, is always inspiring, always interesting. A magazine 432 PUBLIC SPEAKING editor once told me that the real, inside story of any person’s life is entertaining. If one has struggled and fought — and who hasn’t? — bis story, if correctly told, will appeal. There can be no doubt of that. BE CONCRETE The wuriter once had in the same course in pub- lic speaking, a Doctor of Philosophy and a rough- and-ready fellow who had spent his youth thirty years ago in the British Navy. The polished scholar was a university professor; his classmate from the seven seas was the proprietor of % small side street moving-van establishment. Strange to say, the moving-van man’s talks during the course would have held a popular audience far better than the talks of the college professor. Why? The col- lege man spoke in beautiful English, with a de- meanor of culture and refinement, and with logic and clearness; but his talks lacked one essential, concreteness. They w^ere too vague, too general. On the other hand, the van owner possessed hardly enough power of cerebration to generalize. When he talked he got right down to business immedi- ately. He was definite ; he was concrete. That qual- ity, coupled with his virility and his fresh phrase- ology, made his talks very entertaining. I have cited this instance, not because it is typical either of college men or moving-van proprietors, but because it illustrates the interest-getting power that accrues to the man — regardless of education — - who has the happy habit of being concrete and def- inite in his speaking. INTERESTING YOUR AUDIENCE 433 This principle is so important that we are going to use several illustrations to try to lodge it firmly in youi* mind. We hope you will never forget it, never neglect it. Is it, for example, more interesting to state that Martin Luther, as a boy, was “stubborn and intract- able,” or is it better to say that he confessed that his teachers had flogged him as often as “fifteen times in a forenoon”? Words like “stubborn and intractable” have very little attention value. But isn’t it easy to listen to the flogging count? The old method of writing a biography was to deal in a lot of generalities which Aristotle called, and rightly called, “The refuge of weak minds.” The new method is to deal with concrete facts that speak for themselves. The old fashioned biog- rapher said that John Doe was born of “poor but honest parents.” The new method would say that John Doe’s father couldn’t afford a pair of over- shoes, so when the snow came, he had to tie gunny sacking around his shoes to keep his feet dry and warm; but, In spite of his poverty, he never watered the milk and lie never traded a horse wfith the heaves as a sound animal. That shows that his parents were “poor but honest,” doesn’t It? And doesn’t it do it in a way that Is far more interesting than the “poor but honest” method? If this method works for modern biographers It will work also for modern speakers. Let us take one more Illustration. Suppose you wished to state that the potential, horse power wasted at Niagara every day was appalling. Sup* 434 PUBLIC SPEAKING pose you said just that, and then added, that if it were utilized and the resulting profits turned to purchasing the necessities of life, crowds could be clothed and fed. Would that be the way to make it interesting and entertaining? No — No. Isn’t this far better? We are quoting from Edwin E. Slosson in the Daily Science News Bulletin: “We are told that there are some millions of people in poverty and poorly nourished in this country, yet here at Niagara is wasted the equivalent of 250,000 loaves of bread an hour. We may see with our mind's eye 600,000 nice fresh eggs dropping over the precipice every hour and mat ing a gigantic omelet in the whirlpool. If calico were con- tinuously pouring from the looms in a stream 4,000 feet wide like Niagara River, it would represent the same des- truction of property. If a Carnegie Library were held under the spout it would be filled with good books in an hour or two. Or we can imagine a big department store floating down from Lake Erie every day and smashing its varied contents on the rocks 160 feet below. That would be an exceedingly interesting and diverting spectacle, quite as at- tractive to the crowd as the present, and no more expensive to maintain. Yet some people might object to that on the ground of extravagance who now object to the utilization of the power of the falling water.” c PICTURE-BUILDING WORDS In this process of interest-getting, there is one aid, one technique, that is of the highest impor- tance ; yet it is all but ignored. The average speaker does not seem to be aware of its existence. He has probably never consciously thought about it at all. I refer to the process of using words that create pictures. The speaker who is easy to lis- INTERESTING YOUR AUDIENCE 435 ten to is the one who sets images floating before your eyes. The one who employs foggy, common- place, colorless symbols sets the audience to nodding. Pictures. Pictures. Pictures. They are as free as the air you breathe. Sprinkle them through your talks, your conversation; and you will be more en- tertaining, more influentiaL To illustrate : let us take the excerpt just quoted from the Daily Science News Bulletin regarding Niagara. Look at the picture words. They leap up and go scampering away in every sentence, as thick as rabbits in Australia: “250,000 loaves of bread, 600,000 eggs dropping over the precipice, gigantic omelette in the whirlpool, calico pouring from the looms in a stream 4,000 feet wide, Car- negie library held under the spout, books, a big department store floating, smashing, rocks below, falling water.” It would be almost as difficult to ignore such a talk or article as it would be to pay not the slight- est attention to the scenes from a film unwinding on the silver screen of the motion picture theater. Herbert Spencer, in his famous little essay on the Philosophy of Style , pointed out long ago the su- periority of terms that call forth bright pictures: “We do not think,” says he, “in generals but in particu- lars. ... We should avoid such a sentence as “In proportion as the manners, customs and amusements of a nation are cruel and barbarous, the regulations of their penal code will be severe. “And in place of it, we should write: 436 PUBLIC SPEAKING “In proportion as men delight in battles, bull fights and combats of gladiators, will they punish by hanging, burning and the rack.” . Picture-building phrases swarm through the pages of the Bible and through Shakespeare like bees around a cider mill. For example, a commonplace writer would have said that a certain thing would be superfluous, like trying to improve the perfect. Flow did Shakespeare express the same thought? With a picture phrase that is immortal: “To gild refined gold, to paint the lily, to throw perfume on the violet.” Did you ever pause to observe that the proverbs that are passed on from generation to generation are almost all visual sayings? “A bird in the hand is worth two in the bush.” “It never rains but it pours.” “You can lead a horse to water but you can’t make him drink.” And you will find the same picture element in almost all the similes that have lived for centuries and grown hoary with too much use: “Sly as a fox.” “Dead as a door nail.” “Flat as a pancake.” “Hard as a rpck.” Lincoln continually talked in visual terminology. When he became annoyed with the long, com- plicated, red-tape reports that came to his desk in the White House, he objected to them, not with a colorless phraseology, but with a picture phrase that it is almost impossible to forget. “When I send a man to buy a horse,” said he, “I don’t want to be told how many hairs the horse has in his tail. I wish only to know his points.” INTERESTING YOUR AUDIENCE 437 THE INTEREST GETTING VALUE OF CONTRASTS Listen to the following condemnation of Charles I by Macaulay. Note that Macaulay not only uses pictures, but he also employs balanced sentences. Violent contrasts almost always hold our interests; violent contrasts are the very brick and mortar of this paragraph: “We charge him with having broken his coronation oath ; and we are told that he kept his marriage vow! We accuse him of having given up his people to the merciless inflictions of the most hot-headed of prelates; and the defense is that he took his little son on his knee and kissed him ! W e cen- sure him for having violated the articles of the Petition of Right, after having, for good and valuable consideration, promised to observe them; and we are informed that he was accustomed to hear prayers at six o’clock in the morning! It is to such considerations as these, together with his Van- dyke dress, his handsome face and his peaked beard, that he owes, we verily believe, most of his popularity with the present generation.” INTEREST IS CONTAGIOUS We have bben discussing so far the kind of ma- terial that interests an audience. However, one might mechanically follow all the suggestions made here and speak according to Cocker, and yet be vapid and dull. Catching and holding the interest of people is a delicate thing, a matter of feeling and spirit. It is not like operating a steam engine. No book of precise rules can be given for it. Interest, be it remembered, is contagious. Your hearers are almost sure to catch it if you have a 438 PUBLIC SPEAKING bad case of it yourself. A short time ago, a gentle, man rose during a session of this course in Balth more and warned his audience that if the present methods of catching rock fish in Chesapeake Bay were continued the species would become extinct. And in a very few years ! He felt his subject. It was important. He was in real earnest about it., Everything about his matter and manner showed that. When he arose to speak, I did not know that there was such an animal as a rock fish in Chesapeake Bay. I imagine that most of the audi- ence shared my lack of knowledge and lack of In- terest. But before the speaker finished, all of us had caught something of his concern. All of us would probably have been willing to have signed a petition to the legislature to protect the rock fish by law. I once asked Richard Washburn Child, then American Ambassador to Italy, the secret of his suc- cess as an interesting writer. He replied: “I am so excited about life that I cannot keep still. I just have to tell people about it.” One cannot keep from being enthralled with a speaker or writer like that. I recently went to hear a speaker in London : after he was through, one of our party, Mr. E. F. Ben- son, a well-known English novelist, remarked that he enjoyed the last part of the talk far more than the first. When I asked him why, he replied: “The speaker himself seemed more interested in the last part, and I always rely on the speaker to supply the enthusiasm and interest.” Everyone does. Remember that. INTERESTING YOUR AUDIENCE 439 SUMMARY 1. We are interested in extraordinary facts about ordinary things. 2. Our chief interest is ourselves. 3. The person who leads others to talk about themselves and their interests and listens intently will generally be considered a good conversational- ist, even though he does very little talking. 4. Glorified gossip, stories of people, will almost always win and hold attention. The speaker ought to make only a few points and to illustrate them with human interest stories. 5. Be concrete and definite. Do not belong to the “poor-but-honest” school of speakers. Do not merely say that Martin Luther was “stubborn and intractable” as a boy- Announce that fact. Then follow it with the assertion that his teachers flogged him as often as “fifteen times in a forenoon.” That makes the general assertion clear, impressive and interesting. 6. Sprinkle your talks with phrases that create pictures, with words that set images floating before your eyes. 1 7. If possible use balanced sentences and contrast ing ideas. 8. Interest is contagious. The audience is sure to catch it if the speaker himself has a bad case of it. But it cannot be won by the mechanical ad- herence to mere rules. SPEECH BUILDING WORDS OFTEN MISPRONOUNCED Do not drop the H sound in words like the fol- lowing. In these the W is pronounced as if it were after the H ; as hwy for why. Say: whack not wack wharf not warf wheat not weat wheel not weel when not w T en whether not wether which not w r ich whip not wip whiskey not wiskey white not wdte whittle not wattle whoa not wo ERRORS IN ENGLISH Review . There are three errors in the following paragraph. Can you locate them? “Was this done by you, or who ?” w^as the shout exploded at us as we came through the door. It w^as a question of whether he or myself should take the blame. He don’t feel that the fault was his, and I feel that it was not mine. 440 INTERESTING YOUR AUDIENCE 44J New Study Material . Rule: Words joined to the subject by such expressions as with, together with , aS well as, in addition to, do not pluralize the subject and do not cause the subject to require a plural verb. For example : Right: The task of getting proper machinery, with that of raising capital and of employing ex- perienced hands, was enormous. Wrong: The task of getting proper machinery, ■with that of raising capital and of employing ex- perienced hands, were enormous. Right : The invoice mailed yesterday, in addition to the bills due last month, has been paid. Wrong: The invoice mailed yesterday, in addi- tion to the bills due last month, have been paid. Right: Major Harvey, as well as Colonel Mills, has appraised the property. Wrong: Major Harvey, as well as Colonel Mills, have appraised the property. Right: Our entire factory with all of its con- tents, together with three adjoining storerooms, was burned yesterday. Wrong: Our entire factory with all of its con- tents, together with three adjoining storerooms, were burned yesterday. Rule: Do not use the double negative. Note the examples which follow: Right : I can hardly see. Wrong: I can’t hardly see. Right : I never cause any harm to anyone. Wrong: I never cause no harm to nobody „ Rule: Do not use never to take the place of not. Examples of this are as follows : 442 PUBLIC SPEAKING Right : I did not bring my notebook to take dicta- tion. Wrong : I never brought my notebook to 'cake dic- tation. Rule : In certain sections of the country es- pecially, it is customary to misuse yet, already, once, and however. Right : The letter is still here. Wrong : The letter is here yet. Right : He has gone already. Wrong : He has gone already yet. Rule : At the beginning of a sentence do not use such introductory words as why, well, then, now, see, and again, unless they are needed. They are very often used because the speaker has gotten into such a habit. Effective speaking, both in public and in conversation, is often marred by this habit. Some contracted forms cause trouble in speaking. The most important of these are don’t, doesn’t, ham’ t, ain’t. Don’t is a contraction of do not, and therefore should be used with plural subjects and with I. You may say I don’t, we don’t, you don’t, they don’t, and don’t with any other plural subject, but you should never say he don’t, she’ don’t, it don’t. Examples : Right: Tie does not care for the theater. Wrong: He don’t care for the theater. H ain’t is a provincialism and is used very ex- tensively in certain sections of the United States. If possible, it is more erroneous than ain’t. Both of these expressions are improper contractions for are not, aren’t, have not, haven’t, has not, hasn’t, INTERESTING YOUR AUDIENCE 443 Right: Isn’t he here? Wong: Ain’t he here? Right.: Haven’t you got it? Wrong: H ain’t (or ain’t) you got it? CORRECT USAGE OF WORDS “Bent — Bias — Inclination — Prepossession. These words agree in describing a permanent in- fluence upon the mind which tends to decide its actions. Bent denotes a fixed tendency of the mind in a given direction. It is the widest of these terms and applies to the will, the intellect and the affec- tions taken conjointly; as, the whole bent of his character was toward evil practices. Bias is lit- erally a weight fixed on one side of a ball used in bowling and causing it to swerve from a straight course. Used figuratively, bias applies particularly to the judgment, and denotes something that acts with a permanent force on the character through that faculty; as, the bias of early education, early habits, etc. Inclination is an excited state of de- sire or appetency; as, a strong inclination to the study of law. Prepossession is a mingled state of feeling and opinion in respect to some person or subject which has laid hold of and occupied the mind previous to inquiry. The word is commonly used in a good sense, an unfavorable impression of this kind being denominated a prejudice. ‘Strong minds will be strongly bent, and usually labour under a strong bias; but there is no mind so weak and powerless as not to have its inclinations, and 444 PUBLIC SPEAKING none so guarded to be without its prepossessions.’—* Crabb.” — Webster’s International Dictionary. Enormous — Immense — Excessive. Enormous means out of due proportion, beyond the normal. A prize fighter has enormous strength. Immense denotes a very large quantity, a vast extent. Excessive means beyond what is just, and al- ways denotes something evil. The Aquitania is an enormous ship sailing across an immense expanse of sea. If a person of moderate means were obliged to pay for one of its de luxe suites he would un- doubtedly consider the price enormous, probably excessive. VOICE EXERCISE— HOW TO BE HEARD AT A DISTANCE It is not necessary to shout and yell in order to make yourself heard in a large hall or out of doors. It is necessary only to use your voice correctly. A whisper, if reenforced by the right tone conditions, will carry to the farthest corner of the largest theater. Here are some suggestions that will aid you in being heard. 1. Do not gaze at the floor. That is amateurish. It is annoying to an audience. It destroys a sense of communication, a feeling of give and take, be- tween the listeners and talker. It also directs the tone toward the floor and interferes with its float- ing out over the audience. 2. “The breath,” said Madame Schumann-Heink. “Is the motive power of voice. Without it under INTERESTING YOUR AUDIENCE 445 intelligent control, nothing can be accomplished. One might as well try to run an automobile with- out gasoline as to sing without breath. 55 Yes, or to speak without it. It is the powder behind the bullets of your words. There should be, at all times, a reserve of breath in your lungs to act as a spring board, a catapult, to launch your words. You have doubtlessly seen, in store windows or In shooting galleries, little balls dancing up and down, on jets of water. Your words should be buoyed up by breath like that. They should ride like a kite on a cushion of air. So breathe deeply, feel- ing the lower part of the lungs expanding at the lower ribs and pushing down and flattening out the arched diaphragm. When you start to speak, do not use up all your breath at once. Use as little as possible. Control it according to the di- rections given in Chapter V. 3. Relax the throat, the lips, the jaw. (See Chapters IV, IX and X.) Constricted tones will not carry because they have little vibration. 4. A man pounding with a hammer on a piece of iron will make a disagreeable noise which is all but deafening close at hand; but it will not carry. But the music of an orchestra or a band can be heard playing for a long distance through a racket and uproar. Why the difference? That is easy to explain: the instruments of the band make pure, harmonious sounds, sounds with resonance; but the hammer striking the iron makes only a dull, ugly clangor without resonance. Only a few days ago, the author stood beside a bugler sounding a call. Had the bugler used the same amount of breath 146 PUBLIC SPEAKING in a harsh shout, it would not have carried very far; but this breath sent into the bugle, vibrating in its resonance chambers, created sound waves which carried a long, long distance. Now we can understand why some voices that seem very loud to those in the front rows, do not carry far: they lack resonance, and it is resonance that makes a sound carry — resonance and openness and breath reserve. So practise often the voice exercises given for this purpose in Chapters IV, IX and X. As you are listening to the radio, hum the tunes that are played, feeling with your open palm the vibrations in the top and back of your head, in the nose, on the lips, in the cheeks, in the chest. To make the most of your natural resonance, speak with the same open sensation in your head that you have when you are drinking in the air. This is most important. 5. Sound your vowels distinctly. They are the very heart of your words. It is the vibration of the vowel sounds that carries. Consequently, they must not be neglected or slighted. They must be spoken with freedom and openness and accuracy. Here are the most commonly used vowel sounds: Practise them aloud now : mate, mote, mute, moot; rack, reck, rick, rock, ruck, rook; bah, boil. As you say them, relax and drop the jaw. Say them again, using them this time as an ex- ercise for flexibility of the lips. The correct use of the lips is all important in the sounding of the vowels. The following are some- times called small or feminine vowels. They ex- INTERESTING YOUR AUDIENCE 447 press delicacy. The lips should be stuck out almost into a pout as they are pronounced. Try them now. We have connected these vowel sounds with n to give them a singing quality. en as In men ain as in drain een as in seen in as in sin Here are the bright vowels, expressing joy, sum shine, gladness. Say them with the lips drawn back into something like a smiling position: an as in can ein as in line ahn as in ah These are the heavy or masculine vowels, ex- pressing strength, sonority, richness, fulness, depth. Say them with the lips a little more open than in the whistling position, chin relaxed, dropped and very loose. on as in on ohn as in oh i, oon as in boon own as in own 6. The pitch of your voice ought to vary, ought to flow up and down the scale, naturally and spom taneously as you speak. This principle of delivery was discussed in Chapter VII. This change of pitch will help to individualize your words, to make them more distinctive. 7. In order to be heard at a distance, we need 448 PUBLIC SPEAKING volume. Do not confuse this with mere loudness. A man who does not mean what he says and has slight interest in it, will not, other thing? being equal, be heard as far as the one who puts his heart and soul and sincerity into his talk. It is not emptiness that carries. It is richness. One of the first things that the physician notices on entering the sick room is the voice. It reflects one’s vitality. A robust voice with carrying power does not come from a sick or even tired body. So rest before you speak. Obey the laws of sensible living. “A beautiful voice, beautifully used,” warns Madame Melba, “can only continue to come from a healthy body. . . . Robust health is essential tc any large measure of success. . . . Plenty of fresh air, simple nourishing food and eight or nine hours of sleep are all necessary to the singer whose larynx invariably reflects her bodily conditions.” CHAPTER XV HOW TO GET ACTION "The truly effective speakers never have enthroned Mind impulse as their god . They have controlled and directed it with the judgment born of a careful study of the laws gov- erning action and belief." — Effective Speaking, by Arthur Edward Phillips. " Every business talk, whether it is selling a stove or put- ting a factory policy up for vote , has a definite end to gain — a decision to win — a product or an idea to sell . It is there- fore as much dependent upon an appeal to 'you interests as a business letter or an advertisement on the billboard across the street. The talk that is so planned and directed is as sure to win against unplanned conversation , as is the carefully prepared and tested advertisement F — How To Talk Business to Win. "IF hat then , in brief does a cultivated modern audience demand of a speaker f It insists, first, that the speaker him- self be genuine ; second , that he know something worthwhile and know it well; third, that his own feelings and convic- tions be fully enlisted in the theme that he presents; and, fourth, that he talk straight to the point in simple, natural , forceful language F — Public Speaking Today, by Lockwood- Thorpe. "The great end of life is not knowledge but action F — - Huxley . “ Action is the distinguishing characteristic of greatness F — E. St. Elmo Lewis . “W e are more easily persuaded, in general, by the reasons we ourselves discover, than by those which have been sug - gested to us by others F — Pascal. “ The mastery of forceful speech is one of the noblest pur- poses to which a man can address himself F — Nezuell Dwight Hillis. CHAPTER XV HOW TO GET ACTION If you could have the power of any talent that you now possess doubled and trebled for the mere asking, which one would you select to have this mighty boon conferred upon? Wouldn’t you very likely designate your ability to influence others, to get action? That would mean additional power, additional profit, additional pleasure. Must this art — so essential to our success in life — remain forever a hit and miss affair with most of us? Must we blunder along depending upon our instinct, upon rule of thumb methods only? Or is there a more intelligent way to set about achieving it? There is, and we shall discuss it at once — a method based on the rules of common sense, on the rules of human nature, your nature and mine, a method that the writer has frequently employed himself, a method that he has trained others to use successfully. The first step in this method is to gain interested attention. Unless you do that, people will not lis- ten closely to what you say. How to do this was dealt with at length In Chapters IX and XIV. Would it not be well to review them in this connection? 451 452 PUBLIC SPEAKINb The second step is to gain the confidence of your hearers. Unless you do that, they will have no faith in what you say. And here is where, many a speaker falls down. Here is where many an ad- vertisement fails, many a business letter, many an employe, many a business enterprise. Here is where many an individual fails to make himself effective within his own human environment. WIN CONFIDENCE BY DESERVING IT The prime way to win confidence is to deserve it. The elder J. Pierpont Morgan said that character was the biggest element in obtaining credit It is also one of the biggest elements in obtaining the confidence of an audience. I have noticed time without number that facile and witty speakers — if those are their chief qualities — are not nearly as effective as those who are less brilliant but more sincere. A certain member of a course that the author was recently conducting had been blessed with a striking appearance; and when he stood up to speak, he possessed an admirable fluency of thought and lan- guage. When he had finished, however, people said: “clever chap.” He made a ready, surface impression ; but it was only on the surface, it never amounted to much. In that same group, there was an insurance representative, a man small of stature, a man who groped sometimes for a word, a man lacking grace of diction; but his deep sin- cerity shone through his eyes and vibrated in his voice. HisTiearers listened intently to what he said, Hoiv TO GET ACTION 453 had faith in him, warmed to him without being com scious of why they did it. “No ^Mirabeau, Napoleon, Burns, Cromwell, no man adequate to do anything,” said Carlyle in Heroes and Hero Worship , “but is first of all in right earnest about it; what I call a sincere man. I should say sincerity, a great deep, genuine sin- cerity, is the first characteristic of all men in any way heroic. Not the sincerity that calls itself sin- cere; ah, no, that is a very poor matter indeed — a shallow braggart, conscious sincerity, oftenest self* conceit mainly. The great man’s sincerity is of the kind he cannot speak of — is not conscious of.” There died a few years ago, one of the most brilliant and accomplished speakers of his genera- tion. In his youth sanguine hopes were raised, mighty things were prophesied of him; but he passed on without achieving them. He had less heart than head; he prostituted his undeniable talents, spoke for whatever cause brought him a momentary ad- vantage and financial profit. He gained a reputa- tion of insincerity. His public career was ruined. There is, as Webster said, no use trying to pre- tend a sympathy or sincerity that one does not feel. It won’t work. It must be genuine. It must have the right ring. “The profoundest feeling among the masses,” says the well known Indiana speaker, Albert J. Beveridge, “the most influential element in their character is the religious element. It is as instinc- tive and elemental as the law of self-preservation. It informs the whole intellect and personality of the people. And he who would greatly influence the 454 PUBLIC SPEAKING people by uttering their unformed thoughts, must have this great and unanalyzable bond of sympathy with them.” * Lincoln had this sympathy with the people. He was seldom dazzling. I do not think anyone called him “an orator.” Jn his debates with Judge Doug- las, he lacked the grace and smoothness and rhetoric of his opponent. People christened Douglas “The Little Giant.” And what did they call Lincoln? “Honest Abe.” Douglas had a charming personality, and he was a man of extraordinary spirit and vitality; but he was a man who tried to carry water on both shoul- ders, he put policy above principle, expediency above justice. That was his final undoing. And Lincoln? Well, when he spoke, there was a certain rugged flavor that emanated from the man and doubled the power of his words. People felt his honesty and sincerity and his Christ-like character. As far as knowledge of law is concerned, scores of other men outstripped him; but few of them had more influence with a jury. He was not much concerned about serving Abe Lincoln. He was a thousand times more concerned about serv- ing justice and eternal truth. And people felt it wdien he spoke. SPEAK OUT OF YOUR OWN EXPERIENCE The second way to gain the confidence of the audience is to speak discreetly out of your own experience. That helps immensely. If you give opinions, people may question them. If you relate HOW TO GET ACTION 455 hearsay or repeat what you have read, the thing may have a second-hand flavor. But what you your- self have gone through and lived through, that has a genuine ring, a tang of truth and veracity; and people like it. They believe it. They recognize you as the world’s leading authority on that par- ticular topic. As an illustration of the efficacy of this sort of thing, go to the news stand and purchase a copy of the American Magazine, or System, or Field and Stream. You will find these packed with articles by men relating their own experiences. Or turn to A Message to Garcia (see Appendix). The world had amazing confidence in what Elbert Hubbard said on that occasion. He is speaking out of his own experiences. You know that. You feel it. The whole article breathes it: “I have carried a dinner pail, and I have worked for day’s wages, and I have also been an employer of labor, and I know there is something to be said on both sides.” BE PROPERLY INTRODUCED Many a spe’aker fails to gain the attention of his audience immediately because he is not introduced properly. An introduction — that term was fashioned from two Latin words, intro, to the inside, and dncere, to lead — so an introduction ought to lead us to the inside of the topic sufficiently to make us want to hear it discussed. It ought to lead us to the in- side facts regarding the speaker, facts that demon- strate his fitness for discussing this particular topic. 456 PUBLIC SPEAKING In other words, an introduction ought to “sell” the topic to the audience and it ought to “sell” the speaker. And it ought to do these things in the briefest amount of time possible. That is what it ought to do. But does it? Nine times out of ten — no — emphatically no. Most in- troductions are poor affairs — feeble and inexcusably inadequate. For example, I heard a well known speaker — a man who ought to have known better — introduce the Irish poet, W. B. Yeats. Yeats was to read his own poetry. Three years prior to that he had been awarded the Nobel prize in literature, the highest distinction that can be bestowed upon a man of letters. I am confident that not ten per cent of that particular audience knew of either the award or its significance. Both ought, by all means, to have been mentioned. They ought to have been announced even if nothing else were said. But what did the chairman do? He utterly ignored these facts, and wandered off into talking about mythology and Greek poetry. He was doubtlessly entirely unconscious of the fact that his own ego was prompting him to impress the ^audience with his own knowledge, his own importance. That chairman, in spite of the fact that he is known internationally as a speaker and had been introduced a thousand times himself, was a total failure in introducing another. If a man of his caliber makes such a faux pas , what can we expect of the average chairman? And what are we going to do about it? With all due humility of soul and meekness of spirit, go 457 ROW TO GET ACTION to the chairman beforehand and ask him if he would like a few facts to use in his introduction. He will appreciate your suggestions. Then tell him the things you would like to have mentioned, the things that show why you are in a position to talk about this particular subject, the simple facts that the audi- ence ought to know, the facts that will win you a hearing. Of course, after being told only once, the chairman is going to forget half of them and get the other half all mixed up; so it is a good plan to hand them to him, just a sentence or two, type- written, hoping that he will refresh his mind be- fore he introduces you. But will he? Probably not. And that is that. BLUE GRASS AND HICKORY WOOD ASHES One autumn the author was conducting courses in public speaking at various Y. M. C. A.’s in greater New York. The star salesman of one of the best known selling organizations in the city was a member of one of those courses, and one evening he made the preposterous statement that he had been able to „ make blue grass grow without the aid of seed or roots. He had, according to his story, scattered hickory wood ashes over newly plowed ground. Presto ! Blue grass had appeared. He firmly believed that the hickory wood ashes and the hickory wood ashes alone were responsible for the blue grass. In criticizing his talk, I smilingly pointed out to him that his phenomenal discovery would, if true, make him a millionaire, for blue grass seed was 458 PUBLIC SPEAKING worth several dollars a bushel. I also told him that it would make him immortal, that it would make him the outstanding scientist of all history. I in- formed him that no man, living or dead, had ever been able to perform the miracle he claimed to have performed, no man had ever been able to produce life from an inanimate substance. I told him that very quietly, for I felt that his mistake was so palpable, so absurd, as to require no emphasis in the. refutation. When I had finished, every other member of the course saw the folly of his assertion; but he did not see it, not for a sec- ond. He was in earnest about his contention, deadly in earnest. He leaped to his feet and informed me that he was not wrong. He had not been relating theory, he protested, but personal experience. He knew whereof he spoke. He continued to talk, en- larging on his first remarks, giving additional In- formation, piling up additional evidence, a rugged sincerity and honesty shining through his voice. Again I informed him that there was not the re- motest hope in the world of his being right or even approximately right or within a thousand miles of the truth. In a second he was on his feet once more, offering to bet me five dollars and to let the U. S. Department of Agriculture settle the matter. I noticed that he had soon won over several mem- bers of the course to his way of thinking. Marvel- ing at their credulity, I inquired why they had now come to believe in his contention. His earnestness — ■ that was the only explanation they could give — earnestness. HOW TO GET ACTION 459 Earnestness : The power of it is incredible — es- pecially with a popular audience. Very Tew people have the capacity for independ- ent thought. It is as rare as the topaz of Ethiopia. But all of us have feelings and emotions, and all of us are influenced by the speaker’s feeling. If he believes a thing earnestly enough f and says it earnestly enough } even though he claims he can pro- duce blue grass from dust and ashes, he will gain some adherents, he will win some disciples. He can do that even among supposedly sophisticated and unquestionably successful business men in the city of New York. After you have won the audience’s interested at- tention and their confidence, the real work begins., The third step then is to state the facts, to EDUCATE PEOPLE REGARDING THE MERITS OF YOUR PROPOSITION This is the very heart of your talk, the meat. This is where you will need to devote most of your time. Now you will need to apply all you have learned in Chapter XII about Clearness, all you have learned in Chapter XIII about Impressiveness and Conviction. Here is where your preparation will count. Here is where the lack of it will rise up like Banquo’s ghost and mock you. Here you are on the firing line. And “a battle field,” says Marshal Foch, “does not give an oppor- tunity for study. One does what he can to apply what he already knows, therefore it is necessary 460 PUBLIC SPEAKING that he should know thoroughly and be able to use his knowledge quickly.” Here is where you need to know a score of times more about your topic than you can possibly use. When the White Knight in Alice Through the Look- ing Glass started out on his journey, he prepared for every possible contingency: he took a mouse trap lest he should be troubled with mice at night, and he carried a bee hive in case he should find a stray swarm of bees. If the White Knight had prepared puolic talks like that, he would have been a winner. He would have been able to overwhelm with a torrent of information every objection that could be brought forth. He would have known his subject so well and he would have planned it so thoroughly that he could hardly have failed. HOW PATTERSON ANSWERED OBJECTIONS If you are addressing a business group on some proposal that affects them, you should not only edu- cate them; but you should let them educate you. You should ascertain what is in their minds — other- wise you may be dealing with something entirely beside the point. Let them express their minds; answer their objections; then they will be in a more placid state to listen to you. Here is the way the late John H. Patterson, the first president of the National Cash Register Company, handled a situa- tion of that kind. We are quoting from his article in System Magazine: “It became necessary to raise the prices of our cash reg- isters. The agents and sales managers protested; they said HOW TO GET ACTION 46 ! that our business would go, that prices had to be kept where they were. I called them all in to Dayton and we had a meeting.^ I staged the affair. Back of me on the platform I had a great sheet of paper and a sign painter. “I asked the people to state their objections to the increas- ing of prices. The objections came ripping out from the audience like shots from a machine gun. As fast as they came, I had the sign man post them on the big sheet. We spent all of the first day gathering objections. I did nothing but exhort. When the meeting closed we had a list of at least a hundred different reasons why the prices should not be raised. Every possible reason w T as up there before the men, and it seemed conclusively settled in the minds of the audience that no change should be made. Then the meeting adjourned. “On the next morning, I took up the objections one by one and explained by diagrams and words exactly why each was unsound. The people were convinced. Why? Every- thing that could be said contra was up in black and white and the discussion centered. No loose ends were left. We settled everything on the spot. “But in a case such as this one it would not have been enough, in my mind, merely to have settled the point in dispute. A meeting of agents should break up with all of the audience filled with a new lot of enthusiasm; perhaps the points of the register itself might have been a little blurred in the discussion. That would never do. We had to have a dramatic climax. I had arranged for that and just before the close of the conference, I had a hundred men march, one by one, across the stage ; each bore a banner and on that banner was a picture of a part of the latest register and just what it did. Then when the last man passed across, they all came back into a kind of grand finale — the complete machine. The meeting ended with the agents on their feet and cheering wildly !” 462 PUBLIC SPEAKING SETTING ONE DESIRE TO FIGHTING ANOTHER The fourth step in this method is to appeal to the motives that make men act. This earth and all things in it and on it and in the waters underneath it, are run, not haphazardly, but according to the immutable law of cause and effect. “For the world was made in order, And the atoms march in tune/ 7 Everything that ever has happened or ever will happen has been, or will be, the logical and in- evitable effect of something that preceded it, the logical and inevitable cause of something that fol- lows. This principle, like the laws of the Medes and Persians, changeth not. It is as true of earth- quakes and Joseph’s coat of many colors, and the honking of wild geese and jealousy and the price of baked beans, and the Kohinoor diamond, and the beautiful harbor in Sydney — it is as true of those things as it is of putting a nickel in a slot and getting a package of gum. . . . When one recognizes this, he understands, once and for all, why-superstition is unspeakably silly — for how can the unchangeable laws of nature be stopped or altered or affected in the slightest by thirteen people sitting at a table or because one breaks a mirror? Every conscious and deliberate act we perform is caused by what? By some desire. The only peo- ple to whom this does not apply are incarcerated in insane asylums. The things that actuate us are not many. We are ruled hour by hour, dominated day HOW TO GET ACTION 463 and night, by a surprisingly small number of long- ings. All that means just this: if one knows what these motives are and can appeal to them with sufficient force, he will have extraordinary power. The wise speaker attempts to do precisely that. But the blunderer gropes his way blindly and to no purpose. For example, a father finds that his young son has been smoking cigarettes surreptitiously. He grows irate, fumes, scolds, commands the boy to have done with the pernicious habit, warns him that it will ruin his health. But suppose that the boy is not concerned about his health, that he loves the flavor and adventure of smoking a cigarette more than he fears physical consequences. What wall happen? The father’s ap- peal will prove futile. Why? Because the parent was not shrewd enough to play upon a motive that touched his son. The parent played only on the motives that actuated himself. He did not get over on the boy’s side of the fence at all. However, it is quite probable that that boy longs wath all his heart to make the track team at school, to compete for the hundred yard dash, to excel at athletics. So if the father will only cease unload- ing his own feelings, and show his son that smoking is going to impede and interfere with his cherished athletic ambitions, the father will probably get the desired action, get it smoothly and completely, and get it by the eminently sensible process of putting a stronger desire against a weaker one. This is precisely what does happen in one of the biggest sporting events in the world — the Oxford-Cam- 464 PUBLIC SPEAKING bridge boat race. The oarsmen deny themselves the use of tobacco all during their training. Compared to the winning of the race, every other desire is secondary. One of the most serious problems that mankind faces to-day is the battle with insects. A few years ago, the Oriental fruit moth was imported into this country on some cherry trees which were for- warded at the instance of the Japanese government and were used to ornament the borders of a lake at our national capital. This moth spread and threatened the fruit crop of some of the eastern states. Spraying seemed to have no effect, so finally, the government was obliged to import another insect from Japan, and turn it loose here to prey upon this moth. So our agricultural experts are fighting one pest with another. The man skilled in getting action employs similar tactics. He sets one motive to war against an- other. This method is so sensible, so simple, so utterly apparent that one might imagine that the use of it was all but universal. Far from it. One often sees exhibitions that make him inclined to sus- pect that the use of it is very rare. To cite a concrete case: the writer recently at- tended a noonday luncheon club in a certain city. A golf party was being organized to play over the country club course of a neighboring city. Only a few members had put down their names. The presi- dent of the club was displeased; something he was behind was about to fall; his prestige was at stake. So he made what he imagined was an appeal for more members to go. His talk was woefully in- HOW TO GET ACTION 465 adequate ; he based his urge very largely on the fact that he wanted them to go . That was no appeal at all. *He was not handling human nature skill- fully; he was merely unloading his own feelings. Like the irate father with the cigarette-smoking son, he neglected entirely to talk in terms of the desires of his hearers. What should he have done? He should have used a generous supply of common sense; he should have had a little quiet talk with himself before he spoke to the others; and he should have addressed him- self somewhat in this fashion: “Why aren’t more of these men going on this golfing party? Some probably imagine they cannot spare the time; others may be thinking of the railway fare and various expenses. How can I overcome these objections? I will show them that recreation is not lost time, that grinds are not the most successful men, that one can do more in five days when he is fresh than he can in six when his batteries need recharging. Of course, they know this already; but they need to be reminded of it. I will play up things that they ought to want more than they want to save the small expense connected with this party. I will show them that it is an investment in health and pleas- ure. I will stir their imaginations, make them see themselves out on the course, the west wind in their faces, the green sward under their feet, feeling sorry for those back in the hot city who live for nothing but money.” Would such a procedure, in your opinion, have been more likely to succeed than the mere “I-want- you-to-go” appeal that the speaker used? 466 PUBLIC SPEAKING THE DESIRES THAT DETERMINE OUR ACTIONS ' ' T What, then, are these basic and human longings that should mold our conduct and make us behave like human beings? If an understanding of them and a playing upon them Is so essential to our suc- cess, then out with them. Let us have the light upon them, let us examine and dissect and analyze them. We shall devote the rest of this chapter to dis- cussing and telling a few stories about them. That, you will agree, is the way to make them clear, the way to make them convincing, the way to engrave them deep upon the walls of your memory. One of the very strongest of these motives is— what would you say? You are right: the desire for gain. That will be largely responsible for a few hundred million people getting out of bed to-morrow morning two or three hours earlier than they would otherwise arise without this spur. Is it necessary to discourse further upon the potency of this well- known urge? And even stronger than the money "motive is the desire for self-protection. AH health appeals are based on that. For example, when a city adver- tises its healthful climate, when a food manufac- turer features the purity and strength-giving quali- ties of his product, when a patent medicine vendot enumerates all the ills that his nostrums will allevi* ate, when a dairymen’s league tells us that milk is rich in vitamines, a product indispensable to the maintenance of life, when a speaker for an a nth HOW TO GET ACTION 467 cigarette society tells us that about 3% of all tobacco is nicotine and that one drop of nicotine will kill a dog and eight drops will destroy a horse — all of these people are appealing to our innate desire to preserve life. To make the appeal to this motive strong, make it personal. Don’t, for example, quote statistics to show that cancer is on the increase. No. Tie it right down to the people who are listening to you, e.g., “There are thirty people in this room. If all of you live to be forty-five, three of you, accord- ing to the law of medical averages, will die of cancer. I wonder if it will be you, or you, or you over there.” As strong as the desire for money — in fact, in many people it is far stronger — is the wish to be thought well of, to be admired. In other words, pride. Pride with a capital P. Pride in italics. PRIDE in capital letters. Pride, what crimes have been committed in thy name! For many years thousands and thousands of young girls suffered excruciating pains in China, screamed with it and did it willingly because the dictates of pride said that their feet must be bound and not allowed to grow. At this very moment, thousands of native women in certain parts of Cen- tral Africa are wearing wooden discs in their lips. Incredible as it may seem, these discs are as large as the plate on which you ate breakfast this morn- ing. When the little girls in these tribes reach eight years of age, a slit is made in the outer portion of their lips and a disc is inserted. As the seasons pass, one disc is replaced by another progressively larger. 4-68 PUBLIC SPEAKING Finally the teeth have to be removed to make room for this much-prized ornament. These cumber- some appendages render it impossible for these ebony belles to utter an intelligible sound. The rest of the tribe can seldom understand their attempts at talking. But all this is endured, even silence is endured by these women, in order that they may appear beautiful, in order that they may be ad- mired, in order that they may stand high in their own estimation, in order that their pride may be appeased. Although we don’t go quite that far in Melbourne, or Montreal, or Cleveland, nevertheless, “The colonel’s lady and Judy O’Grady, Are sisters under the skin.” So the appeal to pride, if done skillfully, has a force only a trifle less potent than T. N ( . T. Ask yourself why you are taking this course. Were you influenced, to some extent, by the wish to make a better impression? Did you covet the glow of inward satisfaction that comes from making a creditable talk? Won’t you feel a very pardonable pride in the power, leadership, and distinction, that naturally pertain to the public speaker? The editor of a mail order journal recently stated in a public address that of all the appeals that one could put in a sales letter, none were so effec- tive as the appeals to pride and profit. Lincoln won a lawsuit once by a clever appeal to this pride motive. It was in the Tazewell County Court in 1847. Two brothers by the name of Snow had purchased two yokes of oxen and a prairie plow 469 h6w to get action from a Mr. Case. In spite of the fact that they were minors, he accepted their joint note for two hundred dollars. When it fell due, and he tried to collect it, he got laughter, not cash. It wasn’t promising laughter, either; so he employed Lincoln and had them into court. The Snow brothers pleaded that they were minors and that Case knew they were minors when he accepted the note, Lincoln admitted everything they claimed and the validity of the minor act. “Yes, gentlemen, I reckon that is so,” he said to point after point. It seemed as if he had given his entire case away. However, when his turn came, he addressed the twelve good men and true, in this fashion: “Gentle- men of the jury, are you willing to allow these boys to begin life with this shame and disgrace attached to their character? The best judge of human character that ever wrote has left these words' — “ ‘Good name in man or woman, dear my Lord, Is the immediate jewel of their souls: Who steals my purse, steals trash ; ’tis something, nothing; Twas mine, ’tis his, and has been slave to thousands; But he th#t filches from me my good name Robs me of that which not enriches him And makes me poor indeed !’ ” Then he pointed out that these boys might never have stooped to this villainy had it not been for the Unwise counsel of their attorney. Showing how the noble profession of law was sometimes prostituted to prevent rather than to promote justice, he turned and scathingly rebuked the opposing attorney, “And now, gentlemen of the jury,” he continued, 470 PUBLIC SPEAKING “you have it in your power to set these boys right before the world .’ 5 Surely these men would not lend their names nor their influence to shielding rpatent dishonesty? They could not be true to their ideals and do it — such was his plea. He appealed to their pride, you see : and, without leaving their seats, the jury voted that the debt must be paid. Lincoln in this instance appealed also to the jury’s innate love of justice. It is native to almost all of us. We will stop on the street to take the part of a small boy who is being mistreated by a larger one. We are creatures of feeling, who long for com- forts and pleasures. We drink coffee and wear silk socks and go to the theater and sleep on the bed instead of the floor, not because we have reasoned out that these things are good for us, but because they are pleasant. So show that the thing you pro- pose will add to our comforts and increase our pleas- ures, and you have touched a powerful spring of action. When Seattle-advertised that its death rate was the lowest of any large city in the United States and that a child born there had the- best chances of surviving and living long, to what motive was the city appealing? A very strong one, one that is re- sponsible for much of the conduct of the world — affection. Patriotism is also based on the motives of affection and sentiment. Sometimes an appeal to the sentiments will pro- duce action when all others fail. That was the ex- perience of the well-known real estate auctioneer of New York City, Joseph P. Day. He closed the 471 ' > HOW TO GET ACTION largest sale of his life by such an appeal. Here is his own story of how he did it. n “Expert knowledge is not the all of selling,, In my largest single sale I used no technical knowledge whatso- ever. I had been negotiating with Judge Gary for the sale to the United States Steel Corporation of the building at 71 Broadway, which has always contained its offices. I thought I had closed the sale when, calling upon Judge Gary, he said very quietly but very decisively: “ ‘Mr. Day, we have had the offer of a much more modern building near here and it would seem to answer our purpose better. It is/, pointing to the woodwork, ‘a better- finished building. This building is too old-fashioned; you know it is a very old structure. Some of my associates here think that, all in all, the other building will answer our purposes more adequately than this one/ “There was a $5,000,000 sale drifting out of the window! I did not answer for a moment, and Judge Gary did not go on. He had given his decision. If a pin had dropped to the floor it would have sounded like a bomb. I did not attempt to answ r er. Instead, I asked : “‘Judge Gary, where was your first office when you came to New York?’ “ ‘Right here/ he said, ‘or rather in the room on the other side/ “ ‘Where was the Steel Corporation organized V “ ‘Why, right* here in these offices/ he mused rather than answered. And then, of his own accord: ‘Some of the younger executives have from time to time had more elab- orate offices than this. They have not been quite satisfied with the older furniture. But/ he added, ‘none of those men are with us now/ “The sale was over. The next week we formally closed. “Of course, I knew what building had been offered to him, and I might have compared the structural merits of the two. Then I should have Judge Gary arguing — with himself if not with me — over material points of construction. Instead I appealed to sentiment.” 472 PUBLIC SPEAKING RELIGIOUS MOTIVES There is another powerful group of motives that influence us mightily. Shall we call them religious motives? I mean religious, not in the sense of orthodox worship or the tenets of any particular creed or sect. I mean rather that broad group of beautiful and eternal truths that Christ taught: justice and forgiveness and mercy, serving others and loving our neighbors as ourselves. No man likes to admit, even to himself, that he is not good and kind and magnanimous. So we love to be appealed to on these grounds. It im- plies a certain nobleness of soul. We take pride in that. For a great many years, C. S. Ward was a sec- retary of the International Committee of the Y. M. C. A., devoting all of his time to conducting campaigns to raise funds for Association buildings. It does not mean self-preservation or an increase of property or power for a man to write a check for a thousand dollars to the local Y. M. C. A. ; but many men will do it out of a desire to be noble and just and helpful. Setting up a campaign in a northwestern city, Mr. Ward approached a well-known business ex- ecutive who had never been identified with the church or with social movements. What? Was he expected to neglect his business for a week to raise funds for a Y. M. C. A. building? The idea was preposterous. He finally consented to come to the opening meeting of the campaign; and was so moved there by Mr. Ward’s appeal to his noble- HOV TO GET ACTION 473 ness and altruism that he devoted an entire week to an enthusiastic money-raising campaign. Before the week was over, this man who had been noted for his constant use of profanity, was praying for the success of the undertaking. A group of men once called upon the late James J. Hill to persuade him to establish Y. M. C. A.’s along his railroad lines in the Northwest. Money was re- quired, a considerable outlay of it; and, knowing Hill to be a shrewd business man they unwisely based their principal arguments upon his desire for gain. These Associations, they pointed out, would make for happy, contented workmen, and would enhance the value of his property. “You have not yet mentioned,” Mr. Hill replied, “the thing that will really lead me to establish these Y. M. C. A.’s — that is the desire to be a force for righteousness and to build Christian character.” A long-standing dispute over some frontier ter- ritory had, in 1900, brought Argentine and Chile to the brink of war. Battleships had been built, armaments amassed, taxes increased, and costly preparations made to settle the issue by blood. On Easter day, 1 <}oo, an Argentine bishop made a pas- sionate appeal for peace in the name of Christ. Across the Andes, the Chilean bishop reechoed the message. The bishops went from village to village appealing for peace and brotherly love. At first, their audiences were only women ; but finally this appeal stirred the entire nations. Popular petitions and public opinion forced the governments to arbi- trate and to reduce their armies and navies. The frontier fortresses were dismantled, and the guns 474 PUBLIC SPEAKING melted and cast into a huge bronze figure of Christ* To-day high in the lofty Andes, guarding the dis- puted frontiers, towers this statue of the Prince of Peace holding the cross, On the pedestal is writ- ten: “These mountains themselves shall fall and crumble to dust before the peoples of Chile and the Argentine Republic shall forget their solemn cove- nant sworn at the feet of Christ.” Such is the power of the appeal to the religious emotions and convictions. SUMMARY So much for the method we have been discussing. First, get interested attention. Second, win confidence by deserving it, by your sincerity, by being properly introduced, by being qualified to speak on your subject, by telling the things that your experience has taught you. Third, state your facts, educate your audience re* garding the merits of your proposal, answer their objections. Fourth, appeal to the motives that make men act : the desire for gain, self-protection/ pride, pleas- ures, sentiments, affections, and religious ideals, such as justice, mercy, forgiveness, love. This method, if used wisely, will not only help the speaker In public; it will help him also in private. It will help him in the writing of sales letters, in constructing advertisements, in managing business interviews. ’•* ||m H(3w to get action 475 HAS THE AUTHOR USED SUCCESSFULLY THE METHOD HE HAS BEEN DESCRIBING? First step : Did the writer gain your interested attention by emphasizing the importance of this matter of influencing human nature and by declar- ing that there was a scientific method of going about it and that we would discuss it forthwith? Second step : Did the writer gain your confidence by telling you that this system was based upon the rules of common sense, that he himself had em- ployed it and had taught thousands of others to do it? Third step: Did the writer state the facts clearly, did he educate you regarding the working and the merits of the method? Fourth step : Did the writer convince you that the use of this method will bring you additional influ- ence and profit? Will you, as a result of reading this chapter, endeavor to use this method? In other words, has the writer gotten action? * *The author wishes to acknowledge here his indebtedness for this plan to Arthur Dunn in his book, Scientific Selling and A dvertising. f SPEECH BUILDING WORDS OFTEN MISPRONOUNCED Watch your first syllables: do not substitute uh for a. Do not say: uhbate for abate uhlert for alert uhbout “ about uhlow tt allow uhcount “ account uhmonia tt ammonia uhdorn “ adorn uhnoy tt annoy uhdress “ address uhpear tt appear uhfect !i affect uhrest tt arrest uhgree “ agree uhsume a assume uhgrieve “ aggrieve uhtach tt attach Do not shorten or change the sound of be and de in the following words. Do not say: buh-cause or b’cuz for because buh-lieve tt b’lieve a believe buh-come a b’corae tt become buh-fore a b’fore tt before buh-gin u b’gin a begin duh-bate it d’bate a debate duh-cide it d’cide a decide duh-test a d’test a detest duh-fer tt d’fer it defer duh-gree a d’gree tt degree HOW TO GET ACTION 477 ERRORS IN ENGLISH Review . Read over the following paragraph and note the errors contained in it: Mr. Jones, as well as two other friends of mine, have endorsed the note. He, with the others, have learned of the increased demand for my patented article and feel that money in addition to talent are necessary for the marketing of the machine. New Study Material . Rule: Always place your adjectives and adverbs so that it is very easy to tell which words they modify. There are daily errors in the use of only, nearly, almost, etc. Right: I had only one minute to catch the train. Wrong: I only had one minute to catch the train. Rule : Do not use the superlative degree for the comparative. If you are comparing but two objects, use the comparative degree. Examples: Right : This day is the worse of the two. Wrong: This day is the worst of the two. Rule : Do not use these or those before such words as type, kind, sort . Examples : Right : That kind of houses seldom lasts long. Wrong: Those kind of houses seldom last long. Right : We can never get this sort of prices. Wrong: We can never get these sort of prices. Rule : Do not say kind of a, sort of a, type of a, Note the following examples: Right : That kind of job is simply a blind alley. Wrong: That kind of a job is simply a blind alley. Right: That sort of employer deserves labor troubles. PUBLIC SPEAKING Wrong: That sort of an employer deserves labor troubles. Right : That type of engine is very expensive. Wrong: That type of an engine is very expen-, sive. Rule: We are in the habit of using certain superfluous words in some of our expressions. You will be able to see for yourself, in the following examples the reasons why the right hand column is not correct: Right back of (or behind) is but one left more than you think inside a beginner an infant anywhere, everywhere, nowhere Wrong in back of is not but one left more than you think for inside of a new beginner a little infant anywheres, everywheres, nowheres Rule: There are certain words which are always plural in form but which take the singular verb. Among these are: physics , e'thics, mathe - matics , news , etc. Rule : When such words as dozen , score, yoke, have a numeral in front of them, no “s” is needed, as “He bought two dozen eggs.” Another use is “ Dozens of men were killed in the charge.” Rule: There are certain foreign words which have retained their own plurals. Among these are : addendum , alumnus , alumna (fern.), analysis , crisis , datum , erratum , parenthesis, phenomenon , synopsis . 479 HOW TO GET ACTION These plurals are addenda } alumni f alumna (fern.), analyses } crises f data, errata , parentheses } phe~ nomerih, synopses. The modern tendency seems to 'take memorandum out of this class and to make memorandums the new plural. You will find, how- ever, that many persons are accustomed to use memoranda f which is perfectly correct as most dic- tionaries still hold. Rule: When you talk about several pairs, it should be so written, as u Pive pairs of shoes were sold.” It comes under the same ruling as “five years ago.” Both these expressions are correct and the singular form of these nouns should never be used when there is a plural numeral in front of them. Rule : In compound nouns, the important part of the compound receives the mark of the plural, as mothers-m-law. The mark of possessive will come on the last part of the compound, as “my mother* in-law’s husband.” CORRECT USAGE OF WORDS A skillful'm&n has profited both from knowledge and practise, as a skillful physician. Dexter means pertaining to the right hand. Dexterous implies habitual ease and sureness, such as we have in our right hands. Adroit is very close to dexterous in meaning, but it also implies the ability to make quick, sure movements, either mental or physical. Apt means especially qualified, but it is not so strong a term as expert . Sharp denotes a keen intelligence and a quick, nice discrimination. The f 480 PUBLIC SPEAKING' proficient man has gone forward and made consid- erable progress. Competent is often used to indi- cate the general, natural ability that fits one to perform a task. Qualified commonly refers to specific training. A competent musician might, with study and practise, qualify for a position with the Philharmonic Orchestra. Initiated refers to In- structions In the beginnings and rudiments. It is derived from the same source as the word initial . A man who is initiated in the problems of finance may not be qualified to handle the financial affairs of a large corporation. VOICE EXERCISE-SPEAKING MORE DISTINCTLY According to a special article in the New York Times , one man out of every seven who sought to become officers in our army during the World War was refused a commission because of u poor articulation, lack of voice and imperfect enuncia- tion.” These handicaps are just as prevalent? and almost as serious, in civil life. Aren’t you sometimes forced to ask people to repeat in conversation — especially strangers? Haven’t you been annoyed by listen- ing to some speaker whom you found it difficult, at times, to understand? How often even those whom we can understand lack that clear-cut articulation which, according to the author of Acres of Diamonds , is the charm How delightful it is to listen to. It 481 hW to get action is generally felt to be an infallible sign of refine- ment and culture. Every man can improve his enunciation and articulation by practise. Deaf mutes are trained to use accurately the muscles of their lips and cheeks and tongues. As a result, they are taught to speak almost as distinctly as many who possess the faculty of hearing. Imagine, then, what such training can do for the average man. The easiest sounds to begin with are the con- sonants which are made by closing the lips. There are five of them : p, b, m, w and wh\ Here are some rules : Press the lips tightly together for these sounds always . Tighter than you are accustomed to do, and for a longer time . Many people hardly touch the lips together in making p } or b, or m ; are you one of them? Exaggerate the sound, as if it w r ere doubled . Sound Almost like copy cop-py big ^ bbig ■moving mmoving weather wweather white whwhite The last sound, wh, used to be spelled, long ago, hw . Think of it like that; make the sound of h, and then bring the lips together for the w } and you will have no trouble in making it distinct. Many people sound white , why , what almost like wife, wy } wat . Do you? 482 PUBLIC SPEAKING? Localize the sensation — feel the pressure of the m of moving, the b of big, etc., at the very center of your lips, in front of the middle teeth. Use both lips, upper as well as lower. Do you use your upper lip now? Stand in front of a mirror and see. And don’t be afraid to push the lips slightly out- ward on these sounds, like a little megaphone. You cannot make them plainly otherwise. Some Exercises for Daily Use: Repeat single lip* sounds : me-me-me-me; pep-pep-pep-pep ; wo-wo-zvo* Try these nonsense sentences: Mobile millions of amiable men . Prohibitive problems prepare to appear . Breezes are blowing big billows about the bay . Why whisper , when warbling will win every- where? The following consonants are made by touching the tongue to some part of the roof of the mouth : t, d, tk, n, l, sh, z, ch, j, r, k, g (hard), ng. Tongue consonants enter into nearly all words. For con* venience we may group these 14 sounds as follows: 1. i, d, th, n, ch, j, z. 2. k, g (hard), ng. c 3. l,s, sh, r. We shall here consider the first group. To make the sounds of t, d, th, n , ch, j and z ac- curately, easily and quickly, take pains to press the tongue tightly against the roof of the mouth. Most people use their tongues lazily. They say “cer’nly” when they think they are saying “certainly” ; “moun’n” when they think they are saying “moun- tain.” That is downright carelessness. Make your- 483 HOV> TO GET ACTION self squeeze the tongue tight; this alone will go far toward making your speech distinct. To make these sounds quickly and easily, narrow th,e tongue to a point like a pencil, and use only the tip , the first quarter-inch or so; don’t slap the whole broad surface upward as you say t f d, etc. And touch the roof of the mouth just behind the front teeth, not farther back. Hold a mirror before your mouth and repeat these nonsense phrases, using your muscles actively, as directed; or make up other phrases of your own: Tip-toeing daintily down to dine. Lolita laughing neatly taught the tune . Cherish jealously the jolly ginger jar. “Caruso’s faultless articulation,” according to Fucito and Beyer in their book Caruso and the Art of Singing , “was due to the flexibility of his lips and tongue. . . . An excellent exercise for the flexibility of the tongue and lips (and also for the distinct enunciation of the R) is: tra, tre } tro, tru; and bra, bre, bri , bro, bru” The Italian voice teachers train their singers a great deal on /. With the tip of the tongue on the roof of the mduth, lips out, chin loose, say lul, lul , lul, lul , lul , lul, lul . I, n and m are called the singing consonants. They should naturally sing, but most speakers do not make them sing, n is very good for practise because it gives one the most head tone. We used it in connection with the vowel sounds in the last chapter: am, een, etc. CHAPTER XVI IMPROVING YOUR DICTION “The ear of the world must be tickled in order to be made attentive — clearness , force and beauty of style are absolutely necessary to one who would draw men to his way of thinking ; nay , to anyone who would induce the great mass of mankind to give so much as passing heed to what he has to say.” — Woodrow Wilson . “Whatever is in the sermon must be in the preacher first; clearness, logicalness , vivacity, earnestness must be personal qualities in him before they are qualities of thought and language in what he utters.” — Phillips Brooks. “ Men who talk well read more, as a rule, than the aver- age. Without conscious effort , they absorb many ideas and the words that express them. Something of the style and taste of superior writers gets into their thought and speech. Reading is usually considered the most potent single factor in the enlargement of vocabulary . ” — Public Speaking for Business Men, Hoffman. “You don't want a diction gathered from newspapers, caught from the air, common and unsuggestive ; but you want one whose every word is full freighted with suggestion and association , with beauty and power.” — Rufus Choate . e “Soak yourself full of the world's best literature so that you will have words, strong words, clear words, for your speaking — Dr. Lynn Harold Hough a CHAPTER XVI IMPROVING YOUR DICTION A short time ago an Englishman, without em- ployment and without financial reserves, was walk- ing the streets of Philadelphia seeking a position. He entered the office of Mr. Paul Gibbons, a well known business man of that city, and asked for an interview. Mr. Gibbons looked at the stranger distrustfully. His appearance was emphatically against him. His clothes were shabby and thread- bare, and over all of him were written large the unmistakable signs of financial distress. Half out of curiosity, half out of pity, Mr. Gibbons granted the interview. At first, he had intended to listen for only a moment, but the moments grew into min- utes, and the minutes mounted into an hour; and the conversati®n still continued. It ended by Mr. Gibbons telephoning to Mr. Roland Taylor, the Philadelphia manager for Dillon, Read and Com- pany; and Mr. Taylor, one of the leading financiers of that city, invited this stranger to lunch and se- cured for him a desirable position. How was this man, with the air and outward appearance of fail- ure, able to effect such a prized connection within so short a time? The secret can be divulged in a single phrase: 4,^7 488 PUBLIC SPEAKING his command of the English language. He was, in reality, an Oxford man who had come to this coun- try on a business mission which had end&d in dis- aster, leaving him stranded, without funds and with- out friends. But he spoke his mother tongue with such precision and beauty that his listeners soon forgot his rusty shoes, his frayed coat, his unshaven face. His diction became an immediate passport into the best business circles. This man’s story is somewhat extraordinary, but It illustrates a broad and fundamental truth, namely, that w r e are judged each day by our speech. Our words reveal our refinements; they tell the discern- ing listener of the company we have kept; they are the hall marks of education and culture. We have only four contacts with the world, you and I. We are evaluated and classified by four things; by what we do, by how we look, by what we say, and by how we say It. Yet many a man blunders through a long life time, after he leaves school, without any conscious effort to enrich his stock of words, to master their shades of meaning, to speak with precision and distinction. He comes habitually to use the overworked and exhausted phrases of the office and street. Small wonder that his talk lacks distinction and individuality. Small wonder that he often violates the accepted tradi- tions of pronunciation, and that he sometimes trans- gresses the very canons of English grammar itself. I have heard even college graduates say “ain’t,” and “he don’t,” and “between you and I.” And if men with academic degrees gracing their names commit such errors, what can we expect of those ft IMPROVING YOUR DICTION 489 whose education has been cut short by the pres- sure of economic necessity? Years ?ago, I stood one afternoon day-dreaming in, the Coliseum at Rome. A stranger approached me, an English colonial. He introduced himself, and began talking of his experiences in the Eternal City. He had not spoken three minutes until he had said “you was,” and “I done.” That morning, when he arose, he had polished his shoes and put on spotless linen in order to maintain his own self- respect and to win the respect of those with whom he came in contact; but he had made no attempt whatever to polish his phrases and to speak spot- less sentences. He would have been ashamed, for example, of not raising his hat to a woman when he spoke; but he was not ashamed — no, he was not even conscious— of violating the usages of gram- mar, of offending the ears of discriminating audi- tors. By his own words, he stood revealed and placed and classified. His woeful use of the Eng- lish language proclaimed to the world continually and unmistakably that he was not a person of cul- ture. Dr. Charles’ W. Eliot, after he had been presi- dent of Harvard for a third of a century, de- clared: “I recognize but one mental acquisition as a necessary part of the education of a lady or gentleman, namely, an accurate and refined use of the mother tongue.” This is a significant pro- nouncement. Ponder over it. But how, you ask, are we to become intimate with words, to speak them with beauty and accuracy? Fortunately, there is no mystery about the means 490 • PUBLIC SPEAKING to be employed, no legerdemain. The method is an open secret. Lincoln used it with amazing suc- cess. No other American ever wove w£>rds into such comely patterns, or produced with prose su r ch matchless music: “with malice towards none, with charity for all.” Was Lincoln, whose father was a shiftless, illiterate carpenter and whose mother was a woman of no extraordinary attainments — was he endowed by nature with this gift for words? There Is no evidence to support such an assump- tion. When he was elected to Congress, he de- scribed his education in the* official records at Wash- ington, with one adjective: “defective.” He had attended school less than twelve months in his entire life. And who had been his mentors? Zachariah Birney and Caleb Hazel in the forests of Kentucky, Azel Dorsey and Andrew Crawford along Pigeon Creek in Indiana — itinerant pedagogues, all of them, drifting from one pioneer settlement to an- other, eking out an existence wdierever a few scholars could be found who were willing to ex- change hams and corn and wheat for the three R’s. Lincoln had meager assistance, little of uplift or inspiration from them, and little, too,* from his daily environment. The farmers and merchants, the lawyers and liti- gants with whom he associated in the Eighth Ju- dicial District of Illinois, possessed no magic with words. But Lincoln did not- — and this is the sig- nificant fact to remember — Lincoln did not squander all his time with his mental equals and inferiors. He made boon companions out of the elite minds, the singers, the poets of the ages. He could re« IMPROVING YOUR DICTION 491 ' ■> peat from memory whole pages of Burns and Byron and Browning. He wrote a lecture on Burns. He had one, copy of Byron’s poems for his office and another for his home. The office copy had been used so much that it fell open, whenever it was lifted, to Don Juan. Even when he was in the White House and the tragic burdens of the Civil War were sapping .his strength and etching deep furrows in his face, he often found time to take a copy of Hood’s poems to bed. Sometimes he awoke in the middle of the night and, opening the book, he chanced upon verses- that especially stirred or pleased. Getting up, clad only in his night shirt and slippers, he stole through the halls until he found his secretary and read to him poem after poem. In the White House, he found time to re- peat long, memorized passages from Shakespeare, to criticize the actor’s reading of them, to give his own individual interpretation. “I have gone over some of Shakespeare’s plays,” he wrote Hackett, the actor, “perhaps as frequently as any unprofes- sional reader. Lear, Richard III, Henry VIII, Hamlet, and especially Macbeth. I think nothing equals Macbeth. It is wonderful!” Lincoln was devoted to verse. Not only did he memorize and repeat it, both in private and pub- lic, but he even essayed to write it. He read one of his long poems at his sister’s wedding. Later, in middle life, be filled a note book with his original compositions, but he was so shy about these crea- tions that he never permitted even his closest friends to read them. “This self-educated man,” writes Robinson in 492 PUBLIC SPEAKING his book, Lincoln as a Man of Letters , “clothed his mind with the materials of genuine culture. Call it genius or talent, the process of his attainment was that described by Professor Emerton in speaking p of the education of Erasmus: ‘He was no longer at school, but was simply educating himself by the only pedagogical method which ever yet produced any results anywhere, namely, by the method of his own tireless energy in continuous study and practice. 5 55 This awkward pioneer, who used to shuck corn and butcher hogs for 31 cents a day on the Pigeon Creek farms of Indiana, delivered, at Gettysburg, one of the most beautiful addresses ever spoken by mortal man. One hundred and seventy thousand men fought there. Seven thousand were killed. Yet Charles Sumner said, shortly after Lincoln’s death, that Lincoln’s address would live when the memory of the battle was lost, and that the battle would one day be remembered largely because of the speech. Who will doubt the correctness of this prophecy? Isn’t it, even in this generation, be- ginning to be fulfilled? Do you not, even now, think of the speech as much as of the fighting when you hear the name, “Gettysburg”? Edward Everett spoke for two hours at Gettys- burg; all that he said has long since been forgotten. Lincoln spoke for less than two minutes : a pho- tographer attempted to take his picture while de- livering the speech, but Lincoln had finished before the primitive camera could be set up and focused. Lincoln’s address has been cast in imperishable bronze and placed In a library at Oxford as an ex- Improwing your diction 493 ;) ample of what can be done with the English lan- guage. It ought to be memorized by every student of public speaking. Tour score and seven years ago our fathers brought forth on this continent a new nation, conceived in liberty, and dedicated to the proposition that all men are created equal. Now we are engaged in a great civil war, testing whether that nation, or any nation so conceived and so dedicated, can long endure. We are met on a great battle-field of that war. We have come to dedicate a portion of that field as a final resting-place for those who here gave their lives that that nation might live. It is altogether fitting and proper that we should do this. But in ’a larger sense we cannot dedi- cate, we cannot consecrate, we cannot hallow this ground. The brave men, living and dead, who struggled here, have consecrated it, far above our poor power to add or detract. The world will little note, nor long remember, what we say here, but it can never forget what they did here. It is for us, the living, rather to be dedicated here to the unfin- ished work which they who fought here have thus far so nobly advanced. It is rather for us to be here dedicated to the great task remaining before us, that from these honored dead we take increased devotion to that cause for which they gave the last full measure of devotion; that we here highly resolve that these dead shall not have died in vain; that this nation, under God, shall have a new birth of free- dom ; and that ^government of the people, by the people, for the people, shall not perish from the earth. It is commonly supposed that Lincoln originated the immortal phrase which closed this address; but did he? Herndon, his law partner, had given Lincoln, several years previously, a copy of Theo- dore Parker’s addresses. Lincoln read and under- scored in this book the words “Democracy is direct self-government, over all the people, by all the 494 PUBLIC SPEAKIip people, and for all the people.” Theodore Parker may have borrowed his phraseology from Webster who had said, four years earlier, in his famous reply to Hayne: “The people’s government, made for the people, made by the people, and answerable to the people.” Webster may have borrowed his phraseology from President James Monroe who had given voice to the same idea a third of a cen- tury earlier. And to whom was James Monroe indebted? Five hundred years before Monroe was born, Wyclif had said, in the preface to the trans- lation of the Scriptures, that “this Bible is for the government of the people, by the people, and for the people.” And long before Wyclif lived, more than 400 years before the birth of Christ, Cleon, in an address to the men of Athens, spoke of a ruler “of the people, by the people, and for the people.” And from what ancient source Cleon drew his inspiration, is a matter lost in the fog and nighc of antiquity. How little there is that is new! How much even the great speakers owe to their reading and to their association with books ! Books ! There is the secret ! tfe who would enrich and enlarge his stock of words must soak and tan his mind constantly in the vats of litera- ture. “The only lamentation that I always feel in the presence of' a library,” said John Bright, “is that life is too short and I have no hope of a full enjoyment of the ample repast spread before me.” Bright left school at fifteen, and went to work in a cotton mill, and he never had the chance of schooling again. Yet he became one of the most IMPROVING YOUR DICTION 495 brilliant speakers of the generation, famous for his superb command of the English language. He read and studied and copied in note books and committed to memory long passages from the poetry of Byron and Milton, and Wadsworth and Whittier, and Shakespeare and Shelley. He went through “Para- dise Lost” each year to enrich his stock of words. Charles James Fox read Shakespeare aloud to improve his style. Gladstone called his study a “Temple of Peace,” and in it he kept 15,000 books. He was helped most, he confessed, by reading the works of St. Augustins, Bishop Butler, Dante, Aristotle, and Homer. “The Iliad” and “The Odyssey” enthralled him. He wrote six books on Homeric poetry and Homeric times. The younger Pitt’s practise was to look over a page or two of Greek or Latin and then to translate the passage into his own language. He did this daily for ten years, and “he acquired an almost unrivalled power of putting his thoughts, without premeditation, into words well selected and well arranged.” Demosthenes copied Thucydides’ history eight times in his owp handwriting in order that he might acquire the majestic and impressive phraseology of that famous historian. The result? Two thousand years later, in order to improve his style, Woodrow Wilson studied the works of Demosthenes. Mr. Asquith found his best training in reading the works of Bishop Berkeley. Tennyson studied the Bible daily. Tolstoy read and re-read the Gospels until he knew long passages by memory. Ruskin’s mother forced him bv steady, 496 PUBLIC SPEAKING daily toil to memorize long chapters of the Bible and to read the entire Book through aloud each year, “every syllable, hard names and ,all, from Genesis to the Apocalypse.” To that discipline and study Ruskin attributed his taste and style in litera- ture. R. L. S. are said to be the best loved initials in the English language. Robert Louis Stevenson was essentially a writer’s writer. How did he develop the charming style that made hi m famous? Fortunately, he has told us the story himself. “Whenever I read a book or a passage that particularly pleased me, in which a thing was said or an effect rendered with propriety, in which there was either some conspicuous force or some happy distinction in the style, I must sit down at once and set myself to ape that quality. I was unsuc- cessful, and I knew it; and tried again, and was again un- successful, and always unsuccessful; but at least in these vain bouts I got some practice in rhythm, in harmony, in construction and coordination of parts. “I have thus played the sedulous ape to Hazlitt, to Lamb, to Wordsworth, to Sir Thomas Browne, to Defoe, to Hawthorne, to Montaigne. “That, like it or not, is the way to learn to write; whether I have profited or not, that is the way. It was the way Keats learned, and there never r was a finer tem- perament for literature than Keats\ “It is the great point of these imitations that there still shines beyond the student’s reach, his inimitable model. Let him try as he please, he is still sure of failure; and it is an old and very true saying that failure is the only high- road to success.” Enough of names and specific stories. The secret is out. Lincoln wrote it to a young man eager to become a successful lawyer: “It is only to get IMPROVING YOUR DICTION 497 the books and to read and study them carefully. Work, work, work is the main thing.” What ebooks? Begin with Arnold Bennett’s “flow to Live on Twenty-four Hours a Day.” This book will be as stimulating as a cold bath. It will tell you a lot about that most interesting of all subjects — yourself. It will reveal to you how much time you are wasting each day, how to stop the wastage, and how to utilize what you salvage. The entire book has only 103 pages. You can get through it easily in a week. Tear out twenty pages each morning, put them in your hip pocket. Then offer up upon the altar of the morning newspaper only ten minutes instead of the customary twenty or thirty minutes. “I have given up newspapers in exchange for Tacitus and Thucydides, for Newton and Euclid,” wrote Thomas Jefferson, “and I find myself much the happier.” Don’t you believe that you, by fol- lowing Jefferson’s example at least to the extent of cutting your newspaper reading In half, would find yourself happier and wiser as the weeks go by? Aren’t you, at any rate, willing to try it for a month, and to devote the time you have thus sal- vaged to the more enduring value of a good book? Why not read the pages you are to carry with you while waiting for elevators, for street cars, for food, for appointments? After you have read those 20 pages, replace them in the book, tear out another 20. When you have consumed them all, put a rubber band around the covers to hold the loose pages in place. Isn’t it better far to have a book butchered and mutilated 498 PUBLIC SPEAKING in that fashion, with its message in your head, than to have it reposing unbruised and unread upon the shelves of your library? After you have finished “How to Live on Twenty- Four Hours a Day,” you may be interested in an- other book by the same author. Try “The Human Machine.” This book will enable you to handle people more tactfully. It will develop your poise and self-possession. These books are recommended here not only for what they say, but for the way they say it, for the enriching and refining effect they are sure to have uporl your vocabulary. Some other books that will be helpful are sug- gested: “The Octopus” and “The Pit,” by Frank Norris, are two of the best American novels ever written. The first deals with turmoils and human tragedies occurring in the wheat fields of California : the second portrays the battles of the bears and bulls on the Chicago Board of Trade. “Tess of the D’Urbervilles,” by Thomas Hardy, is one of the most beautiful tales ever written. “A Man’s Value to Society,” by Newell Dwight Hillis and Profes- sor William James’ “Talks to Teachers” are two books well worth reading. “Ariel, A Life of Shelley,” by Andre Maurois, Byron’s “Childe Har- old’s Pilgrimage” and Robert Louis Stevenson’s “Travels with a Donkey” should also be on your list. Make Ralph Waldo Emerson your daily com- panion. Command him to give you first his famous essay on “Self-Reliance.” Let him whisper into your ear marching sentences like these r IMPROVING YOUR DICTION 499 “Speak your latent conviction, and it shall be the universal sense ; for always the inmost becomes the outmost, — and our first thought is rendered back to us by the trumpets of the Last Judgment. Familiar as the voice of the mind is to ea<;h, the highest merit we ascribe to Moses, Plato, and Milton, is that they set at naught books and traditions, and spoke not what men said but what they thought. A man should learn to detect and watch that gleam of light which flashes across his mind from within, more than the lustre of the firmament of bards and sages. Yet he dismisses with- out notice his thought, because it is his. In every work of genius we recognize our own rejected thoughts: they come back to us with a certain alienated majesty. Great works of art have no more affecting lesson for us than this. They teach us to abide by our spontaneous impression with good- humoured inflexibility then most when the whole cry of voices is on the other side. Else, to-morrow a stranger will say with masterly good sense precisely what we have thought and felt all the time, and we shall be forced to take with shame our own opinion from another. “There is a time in every man’s education when he ar- rives at the conviction that envy is ignorance ; that imitation is suicide; that he must take himself for better, for worse, as his portion ; that though the wide universe is full of good, no kernel of nourishing corn can come to him but through his toil bestowed on that plot of ground w T hich is given to him to till. The power which resides in him is new in nature, and none but he knows what that is which he can do, nor does he know until he has tried.” But we have really left the best authors to the last. What are they? When Sir Henry Irving was asked to furnish a list of what he regarded as the hundred best books, he replied: “Before a hundred books, commend me to the study of two — the Bible and Shakespeare.” Sir Henry was right. Drink from these two great fountain sources of English literature. Drink long and often. Toss 500 PUBLIC SPEAKING your evening newspaper aside and say, “Shake- speare, come here and talk to me to-night of Romeo and his Juliet, of Macbeth and his ambi- tion.” If you do these things, what will be your reward? Gradually, unconsciously but inevitably, your dic- tion will begin to take on added beauty and refine- ment. Gradually, you will begin to reflect some- what the glory and beauty and majesty of your companions. “Tell me what you read,” observed Goethe, “and I will tell you what you are.” This reading program that I have suggested will require little but will power, little but a more care- ful husbanding of time. . . . You can purchase pocket copies of Emerson’s essays and Shakespeare’s plays for five cents each. THE SECRET OF MARK TWAIN’S WAY WITH WORDS How did Mark Twain develop his delightful facility with words ? As a young man, he traveled all the way from Missouri to Nevada by the pon- derously slow and really painful stage coach. Food — and sometimes even water — had to be carried for both passengers and horses. Extra weight might have meant the difference between safety and dis- aster; baggage was charged for by the ounce; and yet Mark Twain carried with him a Webster’s Unabridged Dictionary over mountain passes, across scorched deserts, and through a land infested with bandits and Indians. He wanted to make himself master of words, and with his characteristic cour~ ’improving YOUR DICTION 501 ■ } age and common sense, he set about doing the things necessary to bring that mastery about. Both Pitt and Lord Chatham studied the diction- ary twice, every page, every word of it. Browning pored over it daily, finding in it entertainment as well as instruction. Lincoln “would sit In the twi- light,” records his biographers, Nicolay and Hay, “and read a dictionary as long as he could see.” These are not exceptional instances. Every writer and speaker of distinction has done the same. Woodrow Wilson was superbly skillful with the English language. Some of his writings — parts of his Declaration of War against Germany — will un- doubtedly take a place in literature. Here is his own story of how he learned to marshal words : “My father never allowed any member of his household to use an incorrect expression. Any slip on the part of one of the children was at once corrected; any unfamiliar word was immediately explained ; each of us was encouraged to find a use for it in our conversation so as to fix it in our memories.” A New York speaker who is often complimented upon the firm texture of his sentences and the simple beauty of his language, during the course of a con- versation recently, lifted the embargo on the secret of his power to choose true and incisive words. Each time he discovers an unfamiliar word in con- versation or reading matter, he notes it in his memorandum book. Then, just prior to retiring at night, he consults his dictionary and makes the word his own. If he has gathered no material in this fashion during the day, he studies a page or i 502 PUBLIC SPEAKING two of Fernald’s Synonyms , Antonyms and Preposi- tions, noting the exact meaning of the words which he would ordinarily interchange as perfect syno- nyms. A new word a day — that is his motto. This means in the course of a year three hundred and sixty-five additional tools for expression. These new words are stored away in a small pocket note book, and their meanings reviewed at odd moments dur- ing the day. He has found that a word becomes a permanent acquisition to his vocabulary when he has used it three times. ROMANTIC STORIES BEHIND THE WORDS YOU USE Use a dictionary not only to ascertain the mean- ing of the word, but also to find its derivation. Its history, its origin is usually set down in brackets after the definition. Do not imagine for a mo- ment that the words you speak each day are only dull, listless sounds. They are reeking with color; they are alive with romance. You cannot, for ex- ample, say so prosaic a thing as “Telephone the grocer for sugar, ” without using words that we have borrowed from many different languages and civ- ilizations. Telephone is made from two Greek words, tele } meaning far, and phone , meaning sound. Grocer comes from an old French word, grossier y and the French came from the Latin, grossarius / it literally means one who sells by the wholesale or gross. We got our word sugar from the French; the French borrowed it from the Spanish; the Span- ish lifted it from the Arabic; the Arabic took it 503 \mprot/ing YOUR DICTION | from the Persian; and the Persian word shaker was derived from the Sanskrit carkara , meaning candy. , You may wox-k for or own a company. Com- pany is derived from an old French word meaning companion; and companion is literally com , with, and pants, bread. Your companion is one with whom you have bread. A company is really an as- sociation of people who are trying to make their bread together. Your salary literally means your salt money. The Roman soldiers drew a certain allowance for salt, and one day some wag spoke of his entire income as his salarium, and created a bit of slang which has long since become respectable English. You are holding in your hand a book. It literally means beech, for a long time ago the Anglo-Saxons scratched their words on beech trees and on tablets of beech wood. The dollar that you have in your pocket literally means valley. Dollars were first coined in St. Joachim’s Thaler or dale or valley in the sixteenth century. The words janitor and January have both come down from the name of an Etruscan blacksmith who lived in Rome, and made a specialty of locks and bolts for doors. When he died, he was deified as a pagan god, and was represented as having two faces, so that he could look both ways at the same time, and was associated with the opening and clos- ing of doors. So the month that stood at the close of one year and the opening of another was called January, or the month of Janus. So when we talk of January or a janitor, a keeper of doors, we are honoring the name of a blacksmith who lived a 504 PUBLIC SPEAKING thousand years before the birth of Christ and who had a wife by the name of Jane. The seventh month, July, was named after Julius Caesar; so the Emperor Augustus, not to be out- done, called the next month August . But the eighth month had only thirty days at that time, and Augustus did not propose to have the month named after him any shorter than a month named after Julius; so he took one day away from February and added it to August, and the marks of this vain- glorious theft are evident on the calendar hanging in your home to-day. Trudy, you will find the his- tory of -words fascinating. Please look up in a large dictionary the deriva- tion of these words : atlas, boycott, cereal, colossal, concord, curfew, education, finance, lunatic, panic, palace, pecuniary, sandwich, tantalize. Get the stories behind them. It will make them doubly colorful, doubly interesting. You will use them, then, with added zest and pleasure. RE-WRITING ONE SENTENCE A HUNDRED AND FOUR TIMES IT Strive to say precisely what you mean, to express the most delicate nuances of thought. That is not always easy — not even for experienced writers. Fanny Hurst told me that she sometimes re-wrote her sentences from fifty to a hundred times. Only a few days prior to the conversation she said she had re-written one sentence one hundred and four times by actual count. Yet she was so accomplished a writer that the Cosmopolitan Magazine was pay- IMPROVING YOUR DICTION 505 ing her two thousand dollars a story. Mabel Her- bert Urner confided to me that she sometimes spent an entire, afternoon eliminating only one or two sentences from a short story that was to be syn- dicated through the newspapers. Gouverneur Morris has told how Richard Hard- ing Davis labored incessantly for just the right word : “Every phrase in his fiction was, of all the myriad phrases he could think of, the fittest in his relentless judg- ment to survive. Phrases, paragraphs, pages, whole stories even, were written over and* over again. He worked upon a principle of elimination. If he wished to describe an automobile turning in at a gate, he made first a long and elaborate description from which there was omitted no detail, which the most observant pair of eyes in Christendom has ever noted with reference to just such a turning. Thereupon he would begin a process of omitting one by one those details which he had been at such pains to recall ; and after each omission he would ask himself, ‘Does the picture remain ?* If it did not he restored the detail which he had just omitted, and experimented with the sacrifice of some other, and so on, and so on, until after Herculean labor there remained for the reader one of those swiftly flashed ice-clear pictures (complete in every detail) with which his tales and romances are so delightfully and continuously adorned.” Most students of this course have neither time nor disposition to search as diligently for words as the authors just described. These instances are cited to show you the importance successful writers attach to proper diction and expression, in the hope that it may encourage students to take an increased interest in the use of English. It is, of course, not 506 PUBLIC SPEAKING practical for a speaker to hesitate in a sentence and uh-uh about, hunting for the word which will ex- actly express the shade of meaning he desires to convey, but he should practise preciseness of ex- pression in his daily intercourse until it comes un- consciously. He should, but does he? He does not. Milton is reported to have employed eight thousand words, and Shakespeare fifteen thousand. A Standard Dictionary contains fifty thousand less than half a million; but the average man, according to popular estimates, gets along with approximately two thousand. He has some verbs, enough connectives to stick them together, a handful of nouns, and a few overworked adjec- tives. He is too lazy, mentally, or too absorbed in business, to train for precision and exactness. The result? Let me give you an illustration. I once spent a few unforgettable days on the rim of the Grand Canyon of the Colorado. In the course of an afternoon, I heard a lady apply the same adjective to a Chow dog, an orchestral selec- tion, a man’s disposition, and the Grand Canyon itself. They were all “beautiful.” What should she have said? Here are the syno- nyms that Roget lists for beautiful. Which adjec- tives do you think she should have employed? Adjective: beautiful, beauteous, handsome, pretty, lovely, graceful, elegant, exquisite, delicate, dainty. comely , fair, goodly, bonny, good-looking, well- favored, well-formed, well-proportioned, shapely, symmetrical, harmonious. 'improving YOUR DICTION 507 bright, bright-eyed, rosy-cheeked, rosy, ruddy, blooming, in full bloom. trim, .trig, tidy, neat, spruce, smart, jaunty, dap- P,U* brilliant, shining, sparkling, radiant, splendid, re- splendent, dazzling, glowing, glossy, sleek, rich, gorgeous, superb, magnificent, grand, fine. artistic, aesthetic, picturesque, pictorial, enchant- ing, attractive, becoming, ornamental. perfect, unspotted, spotless, immaculate, unde* formed, undefaced. passable , presentable,' tolerable, not amiss. The synonyms just quoted have been taken from Roget’s Treasury of Words. It is an abridged edi- tion of Roget’s Thesaurus. What a help this book is. Personally, I never write without having it at my elbow. I find occasion to use it ten times as often as I use the dictionary. What years of toil Roget consecrated to its mak- ing; yet it will come and sit on your desk and serve you a lifetime for the price of an inexpensive neck- tie. It is not a book to be stored away on a library shelf. It is a tool to be used constantly. Use it when writing out and polishing the diction of your talks. Use it in dictating your letters and your busi- ness reports. Use it daily, and it will double and treble your power with words. SHUN WORN-OUT PHRASES Strive not only to be exact, but to be fresh and original. Have the courage to say the thing as you see it, for “the God of things as they are.” 508 PUBLIC SPEAKING (I"'. For example, shortly after the flood, some original mind first used the comparison, “cool as a cucum- ber.” It was extraordinarily good then because it was extraordinarily fresh. Even as late as Bel- shazzar’s famous feast, it may still have retained enough of its pristine vigor to warrant its use in an after-dinner speech. But what man who prides himself on his originality would be guilty of repeat- ing it at this somewhat late date? Here are a dozen similes to express coldness. Aren’t they just as effective as the hackneyed “cu- cumber” comparison, and* far fresher and more acceptable? Cold as a frog. Cold as a hot-water bag in the morning. Cold as a ramrod. Cold as a tomb. Cold as Greenland’s icy mountains. Cold as clay. — Coleridge. Cold as a turtle.' — Richard Cumberland. Cauld as the drifting snow. — Allan Cunningham . Cold as salt. — James Huneker. Cold as an earthworm. — Maurice Maeterlinck . Cold as dawn. * Cold as rain in autumn. While the mood is upon you, think now of similes of your own to convey the idea of coldness. Have the courage to be distinctive. Write them here: Cold as Cold as Cold as Cold as o IMPROVING YOUR DICTION 509 I' I once asked Kathleen Norris, who is reputed to be America’s highest paid writer of magazine serial fiction, how style could be developed. “By reading classics of prose and poetry,” she replied, “and by critically eliminating stock phrases and hackneyed expressions from your work.” A magazine editor once told me that when he found two or three hackneyed expressions in a story submitted for publication, he returned it to the au- thor without wasting time reading it; for, he added, one who has no originality of expression will exhibit little originality of thou’ght. SUMMARY 1. We have only four contacts with people. We are evaluated and classified by four things : by what we do, by how we look, by what we say, and how we say it. How often we are judged by the lan- guage we use. Charles W. Eliot, after he had been president of Harvard for a third of a cen- tury, declared: “I recognize but one mental acquisi- tion as a necessary part of the education of a lady or gentleman,* namely, an accurate and refined use of the mother tongue.” 2. Your diction will be very largely a reflection of the company you keep. So follow Lincoln’s ex- ample and keep company with the masters of lit- erature. Spend your evenings, as he often did, with Shakespeare and the other great poets and masters of prose. Do that and unconsciously, inevitably, your mind will be enriched and your diction will take on something of the glory of your companions. 510 PUBLIC SPEAKING 3. “I have given up newspapers in exchange for Tacitus and Thucydides* for Newton and Euclid,” wrote Thomas Jefferson* “and I find myself much the happier.” Why not follow his example? Don’t give up the newspapers completely, but skim through in half the time you now devote to them. Give the time you thus salvage to the reading of some en- during book. Tear out twenty or thirty pages from such a volume, carry them in your pocket, read them at odd moments during the day. 4. Read with a dictionary by your side. Look up the unfamiliar word. Try f to find a use for it so that you may fix it in your memory. 5. Study the derivation of the words you use. Their histories are not dull and dry; often they are replete with romance. For example, the word salary really means salt money . The Roman sol- diers were given an allowance for the purchase of salt. Some wag one day created a bit of slang by referring to his wage as his salt money, 6. Don’t use shopworn, threadbare words. Be precise, exact, in your meaning. Keep Roget’s Treasury of Words on your desk. Refer to it often. Don’t qualify as “beautiful” everything that is ap- pealing to the eye. You may convey your meaning more precisely and with more freshness and beauty if you employ some synonym of beautiful — such as elegant } exquisite, handsome, dainty, shapely, jaunty, dapper, radiant, dazzling, gorgeous, superb, mag- nificent, picturesque , etc. 7. Don’t use trite comparisons such as “cool as a cucumber.” Strive for freshness. Create similes of your own. Have the courage to be distinctive. 1 . i SPEECH BUILDING WORDS OFTEN MISPRONOUNCED See if you can pronounce all of the italicized words in the following selection: On his awakening, after the tempestuous day, the aviator rose from his bed before the broken hearth and looked over his radiator and carburetor carefully to see that they were not injured. After all parts were lubricated, even before the dew was off the grass, he flew due east as his duty called. His aerial trip was aided by his knowledge of the geog- raphy of the country. He was an athlete ; the boisterous and jovial events of the past evening did not ajfect his dexterous handling of the white ship. He did not need the whit) of whiskey to steady his hand on the wheel . Neither did the memories of the plaudits of the gallery nor the past history of his comrades of the squadron abate his constant watch over the boundaries, » ERRORS IN ENGLISH Review. You will find in the following examples that an attempt has been made to cover most of the important rules which have been placed before you. If you can avoid all the pitfalls which have been. shown in the previous lessons you will speak a quality of English which is far above that usually heard. 511 512 PUBLIC SPEAKING How many of these sentences are incorrect, and why? He told you and I a different story. * Just between you and me, 1 admit she done the best she could. Let’s you and I go now. Were you and I invited the day he come home? John is taller than me. Mr. Smith and I work together. Everybody cashed their checks in order to enjoy the holiday. I am introducing a stenographer who you will like. She had bidden $20 for the coat and didn’t get it. The man was hanged after he had been convicted before a jury. Eliza had not swum across the river because of the ice. Part of the material have been shipped. A thousand dollars were lost in the deal. That kind of a house will not stand the climate. He, as well as I, have taken the risk. These sort of investments are not safe. Scarcely had the lamp been lighted when it was shot out. She had two son-in-laws who were worthless. My two mothers-in-law’s husbands were drowned. The robbers hunted everywheres for the money. Mr. Long don’t take chances on margin buying. Do you suppose it to be him? Us and our friends play bridge together. He had lain the mail on the desk, but the presi dent had not saw them. 'improving YOUR DICTION 513 Neither Mr. Blank or him were to blame for the mistake. The file clerk had went through the files care- fpl!y. The firm likes these kind of letter heads. They are finer than your’s. A person can save money by paying your bills on time. A man can’t drive a car without he has a driver’s license. We have never had quite as much fun as we did in this class. “I didn’t do nothing,” is the wail that many a child raises. It only has been a comparatively few years since the government was founded. He has almost exhausted all his resources. If your laundry don’t give satisfaction, try ours. CORRECT USAGE OF WORDS Which of the following sentences are incorrect, and why? » 1. There must be a spirit of loyalty between all the states in the Union. 2. I have acquired an antipathy for the man. 3. He is bound to succeed at all costs. 4. He was fortunate in getting a good education. 5. She has the ability to sing well when she wants to. 6. ' May I call to-morrow? 7. We had a delightful dinner. 514 PUBLIC SPEAKING 8. He was greatly effected by f the news of her death. 9. He tried to enthuse me over both plans. 10. Onions are a very healthy food. 11. Swimming is a healthful exercise. 12. We are likely to have difficulties. 13. This is a unique opportunity to get a bargain in real estate. 14. He is a very social person. 15. He has an extraordinary capacity for hard work. 16. I anticipated this advance in prices when I ordered last autumn. 17. The pugilist has immense strength. 18. He has a bias toward the manual trades. 19. The event transpired but it did not become known. 20. Our horse is liable to win. VOICE EXERCISE— REVIEW 1. Turn to the poem The Cataract of Lodore , in Chapter VI. Read this aloud, paying espercial attention to four things. a. Be sure that you are breathing from the diaphragm. b. Be sure that you have a reserve of breath in your lungs to act as a spring board to launch your words to give them carrying power. c. Be sure that your throat is open and utterly free and relaxed. d. Be sure that you are using nasal resonance, IMPROVING YOUR DICTION 515 (See Voice Exercise, Chapter XIII.) Accentuate the ng sounds that are found in almost every line of this poem. Let them ring through your nose. , 2. Read the following verses aloud using the fal- setto voice to develop brightness. (See Voice Ex- ercise, Chapter VII.) “True worth is in being, not seeming, In doing each day that goes by Some little good, not in dreaming Of great ’things to do by and by. “For whatever men say in their blindness, And in spite of the follies of youth, There is nothing so kingly as kindness, And nothing so royal as truth.” 3. Read the following verses aloud, paying es- pecial attention to the tip of the tongue. Feel it striking the back of the teeth with an elastic touch. This will give vivacity and a sense of speed to your reading. (See Chapter VI.) THE FIRST OF SEPTEMBER “The first of September, remember The day of supremest delight. Get ready the cartridge, the partridge Must fall in the stubble ere night. “The breech-loader’s ready, and steady The dog that we taught in old days; He’s firm to his duty, a beauty That comes for but one person’s praise* “He is careful in stubble, no trouble, In turnips he’s keen as a man ; 516 PUBLIC SPEAKING r But looks on acutely, and mutely Seems saying ‘Shoot well, if you can. 5 “They flash from the cover, what lover* Of sport does not thrill as they rise * In feathered apparel? Each barrel Kills one, as the swift covey flies. “One pipe, then be doing, pursuing The sport that no sport can eclipse: So homeward to dinner, a winner Of praise from the fairest of lips.” — Savile Clark in Punch . e 4. Hum the tune of the Long , Long Trail . Fol- lowing the directions given in the Voice Exercise for Chapter XI, feel the resonance, the vibrations, in the top of your head, the back of your head, the chest, the nasal cavities, the face. As you hum, try to feel in the head, the same cool, open, taking-in sensation that you experience when you are inhaling: LONG, LONG TRAIL “There’s a long, long trail a-winding Into the land of mw dreams, Where the nightingales are singing And a white moon beams; There’s a long, long night of waiting Until my dreams all come true; Till the day when I’ll be going down That long, long trail with you.” 5. Read the following poem, “The Vagabond, 55 by Robert Louis Stevenson, with the same spirit of happiness singing in your voice that must have sung in Stevenson’s heart when he wrote it. As we IMPROVING YOUR DICTION 517 "J pointed out in the Voice Exercise for Chapter VII, the reading of joyous poetry is one of the very best means for developing bright, attractive tones. * “Give me the life I love, Let the lave go by me, Give the jolly heavens above And the byway nigh me. Bed in the bush with stars to see. Bread I dip in the river — There’s the life for a man like me, There’s the life" forever. “Let the blow fall soon or late. Let what will be o’er me: Give the face of earth around And the road before me. Wealth I seek not, hope nor love, Nor a friend to know me; All I seek, the heaven above And the road below me.” In conclusion, let 41s warn the student that the mere reading and casual practising now and then of the voice exercises outlined in this course will not procure the most desirable results. They ought to be practised daily. You will get out of them only what you put into them — nothing more, nothing less. APPENDIX ACRES of diamonds RUSSELL H. CONWELL No other lecture has ever been delivered as often by its author as Acres of Diamonds ” If one were to deliver the same lecture each night in the yect) m for fifteen years, he would not at the end of that time have equalled Dr. ConwelVs record. The noted Philadelphian preached his " Acres of Diamonds ” philosophy more than five thousand seven hundred times . If the proceeds from this lecture had been put out at compound interest, the sum would aggregate more than eight million dollars . With the profits from, his various lectures, this man who in his youth waged such a bitter struggle to get an education, helped more than three thou - sand men through college . ACRES OF DIAMONDS By Russell H. Conwell In 1870 we wept down the Tigris River. We hired a guide at Bagdad to show us Persepolis, Nineveh and Baby- lon, and the ancient countries of Assyria as far as the Ara- bian Gulf. He was well acquainted with the land, but he was one of those guides who love to entertain their patrons ; he was like a barber that tells you many stories in order to keep your mind off the scratching and the scraping. He told me so many stories that I grew tired of his telling them and I refused to listen — looked away whenever he commenced; that made the guide quite angry. I remembered that toward evening he took his Turkish cap off his head and swung it around in the air. The gesture I did not understand and I did not look at him for fear I should become victim of another story. But, although I am not a woman, I did look, and* the instant I turned my eyes upon that worthy guide he was off again. Sai^ he, “I will tell you a story now which I reserve'' for my particular friends !” So then, count- ing myself a particular friend, I listened, and I have always been glad I did. He said there once lived not far from the River Indus an ancient Persian by the name of AI Hafed. He said that A 1 Hafed owned a very large farm with orchards, grain fields, and gardens. He was a contented and wealthy man — contented because he was wealthy, and wealthy because he was contented. One day there visited this old farmer one of those ancient Buddhist priests, and he sat down by Al Hafed’s fire and told that old farmer how this world of $21 522 APPENDIX f ours was made. He said that this world was once a mere bank of fog, which is scientifically true, and he said that the Almighty thrust his finger into the bank of fog and then began slowly to move his finger around and gradually to increase the speed of his finger until at last he whirled that bank of fog into a solid ball of fire, and it went rolling through the universe, burning its way through other cosmic banks of fog, until it condensed the moisture without, and fell in floods of rain upon the heated surface and cooled the outward crust. Then the internal flames burst through the cooling crust and threw up the mountains and made the hills and the valleys of this -wonderful world of ours. If this Internal melted mass hurst out and cooled very quickly it became granite; that which cooled less quickly became silver; and less quickly, gold; and after gold dia- monds were made. Said the old priest, “A diamond is a congealed drop of sunlight.” This is a scientific truth also. You all know that a dia- mond is pure carbon, actually deposited' sunlight — and he said another thing I would not forget: he declared that a diamond is the last and highest of God’s mineral creations, as a woman is the last and highest of God’s animal creations. I suppose that is the reason w r hy the two have such a liking for each other. And the old priest told A1 Hafed that if he had a handful of diamonds he ^could purchase a whole country, and with a mine of diamonds he <could place his children upon thrones through the influence of their great wealth. AI Hafed heard all about diamonds and how much they were worth, and went to his bed that night a poor man — not that he had lost anything, but poor because he was discontented and discontented because be thought he was poor. He said: “I want a mine of diamonds.” So he lay awake all night, and early in the morning sought out the priest. Now I know from experience that a priest- when awakened early in the morning is cross. He awoke that priest out of his dreams and said to him, “Will you tell me ACRES OF DIAMONDS 523 where I can find diamonds?” The priest said, “Diamonds? What do you want with diamonds?” “I want to be im- mensely rich,” said A1 Hafed, “but I don't know where to go.” “Well,” said the priest, “if you will find a river that rtms over white sand between high mountains, in those sands you will always see diamonds.” “Do you really believe that there is such a river?” “Plenty of them, plenty of them; all you have to do is just go and find them, then you have them.” A1 Hafed said, “I will go.” So he sold his farm, collected his money at interest, left his family in charge of a neighbor, and away he went in search of diamonds. He began very properly, to my mind, at the Mountains of the Moon. Afterwards he went around into Palestine, then wandered on into Europe, and at last when his money was all spent, and he was in rags, wretchedness, and poverty, he stood on the shore of that bay in Barcelona. Spain, when a tidal wave came rolling through the Pillars of Hercules and the poor, afflicted, suffering man could not resist the awful temptation to cast himself into that incoming tide, and he sank beneath its foaming crest, never to rise in this life again. When that old guide had told me that very sad story, he stopped the camel I was riding and went back to fix the baggage on one of the other camels, and I remember thinking to myself, “Why did he reserve that for his particular friends f* Ther$ seemedlo be no beginning, middle, or end — nothing to it. That was the first story I had ever heard told or read in which the hero was killed in the first chapter. I had but one chapter of that story and the hero was dead. When the guide came back and took up the halter of my camel again, he went right on with the same story. He said that A1 Hafed’s successor led his camel out into the garden to drink, and as the camel put its nose down into the clear water^of the garden brook A1 Hafed's successor noticed a curious flash of light from the sands of the shallow stream, and reaching in he pulled out a black stone having an eye 524 APPENDIX of light that reflected all the colors o r i the rainbow, and he took that curious pebble into the house and left it on the mantel, then went on his way and forgot all about it. A few days after that, this same old priest who told r Al Hafed how diamonds were made, came in to visit his successor. When he saw that flash of light from the mantel, he rushed up and said, “Here is a diamond — here is a diamond ! Has A1 Hafed returned ?” “No, no; A1 Hafed has not returned and that is not a diamond ; that is nothing but a stone ; we found it right out here in our garden.” “But I know a diamond when I see it,” said he; “that if a diamond!” Then together they rushed to the garden and stirred up the white sands with their fingers and found other more beautiful, more valuable diamonds than the first, and thus, said the guide to me, were discovered the diamond mines of Golconda, the most magnificent diamond mines in all the history of mankind, exceeding the Kimberley in its value. The great Kohinoor diamond in England’s crown jewels and the largest crown diamond on earth in Russia’s crown jewels which I had often hoped she would have to sell before they had peace with Japan, came from that mine, and when the old guide had called my attention to that wonderful discovery he took his Turkish cap off his head again and swung it around in the air to call my attention to the moral. Those Arab guides have a moral to each story, though the stories are not avvvays mgral. He said, had AI Hafed remained at home and dug in his own cellar or in his own garden, instead of wretchedness, starvation, poverty, and death in a strange land, he would have had “acres of diamonds” — for every acre, yes, every shovelful of that old farm afterwards revealed the gems which since have decorated the crowns of monarchs. When he had given the moral to his story, I saw why he had reserved this story for his “particular friends.” I didn’t tell him I could see it; I was not going to tell that old Arab that I could see it For it was that mean old Arab’s way of going ACRES OF DIAMONDS 525 around a thing, likd a lawyer, and saying indirectly what he did not dare say directly, that there was a certain young man that day traveling down the Tigris River that might better be 1 * at home in America. I didn’t tell him I could see it. I told him his story reminded me of one, and I told it to him quick. I told him about that man out in California, who, in 1847, owned a ranch out there. He read that gold had been discovered in Southern California, and he sold his ranch to Colonel Sutter and started off to hunt for gold. Colonel Sutter pul? a mill on the little stream in that farm and one day his little girl brought some wet sand from the raceway of the mill into t^e house and placed it before the fire to dry, and as that sand was falling through the Kltle girl’s fingers a visitor saw the first shining scales of real gold that were ever discovered in California ; and the man who wanted the gold had sold this ranch and gone away, never to return. I delivered this lecture two years ago in Cali- fornia, in the city that stands near that farm, and they told me that the mine is not exhausted yet, and that a one-third owner of that farm has been getting during these recent years twenty dollars of gold every fifteen minutes of his life, sleeping or waking. Why, you and I would enjoy an income like that. But the best illustration that I have now of this thought was found in Pennsylvania. There was a man living in Pennsylvania who owned a farm there, and he did what I should do if I had a farm in Pennsylvania — he sold it. But before he sold it he concluded to secure employment collecting coal oil for his cousin in Canada. They first discovered coal oil there. So this farmer in Pennsylvania decided that he would apply for a position with his cousin in Canada. Now, you see, this farmer was not altogether a foolish man. He did not leave his farm until he had something else to do. Of all the simpletons the stars shine on there is none more foolish than a man who leaves one job before he has obtained 526 APPENDIX another. And that has especial reference to gentlemen of my profession, and has not reference to a man seeking a divorce. So I say this old farmer did not leave one job until he had obtained another. He wrote to Canada, but his cousin replied that he could not engage him because he did not know anything about the oil business. “Well, then/ 5 said he, “I will understand it. 55 So he set himself at the study of the whole subject. He began at the second day of the creation, he studied the subject from the primitive vegetation to the coal oil stage, until he knew all about it. Then he wrote to his cousin and said, <v Now I understand the oil business. 55 And his cousin replied to him, “All right, then, come on. 55 # That man, by the record of the county, sold his farm for eight hundred and thirty-three dollars — even money, “no cents. 55 He had scarcely gone from that farm before the man who purchased it went out to arrange for watering the cattle and he found that the previous owner had arranged the matter very nicely. There is a stream running down the hillside there, and the previous owner had gone out and put a plank across that stream at an angle, extending across the brook and down edgewise a few inches under the sur- face of the water. The purpose of the plank across that brook was to throw over to the other bank a dreadful- looking scum through which the cattle would not put their noses to drink above the plank, although they would drink the water on one side below it. Thus that man who had gone to Canada had been himself damming back for twenty- three years a flow of coal oil which the State Geologist of Pennsylvania declared officially, as early as 1870, was then worth to our State, a hundred millions of dollars. The city of Titusville now stands on that farm and those Pleasant- ville wells flow on, and that farmer who had studied all about the formation of oil since the second day of God 5 s creation clear down to the present time, sold that farm for $833, no cents — again I say, “no sense. 55 ACRES OF DIAMONDS 527 But I need another illustration, and I found that in Mas- sachusetts, and I am sorry I did, because that is my old State. This young man I mention went out of the State 1 to study— Vent down to Yale College and studied Mines [ ai?d Mining. They paid him fifteen dollars a week during j his last year, for training students who were behind their j classes in mineralogy, out of hours, of course, while pursuing j his own studies. But when he graduated they raised his pay from fifteen dollars to forty-five dollars and offered him a professorship. Then he went straight home to his mother and said, “Mother,* I won’t work for forty-five dollars a week. What is forty-five dollars a week for a man with a brain like mine! Mother, diet’s go out to California and j stake out gold claims and be immensely rich.” “No,” said I his mother, “it is just as well to be happy as it is to be i rich.” But as he was the only son he had his way — they always ji do; and they sold out in Massachusetts and went to Wis- j consin, where he went into the employ of the Superior Copper Mining Company, and he was lost from sight in the employ of that company at fifteen dollars a week again. He was also to have an interest in any mines that he should discover for that company. But I do not believe that he has ever discovered a mine — I do not know anything about ; it, but I do not believe he has. I know he had scarcely gone from the old homestead before the farmer who had bought the homestead went o^t to dig potatoes, and as he was bringing them in in a large basket through the front gateway, the ends of the stone wall came so near together at the gate that the basket hugged very tight. So he set jj the basket on the ground and pulled, first at one side and • j then on the other side. Our farms in Massachusetts are i| mostly stone walls, and the farmers have to be economical j with their gateways in order to have some place to put the stones? That basket hugged so tight there that as he was j hauling it through he noticed in the upper stone next the 528 APPENDIX gate a block of native silver, eight indies square; and this professor of mines and mining and mineralogy, who would not work for forty-five dollars a week, when he sold that homestead in Massachusetts, sat right on that stone to make the bargain. He was brought up there; he had gone back and forth by that piece of silver, rubbed it with his sleeve, and it seemed to say, “Come now, now, now, here’s a hundred thousand dollars. Why not take me?” But he would not take it. There was no silver in Newburyport; it was all away off — well, I don’t know where; he didn’t, but somewhere else — and he was a professor of mineralogy. I do not know of anything I would enjoy better than to take the whole time tonight teeing of blunders like that I have heard professors make. Yet I wish I knew what that man is doing out there in Wisconsin. I can imagine him out there, as he sits by his fireside, and he is saying to his friends, “Do you know that man Conwell that lives in Philadel- phia?” “Oh, yes, I have heard of him.” “And do you know that man Jones that lives in that city?” “Yes, I have heard of him.” And then he begins to laugh and laugh and says to his friends, “They have done the same thing I did,precisely.” And that spoils the whole joke, because you
and I have done it. Ninety out of every hundred people here have made that mistake this very day. I say you ought to be rich; you have no right to be poor. To live ifi Philadelphia and not be rich is a misfortune, and it is doubly a misfortune, because you could have been rich just as well as be poor. Phila- delphia furnishes so many opportunities. You ought to be rich. But persons with certain religious prejudice will ask, “How can you spend your time advising the rising genera- tion to give their time to getting money — dollars and cents — * the commercial spirit?” Yet I must say that you ought to spend time getting rich. You and I know there are some things more valuable than money; of course, we do. Ah, yes! By a heart made ACRES OF DIAMONDS 529 unspeakably sad by 1 ) a grave on which the autumn leaves now fall, I know there are some things higher and grander and sublimer than money. Well does the man know, who has suffered, that there are some things sweeter and holier and more sacred than gold. Nevertheless, the man of com- mon sense also knows that there is not any one of these things that is not greatly enhanced by the use of money. Money is power. Love is the grandest thing on God’s earth, but fortunate the lover who has plenty of money. Money is power ; money has powers ; and for a man to say, u l do not want moftey,” is to say, “I do not wish to do any good to my fellowmen.” It is absurd thus to talk. It is* absurd to disconnect them.,, This is a wonderfully great life, and you ought to spend your time getting money, be- cause of the power there is in money. And yet this religious prejudice is so great that some people think it is a great honor to be one of God’s poor. I am looking in the faces of people who think just that way. I heard a man once say in a prayer meeting that he was thankful that he was one of God’s poor, and then I silently wondered what his wife would say to that speech, as she took in washing to support the man while he sat and smoked on the veranda. I don’t want to see any more of that kind of God’s poor. Now, when a man could have been rich just as well, and he is now weak because he is poor, he has done some great wrong ,* he has been untruthful to himself : he has been unkind to ' r\ * his fellowmen. We ought to get rich if we can by hon- orable and Christian methods, and these are the only methods that sweep us quickly toward the goal of riches. I remember, not many years ago, a young theological student who came into my office and said to me that he thought it was his duty to come in and “labor with me.” I asked him what had happened, and he said: “I feel it is my duty to come in and speak to you, sir, and say that the Holy Scriptures declare that money is the root of all evil.” I asked him where he found that saying, and he said he found 530 APPENDIX it in the Bible. I asked him whether %e had made a new Bible, and he said, no, he had not gotten a new Bible, that it was in the old Bible. “Well/’ I said, “If it is in my Bible, I never saw it. Will you please get the* text-book and let me see it?” He left the room and soon came stalk- ing in with his Bible open, with all the bigoted pride of the narrow sectarian, who founds his creed on some misinter- pretation of Scripture, and he put the Bible down on the table before me and fairly squealed into my ear, “There it is. You can read it for yourself.” I said to him, “Young man, you will learn when you get a little older, that you cannot trust another denomination to read the Bible for you.” I said, “Now, you belong to another denomination. Please read it to me, and remember that you are taught in a school where emphasis is exegesis.” So he took the Bible and read it : “The love of money is the root of all evil.” Then he had it right. The Great Book has come back into the esteem and love of the people, and into the respect of the greatest minds of earth, and now you can quote it and rest your life and your death on it without more fear. So. when he quoted right from the Scriptures he quoted the truth. “The love of money is the root of all evil.” Oh, that is it. It is the worship of the means instead of the end, though you cannot reach the end without the means. When a man makes an idol of the money instead of the pur- poses for which it may be used, wh&n he squeezes the dollar until the eagle squeals, then it is made the root of all evil. Think, if you only had the money, what you could do for your wife, your child, and for your home and your city. Think how soon you could endow the Temple College yonder if you only had the money and the disposition to give it ; and yet, my friend, people say you and I should not spend the time getting rich. How inconsistent the whole thing is. We ought to be rich, because money has power. I think the best thing for me to do is to illustrate this, for if I say you ought to get rich, I ought, at least, to suggest 531 I ACRES OF DIAMONDS how it is done. get a prejudice against rich men be- cause of the lies that are told about them. The lies that are told about Mr. Rockefeller because he has two hundred million dollars — so many believe them ; yet how false is the representation of that man to the world. How little we can tell what is true nowadays when newspapers try to sell their papers entirely on some sensation ! The way they lie about the rich men is something terrible, and I do not know that there is anything to illustrate this better than what the newspapers now say about the city of Philadelphia. A young man came to me the other day and said, “If Mr. Rockefeller, as you think, is a good man, why is it that everybody says so much against him ?” It is because he has gotten ahead of us; that is the whole of it — just gotten ahead of us. Why is it Mr. Carnegie is criticized so sharply by an envious world ? Because he has gotten more than we have. If a man knows more than I know, don’t I incline to criticize somewhat his learning? Let a man stand in a pulpit and preach to thousands, and if I have fifteen people in my church, and they’re all asleep, don’t I criticize him? We always do that to the man who gets ahead of us. Why, the man you are criticizing has one hundred millions, and you have fifty cents, and both of you have just what you are worth. One of the richest men in this country came into my home and sat down in my parlor and said: “Did you see all those lies about my family in the paper?” “Certainly I did; I knew 'they were lies when I saw them.” “Why do they lie about me the way they do?” “Well,” I said to him, “if you will give me your check for one hundred millions, I will take all the lies along with it.” “Well,” said he, “I don’t see any sense in their thus talking about my family and myself. Conwell, tell me frankly, what do you think the American people think of me?” “Well,” said I, “they think you are the blackest-hearted villain that ever trod the soil!” “But what can I do about it?” There is nothing he can do about it, and yet he is one of the sweetest 532 APPENDIX Christian men I ever knew. If you g^t a hundred millions you will have the lies; you will be lied about, and you can judge your success in any line by the lies that are told about you. I say that you ought to be rich. But thq*e are ever coming to me young men who say, “I would like to go iijto business, but I cannot.” “Why not?” “Because I have no capital to begin on.” Capital, capital to begin on! What! young man! Living in Philadelphia and looking at this wealthy generation, all of whom began as poor boys, and you want capital to begin on? It is fortunate for you that you have no capital. I am glad you ha^e no money. I pity a rich man’s son. A rich man’s son in these days of ours occupies a very difficult position. They are to be pitied. A rich man’s son cannot know the very best things in human life. He cannot. The statistics of Massachusetts show us that not one out of seventeen rich men’s sons ever die rich. They are raised in luxury, they die in poverty. Even if a rich man’s son retains his father’s money even then he can- not know the best things of life. A young man in our college yonder asked me to formulate for him what I thought was the happiest hour in a man’s history, and I studied it long and came back convinced that the happiest hour that any man ever sees in any earthly matter is when a young man takes his bride over the threshold of the door, for the first time, of the house he himself has earned and built, when he turns to his bride and with an eloquence greater than any language of mine, he sayeth to his wife, “My loved one, I earned this home myself; I earned it all. It is all mine, and I divide it with thee.” That is the grandest moment a human heart may ever see. But a rich man’s son cannot know that. He goes into a finer mansion, it may be, but he is obliged to go through the house and say, “Mother gave me this, mother gave me that, my mother gave me that, my mother gave me that,” until his wife wishes she had married his mother. Oh, I pity a rich man’s son. I do, until he gets so far along ACRES OF DIAMONDS 533 in his dudeism tMt he gets his arms up like that and can't get them down. Didn’t you ever see any of them astray at Atlantic City ? I saw one of these scarecrows once and I nearer tire thinking about it. I was at Niagara Falls lecturing, and after the lecture I went to the hotel, and when I went up to the desk there stood there a millionaire’s son from New York. He was an indescribable specimen of anthropologic impotency. He carried a gold-headed cane under his arm — more in its head than he had in his. I do not believe I could describe the young man if I should try. But still I must say that he wore an eye-glass he could not see through; patent leather shoes he could not walk in, and pants he could not sit dowq in — dressed like a grasshopper! Well, this human cricket came up to the clerk’s desk just as I came in. He adjusted his unseeing eyeglass in this vcise and lisped to the clerk, because it’s “Hinglish, you know,” to lisp: “Thir, thir, will you have the kindness to fuhnish me with thome papah and thome envelopehs!” The clerk measured that man quick, and he pulled out a drawer and took some envelopes and paper and cast them across the counter and turned away to his books. You should have seen that specimen of humanity when the paper and en- velopes came across the counter — he whose wants had always been anticipated by servants. He adjusted his unseeing eye- glass and he yelled after that clerk: “Come back here, thir, come right back here. Now, thir, will you order a thervant to take that papah and thothe envelopes and carry them to yondah dethk.” Oh, the poor miserable, contemptible American monkey He couldn’t carry paper and envelopes twenty feet. I suppose he could not get his arms down. I have no pity for such travesties of human nature. If you have no capital, I am glad of it. You don’t need capital; you need common sense, not copper cents. A. T. Stewart, the great princely merchant of New York, the rfchest man in America in his time, was a poor boy; he had a. dollar and a half and went into the mercantile 534 APPENDIX business. But he lost eighty-seven and# a half cents of his first dollar and a half because he bought some needles and thread and buttons to sell, which people didn’t want. Are you poor? It is because you are not wanted and are left on your own hands. There was the great lessor. Apply it whichever way you will it comes to every single person’s life, young or old. He did not know what people needed, and consequently bought something they didn’t want and had the goods left on his hands a dead loss. A. T. Stewart learned there the great lesson of his mercantile life and said, “I will never buy anything more until I first learn what the people want; then I’ll make the purchase.” He went around to the doors # and asked them what they did want, and when he found out what they wanted, he invested his sixty-two and a half cents and began to supply “a known demand.” I care not what your profession or occupation in life may be; I care not whether you are a lawyer, a doctor, a housekeeper, a teacher, or whatever else, the principle is precisely the same. We must know what the world needs first and then invest ourselves to supply that need, and success is almost certain. A. T. Stewart went on until he was worth forty millions. “Well,” you will say, “ a man can do that in New York, but cannot do it here in Philadelphia.” The statistics very carefully gath- ered in New York in 1889 showed one hundred and seven millionaires in the city worth ovef ten millions apiece. It was remarkable and people think they must go there to get rich. Out of that one hundred and seven millionaires only seven of them made their money in New York, and the others moved to New York after their fortunes were made, and sixty-seven out of the remaining hundred made their fortunes in towns of less than six thousand people, and the richest man in the country at that time lived in a town of thirty-five hundred inhabitants, and always lived there and never moved away. It is not so much where you are as what you are. But at the same time if the largeness of the city ACRES OF DIAMONDS 535 comes into the problem, then remember it is the smaller city that furnishes the great opportunity to make the millions of money. The best illustration that I can give is in refer- ence to Jolln Jacob Astor, who was a poor boy and who made all the money of the Astor family. He made more than his successors have ever earned, and yet he once held a mort- gage on a millinery store in New York, and because the people could not make enough money to pay the interest and the rent, he foreclosed the mortgage and took possession of the- store and went into partnership with the man who had failed. He kdpt the same stock, did not give him a dollar capital, and he left him alone and went out and sat down upon a bench in the park. Out there on that bench in the park he had the most important, and to my mind, the pleasantest part of that partnership business. He was watching the ladies as they went by ; and where is the man that wouldn’t get rich at that business? But when John Jacob Astor saw a lady pass, with her shoulders back and her head up, as if she did not care if the whole world looked on her, he studied her bonnet ; and before that bonnet was out of sight he knew the shape of the frame and the color of the trimmings, the curl of the — something on a bonnet. Sometimes I try to describe a woman’s bonnet, but it is of little use, for it would be out of style tomorrow night. So John Jacob Astor went to the store and said: “Now, put in the show wipdow jus? such a bonnet as I describe to you because,” said he, “I have just seen a lady who likes just such a bonnet. Do not make up any more till I come back.” And he went out again and sat on that bench in the park, and another lady of a different form and complexion passed him with a bonnet of different shape and color, of course. “Now,” said he, “put such a bonnet as that in the show window.” He didn’t fill his show window with hats and bonnets which drive people away and then sit in the back of the store and bawl because the people go somewhere else to trade. He didn’t put a hat or bonnet in that show 536 APPENDIX window the like of which he had not 0 seen before it was made up. In our city especially there are great opportunities for manufacturing, and the time has come when the line is drawn very sharply between the stockholders of the factory and their employes. Now, friends, there has also come a discouraging gloom upon this country and the laboring men are beginning to feel that they are being held down by a crust over their heads through which they find it impossible to break, and the aristocratic money-owner himself is so far above that he will never descend to their ^assistance. That is the thought that is in the minds of our people. But, friends, never in the history of our country was there an opportunity so great for the poor man to get rich as there is now in the city of Philadelphia. The very fact that they get discour- aged is what prevents them from getting rich. That is all there is to it. The road is open, and let us keep it open between the poor and the rich. I know that the labor unions have two great problems to contend with, and there is only one way to solve them. The labor unions are doing as much to prevent its solving as are the capitalists today, and there are positively two sides to it. The labor union has two difficulties; the first one is that it began to make a labor scale for all classes on a par, and they scale down a man that can earn five dollars a day to two and a half a day, in order to level up to him Sn imbeqile that cannot earn fifty cents a day. That is one of the most dangerous and discouraging things for the working man. He cannot get the results of his work if he do better work or higher work or work longer; that is a dangerous thing, and in order to get every laboring man free and every American equal to every other American, let the laboring man ask what he is worth and get it — not let any capitalist say to him: “You shall work for me for half of what yqyu are worth;” nor let any labor organization say “You shall work for the capitalist for half your worth.” Be a man, be ACRES OF DIAMONDS 537 independent, and \hen shall the laboring man find the road ever open from poverty to wealth. The other difficulty that the labor union has to , consider, and this problem they have to solve themselves, is the kind of orators who come and talk to them about the oppressive rich. I can in my dreams recite the oration I have heard again and again under such circumstances. My life has been with the laboring man. I am a laboring man myself. I have often^ in their assemblies, heard the speech of the man who has been invited to address the labor union. The man who gets up before the assembled company of honest laboring men and he begins by saying: “Oh, ye honest, industrious laboring men, who have furnished all the capital of the world, who have built all the palaces and constructed all the railroads and covered the ocean with her steamships. Oh, you laboring men! You are nothing but slaves; you are ground down in the dust by the capitalist who is gloat- ing over you as he enjoys his beautiful estates and as he has his banks filled with gold, and every dollar he owns is coined out of the heart's blood of the honest laboring man." Now, that is a lie, and you know it is a lie; and yet that is the kind of speech that they are all the time hearing, representing the capitalists as wicked and the labor- ing men so enslaved. Why, how wrong it is! Let the man who loves his flag and believes in American principles en- deavor with alh his soul to bring the capitalist and the laboring man together until they stand side by side, and arm in arm, and work for the common good of humanity. He is an enemy to his country who sets capital against labor or labor against capital. Suppose I were to go down through this audience and ask you to introduce me to the great inventors who live here in Philadelphia. “The inventors of Philadelphia," you would say, “Why we don’t have any in Philadelphia. It is too slow to invent anything." But you do have just as great inventors, and they are here in this audience, as ever in- 538 APPENDIX vented a machine. But the probability^ that the greatest inventor to benefit the world with his discovery is some per- son, perhaps some lady, who thinks she could not invent anything. Did you ever study the history of invention and see how strange it was that the man who made the greatest discovery did it without any previous idea that he was an inventor? Who are the great inventors? They are persons with plain, straightforward common sense, who saw a need in the world and immediately applied themselves to study that need. If you want to invent anything, don’t Try to find it in the wheels in your head nor in the wheels in your machine, but first find out w 7 hat the people need, and then apply yourself to that need? and this leads to invention on the part of the people you would not dream of before. The great inventors are simply great men; the greater the man the more simple the man, and the more simple a ma- chine, the more valuable it is. Did you ever know 7 a really great man? His ways are so simple, so common, so plain, that you think any one could do what he is doing. So it is with the great men the world over. If you know a really great man, a neighbor of yours, you can go right up to him and say, “How are you, Jim, good morning, Sam.” Of course you can, for they are always so simple. When I w^rote the life of General Garfield, one of his neighbors took me to his back door^and shouted, “Jim, Jim, Jim!” and very soon “Jim” came to the deor and General Garfield let me in — one of the grandest men of our century. The great men of the world are ever so. I was down in Virginia and went up to an educational institution and was directed to a man who was setting out a tree. I approached him and said, “Do you think it would be possible for me to see General Robert E. Lee, the President of the University?” He said, “Sir, I am General Lee.” Of course, when you meet such a man, so noble a man as that, you will fine? him a simple, plain man. Greatness is always just so modest and great inventions are simple. ACRES OF DIAMONDS 539 I asked a class in school once who were the great inventors, and a little girl popped up and said, “Columbus.” Well, now, she was not so far wrong. Columbus bought a farm and he carried on that farm just as I carried on my father’s farm. He took a hoe, and went out and sat down on a rock. But Columbus, as he sat upon that shore and looked out upon the ocean, noticed that the ships, as they sailed away, sank deeper into the sea the farther they went. And since that time some other “Spanish ships” have sunk into the sea. But as Columbus noticed that the tops of the masts dropped down out of sight, he said: “That is the way it is with this hoe handle; if you go around this hoe handle, the farther off you go the farther down you go. I can sail around to the East Indies.” 7 * How plain it all was. How simple the mind — majestic, like the simplicity of a mountain ia its greatness. Who are the great inventors? They are ever the simple, plain, everyday people who see the need and set about to supply it. I was once lecturing in North Carolina, and the cashier of the bank sat directly behind a lady who wore a very large hat. I said to that audience, “Your wealth is too near to you; you are looking right over it.” He whispered to his friend, “Well, then, my wealth is in that hat.” A little later, as he wmote me, I said, “Wherever there is a human need there is a greater fortune than a mine can furnish.” He caught my thought, ^and drew up his plan for a better hat pin than was in the hat before him, and the pin is now being manufactured. He was offered fifty-five thousand dollars for his patent. That man made his fortune before he got out of that hall. This is the whole question: Do you see a need? I remember well a man up in my native hilL, a poor man, who for twenty years was helped by the town^ in his pov- erty, who owned a wide-spreading maple tree that covered the po*9r man’s cottage like a benediction from on high. I remember that tree, for in the spring — there were some I 540 APPENDIX roguish boys around that neighborhood when I was young — in the spring of the year the man would put a bucket there and the spouts to catch the maple sap, and I remember where that bucket was: and when I was young the bojs were, oh, so mean, that they went to that tree before that man had gotten out of bed in the morning, and after he had gone to bed at night, and drank up that sweet sap. I could swear they did it. He didn’t make a great deal of maple sugar from that tree. But one day he made the sugar so white and crystalline that the visitor did not believe it was maple sugar; thought maple sugar must be re$ or black. He said to the old man: “Why don’t you make it that way and sell it for confectionery?” The old man caught his thought and invented the “rock maple crystal,” and before that patent expired he had ninety thousand dollars and had built a beau- tiful palace on the site of that tree. After forty years owning that tree he awoke to find it had fortunes of money indeed in it. And many of us are right by the tree that has a fortune for us, and we own it, possess it, do what we will with it, but we do not learn its value because we do not see the human need; and in these discoveries and inventions this is one of the most romantic things of life. I have received letters from all over the country and from England, where I have lectured, saying that they have discovered this and that, and one man out in Ohio took me through his great factories last spring, and said that they cost him $680,000, and said he, “I was notnvorth a cent in the world when I heard your lecture, ‘Acres of Diamonds’ ; but I made up my mind to stop right here and make my fortune here, and here it is.” He showed me through his unmortgaged possessions. And this is a continual experience now as I travel through the country, after these many years. I mention tliis incident, not to boast, but to show you that you can do the same if you will. Who are the great inventors? I remember a good illus- tration in a man who used to live in East Brookfield, Mass. ACRES OF DIAMONDS 541 He was a shoemaker, and he was out of work, and he sat around the house until his wife told him to “go out doors.” And he did what every husband is compelled by law to do — he obeyed his wife. And he went out and sat down on an *ash barrel in his back yard. Think of it. Stranded on an ash barrel and the enemy in possession of the house! As he sat on that ash barrel, he looked down into that little brook which ran through the back yard into the meadows, and he saw a little trout go flashing up the stream and hiding under the bank. I do not suppose he thought of Tennyson's beautiful poem: o “I chatter, chatter, as I flow, To join the Brimming river; For men may come, and men may go, But I go on forever.” But as this man looked into the brook, he leaped off that ash barrel and managed to catch the trout with his fingers, and sent it to Worcester. They wrote back that they would give him a five dollar bill for another such trout as that, not that it was worth that much, but they wished to help the poor man. So this shoemaker and his wife, now perfectly united, that five dollar bill in prospect, went out to get another trout. They went up the stream to its source and down to the>brimming river, but not another trout could they find in the whole stream ; and so they came home disconsolate and went to the minister. The minister: didn't know how trout grew, but he pointed the way. Said he, “Get Seth Green’s book, and that will give you the in- formation you want.” They did so, and found all about the culture of trout. They found that a trout lays thirty-six hundred eggs every year and every trout gains a quarter of a pound every year, so that in four years a little trout will furnish four tons per annum to sell to the market at fifty cents a pound. When they found that, they said they 542 APPENDIX didn’t believe any such story as that, bi# if they could get five dollars apiece they could make something. And right in that same back yard with the coal sifter up stream and window screen down the stream, they began the culture of trout. They afterwards moved to the Hudson, and since then he has become the authority in the United States upon the raising of fish, and he has been next to the highest on the United States Fish Commission in Washington. My lesson is that man’s wealth was out there in his back yard for twenty years, but he didn’t see it until his wife jdtrove him out with a mop stick. * I remember meeting personally a poor carpenter of King- ham, Massachusetts, who was oi# of work and in poverty. His wife also drove him out of doors. He sat down on the shore and whittled a soaked shingle into a wooden chain. His children quarreled over it in the evening, and while he was whittling a second one, a neighbor came along and said, “Why don’t you whittle toys if you can carve like that?” He said, “I don’t know what to make!” There is the whole thing. His neighbor said to him: “Why don’t you ask your own children?” Said he, “What is the use of doing that? My children are different from other people’s children.” I used to see people like that when I taught school. The next morning when his boy came down the stairway, he said, “Sam, what do you want for a toy?” “I want a wheelbarrow.” When hfe little girl came down, he asked her what she wanted, and she said, “I want a little doll’s washstand, a little doll’s carriage, a little doll’s um- brella,” and went on with a whole lot of things that would have taken his lifetime to supply. He consulted his own children right there in his own house and began to whittle out toys to please them. He began with his jack-knife, and made those unpainted Hingham toys. He is the richest man in the entire New England States, if Mr. Lawson is to be trusted in his statement concerning such things, and yet that man’s fortune was made by consulting his own children in his ACRES OF DIAMONDS 543 a own house. You dop^'t need to go out of your own house to find out what to invent or what to make. I always talk too long on this subject. I would kke to meet the great men who are here tonight. The great men! We don't have any great men in Phila- delphia. Great men! You say that they all come from London, or San Francisco, or Rome, or Manayunk, or any- where else but here — anywhere else but Philadelphia — and yet, in fact, there are just as great men in Philadelphia as in any jjity of its size. There are great men and women in this audience. Great men, I have said, are very simple men. Just as many great men here as are to be found any- where. The greatest error in judging great men is that we think that they always hold an office. The world knows nothing of its greatest men. Who are the great men of the world? The young man and young woman may well ask the question. It is not necessary that they should hold an office, and yet that is the popular idea. That is the idea we teach now in our high schools and common schools, that the great men are those who hold some high office, and unless we change that very soon and do away with that prejudice, we are going to change to an empire. There is no question about it. We must teach that men are great only on their intrinsic value, and not on the position that they may incidentally happen to occup3>\ And yet, don't blame the young men saying that they are going to be great when they get into some official position. I ask this audience again, who of you are going to be great? Says a young man : . “I am going to be great." “When are you going to be great?" “When I am elected to some political office." Won't you learn the lesson, young man, that it is prima facte evidence of littleness to hold public office under our form of government? Think of it. This is a government of the people, and by the people, and for the people, and not fof the office-holder, and if the people in this country rule as they always should rule, an office-holder is only 544 APPENDIX the servant of the people, and the^ Bible says that 4 'the servant cannot be greater than his master.” The Bible says that “he that is sent cannot be greater than him who sent him.” In this country the people are the masters, and the office-holders can never be greater than the people; rthey should be honest servants of the people, but they are not our greatest men. Young man, remember that you never heard of a great man holding any political office in this country unless he took that office at the expense of himself. It is a loss to ever? great man to take a public offig£ in our country. Bear this in mind, young man, that you cannot be made great by a political election. Another young man says, “I am going to be a great man in Philadelphia some time.” “Is that so? When are you going to be great?” “When there comes another war! When we get into difficulty with Mexico, or England, or Russia, or Japan, or with Spain again over Cuba, or with New Jersey, I will march up to the cannon’s mouth, and amid the glistening bayonets I will tear down their flag from its staff, and I will come home with stars on my shoulders, and hold every office in the gift of the govern- ment, and I will be great.” “No, you won’t! No, you won’t ; that is no evidence of true greatness, young man.” But don’t blame that young man for thinking that way; that is the way he is taught in the high school. That is the way history is taught in college, die is taught that the men who held the office did all the fighting. r I remember we had a Peace Jubilee here in Philadelphia soon after the Spanish war. Perhaps some of these visitors think we should not have had it until now in Philadelphia, and as th6 great procession was going up Broad street I was told that the tally-ho coach stopped right in front of my house, and on the coach w T as Hobson, and all the people threw up their hats and swung their handkerchiefs, and shouted “Hurrah for Hobson !” I would have yelled too, because he deserves much more of his country than he has 545 ir» ACRES OF DIAMONDS ever received. Bu| suppose I go into the High School tomorrow and ask, “Boys, who sunk the Merrimac?” If they answer me “Hobson,” they tell me seven-eighths of a lie — seve%eighths of a lie, because there were eight men who spnk the Merrimac. The other seven men, by virtue of their positions, were continually exposed to the Spanish fire, while Hobson, as an officer, might reasonably be behind the smokestack. Why, my friends, in this intelligent audience gathered here tonight I do not believe I could find a single person^ that can name the other seven men who were with Hobson. Why da we teach history in that way? We ought to teach that however humble the station a man may occupy, if he does his full duty in his place, he is just as much entitled to the American people’s honor as is a king upon a throne,, We do teach it as a mother did her little boy in New York when he said, “Mamma, what great building is that?” “That is General Grant’s tomb.” “Who was General Grant?” “He was the man who put down the rebellion.” Is that the way to teach history? Do you think we would have gained a victory if it had depended on General Grant alone? Oh, no. Then why is there a tomb on the Hudson at all? Why, not simply because General Grant was personally a great man himself, but that tomb is there because he was a representative man and represented two hundred thousand men who went down to death for their nation and many of them as great as General Grant? That is why that beautiful tomb stands on the heights over the Hudson. I remember an incident that will illustrate this, the only one that I can give tonight. I am ashamed of it, but I don’t dare leave it out. I close my eyes now ; I look back through the years to 1863; I can see my native town in the Berkshire Hills, I can see that cattle-show ground filled with people; I can see that church there and the town hall crowoed, and hear bands playing, and see flags flying and handkerchiefs streaming — well do I recall at this moment 546 APPENDIX that day. The people had turned out to receive a company of soldiers, and that company came marching up on the Common. They had served out one term in the Civil War and had re-enlisted, and they were being receive^ by their native townsmen. I was but a boy, but I was captain of that company, puffed out with pride on that day — why, a cambric needle would have burst me all to pieces. As I marched on the Common at the head of my company, there was not a man more proud than I. We marched into the town hall and then they seated my soldiers down in the center of the house and I took my place* down on the front seat, and then the town officers filed through the great throng of people, who stood close and packed in that little hall. They came up on the platform, tormed a half circle around it, and the mayor of the town, the “chairman of the Select- men” in New England, took his seat in the middle of that half circle. He was an old man, his hair -was gray; he never held an office before in his life. He thought that an office w T as all he needed to be a truly great man, and when he came up he adjusted his powerful spectacles and glanced calmly around the audience with amazing dignit}^. Suddenly his eyes fell upon me, and then the good old man came right forward and invited me to come up on the stand with the town officers. Invited me up on the stand! No town officer ever took notice of me before I went to war. Now, I should not say that. One town officer was there who ad- vised the teacher to “whale” me, but I meat* no “honorable mention.” So I was invited up on the stand with the town officers. I took my seat and let my sword fall on the floor, and folded my arms across my breast and waited to be received. Napoleon the Fifth! Pride goeth before destruc- tion and a fail. When I had gotten my seat and all became silent through the hall, the chairman of the Selectmen arose and came forward with great dignity to the table, and we all supposed he would introduce the Congregational min- ister, who was the only orator in the town, and who would 547 ACRES OF DIAMONDS give the oration to the returning soldiers. But, friends, you should have seen the surprise that ran over that audience when they discovered that this old farmer was going to deliver that oration himself. He had never made a speech in 1 his life before, but he fell into the same error that others have fallen into, he seemed to think that the office would make him an orator. So he had written out a speech and walked up and down the pasture until he had learned it by heart and frightened the cattle, and he brought that manu^wript with him, and taking it from his pocket, he spread it carefully lT upon the table. Then he adjusted his spectacles to be sure that he might see it, and walked far back on the platform and the ? n stepped forward like this. He must have studied the subject much, for he assumed an elocutionary attitude; he rested heavily upon his left heel, slightly advanced the right foot, threw back his shoulders, opened the organs of speech, and advanced his right hand at an angle of forty-five degrees. As he stood in that elocu- tionary attitude this is just the way that speech went, this is it precisely. Some of my friends have asked me if I do not exaggerate it, but I could not exaggerate it. Impossible! This is the way it went; although I am not here for the story but the lesson that is back of it : “Fellow citizens/' As soon as he heard his voice, his hand began to shake like that, his knees began to tremble, and then he shook all o r Ver. He coughed and choked and finally came around to look at his manuscript. Then he began again: “Fellow citizens: We — are — we are — we are — we are — We are very happy — we are very happy — we are very happy — to welcome back to their native town these soldiers who have fought and bled — and come back to their native town. We are especially — -we are especially — we are especially — we are especially pleased to see with us today this y$ung hero (that meant me) — this young hero who in imagination (friends, remember, he said “imagination," for if he had not said that, I would not be egotistical enough 548 APPENDIX to refer to it) — this young hero who# in imagination, we have seen leading — we have seen leading — we have seen lead- ing his troops on to the deadly breach. We have seen his shining — his shining — we have seen his shining*— we have seen his shining — his shining sword — flashing in the sunlight as he shouted to his troops, ‘Come on P ” Oh, dear, dear, dear, dear! How little that good, old man knew about war. If he had known anything about war, he ought to have known what any soldier in this audi- ence knows is true, that it is next to a crime for aivofficer of infantry ever in time of danger to g?5 ahead of his men. I, with my shining sword flashing in the sunlight, shouting to my troops: “Come on.” I ngver did it. Do you suppose I would go ahead of my men to be shot in the front by the enemy and in the back by my own men? That is no place for an officer. The place for the officer is behind the private soldier in actual fighting. How often, as a staff officer, I rode down the line when the Rebel cry and yell was coming out of the woods, sweeping along over the fields, and shouted, “Officers to the rear! Officers to the rear!” and then every officer goes behind the line of battle, and the higher the officer’s rank, the farther behind he goes. Not because he is any the less brave, but because the laws of war require that to be done. If the general came up on the front line and were killed you would lose your battle any* how, because he has the plan of th£ battle in his brain, and must be kept in comparative safety. I, with my “shining sword flashing in the sunlight.” Ah ! There sat in the hall that day men who had given that boy their last hardtack, who had carried him on their backs through deep rivers. But some were not there; they had gone down to death for their country. The speaker mentioned them, but they were but little noticed, and yet they had gone down to death for their country, gone down for a cause they believed was right and still believe was right, though I grant to the other side the same that I ask for myself. Yet these men who had ACRES OF DIAMONDS 549 $ actually died for the^r country were little noticed, and the hero of the hour was this boy. Why was he the hero? Sim- ply because that man fell into the same foolishness. This boy was ail officer, and those were only private soldiers. I learned a lesson that I will never forget. Greatness consists not in holding some office; greatness really consists in doing some great deed with little means, in the accom- plishment of vast purposes from the private ranks of life ; that is true greatness. He who can give to this people better streets-rdbetter homes, better schools, better churches, more religion, more of happiness, more of God, he that can be a blessing to the community in which he lives tonight will be great anywhere, but he who a cannot be a blessing where he now lives will never be great anywhere on the face of God’s earth. “We live in deeds, not years; in feeling, not in figures on a dial ; in thoughts, not breaths ; we should count time by heart throbs, in the cause of right.” Bailey says: “He most lives who thinks most.” If you forget everything I have said to you, do not forget this, because it contains more in two lines than all I have said. Bailey says: “He most lives who thinks most, who feels the noblest,, and who acts the best.” A MESSAGE TO GARCIA ELBERT HUBBARD This is not a speech . It originally appeared as an article in the March , i8qq, Philistine Magazine. It is given here because it is representative of the messages popular in the business world. About a million and a half copies of this article were dis- tributed by the New York Central Railroad . It has been translated into all written languages. During the war between Russia and Japan , every Russian soldier who went to the front was given a copy of the Mes- sage to Garcia. The Japanese , finding the booklets in possession of the Russian prisoners , concluded that it must be a good thing , and accordingly translated it into Japanese . And on an order of the Mikado, a copy was given to every man in the employ of the Japanese Government, soldier or civilian . Over forty million copies of A Message to Garcia have been printed . This is said to be a larger circulation than any other literary venture has ever attained during the lifetime if the author, in all history . r e A MESSAGE TO GARCIA By Elbert Hubbard In Sethis Cuban business there is one man stands out on the horizon of my memory like Mars at Perihelion. When war broke out between Spain and the United States, it was very necessary to communicate quickly with the leader of the Insurgents. Garcia was somewhere in the mountain fastnesses of Cuba — no one knew where. No mail or tele- graph message could reach him. The President must secure his cooperation, and quickly. What to do ! Some one said to the President, “There is a fellow by the name of Rowan will find Garcia for you, if anybody can.” Rowan was sent for and given a letter to be delivered to Garcia. How the “fellow by the name of Rowan” took the letter, sealed it up in an oilskin pouch, strapped it over his heart, in four days landed by night off the coast of Cuba from an open boat, disappeared into the jungle, and in three weeks came out on the other side of the Island, having trav- ersed a hostile country on foot, and delivered his letter to Garcia — are things I have no special desire now to tell in detail. The point that I wish to make is this: McKinley gave Rowan a letter to be delivered to Garcia; Rowan took the letter and did not ask, “Where is he at?” By the Eternal ! there is a man whose form should be cast in deathless bronze and the statue placed in every college of the land. It is not book learning young men need, or in- struction about this and that, but a stiffening of the vertebrae which will cause them to be loyal to a trust, to act promptly, 554 APPENDIX concentrate their energies: do the thinjg — “ Carry a message to Garcia.” General Garcia is dead now, but there are other Garcias. No man who has endeavored to carry out an enterprise where many hands were needed, but has been well-nigh appalled^ at times by the imbecility of the average man — the inability or unwillingness to concentrate on a thing and do it. Slipshod assistance, foolish inattention, dowdy indiffer- ence, and half-hearted work seem the rule; and no man suc- ceeds, unless by hook, or crook, or threat he forces or bribes other men to assist him; or mayhap, God in His goodness performs a miracle, and sends him an Angel of Light for an assistant. You, reader, put this matter to a test: You are sitting now in your office — six clerks are within call. Summon any one and make this request: “Please look in the encyclopedia and make a brief memorandum for me concerning the life of Correggio.” Will the clerk quietly say, “Yes, sir,” and go to the task? On your life he will not. He will look at you out of a fishy eye and ask one or more of the following questions: Who was he? Which encyclopedia? Where is the encyclopedia? Was I hired for that? Don’t you mean Bismarck? r What’s the matter with Charlie doing if? Is he dead ? Is there any hurry ? ShaVt I bring 5 r ou the book and let you look it up your- self? What do you want to know for ? And I will lay you ten to one that after you have answered the questions, and explained how to find the information, and why you want it, the clerk will go off and get onC of the other clerks to help him try to find Correggio — and then A MESSAGE TO GARCIA 555 come back and tell you there is no such man. Of course I may lose my bet, but according to the Law of Average I will not. Now, if you are wise, you will not bother to ex- plain to your “assistant” that Correggio is indexed under the C% not in the K's, but you will smile very sweetly and say, “Never mind,” and go look it up yourself. And this in- capacity for independent action, this moral stupidity, this infirmity of the will, this unwillingness to cheerfully catch hold and lift — these are the things that put pure Socialism so faPulto the future. If men will not act for themselves, what will they do when the benefit of their effort is for all? A first mate with a knotted club seems necessary; and the dread of getting “the bounce” Saturday night holds many a worker to his place. Advertise for a stenographer, and nine out of ten who apply can neither spell nor punctuate — and do not think it necessary to. Can such a one write a letter to Garcia? “You see that bookkeeper,” said the foreman to me in a large factory. “Yes; what about him?” “Well, he's a fine accountant, but if I'd send him uptown on an errand, he might accomplish the errand all right, and on the other hand, might stop at four saloons on the way, and when he got to Main Street would forget what he had been sent for.” * Can such a man be entrusted to carry a message to Garcia ? We have recently been hearing much, maudlin sympathy expressed for the “downtrodden denizens of the sweatshop/' and the “ homeless wanderer searching for honest employ- ment,” and with it all often go many hard words for the men in power. Nothing is said about the employer who grows old before his time in a vain attempt to get frowsy ne'er-do-wells to do intelligent work ; and his long, patient striving after “help” that does nothing but loaf when his back is turned. In every store and factory there is a constant weeding-out process 556 APPENDIX going on. The employer is constantly fending away “help” that have shown their incapacity to further the interests of the business, and others are being taken on.. No matter how good times are, this sorting continues ; only, if times are hard and work is scarce., the sorting is done finer — but out, arid forever out, the incompetent and unworthy go. It is the survival of the fittest. Self-interest prompts every employer to keep the best— those who can carry a message, to Garcia. I know one man of really brilliant parts who has not the ability to manage a business of his own, and. yet who 4o^abso- lutely worthless to anyone else, because he carries with him constantly the insane suspicion that his employer is oppres- sing, or intending to oppress, him. He cannot give orders, and he will not receive them* Should a message be given him to take to Garcia, his answer would probably be “Take it yourself !” Tonight this man walks the streets looking for work, the wind whistling through his threadbare coat. No one who knows him dare employ him, for he is a regular firebrand of discontent. He is impervious to reason, and the only thing that can impress him is the tee of a thick-soled number nine boot. Of course, I know that one so morally deformed is no less to be pitied than a physical cripple ; but in our pitying let us drop a tear, too, for the men who are striving to carry on a great enterprise, whose working hours are not limited by the whistle, and whose hair is fast turning white through the struggle to hold in line dowdy indifference, slipshod imbecil- ity, and heartless ingratitude which, but for their enterprise, would be both hungry and homeless. Have I put the matter too strongly? Possibly I have; but when all the world has gone a-slumming I wish to speak a word of sympathy for the man who succeeds — the man who, against great odds, has directed the efforts of others, an4 hav- ing succeeded, finds there’s, nothing in it: nothing but bare board and clothes. I have carried a dinner-pail and w T orked " A MESSAGE TO GARCIA 557 for day s wages, and I have also been an employer of labor, and I know there is something to be said on both sides. There is no excellence, per se, in poverty ; rags are no recom- mendation; and all employers are not rapacious and high- handed, any more than all poor men are virtuous. My heart goes out to the man who does his work when the “boss” is away, as well as when he is at home; and the man who, when given a letter for Garcia, quietly takes the missive, without asking any idiotic questions, and with no lurking intet^ion of chucking it into the nearest sewer, or of doing aught else but deliver it, never gets “laid off,” nor has to go on a strike for higher wages. Civilization is one long, anx- ious search for just such individuals. Anything such a man asks shall be granted. He is wanted in every city, town, and village— in every office, shop, store, and factory. The world cries out for such : he is needed and needed badlv— the man who can “Carry a Message to Garcia ” 9 AS A MAN THINKETH JAMES ALLEN This little essay, “As A Man Thinlzeth” is exercising a commanding influence in many lives today . Read it, not hastily , hut thoughtfully and often . You will find in it not a single reference to speaking but you will discover much that has to do with building the prime requisites of a successful speaker : an abiding self- confidence and sincerity and personality.. All effective speaking and real leadership of men issues from effective thinking . We have known of many cases in which this little mes- sage has become a prodigious power in the lives of men. *1 AS A MAN THINKETH ?» By James. Allen THOUGHT AND CHARACTER The aphorism, “As a man thinketh in his heart so is he,” not Tfrdy embraces the whole of a man’s being, but is so comprehensive as to reach out to every condition and cir- cumstance of his life. A man is literally what he thinks > his character being the complete sum of all his thoughts. As the plant springs from, and could not be without, the seed, so every act of a man springs from the hidden seeds of thought, and could not have appeared without them. This applies equally to those acts called “spontaneous” and “unpremeditated” as to those which are deliberately executed. Act is the blossom of thought, and joy and suffering are its fruits; thus does a man garner in the sweet and bitter fruitage of his own husbandry. “Thought in the mind hath made us. What we are By thought was wrought and built. If a man’s mind Hath evil thoughts, pain comes on him as comes The wheel the gx behind. * * * * * * If one endure In purity of thought, joy follows him As his own shadow — sure.” Man is a growth by law, and not a creation by artifice, and cause and effect is as absolute and undeviating in the hidden realm* of thought as in the world of visible and material things. A noble and God-like character is not a thing of favor or chance, but is the natural result of continuous effort 561 562 APPENDIX and right thinking, the effect of long-therished association with God-like thought. An ignoble and bestial character, by the same process, is the result of the continued harboring of grovelling thoughts. Man is made or unmade by himself; in the armory of thought he forges the weapons by which he destroys him- self ; he also fashions the tools with which he builds for him- self heavenly mansions of joy and strength and peace. By the right choice and true application of thought, man ascends to the Divine Perfection; by the abuse and wrong* Appli- cation of thought, he descends below the level of the beast. Between these two extremes are all the grades of character, and man is their maker and master. Of all the beautiful truths pertaining to the soul which have been restored and brought to light in this age, none is more gladdening or fruitful of divine promise and con- fidence than this — that man is the master of thought, the moulder of character, and the maker and shaper of condition, environment, and destiny. As a being of Power, Intelligence, and Love, and the lord of his own thoughts, man holds the key to every situation, and contains within himself that transforming and regener- ative agency by which he may make himself what he wills. Man is always the master, even in his weakest and most abandoned state; but in his weakness and degradation he is the foolish master who misgoverns his “household.” When he begins to reflect upon his condition, and to search dili- gently for the Law upon which his being is established, he then becomes the wise master, directing his energies with intelligence, and fashioning his thoughts to fruitful issues. Such is the conscious master, and man can only thus become by discovering within himself the laws of thought; which discovery is totally a matter of application, self-analysis, and experience. > Only by such searching and mining are gold and diamonds obtained, and man can find every truth connected with his 563 AS A MAN THINKETH being, if he will djg deep into the mine of his soul; and that he is the maker of his character, the moulder of his life, and the builder of his destiny, he may unerringly prove, if he will watch, control, and alter his thoughts, tracing their effects upon himself, upon others, and upon his life and circumstances, linking cause and effect by patient practice and investigation, and utilizing his every experience, even to most trivial, every-day occurrence, as a means of obtaining that knowledge of himself which is Understanding, Wisdom, Power™, In this direction, as in no other, is the law abso- lute that “He that ^eeketh findeth ; and to him that knocketh it shall be opened” ; for only by patience, practice, and cease- less importunity can a mag enter the Door of the Temple of Knowledge. EFFECT OF THOUGHT ON CIRCUMSTANCES A man’s mind may be likened to a garden, which may be intelligently cultivated or allowed to run wild ; but whether cultivated or neglected, it must, and will, bring forth . If no useful seeds are put into it, then an abundance of useless weed-seeds will fall therein, and will continue to produce their kind. Just as the gardener cultivates his plot, keeping it free from weeds, and growing the flowers and fruits which he requires, so may a man i%nd the garden of his mind, weeding out all the wrong, useless, and impure thoughts, and cul- tivating toward perfection the flowers and fruits of right, useful, and pure thoughts. By pursuing this process, a man sooner or later discovers that he is the master-gardener of his soul, the director of his life. He also reveals, within him- self, the laws of thought, and understands, with ever in- creasing accuracy, how the thought-forces and mind ele- ments operate in the shaping of his character, circumstances, and destiny. Thought and character are one, and as character can 564 APPENDIX only manifest and discover itself through environment and circumstance, the outer conditions of a person’s life will al- ways be found to be harmoniously related to his inner state. This does not mean that a man’s circumstances £t any given time are an indication of his entire character, but that tht)se circumstances are so intimately connected with some vital thought-element within himself that, for the time being, they are indispensable to his development. Every man is where he is by law of his being ; the thoughts which he has built into his character have brought him there, and in the arrangement of his life there is no element of chance, but all is the result of a law which cannot err 0 This is just as true of those *vho feel “out of harmony” with their surroundings as of those who are contented with them. As a progressive and evolving being, man is where he is that he may learn that he may grow; and as he learns the spiritual lesson which any circumstance contains for him, it passes away and gives place to other circumstances, Man is buffeted by circumstances so long as he believes himself to be the creature of outside conditions, but when he realizes that he is a creative power, and that he may com- mand the hidden soil and seeds of his being out of which circumstances grow, he then becomes the rightful master of himself. That circumstances grow out of thought every man knows who has for any length of time practiced self-control and self- purification , for he will have noticed that the alteration in his circumstances has been in exact ratio with his altered mental condition. So true is this that when a man earnestly applies himself to remedy the defects in his character, and makes swift and marked progress, he passes rapidly through a succession of vicissitudes. The soul attracts that which it secretly harbor^; that which it loves, and also that which it fears; it reaches the height of its cherished aspirations; it falls to the level of * AS A MAN THINKETH 565 its unchastened desires, — and circumstances are the means by which the soul receives its own. Every thought-seed sown or allowed to fall into the mind, and to take root there, produces its own, blossoming sooner o relate r into act, and bearing its own fruitage of opportunity and circumstance. Good thoughts bear good fruit, bad thoughts bad fruit. The outer world of circumstance shapes itself to the inner world of thought, and both pleasant and unpleasant external condftic&s are factors which make for the ultimate good of the individual. As* the reaper of his own harvest, man learns both by suffering and bliss. Following the inmost desires, aspirations, thoughts, by w T hich he allows himself to be dominated (pursuing the will-o’-the-wisps of impure imaginings or steadfastly walking the highway of strong and high endeavor), a man at last arrives at their fruition and fulfilment in the outer conditions of his life. The laws of growth and adjustment everywhere obtain. A man does not come to the pothouse or the gaol by the tyranny of fate or circumstance, but by the pathway of grovelling thoughts and base desires. Nor does a pure- minded man fall suddenly into crime by stress of any mere external force; the criminal thought had long been secretly fostered in the heart, an^d the hour of opportunity revealed its gathered power. Circumstance does not make the man; it reveals him to himself. No such conditions can exist as descending into vice and its attendant sufferings apart from vicious inclinations, or ascending into virtue and its pure happiness without the continued cultivation of virtuous aspirations; and man, therefore, as the lord and master of thought, is the maker of himself, the shaper and author of environment. Even at birth the soul comes to its own, and through every step of its earthly pilgrimage it attracts those combinations of conditions which reveal itself, which are the 566 APPENDIX reflections of its own purity and impuyrity, its strength and weakness. Men do not attract that which they want , but that which they are. Their whims, fancies, and ambitions ace thwarted at every step, but their inmost thoughts and desires are fed with their own food, be it foul or clean. The “divinity that shapes our ends” is in ourselves; it is our very self. Man is manacled only by himself : thought and action are the gaolers of Fate— they imprison, being base; they are also the angels of Freedom — they liberate, being noble. Not jvkit he wishes and prays for does a man get,* but what he justly earns. His wishes and prayers are only gratified and answered when they harmonise with his thoughts and actions. In the light of truth, what, then, is the meaning of “fight- ing against circumstances? It means that a man is con- tinually revolting against an effect without, while all the time he is nourishing and preserving its cause in his heart. That cause may take the form of a conscious vice or an unconscious weakness; but whatever it is, it stubbornly re- tards the efforts of its possessor, and thus calls aloud for remedy. Men are anxious to improve their circumstances, but are unwilling to improve themselves; they therefore remain bound. The man who does not shrink from self-crucifixion can never fail to accomplish the object upon which his heart is set. This is true of earthly as of heavenly things. Even the man whose sole object is to acquire wealth must be pre- pared to make great personal sacrifices before he can accom- plish his object; and how much more so he who would realize a strong and well-poised life? Here is a man who is wretchedly poor. He is extremely anxious that his surroundings and home comforts should be improved, yet all the time he shirks his work, and considers he is justified in trying to deceive his employer on the ground of the insufficiency of his w T ages. Such a man does not under- AS A MAN THINKETH 567 stand the simplest rudiments of these principles which are the basis of true prosperity, and is not only totally unfitted to rise out of his wretchedness, but is actually attracting to himself a still deeper wretchedness by dwelling in, and acting out, in- dolent, deceptive and unmanly thoughts. Here is a rich man who is the victim of a painful and persistent disease as a result of gluttony. He is willing to give large sums of money to get rid of it, but he will not sacrifice his gluttonous desires. He wants to gratify his tasTe for rich and unnatural viands and have his health as well. Such a man is totally unfit to have health, because he has not yet learned the first principles of a healthy life. Here is an employer ok labor who adopts crooked meas- ures to avoid paying the regulation wage, and in the hope of making larger profits, reduces the wages of his work- people. Such a man is altogether unfitted for prosperity, and when he finds himself bankrupt, both as regards to repu- tation and riches, he blames circumstances, not knowing that he is the sole author of his condition. I have introduced these three cases merely as illustrative of the truth that man is the causer (though nearly always unconsciously) of his circumstances, and that, whilst aiming at a good end, he is continually frustrating its accomplish- ment by encouraging thoughts and desires which cannot pos- sibly harmonize with that end. Such cases could be multi- plied and varied almost 1 ' indefinitely, but this is not necessary, as the reader can, if he so resolves, trace the action of the iaw r s of thought in his own mind and life, and until this is done, mere external facts cannot serve as a ground of reasoning. Circumstances, however, are so complicated, thought is so deeply rooted, and the conditions of happiness vary so vastly wdth individuals, that a man’s entire soul-condition (although it m^y be known to himself) cannot be judged by another from the external aspects of his life alone. A man may be honest in certain directions, yet suffer privations ; a man may 568 APPENDIX be dishonest in certain directions, yet acquire wealth; but the conclusion usually formed that the one man fails because of his particular honesty , and that the other prospers because of his particular dishonesty , is the result of a superficial judg- ment, which assumes that the dishonest man is almost totally corrupt, and the honest man almost entirely virtuous. In the light of a deeper knowledge and wider experience, such judgment is found to be erroneous. The dishonest man may have some admirable virtues which the other does not pos- sess ; and the honest man obnoxious vices which are abserft in the other. The honest man reaps the good results of his honest thoughts and acts; he also brings upon himself the sufferings which his vices produce* The dishonest man like- wise garners his own suffering and happiness. It is pleasing to human vanity to believe that one suffers because of one’s virtues; but not until a man has extirpated every sickly, bitter, and impure thought from his mind, and washed every sinful stain from his soul, can he be in a posi- tion to know and declare that his sufferings are the result of his good, and not of his bad qualities; and on the way to, yet long before he has reached that supreme perfection he will have found, working in his mind and life, the Great Law which is absolutely just, and which cannot, therefore, give good for evil, evil for good. Possessed of such knowl- edge, he will then know, looking back upon his past ignor- ance and blindness, that his life is, and always was, justly ordered, and that all his past experiences, good and bad, were the equitable outworking of his evolving, yet unevolved self. Good thoughts and actions can never produce bad results ; bad thoughts and actions can never produce good results. This is but saying that nothing can come from corn but corn, nothing from nettles but nettles. Men understand this law in the natural world, and work with it; but few understand it in the mental and moral world (though its operation there is just as simple and undeviating f and they, therefore, do not co-operate with it. 569 AS A MAN THINKETH Suffering is always the effect of wrong thought in some direction. It is an indication that the individual is out of harmony with himself, with the Law of his being. The sole and sapreme use of suffering is to purify, to burn out all that is useless and impure. Suffering ceases for him who is pure. There could be no object in burning gold after the dross had been removed, and a perfectly pure and enlight- ened being could not suffer. The circumstances which a man encounters with suffering arWhs result of his own mental inharmony. The circum- stances which a tfian encounters with blessedness are the result of his own mental harmony. Blessedness, not mate- rial possessions, is the measure of right thought; wretched- ness, not lack of material possessions, is the measure of wrong thought. A man may be cursed and rich ; he may be blessed and poor. Blessedness and riches are only joined together when the riches are rightly and wisely used; and the poor man only descends into wretchedness when he regards his lot as a burden unjustly imposed. Indigence and indulgence are the two extremes of wretch- edness. They are both equally unnatural and the result of mental disorder. A man is not rightly conditioned until he is a happy, healthy, and prosperous being; and happiness, health and prosperity are the result of a harmonious adjust- ment of the inner with the outer, of the man with his sur- roundings. ^ * A man only begins to be a man when he ceases to whine and revile, and commences to search for the hidden justice which regulates his life. And as he adapts his mind to that regulating factor, he ceases to accuse others as the cause of his condition, but builds himself up in strong and noble thoughts ; ceases to kick against circumstances, but begins to use them as aids to his more rapid progress, and as a means of discovering the hidden powers and possibilities within himself. Law, not confusion, is the dominating principle in the 570 APPENDIX universe; justice, not injustice, is the S(jul and substance of life; and righteousness, not corruption, is the moulding and moving force in the spiritual government of the world. This being so, man has but to right himself to find that the uni- verse is right ; and during the process of putting himself right, he will find that as he alters his thoughts towards things and other people, things and other people will alter towards him. The proof of this truth is in every person, and it therefore admits of easy investigation by systematic introspectijparrmd self-analysis. Let a man radically alter lfis thoughts, and he will be astonished at the rapid transformation it will effect in the material conditions of his life. Men imagine that thought can be kept secret, but it cannot; it rapidly crystal- lizes into habit, and habit solidifies into circumstance. Bestial thoughts crystallize into habits of drunkenness and sensuality, which solidify into circumstances of destitution and disease; impure thoughts of every kind crystallize into enervating and confusing habits, which solidify into distract- ing and adverse circumstances; thoughts of fear, doubt, and indecision crystallize into weak, unmanly, and irresolute habits, which solidify into circumstances of failure, indigence, and slavish dependence ; lazy thoughts crystallize into habits of uncleanliness and dishonesty, which solidify into circum- stances of foulness and beggary; hateful and condemnatory •thoughts crystallize into habits of accusation and violence, which solidify into circumstances of injury afid persecution; selfish thoughts of all kinds crystallize into habits of self- seeking, which solidify into circumstances more or less dis- tressing. On the other hand, beautiful thoughts of all kinds crystallize into habits of grace and kindliness, which solidify into genial and sunny circumstances ; pure thoughts crystallize into habits of temperance and self-control, which solidify into circumstances of repose and peace ; thoughts of courage, self-reliance, and decision crystallize into manly habits, Miich solidify into circumstances of success, plenty, and freedom; AS A MAN THINKETH ' * 571 energetic thoughts crystallize into habits of cleanliness and industry, which solidify into circumstances of pleasantness; gentle and forgiving thoughts crystallize into habits of gen- tleness, which solidify into protective and preservative cir- cumstances; loving and unselfish thoughts crystallize into habits of self-forgetfulness for others, which solidify into circumstances of sure and abiding prosperity and true riches. A particular train of thought persisted in, be it good or bad, cannot fail to produce its results on the character and circumstances. A man cannot directly choose his circum- stances, but he can choose his thoughts, and so indirectly, yet surely, shape his circumstances. Nature helps every man Cb the gratification of the thoughts which he most encourages, and opportunities are presented which will most speedily bring to the surface both the good and evil thoughts. Let a man cease from his sinful thoughts, and all the world will soften towards him, and be ready to help him ; let him put away his weakly and sickly thoughts, and lo! oppor- tunities will spring up on every hand to aid his strong re- solves; let him encourage good thoughts, and no hard fate shall bind him down to wretchedness and shame. The world is your kaleidoscope, and the varying combinations of colors which at every succeeding moment it presents to you are the exquisitely adjusted pictures of your ever-moving thoughts, “You will be what you will to be; Let failure find its false content In that poor world, ‘environment/ But spirit scorns it, and is free. “It masters time, it conquers space ; It cows that boastful trickster, Chance, And bids the tyrant Circumstance Uncrown, and fill a servant’s place. 572 APPENDIX “The human Will, that force ynseen, The offspring of a deathless Soul, Can hew a way to any goal, Though walls of granite intervene. * “Be not impatient in delay, But wait as one who understands ; When spirit rises and commands, The gods are ready to obey.” EFFECT OF THOUGHT ON HEALTH AND BODY The body is the servant of th^ mind. It obeys the opera- tions of the mind, whether they be deliberately chosen or automatically expressed. At the bidding of unlawful thoughts the body sinks rapidly into disease and decay; at the command of glad and beautiful thoughts it becomes clothed with youthfulness and beauty. Disease and health, like circumstances, are rooted in thought. Sickly thoughts will express themselves through a sickly body. Thoughts of fear have been known to kill a man as speedily as a bullet, and they are continually killing thousands of people just as surely though less rapidly. The people who live in fear of disease are the people who get it. Anxiety quickly demoralizes the whole body, and lays it open to the entrance of disease ; whfle impure thoughts, even if not physically indulged, will soon shatter the nervous system. Strong, pure, and happy thoughts build up the body in vigor and grace. The body is a delicate and plastic instru- ment, which responds readily to the thoughts by which it is impressed, and habits of thought will produce their own effects, good or bad, upon it. Men will continue to have impure and poisoned blood, so long as they propagate unclean thoughts. Out of a clean heart comes a clean life and a clean body. Out of a defiled AS A MAN THINKETH 573 mind proceeds a defied life and a corrupt body. Thought is the font of action, life, and manifestation ; make the foun- tain pure, and all will be pure. Change of diet will not help a man who will not change his thoughts. When a man makes his thoughts pure, he no longer desires impure food. Clean thoughts make clean habits. The so-called saint who does not w^ash his body is not a saint. He who has strengthened and purified his thoughts does not need to con- sider" th^ malevolent microbe. If you would perfect your body, guard your mind. If you would renew your body, beautify your mind. Thoughts of malice, envy, disappointment, despondency, rob the body of its health and grace. A sour face does not come by chance ; it is made by sour thoughts. Wrinkles that mar are drawn by folly, passion, pride. I know a woman of ninety-six who has the bright, innocent face of a girl. I know a man well under middle age whose face is drawn into inharmonious contours. The one is the result of a sweet and sunny disposition; the other is the out- come of passion and discontent. As you cannot have a sweet and wholesome abode unless you admit the air and sunshine freely into your rooms, so a strong body and a bright, happy, or serene countenance can only result from the free admittance into the mind of thoughts of joy and goo4 will and serenity. On the faces of the aged there are wrinkles made by sym- pathy, others by strong and pure thought, and others are carved by passion: who cannot distinguish them? With those who have lived righteously, age is calm, peaceful, and softly mellowed, like the setting sun. I have recently seen a philo- sopher on his death-bed. He was not old except in years. He died as sweetly and peacefully as he had lived. Th^re is no physician like cheerful thought for dissipating the ills of the body; there is no comforter to compare with good will for dispersing the shadows of grief and sorrow. 574 APPENDIX To live continually in thoughts of ili will, cynicism, sus- picion, and envy, is to be confined in a self-made prison hole. But to think well of all, to be cheerful with all, to patiently learn to find the good in all — such unselfish thoughts are the very portals of heaven; and to dwell day by day* in thoughts of peace toward every creature will bring abounding peace to their possessor. Until thought is linked with purpose there is no intelli- gent accomplishment. With the majority the barque of thought is allowed to “drift” upon the ocean of life. Aim- lessness is a vice, and such drifting must*not continue for him who would steer clear of catastrophe and destruction. They who have no central punpose in their life fall an easy prey to petty worries, fears, troubles, and selfpityings, all of which are indications of weakness, which lead, just as surely as deliberately planned sins (though by a different route), to failure, unhappiness, and loss, for weakness cannot persist in a power-evolving universe. A man should conceive of a legitimate purpose in his heart, and set out to accomplish it. He should make this purpose the centralizing point of his thoughts. It may take the form -of a spiritual ideal, or it may be a worldly object, according to his nature at the time being; but whichever it is, he should steadily focus his thought forces upon the object which he has set before him. He should make this purpose his supreme duty, and should devote himself to its attain- ment, not allowing his thoughts to wander away into ephem- eral fancies, longings, and imaginings. This is the royal road to self-control and true concentration of thought. Even if he fails again and again to accomplish his purpose (as he necessarily must until weakness is overcome), the strength of character gained will be the measure of his true success, and this will form a new starting-point for future power and triumph. # Those who are not prepared for the apprehension of a great purpose, should fix the thoughts upon the faultless per- AS A MAN THINKETH 575 formance of their duty, no matter how insignificant their task may appear. Only in this way can the thoughts be gathered and focussed, and resolution and energy be de- veloped, which being done, there is nothing which may not be accomplished. The weakest soul, knowing its own weakness, and believ- ing this truth — that strength can only be developed by effort and practice , will, thus believing, at once begin to exert itself, and, adding effort to effort, patience to patience, and strength to^*reqgth, will never cease to develop, and will at last grow divinely strong. r> As the physically weak man can make himself strong by careful and patient training, so the man of weak thoughts can make them strong by exercising himself in right thinking. To put away aimlessness and weakness, and to begin to think with purpose, is to enter the ranks of those strong ones who only recognize failure as one of the pathways to attain- ment; who make all conditions serve them, and who think strongly, attempt fearlessly, and accomplish masterfully. Having conceived of his purpose, a man should mentally make out a straight pathway to its achievement, looking neither to the right nor the left. Doubts and fears should be rigorously excluded; they are disintegrating elements which break up the straight line of effort, rendering it crooked, ineffectual, useless. Thoughts of doubt and fear never accomplish anything, and never can. They always lead to failure. Purpose, energy, power to do, and all strong thoughts cease when doubt and fear creep in. The will to do springs from the knowledge that we can do. Doubt and fear are the great enemies of knowledge, and he who encourages them, who does not slay them, thwarts himself at every step. He who has conquered doubt and fear has conquered fail- ure. 1 * His very thought is alive with power, and all difficul- ties are bravely met and wisely overcome. His purposes 576 APPENDIX are seasonably planted, and they blo^m and bring forth fruit which does not fall prematurely to the ground. Thought allied fearlessly to purpose becomes creative force: he who knows this is ready to become* something higher and stronger than a mere bundle of wavering thoughts and fluctuating sensations ; he who does this has become the conscious and intelligent wielder of his mental powers. THE THOUGHT FACTOR IN ACHIEVEMENT # ** • All that a man achieves and all that he fails to achieve is the direct resuit of his own thoughts. In a justly ordered universe, where loss of equipoise would mean total destruc- tion, individual responsibility must be absolute. A man's weakness and strength, purity and impurity, are his own, and not another man's; they are brought about by himself, and not by another ; and they can only be altered by himself, never by another. His condition is also his own, and not another man’s. His suffering and his happiness are evolved from within. As he thinks, so he is ; as he continues to think, so he remains. A strong man cannot help a weaker unless that weaker is willing to be helped, and even then the weak man must become strong of himself ; he must, by his own efforts, develop the strength which he admires in another. None but himself can alter his condition. It has been usual for men to think and to say, “Many men are slaves because one is an oppressor; let us hate the oppressor.” Now, however, there is amongst an increasing few a tendency to reverse this judg- ment, and to say, “One man is an oppressor because many are slaves ; let us despise the slaves.” The truth is that op- pressor and slave are co-operators in ignorance, and while seeming to afflict each other, are in reality afflicting them- selves. A perfect Knowledge perceives the action of l^w in the weakness of the oppressed and the misapplied power of the oppressor ; a perfect Love, seeing the suffering which AS A MAN THINKETH 577 both states entail, condemns neither; a perfect Compassion embraces both oppressor and oppressed. He who has conquered weakness, and has put away all selfish thoughts, belongs neither to oppressor nor oppressed. He is free. A man can only rise, conquer, and achieve by lifting up his thoughts. He can only remain weak, and abject, and miserable by refusing to lift his thoughts. Before a man can achieve anything, even in worldly things, he*mus# lift his thoughts above slavish animal indulgence. He may not, in order to succeed, give up all animality and selfishness, by any means ; but a portion of it must, at least, be sacrificed. A man whose first thought is bestial indul- gence could neither think clearly nor plan methodically; he could not find and develop his latent resources, and would fail in any undertaking. Not having commenced to man- fully control his thoughts, he is not in a position to control affairs and to adopt serious responsibilities. He is not fit to act independently and stand alone. But he is limited only by the thoughts which he chooses. There can be no progress, no achievement, without sacri- fice, and a man's worldly success will be in the measure that he sacrifices his confused animal thoughts, and fixes his mind on the development of his plans, and the strengthening of his resolution and self-reliance. And the higher he lifts his thoughts, the more madly, upright, and righteous he becomes, the greater will be his success, the more blessed and enduring will be his achievements. The universe does not favor the greedy, the dishonest, the vicious, although on the mere surface it may sometimes appear to do so; it helps the honest, the magnanimous, the virtuous. All the great Teachers of the ages have declared this in varying forms, and to prove and know it a man has but to persist in making himself more and more virtuous by lifting up his thoughts. Intellectual achievements are the result of thought conse- 578 APPENDIX # crated to the search for knowledge, or for the beautiful and true in life and nature. Such achievements may be some- times connected with vanity and ambition, but they are not the outcome of those characteristics; they are t he natural outgrowth of long and arduous effort, and of pure and unsel- fish thoughts. Spiritual achievements are the consummation of holy aspirations. He who lives constantly in the conception of noble and lofty thoughts, who dwells upon all that is pure and unselfish, will, as surely as the sun reaches it^ zarrith and the moon its full, become wise and* noble in character, and rise into a position of influence and blessedness. Achievement, of whatever kind, is the crown of effort, the diadem of thought. By the aicT of self-control, resolution, purity, righteousness, and well-directed thought a man ascends ; by the aid of animality, indolence, impurity, corrup- tion, and confusion of thought a man descends. A man may rise to high success in the world, and even to lofty altitudes in the spiritual realm, and again descend into weakness and wretchedness by allowing arrogant, self- ish, and corrupt thoughts to take possession of him. Victories attained by right thought can only be maintained by watchfulness. Many give way when success is assured, and rapidly fall back into failure. All achievements, whether in the business, intellectual, o t spiritual world, are the result of definitely directed thought, are governed by the same law and are of the' same method ; the only difference lies in the object of attainment . He who would accomplish little must sacrifice little; he who would achieve much must sacrifice much ; he who would attain highly must sacrifice greatly. VISIONS AND IDEALS The dreamers are the saviors of the world. As the visible world is sustained by the invisible, so men, through all their AS A MAN THINKETH 579 trials and sins and fordid vocations, are nourished by the beautiful visions of their solitary dreamers. Humanity can- not forget its dreamers; it cannot let their ideals fade and die; it lives in them; it knows them as the realities which it^hall one day see and know. Composer, sculptor, painter, poet, prophet, sage, these are the makers of the after-world, the architects of heaven. The world is beautiful because they have lived ; without them, laboring humanity ■would perish. K*e who cherishes a beautiful vision, a lofty ideal in his heart, will one day Realize it. Columbus cherished a vision of another world, and he discovered it; Copernicus fostered the vision of a multiplicity -pf worlds and a wider universe, and he revealed it; Buddha beheld the vision of a spiritual world of stainless beauty and perfect peace, and he entered into it. Cherish your visions; cherish your ideals; cherish the music that stirs in your heart, the beauty that forms in your mind, the loveliness that drapes your purest thoughts, for out of them will grow all delightful conditions, all heavenly environment ; of these, if you but remain true to them, your world will at last be built. To desire is to obtain ; to aspire is to achieve. Shall man’s basest desires receive the fullest measure of gratification, and his purest aspirations starve for lack of sustenance? Such is not the Law : such a Condition of things can never obtain: “Ask and receive.” Dream lofty dreams, and as you dream, so shall you be- come. Your Vision is the promise of what you shall one day be; your Ideal is the prophecy of what you shall at last unveil. The greatest achievement was at first and for a time a dream. The oak sleeps in the acorn; the bird waits in the egg; §nd m the highest vision of the soul a waking angel stirs. Dreams are the seedlings of realities. Your circumstances may be uncongenial, but they shall 580 APPENDIX not long remain so if you but perceive an Ideal and strive to reach it. You cannot travel within and stand still without . Here is a youth hard pressed by poverty and labor ; confined long hours in an unhealthy workshop ; unschooled# and lack- ing all the arts of refinement. But he dreams of better things ; he thinks of intelligence, of refinement, of grace and beauty. He conceives of, mentally builds up, an ideal condi- tion of life; the vision of a wider liberty and a larger scope takes possession of him; unrest urges him to action, and he, utilizes all his spare time and means, small though tfrey<5:e, to the development of his latent powers zflnd resources. Very soon so altered has his mind become that the workshop can no longer hold him. It has becojne so out of harmony with his mentality that it falls out of his life as a garment is cast aside, and, with the growth of opportunities which fit the scope of his expanding powers, he passes out of it forever. Years later we see this youth as. a full-grown man. We find him a master of certain forces of the mind which he wields with world-wide influence and almost unequaled power. In his hands he holds the cords of gigantic responsi- bilities ; he speaks, and lo i lives are changed ; men and women hang upon his words and remold their characters, and, sun- like, he becomes the fixed and luminous center round which innumerable destinies revolve. He has realized the Vision of his youth. He has become one with his Ideal. And you, too, youthful reader, wiM realize the Vision (not the idle wish) of your heart, be it base or ^beautiful, or a mixture of both, for you will always gravitate toward that which you, secretly, most love. Into your hands will be placed the exact results of your own thoughts; you will re- ceive that which you earn; no more, no less. Whatever your present environment may be, you will fall, remain or rise with your thoughts, your Vision, your Ideal. You will be- come as small as your controlling desire; as great as your dominant aspiration ; in the beautiful words of Stanton*Kirb ham Davis, “You may be keeping accounts, and presently AS A MAM THINKETH 581 you shall walk out of the door that for so long has seemed to you the barrier of your ideals, and shall find yourself before an audience — the pen still behind your ear, the inkstains on your fingers — and then and there shall pour out the torrent of* your inspiration. You may be driving sheep, and you shall wander to the city — bucolic and open-mouthed; shall wander under the intrepid guidance of the spirit into the studio of the master, and after a time he shall say, l l have, nothing more to teach you/ And now you have become thonmaster, who did so recently dream of great things while driving sheep. You»shall lay down the saw and the plane to take upon yourself the regeneration of the world/* The thoughtless, the ignorant, and the indolent, seeing only the apparent effects of things and not the things themselves,, talk of luck, of fortune, and chance. Seeing a man grow rich, they say, “How lucky he is !** Observing another be- come intellectual, they exclaim, “How highly favored he is!** And noting the saintly character and wide influence of an- other, they remark, “How chance aids him at every turn!” They do not see the trials and failures and struggles which these men have voluntarily encountered in order to gain their experience; have no knowledge of the sacrifices they have made, of the undaunted efforts they have put forth, of the faith they have exercised, that they might overcome the apparently insurmountable and realize the Vision of their heart. They do not kn*>w the darkness and the heartaches; they only see the light and joy, and call it “luck * 5 ; do not see the long and arduous journey, but only behold the pleas- ant goal, and call it “good fortune’*; do not understand the process, but only perceive the result, and call it “chance/* In all human affairs there are efforts , and there are results , and the strength of effort is the measure of the result. Chance is not. “Gifts/* powers, material, intellectual, and spiritual possessions are the fruits of effort ; they are thoughts completed, objects accomplished, visions realized. The Vision that you glorify in your mind, the Ideal that 582 APPENDIX you enthrone in your heart — this you will build your life by. ♦.his you will become. SERENITY Calmness of mind is one of the beautiful jewels of wis- dom. It is the result of long and patient effort in self- control. Its presence is an indication of ripened experience, and of a more than ordinary knowledge of the laws and oper- ations of thought. A man becomes calm in the measure fchat he understands himself as a thought-evolved being, for such knowledge necessitates the understanding of others as the result of thought, and as he develops a ri§ht understanding, and sees more and more clearly the internal relations of things by the action of cause and effect, he ceases to fuss and fume and worry and grieve, and remains poised, steadfast, serene. The calm man, having learned how to govern himself, knows how to adapt himself to others; and they, in turn, reverence his spiritual strength, and feel that they can learn of him and rely upon him. The more tranquil a man be- comes, the greater is his success, his influence, his power for good. Even the ordinary trader will find his business pros- perity increase as he develops a greater self-control and equanimity, for people will always prefer to deal with a man whose demeanor is strongly equable. * The strong, calm man is always loved and revered. He is like a shade-giving tree in a thirsty land, or a sheltering rock in a storm. “Who does not love a tranquil heart, a sweet- tempered, balanced life? It does not matter whether it rains or shines, or what changes come to those possessing these blessings, for they are always sweet, serene, and calm. That exquisite poise of character which we call serenity is the last lesson of culture ; it is the flowering of life, the fruitage of the soul. It is precious as wisdom. More to be desired* than jrold — yea, than even fine gold. How insignificant mere AS A MAN THINKETH 583 money-seeking looks ip comparison with a serene life — a life that dwells in the ocean of Truth, beneath the waves, beyond the reach of tempests, in the Eternal Calm. “How many people we know who sour their lives, who rum. all that is sweet and beautiful by explosive tempers, who destroy their poise of character, and make bad blood! It is a question whether the great majority of people do not ruin their lives and mar their happiness by lack of self- control. How few people we meet in life who are well bal- ance, wjio have that exquisite poise which is characteristic of the finished character!” Yes, humanity surges with uncontrolled passion, is tumultuous with ungoverned ^rief, is blown about by anxiety and doubt. Only the wise man, only he whose thoughts are controlled and purified, makes the winds and the storms of the soul obey him. Tempest-tossed souls, wherever ye may be, under what- soever conditions ye may live, know this — in the ocean of life the isles of Blessedness are smiling, and the sunny shore of your ideal awmits ) r our coming. Keep your hand firmly upon the helm of thought. In the barque of your soul re- clines the commanding Master; He does but sleep: wake Him. Self-control is strength; Right Thought is mastery; Calmness is power. Say unto your heart, “Peace, be still P 5
CHILDRENS JUNCTION
LEARN ENGLISH
Tuesday, 25 March 2025
PUBLIC SPEAKING- DALE CARNEGIE
Subscribe to:
Posts (Atom)